The IRS’ taxpayer advocate issued a notice that tens of millions of American taxpayers may be entitled to refunds or reduced penalties and interest due to the postponement of filing deadlines during the COVID-19 emergency declaration.

The National Taxpayer Advocate said in a post on Thursday that refunds or abatements may be available to tens of millions of taxpayers for penalties and interest that were assessed by the IRS during the 3.5-year COVID disaster declaration period.

It explained that the issue has arisen due to recent court decisions, including a ruling in what’s known as the Kwong case that the tax code’s handling of federal disaster declarations meant that filing and payment deadlines were postponed throughout the period from Jan. 20, 2020, through May 11, 2023.

The taxpayer advocate noted that the Justice Department may appeal the decision, but the relief compelled by the ruling isn’t automatic and affected taxpayers must file their refund claims by July 10, 2026.

MISSED THE APRIL 15 TAX DEADLINE? HERE’S WHAT EXPERTS SAY YOU SHOULD DO

“Because of the infrequency of a disaster lasting this long, most taxpayers, even most tax professionals, did not foresee that filing deadlines and payments deadlines would be postponed for this long and that return filings and payments would not be considered late and therefore not subject to penalties and interest. But that is the logical extension of what the court ruled,” the National Taxpayer Advocate wrote.

They went on to warn that barring further action by the IRS or Congress to make sure that all taxpayers impacted by the ruling get what they’re owed, such taxpayers face a fast-approaching deadline to file their claims.

AVERAGE TAX REFUND UP NEARLY 11% FROM A YEAR AGO, IRS DATA SHOWS

“Unless the IRS or Congress acts to ensure all affected taxpayers will receive refunds if the Kwong decision is upheld, taxpayers seeking refunds for penalties and interest they paid relating to that period will, in most cases, need to file claims by July 10, 2026,” the advocate explained.

“At the risk of repetition, my overriding goal is to get the word out to as many taxpayers as possible and to avoid disparate results between the ‘well advised’ and the unaware,'” they said.

The taxpayer advocate said that affected taxpayers may be entitled to a refund or abatement of amounts assessed during the COVID period for:

TAX REFUNDS ARE BIGGER THAN EVER THIS YEAR, BUT RESIDENTS OF 5 STATES ARE CASHING IN THE MOST

The notice cautioned that the IRS requires claims under Form 843 to be filed through paper submissions, and because such filings may not provide an immediate confirmation of receipt, it advised that taxpayers should send claims by certified mail to have evidence of their timely submission in case the forms are lost.

The taxpayer advocate recommended that the IRS should abide by the Taxpayer Bill of Rights and take four steps, including publicizing the issue for taxpayers, providing a six-month filing extension for refund claims, consider providing systemic relief so taxpayers don’t have to file, and to create an electronic submission portal.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

It also urged tax professionals to inform clients about the issue, members of Congress to highlight the issue in communications with constituents, and for the media to report about it for the public’s knowledge.

This post was originally published here

President Donald Trump announced Friday he was raising tariffs on European cars to 25%, citing the European Union’s noncompliance with the U.S.-EU trade deal. 

“I am pleased to announce that, based on the fact the European Union is not complying with our fully agreed to Trade Deal, next week I will be increasing Tariffs charged to the European Union for Cars and Trucks coming into the United States. The Tariff will be increased to 25%,” Trump wrote in a Friday morning Truth Social post.

He did, however, indicate that he would drop the tariffs if European companies agreed to manufacture their cars in the U.S.

“It is fully understood and agreed that, if they produce Cars and Trucks in U.S.A. Plants, there will be NO TARIFF,” Trump also wrote. 

FEDEX, UPS PLEDGE TO REFUND CUSTOMERS AFTER SUPREME COURT TARIFF DECISION

He reiterated the point while speaking to reporters at the White House on Friday.

STICKER SHOCK: WHY US CARS ARE FROZEN OUT OF THE EUROPEAN MARKET

“We raised the tariffs on cars coming in from the European Union because the European Union was not adhering to the trade deal we have. So based on that now, when they build their plants on which they’re spending over $100 billion for countries, not just the Union, but when those plants open, there won’t be any tariffs,” Trump told reporters.

He also touted ongoing U.S. manufacturing of car plants.

“We have right now in the United States over $100 billion of car plants being built. That’s a record. We’ve never had anything like it, from all countries, Japan, South Korea, every, by the way, Canada, Mexico, they’re all building plants in the United States. But the European Union was not adhering to the deal that we made,” Trump said.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The U.S. and EU reached a landmark trade deal in July that saw the President agree to lower tariff rates on EU cars and trucks from its previous 27.5% to 15%.

This post was originally published here

Walmart’s latest quarterly results delivered strong top-line numbers — but buried inside the data was a signal that should unsettle every retailer in America: the retail giant’s growth is now being driven not by its traditional working-class base, but by households earning over $100,000 a year.

During Walmart’s Q4 FY2026 earnings call, Walmart U.S. President John Furner confirmed that the majority of the company’s market share gains came from higher-income households — a demographic that historically shopped elsewhere. 

That shift is not merely a Walmart story. It is a warning flare about the state of the American consumer.

Research from GlobalData Retail shows that nearly 28% of high-income consumers were shopping at discount chains like Walmart in 2025, up from roughly 20% in 2021.  The trajectory is steep — and it tells a story of financial stress spreading up the income ladder.

Walmart U.S. comparable store sales rose 4.6% for the quarter, driven by increased customer transactions and unit volumes. E-commerce sales surged 27%, reaching a record-high 23% share of total sales mix. Expedited store-fulfilled delivery grew more than 50%. 

Underneath those figures, however, the consumer picture is more sobering. Walmart CFO John David Rainey noted that as household budgets have tightened, more consumer dollars are flowing toward necessities rather than discretionary purchases.  That dynamic — trading down on everything from groceries to general merchandise — is showing up across income brackets, not just at the lower end.

Rainey acknowledged that Walmart has actively worked to broaden its assortment to attract wealthier shoppers, adding roughly 100 new brands in FY2026, including Fender, Kenmore, Weber, and Stanley.  The strategy is working — but it raises a question the company has not fully answered: what happens to the core lower-income shopper who built Walmart into what it is, as the retailer pivots upmarket?

Walmart’s global advertising business expanded 37% during the period, and membership fee revenue climbed 15.1%. Higher-margin digital and advertising segments contributed to a 10.5% rise in constant-currency adjusted operating income, outpacing total sales growth. 

The financial mechanics are sound. The social read is more complicated.

When a retailer long considered the definitive barometer of working-class America begins logging its strongest gains from six-figure households, it reflects something deeper than a brand refresh. It reflects an economy in which even comfortable earners are recalibrating — cutting where they can, trading prestige for practicality. Analysts note that if higher-income consumers are pulling back on discretionary spending, the downstream impact on retailers without Walmart’s scale, footprint, and pricing power could be severe. 

For smaller retailers, regional chains, and specialty stores that depend on the same mid-to-upper consumer segment now walking into Walmart, the competitive math has shifted. Walmart is no longer just a threat to grocery chains and big-box rivals. It is encroaching on territory once considered safely out of reach.

Walmart raised its full-year net sales outlook to growth of 4.8% to 5.1%, lifted from a prior range of 3.75% to 4.75%, and guided adjusted earnings per share to a range of $2.58 to $2.63.  By every conventional metric, the quarter was a success.

But the more telling metric may be the one Walmart did not highlight in its headline numbers: the accelerating flight of affluent Americans to the discount aisle. That trend, if it holds, will reshape retail competition, consumer brand strategy, and the broader picture of household financial health in America for years to come.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

MENLO PARK, Calif. — Meta Platforms reported record financial results for the first quarter, posting $56.3 billion in revenue and $26.77 billion in net income, but the company’s aggressive push into artificial intelligence — coupled with sweeping job cuts — triggered investor concern and sent shares lower in after-hours trading.

Revenue rose 33% year over year, marking Meta’s fastest growth since 2021 and exceeding analyst expectations. Adjusted earnings per share came in at $7.31, while diluted EPS reached $10.44, reflecting strong underlying profitability across its advertising-driven business.

However, a significant portion of those profits was driven by a one-time tax benefit tied to recent federal legislation, which added approximately $8 billion to net income. Excluding that adjustment, earnings were materially lower, highlighting the underlying cost pressures associated with Meta’s expanding investment strategy.

Susan Li, Meta’s Chief Financial Officer, emphasized that the company’s increased spending reflects “higher component pricing and additional data center costs” required to support long-term AI capacity, as Meta raised its 2026 capital expenditure outlook to between $125 billion and $145 billion.

That surge in spending is being partially offset by workforce reductions. Meta confirmed it is cutting approximately 8,000 jobs — about 10% of its global workforce — with layoffs set to take effect in May. The company is also eliminating 6,000 previously planned hires, signaling a decisive shift in how it allocates human and financial resources.

The layoffs follow multiple rounds of cuts earlier in the year, as Meta restructures around automation and AI-driven efficiencies across divisions including Reality Labs, recruiting, and core platform operations.

At the same time, the company reported a notable shift in user trends. Daily active users across Meta’s family of apps declined sequentially to 3.56 billion, marking the first drop in its history. Executives attributed the decline in part to geopolitical disruptions, including internet restrictions linked to the ongoing conflict in Iran.

Despite the turbulence, Meta reaffirmed its outlook, guiding second-quarter revenue between $58 billion and $61 billion and maintaining full-year expense projections of up to $169 billion, while committing that operating income will exceed 2025 levels.

The quarter highlights a broader transformation underway across the technology sector. Companies are generating record revenues and profits even as they reduce headcount — redirecting resources toward artificial intelligence infrastructure at an unprecedented scale.

Across Alphabet, Microsoft, Amazon, and Meta, total AI-related capital spending is expected to exceed $600 billion in 2026, reflecting one of the largest coordinated investment cycles in modern corporate history.

For investors, the key question is no longer whether AI will reshape the economy — but how quickly these massive investments will translate into sustainable returns.

Meta’s results make clear that the transition is already underway — and that the cost of staying competitive in the AI era is rising just as rapidly as the opportunity.

JBizNews Desk

The United States on Friday imposed new Iran-related sanctions on several individuals, entities, and one vessel, including some based in China, according to the US Treasury website.

The Treasury further warned that any shippers paying tolls to Iran for passage through the Strait of Hormuz, including charitable donations to organizations such as the Iranian Red Crescent Society, are at risk of punitive sanctions.

“The Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) is aware of Iranian threats to shipping and demands for ‘toll’ payments to receive safe passage through the international Strait of Hormuz,” said the Treasury, noting that any such payments are “generally prohibited.”

The treasury added that the US prohibits any engagements or transactions with the Iranian government, Iranian digital asset exchanges, or Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps (IRGC).

The US considers the IRGC a terrorist organization, with the Treasury warning that any foreign entities that cause Americans to violate its sanctions against the group (and Iran in general) risk “civil and criminal enforcement liability.”

US forces patrol the Arabian Sea near M/V Touska on April 20, 2026. (credit: U.S. Navy via Getty Images)

“Vessels of all nations entering or leaving Iranian ports and coastline are also subject to US Central Command’s (CENTCOM) impartial naval blockade,” the Treasury added.

US targets Iran’s covert ‘shadow banking’ network

On Tuesday, the US imposed new sanctions on 35 groups and individuals involved in operating Iran’s covert financial network, according to the State Department.

Iranian “shadow banking” networks allow the regime to evade sanctions, despite the US “maximum pressure” campaign against the Islamic Republic, the State Department noted. 

The State Department also accused the IRGC and Iranian military forces of illegally using the international financial system to profit from the sale of sanctioned oil, gather missile and weapon components, and fund terror proxies.

The statement also reflected on the plight of the Iranian people, noting how they live under a deteriorating economy while the regime extends favors to the elites.

Reuters contributed to this report.

This post was originally published on here

Tech giant Meta is threatening to cut off access to its social media platforms in New Mexico as a response to the state’s legal effort to compel changes to child safety protocols on the platform.

Meta and the state of New Mexico are expected to proceed to the second stage of their trial next week after a jury recently issued a $375 million award to the state after finding that the company misled consumers about the safety of its platforms and protections for children against sexual predators.

The next phase of the trial will concern what actions the parent company of Facebook, Instagram and WhatsApp must take to address those issues.

Among the remedies New Mexico is seeking is to impose a requirement that Meta meet a 99% accuracy threshold in verifying that children on its platform are at least 13 years old. Meta has pushed back on that requirement, arguing in a court filing that it’s unfeasible and would require it to “comply with impossible obligations.”

META VOWS APPEAL OF ‘LANDMARK’ SOCIAL MEDIA VERDICTS, WARNS OF FREE SPEECH EROSION

Meta’s legal team said in a filing that New Mexico’s “requests for relief are so broad and so burdensome, that if implemented it might force Meta to withdraw its apps entirely from the State of New Mexico as an alternative way of complying with the injunction.”

“It does not make economic or engineering sense for Meta to build separate apps just for New Mexico residents,” Meta’s lawyers added. “Nor could Meta guarantee the perfection the State demands, making it impractical for Meta to operate in New Mexico.”

EXPERT WARNS OF MASSIVE RECKONING FOR SOCIAL MEDIA COMPANIES: ‘GIANT CASE OF KARMA’

The company has argued that it’s being unfairly singled out in comparison to other social media platforms that are popular with young people. It also previously signaled it will appeal the $375 million civil judgment against it.

New Mexico pushed back on Meta’s assertion that it would be impractical to comply with the safeguards it’s seeking for social media apps.

META ORDERED TO PAY $375M AFTER JURY FINDS PLATFORM ENABLED CHILD PREDATORS IN LANDMARK NEW MEXICO CASE

“Meta is showing the world how little it cares about child safety,” said New Mexico Attorney General Raúl Torrez. “Meta’s refusal to follow the laws that protect our kids tells you everything you need to know about this company and the character of its leaders.” 

“We know Meta has the ability to make these changes. For years the company has rewritten its own rules, redesigned its products, and even bent to the demands of dictators to preserve market access. This is not about technological capability. Meta simply refuses to place the safety of children ahead of engagement, advertising revenue, and profit,” Torrez added.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

New Mexico is also seeking that Meta implement safer recommendation algorithms that don’t prioritize engagement over child well-being, restrictions on end-to-end encryption for minors, prominent warning labels about the platform’s risks, permanent bans for adults engaging in or facilitating the exploitation of children, and an independent oversight regime through a court-appointed child safety monitor.

This post was originally published here

MOUNTAIN VIEW, Calif. — Alphabet delivered the strongest quarterly results in its history, reporting $109.9 billion in first-quarter revenue and $62.6 billion in net income, as its artificial intelligence strategy drove explosive growth across Google Cloud and reinforced its dominance in search and digital advertising.

The results easily surpassed Wall Street expectations and sent shares sharply higher, with investors responding to both the scale of the beat and the accelerating momentum in AI-driven services. Revenue rose 22% year over year, marking the company’s 11th consecutive quarter of double-digit growth and its fastest pace since 2022.

Sundar Pichai, Alphabet’s Chief Executive Officer, said the company’s “AI investments and full stack approach are lighting up every part of the business,” pointing to broad-based gains across cloud, search, and subscription services.

The standout performance came from Google Cloud, which generated $20.03 billion in revenue, surging 63% year over year — outpacing key competitors. Even more striking, Alphabet disclosed a contracted cloud backlog exceeding $460 billion, signaling a multiyear pipeline of enterprise demand tied directly to AI infrastructure and services.

Pichai told analysts that enterprise AI solutions have now become the primary growth driver within the cloud division, with adoption of Gemini-based products accelerating rapidly across corporate customers.

Search, long the backbone of Alphabet’s business, also delivered strong results. Revenue from Google Search rose 19%, with executives crediting AI-enhanced search experiences for increasing user engagement and query volume. YouTube advertising revenue reached $9.88 billion, while total paid subscriptions across services such as YouTube Premium and Google One climbed to 350 million.

Alphabet’s ambitions extend well beyond software. The company’s autonomous driving unit, Waymo, surpassed 500,000 fully autonomous rides per week and expanded operations to 11 major U.S. cities, marking a significant milestone in the commercialization of self-driving technology.

To sustain its lead, Alphabet is investing at an unprecedented scale. The company raised its full-year capital expenditure forecast to between $180 billion and $190 billion, with Chief Financial Officer Anat Ashkenazi signaling even higher spending in 2027. Alphabet deployed $35.7 billion in capital expenditures in the first quarter alone, much of it directed toward expanding global data center capacity.

The company’s recent acquisition of cybersecurity firm Wiz will be integrated into Google Cloud, though executives cautioned it will temporarily weigh on margins as investments ramp.

For markets and policymakers alike, Alphabet’s results underscore a defining shift in the global economy: artificial intelligence is no longer a future bet — it is actively reshaping corporate spending, enterprise technology, and competitive dynamics in real time.

With a backlog of nearly half a trillion dollars and accelerating enterprise adoption, Alphabet’s quarter signals that the AI infrastructure race is not slowing — it is intensifying.

JBizNews Desk

President Donald Trump said on Friday that the U.S. gave Spirit Airlines a final bailout proposal to aid the beleaguered carrier.

Trump said, “we’re driving a tough deal,” and that “if we could do it, we’d do it. But only if it’s a good deal. He also said an announcement would be coming soon.

The budget airline most recently sought a lifeline from the U.S. government to the tune of $500 million. The Wall Street Journal reported on Friday that the airline is preparing to end operations after a deal could not be reached between certain bondholders and the government.

Sources later said the administration had proposed $500 million in financing in exchange for warrants equivalent to 90% of Spirit’s equity.

TED CRUZ POURS COLD WATER ON TRUMP ADMINISTRATION PLAN TO BAIL OUT SPIRIT AIRLINES: ‘TERRIBLE IDEA’

There had been disagreements inside the Trump administration over whether and how to fund the bailout, the report said, citing people familiar with the matter.

Not all Spirit bondholders were on board with the deal, the report added.

Trump previously said he was interested in helping the airline.

“If we could get it for the right price, I’d do it to save the jobs,” he said during an event at the Oval Office last week.

Reuters contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

May 1, 2026

California’s fuel crisis has moved from warning to reality. Two major refinery shutdowns, a sharp turn toward jet fuel production, and a shrinking supply of imports from Asia have combined to push gasoline prices toward $6 a gallon — with analysts warning the worst is still ahead.

The number of refineries operating in California has fallen from 23 in 2000 to just 11 today. The two most recent closures — Phillips 66’s 140,000-barrel-per-day Wilmington complex in Los Angeles, which shut in November 2025, and Valero Energy’s 145,000-barrel-per-day Benicia refinery in the Bay Area, which closed in April 2026 — together removed 17.5% of the state’s refining output from the market. 

Those closures did not just reduce supply. They changed the economics of every refinery still running in the state.

With jet fuel margins now sitting above $85 per barrel — more than $35 per barrel above gasoline — California’s remaining refiners have a powerful financial reason to shift output away from motor fuel. In April, they acted on it: jet fuel production climbed by 20,000 barrels per day and diesel by 16,000 barrels per day, while gasoline output was cut by 32,000 barrels per day.  The refineries are not broken. They are simply chasing the money — and drivers are paying the difference.

Retail gasoline in California is now averaging nearly $5.96 per gallon, roughly $1.20 above where it stood at the end of February and about $1.20 above year-ago levels. Diesel has climbed to $7.48 per gallon, up $2.50 from a year earlier. 

The state cannot easily fill the gap with imports. California’s fuel blend — known as CARB-grade gasoline — is one of the strictest formulations in the world. Most domestic refineries cannot produce it, meaning replacement supply must come from a narrow set of overseas facilities, primarily in Asia and India, arriving by ship across the Pacific.  That supply is now drying up too.

Jet fuel exports from South Korea, Japan, and China to California have dropped to decade lows. South Korean shipments, which averaged 40,000 barrels per day through March, fell to 17,000 barrels per day in April. With only days left in the month, just one confirmed cargo had departed Asia for California. 

Airlines are absorbing the hit alongside drivers. Norse Atlantic Airways scrapped all its summer flights from Los Angeles International Airport. Delta, United, and Air Canada have trimmed routes or raised fares as jet fuel costs at LAX have more than doubled year over year. 

Patrick De Haan, head of petroleum analysis at GasBuddy, said jet fuel availability at major California airports is what concerns him most heading into summer. He warned that widespread flight cancellations remain a serious possibility if no resolution to the global supply disruption emerges in the coming weeks. 

Dan Pickering, founder of Pickering Energy Partners, said California occupies a category of its own. Most states are grappling with higher prices. California is grappling with higher prices and the threat of not having enough fuel at all. “Because availability is tough, the price goes up even more,” he said. 

The longer-term picture is equally stark. A study by University of Southern California professor Michael Mische found that the combined effect of the two refinery closures and layers of new state regulations could push average gasoline prices as high as $8.44 per gallon by year-end 2026 — a potential increase of 75% from prices seen in spring 2025. 

State officials are weighing temporary waivers on CARB fuel specifications to ease import constraints. But a structural fix — a new pipeline into California — is not expected to be operational until 2029 at the earliest. 

For California’s 27 million drivers, that timeline offers little comfort. The refinery closures have already happened. The import shortfall is already here. And the summer driving season has not yet begun.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

By JBIZnews Staff
May 1, 2026

Spirit Airlines is teetering on the edge of collapse, with the ultra-low-cost carrier preparing for a potential shutdown after a proposed $500 million government-backed rescue deal fell apart, according to government officials and industry analysts.

The discount airline, already operating under Chapter 11 bankruptcy protection for the second time in less than two years, has only days of cash left to sustain operations, multiple sources familiar with the situation told JBIZnews. Negotiations with the Trump administration for emergency funding — which would have given the government a major equity stake and senior creditor status — stalled when key bondholders and lenders, including hedge fund Citadel, rejected the terms.

Spirit Airlines aircraft amid financial turmoil
(Illustrating the carrier’s deepening crisis as the $500 million rescue package collapses and shutdown looms.)

Ct2PX“LARGE”

The bailout was seen as a last-ditch effort to keep Spirit flying amid soaring jet fuel prices triggered by the U.S.-Iran conflict. Without the infusion, the airline risks immediate liquidation, which would mark the end of operations for one of America’s largest budget carriers and disrupt travel for millions of passengers, analysts warned.

Spirit had been working toward an exit from its latest bankruptcy filing by early summer, but the surge in fuel costs derailed those plans, government sources confirmed. Creditors are concerned the proposed deal would significantly diminish the value of their claims, leading to the impasse.

Aviation experts and analysts view a Spirit shutdown as likely to ripple through the industry, reducing capacity on popular leisure routes and potentially driving up fares at rival carriers. Passengers with upcoming Spirit tickets are being urged to monitor the situation closely, as refunds or rebookings may become complicated if operations cease.

The White House and Department of Transportation have not issued an official comment on the stalled talks, but sources indicate no immediate alternative funding path has emerged. Spirit continues to operate flights for now, but the clock is ticking.

JbizNews Desk – Business

By JBizNews Desk

Amazon Expands Rural Delivery Push, Pressuring Local Businesses

Amazon announced on April 29, 2026, a significant expansion of its rural delivery infrastructure across the United States, targeting underserved communities in the Midwest and Southeast with same-day and next-day delivery capabilities. The move, which includes partnerships with independent delivery contractors and regional logistics providers, is reshaping the competitive landscape for small-town retailers who have long relied on geographic distance as a natural buffer against the e-commerce giant.

The expansion involves the addition of more than 40 new delivery stations in towns with populations under 50,000 — a direct push into markets that have historically been slower to feel the full weight of Amazon’s logistics machine.

What the Expansion Looks Like on the Ground

According to Amazon’s April 29 announcement, the new infrastructure buildout includes:

• Over 40 new last-mile delivery stations in small and mid-size towns
• Expanded partnerships with Delivery Service Partner (DSP) small business operators
• Integration with Amazon’s existing freight and air cargo network for faster rural replenishment
• Investment in electric delivery vehicles for select rural corridors
• Expanded same-day availability for Amazon Prime members in previously excluded ZIP codes

Impact on Small-Town Retailers

Ellen Hughes-Cromwick of the Economic Policy Institute noted that rural small businesses face a compounding set of pressures heading into mid-2026. “When same-day delivery arrives in a town of 20,000 people, it does not just change where people shop — it changes what they expect from every local business,” she said in commentary published April 29. “Convenience is now the baseline, and that raises the bar dramatically for Main Street operators.”

Small hardware stores, pharmacies, and general merchandise retailers in rural communities are among the most exposed. Many of these businesses operate on thin margins and lack the technology infrastructure or capital to compete on speed or price.

Marcus Walton of the Small Business Majority pointed out in a statement released April 29 that the timing compounds existing stress. “Rural small businesses are already navigating elevated insurance costs, persistent workforce shortages, and higher borrowing costs,” he said. “A surge in Amazon’s rural reach could accelerate store closures in communities that can least afford to lose them.”

The DSP Angle: Opportunity for Some Small Operators

Not everyone on Main Street loses. Amazon’s Delivery Service Partner program — which allows small business owners to operate independent delivery franchises — is central to this expansion. The company is actively recruiting entrepreneurs in rural markets to launch DSP operations with startup support and volume guarantees.

Rohit Kumar of Deloitte’s Supply Chain Practice described this as a deliberate dual strategy. “Amazon is simultaneously disrupting local retail and creating a new class of small logistics entrepreneurs in the same communities,” he said in an April 29 industry briefing. “The net effect on local employment and business ownership is genuinely mixed and will vary significantly by region.”

Key details of the DSP opportunity include:

• Startup investment typically ranges from $10,000 to $30,000
• Amazon provides vehicles, equipment, and technology support
• DSP owners can employ between 40 and 100 drivers
• Revenue is volume-based with performance incentives
• No prior logistics experience required

Consumer Behavior Shifting Faster Than Expected

Dana Peterson of The Conference Board highlighted in April 2026 consumer data that rural shoppers are increasingly prioritizing delivery speed and price over local loyalty. “Post-pandemic behavioral shifts have proven stickier than many analysts predicted,” she said. “Rural consumers now shop online at rates approaching suburban levels, and that trend is only accelerating as infrastructure catches up.”

This shift is visible in categories once thought immune to e-commerce disruption — pet supplies, auto parts, and even fresh groceries — all now seeing meaningful online penetration in rural ZIP codes.

Outlook

Amazon’s April 29 rural expansion announcement marks a structural turning point for small-town commerce. While DSP opportunities offer a genuine entrepreneurial path for some, the broader pressure on independent retailers is real and growing. Analysts expect further consolidation among rural small businesses over the next 12 to 18 months, particularly in general merchandise and pharmacy categories.

Ellen Hughes-Cromwick of the Economic Policy Institute summed it up plainly: “Rural communities will need proactive policy support and local business adaptation strategies — not just market forces — to preserve the economic diversity that makes small towns viable places to live and work.”

For small-business owners in affected markets, the window to differentiate through personalized service, community relationships, and niche offerings is narrowing. The time to adapt is now.

JBizNews Desk

An exclusive holiday gathering just north of San Francisco reportedly turned into a stomach-churning fiscal nightmare for California Gov. Gavin Newsom.

Back in December, Newsom and Google co-founder Sergey Brin attended the same “treehouse party” hosted by crypto investor Chris Larsen. It was there, according to a Bloomberg report, that Brin broke the news that he would be leaving the state in response to a proposed wealth tax.

According to the report, it was a tense, private confrontation so jarring that Newsom reportedly complained about a “lingering cold” he attributed to the interaction for months afterward.

Brin allegedly explicitly cited the Billionaire Tax Act, a 5% one-time excise tax on individuals with a net worth exceeding $1 billion, hitting his nearly $289 billion net worth hard.

CALIFORNIANS FLEE HIGH COSTS — AND MANY COME OUT AHEAD FINANCIALLY, STUDY FINDS

Just this week, the Service Employees International Union–United Healthcare Workers West (SEIU-UHW) said it has collected more than 1.55 million signatures, according to a press release, nearly double the 875,000-signature requirement, to put the one-time tax on billionaire assets on the California ballot this November.

If the measure is approved by voters, anyone who was a California resident on Jan. 1, 2026, would owe the tax, according to the proposal.

Brin effectively shielded his wealth from the retroactive reach of the proposed tax by buying properties in Nevada and Florida. He has also committed at least $45 million to a group called “Building A Better California” to fight the initiative, with his total spending to kill the tax already reaching $58 million this year.

“I fled socialism with my family in 1979 and know the devastating, oppressive society it created in the Soviet Union. I don’t want California to end up in the same place,” Brin told The New York Times this week regarding a story by the outlet that discussed his move.

Newsom has publicly opposed the billionaire tax, warning the measure would damage the economy and drive away investment. Since January, it’s estimated that more than $1 trillion in capital has left California.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“This is my fear,” Newsom previously said in a Politico interview. “It’s just what I warned against. It’s happening.”

“The evidence is in. The impacts are very real — not just substantive economic impacts in terms of the revenue, but start-ups, the indirect impacts of … people questioning long-term commitments, medium-term commitments,” he continued. “That’s not what we need right now, at a time of so much uncertainty. Quite the contrary.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

NEW YORK — Job cuts across Corporate America are accelerating into the second quarter, as companies intensify restructuring efforts driven by artificial intelligence adoption, cost pressures, and post-pandemic workforce recalibration.

More than 100,000 workers have been displaced so far in 2026, with 155 separate layoff events impacting over 100,000 employees, according to aggregated labor data. The scale and pace of reductions point to a structural shift rather than a temporary adjustment.

The largest single workforce reduction came from Oracle, which eliminated approximately 30,000 positions, underscoring the magnitude of change underway in the technology sector.

Meta Platforms is in the midst of a major restructuring effort, cutting roughly 8,000 employees — about 10% of its global workforce — with layoffs scheduled to take effect in May. The company has also paused hiring for thousands of open roles as it reallocates resources toward artificial intelligence infrastructure.

Earlier this year, Meta had already reduced headcount across multiple divisions, including its Reality Labs unit, signaling a sustained shift in strategic priorities.

Outside of technology, layoffs are spreading across industries. Nike announced plans to cut 775 jobs in its distribution network, citing efforts to streamline operations and expand automation. UPS has outlined plans to eliminate up to 30,000 operational roles over time, largely through attrition and voluntary programs, alongside facility closures.

Other companies are following similar paths. Snap reduced its workforce by approximately 1,000 employees, while European semiconductor equipment maker ASML announced 1,700 job cuts.

The underlying drivers are clear. Companies are increasingly replacing or consolidating roles through AI-driven automation, while also adjusting to tariff uncertainty, shifting supply chains, and the aftereffects of aggressive hiring during the pandemic years.

The labor market is beginning to reflect that divergence. Tech-sector unemployment has risen to approximately 5.8%, the highest level since the early 2000s, even as overall U.S. unemployment remains relatively low at around 3.8%.

Geographically, layoffs are concentrated in major economic hubs. California leads with more than 20,000 affected workers, followed by Pennsylvania and Texas, where cuts span industries including manufacturing, healthcare, and food production.

Looking ahead, additional waves are expected. Meta has signaled further reductions later in 2026, and upcoming labor reports will provide clearer insight into whether the current pace represents a temporary spike or a new baseline.

For workers, the transition is proving disruptive. For businesses, it reflects a fundamental restructuring of how work is done.

The speed at which artificial intelligence is reshaping corporate operations is now outpacing the labor market’s ability to adapt — setting up the second quarter as a critical test of how deep and lasting this transformation will be.

JBizNews Desk

Apple used its latest investor update to send a broader message about leadership: the next chief executive’s most important resource will be time. Tim Cook told analysts that the defining decision for any successor “comes down to how you allocate your time” and whether that effort delivers “the greatest benefit to the company and the users,” a point reported by Fortune and consistent with remarks Cook made as investors pressed for clues about the company’s next chapter.

The comment landed with unusual force because Apple also paired it with upbeat operating guidance and a renewed emphasis on discipline at a moment when Wall Street wants clearer answers on artificial intelligence, hardware demand and management depth. On the company’s earnings call, Apple finance chief Kevan Parekh said the company expected stronger iPhone momentum in the current quarter, and Reuters reported that the outlook topped analyst expectations, helping lift the stock in after-hours trading. In its earnings materials, Apple said iPhone demand remained healthy, while Cook told investors demand had stayed “robust” across many markets, according to the company’s official release.

The leadership angle drew added attention because senior executive John Ternus, long viewed by some analysts as a credible future contender for the top job, used the call to stress continuity rather than reinvention. Bloomberg reported that Ternus said he intended to carry forward the “deep thoughtfulness, deliberateness and discipline” that investors associate with Cook’s tenure. That framing matters for a company with a market value measured in the trillions, where even subtle shifts in capital allocation, product timing and executive bandwidth can move sentiment quickly.

Markets responded first to the numbers. After the guidance update, Apple shares jumped more than 4%, with CNBC highlighting the move as one of the session’s biggest reactions among megacap technology stocks. Analysts tied the rally to confidence in the iPhone franchise rather than any sudden change in the company’s longer-term narrative. Morgan Stanley analyst Erik Woodring said in a note covered by financial media that stronger guidance “should help restore confidence” in near-term execution, while Reuters and CNBC both emphasized that investors still want proof that growth can extend beyond the core handset business.

That dependence on the iPhone remains central to the investment case. In its quarterly filing and earnings release, Apple showed that the iPhone still contributes roughly half of total revenue, underscoring how much of the company’s earnings power continues to rest on one product line. Cook said the company’s focus remains building products that “truly enrich lives,” a line cited by Fortune, and he argued that disciplined execution around that “north star” creates the foundation for both customer loyalty and future expansion. For investors, the implication stays straightforward: as long as the iPhone engine keeps running, Apple buys itself time to refine newer bets.

The pressure point, however, sits squarely in AI. Analysts across Bloomberg, Reuters and CNBC have noted that Apple entered the generative AI race later and more cautiously than rivals including Microsoft, Alphabet and Meta Platforms. In public presentations and conference remarks, Cook has said Apple sees AI as “one of the most profound technologies of our lifetime,” but the market continues to debate whether the company’s privacy-first, tightly integrated approach can keep pace with competitors moving faster in cloud models and enterprise software. That gap in perception, more than any one quarter’s revenue figure, explains why comments about leadership focus resonated so strongly.

The challenge extends to new hardware categories as well. The Vision Pro headset earned praise for engineering ambition, yet sell-through has looked modest relative to the excitement that preceded launch. Coverage from Bloomberg, Reuters and CNBC has pointed to the device’s premium price and limited mainstream use cases as key constraints. Analysts cited by those outlets said the headset still looks more like a platform seed than a volume business, leaving Apple reliant on future software and developer adoption to justify the category over time.

That leaves Cook’s advice on time management sounding less like a leadership cliché and more like a strategic blueprint. In a company as large as Apple, where management attention must stretch across supply chains, regulation, product design, services, AI and global competition, deciding what not to do can matter as much as deciding what to build. Fortune framed Cook’s remarks as a lesson in focus, while Bloomberg’s coverage of the earnings call suggested the company wants investors to see steadiness, not disruption, in any eventual transition.

What comes next will matter far beyond succession chatter. Investors now have two near-term tests to watch: whether Apple converts stronger iPhone demand into sustained revenue acceleration over the next few quarters, and whether upcoming product and software announcements show a more convincing AI roadmap. Analysts quoted by Reuters and Bloomberg said the company’s next cycle of launches could shape sentiment into 2026, because leadership credibility at Apple ultimately rests on the same standard Cook described himself: putting time where it creates the greatest benefit for users and the business.

JBizNews Desk

WASHINGTON — The U.S. economy expanded at a 2% annualized pace in the first quarter of 2026, rebounding from a near-stall at the end of last year, but the recovery arrived alongside a sharp rise in inflation that is complicating the Federal Reserve’s path forward and intensifying pressure on households and small businesses.

The growth rate marked a clear acceleration from the 0.5% pace recorded in the fourth quarter of 2025, supported by gains in government spending, exports, and business investment. However, the headline figure came in slightly below economists’ expectations, while consumer spending — which accounts for roughly two-thirds of economic activity — slowed, signaling potential fragility beneath the surface.

A major driver of growth was a surge in business investment, particularly in equipment and software, which rose more than 17% from the prior quarter. Much of that spending is tied to the ongoing artificial intelligence boom, as major U.S. technology companies continue pouring capital into data centers and infrastructure to support next-generation computing demand.

The inflation picture, however, was far less encouraging. The Personal Consumption Expenditures Price Index, the Federal Reserve’s preferred gauge, climbed to 3.5% annually in March, up sharply from 2.8% the prior month. Core inflation, which strips out food and energy, remained elevated at 3.2%, well above the Fed’s 2% target.

Michael Strain, an economist at the American Enterprise Institute, said the data reflects “a solid underlying growth trend,” but warned that “clear signs of inflationary pressure remain embedded in the economy.”

Energy costs have been a major contributor to the surge. The war in Iran, which began February 28, has disrupted oil and gas flows through the Strait of Hormuz, pushing fuel prices higher across the board. According to AAA, regular gasoline is now averaging approximately $4.30 per gallon, a four-year high.

Trade dynamics added further complexity. Imports surged as businesses rushed to bring in goods following the Supreme Court’s February decision invalidating significant portions of President Donald Trump’s tariff framework. The merchandise trade deficit widened to $87.9 billion in March, according to Census Bureau data.

For the Federal Reserve, the timing is challenging. Policymakers held interest rates steady at 3.5%–3.75% for a third consecutive meeting, with Chair Jerome Powell acknowledging inflation remains persistent even as he described the broader economy as “solid.”

Market expectations for rate cuts have shifted significantly. Felix Vezina-Poirier, Chief Strategist at BCA Research, noted that “energy-driven inflation pressures reduce any urgency for the Fed to ease policy, particularly with a stable labor market backdrop.”

On Wall Street, investors largely looked past inflation concerns. The S&P 500 rose 1.02% to close above 7,200 for the first time, while the Nasdaq and Dow Jones Industrial Average also posted strong gains, driven in part by robust corporate earnings.

For Main Street, however, the story is more strained. Rising fuel costs, persistent inflation, and elevated borrowing costs are squeezing household budgets and small business margins alike. Many businesses continue to face stacked pressures from shipping surcharges, insurance increases, and ongoing labor shortages.

The divergence between Wall Street’s record-setting momentum and the realities facing consumers and small businesses is emerging as a defining theme of the second quarter — and a key test for the durability of the current expansion.

By JBIZnews Staff
May 1, 2026

Iran has delivered a fresh proposal to the United States via Pakistani mediators aimed at breaking the deadlock over the Strait of Hormuz, even as the U.S. naval blockade on Iranian ports remains firmly in place.

The latest offer, conveyed on Thursday, calls for Iran to reopen the strategically vital waterway — through which roughly 20% of global oil and significant LNG volumes flow — in exchange for the U.S. lifting its blockade on Iranian ports and agreeing to a permanent end to the ongoing conflict. Discussions on Tehran’s nuclear program would be deferred to a later phase, according to officials familiar with the proposal.

The proposal comes amid a fragile ceasefire that took hold in early April following months of direct U.S.-Israeli military action against Iran. The U.S. imposed the naval blockade on April 13 after direct talks in Islamabad collapsed, aiming to choke off Iran’s oil export revenues and increase pressure on the regime.

President Donald Trump has already signaled strong rejection of the Iranian plan. In recent comments, Trump stated the blockade will stay in effect until Tehran agrees to a comprehensive deal addressing U.S. concerns over its nuclear ambitions. “They want to settle. They don’t want me to keep the blockade. I don’t want to lift the blockade because I don’t want them to have a nuclear weapon,” Trump told Axios.

The standoff has sent shockwaves through global energy markets. Brent crude briefly surged above $126 per barrel this week — its highest level since 2022 — as traders priced in prolonged disruption risks. Analysts warn that any extended closure or blockade could further strain supply chains and push gasoline prices higher heading into the critical summer driving season.

Iranian officials, including President Masoud Pezeshkian, have described the U.S. blockade as “doomed to fail” and contrary to international law, while vowing to safeguard the country’s nuclear and missile capabilities. Tehran has also floated the idea of new rules for managing traffic through the Strait of Hormuz.

Negotiations remain in flux, with Pakistani back-channel diplomacy continuing and Iranian Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi holding talks in Russia. A revised Iranian proposal could emerge as early as today, sources indicate, though the White House has given no firm deadline for resolving the crisis.

The impasse underscores the high stakes for global trade and energy security, as both sides dig in over sequencing: Iran prioritizes immediate relief from the blockade, while Washington insists nuclear safeguards come first.

JbizNews Desk – International

Wall Street kicked off May on a strong note Friday, with all three major indexes rising in early trading as a blockbuster Apple earnings report, a record-setting close the night before, and fresh signs of progress in U.S.-Iran peace negotiations sent oil prices sharply lower and stocks higher.

The Numbers At The Open

The S&P 500 gained 0.5%, the Nasdaq Composite added 0.7%, and the Dow Jones Industrial Average advanced roughly 112 points, or 0.2%, in early trading.  The gains build on a historic session Thursday. The S&P 500 closed above the 7,200 threshold for the first time ever, helping both the S&P 500 and Nasdaq secure their strongest monthly performances since 2020. The Dow posted its strongest monthly performance since November 2024. 

Top Mover: Apple

The clear standout at the open is Apple. Apple reported fiscal second-quarter earnings of $2.01 per share on revenue of $111.18 billion, beating analyst estimates of $1.95 per share and $109.66 billion in revenue.  iPhone revenue reached $56.99 billion, up 21.7% year over year, beating expectations across every product category.  Services revenue surged 16.3% to a new all-time record of $30.98 billion.  Apple’s board authorized an additional $100 billion in share repurchases and raised its quarterly dividend 4% to $0.27 per share.  Shares jumped more than 4% at the open. CEO Tim Cook called the results exceptionally strong, saying “the first half of this year was very strong.” 

Analyst Calls

Venu Krishna, head of U.S. equity strategy at Barclays, pointed to a strong economic growth outlook and an intact tech story as catalysts to keep the rally going, saying “the story is good, so we remain optimistic.” 

Pakistan’s Role In Moving Oil Markets

One of the biggest market drivers this morning is not a stock — it is diplomacy. Oil prices fell after Iran reportedly sent its response through Pakistani mediators to the latest U.S. amendments to a draft peace agreement. U.S. West Texas Intermediate crude fell roughly 3% to around $102 a barrel, while international benchmark Brent edged lower to $110.23. 

Pakistan‘s role as mediator in the U.S.-Iran conflict has been one of the most consequential diplomatic developments of 2026. On March 23, Pakistan formally offered to host talks between Washington and Tehran , stepping in as a neutral bridge between two sides with no direct communication. The formal Islamabad Talks were held on April 11 and 12, led on the U.S. side by Vice President JD Vance, alongside special envoys Steve Witkoff and Jared Kushner, and on the Iranian side by parliamentary speaker Mohammad Bagher Ghalibaf and foreign minister Abbas Araghchi. The talks lasted 21 hours but ended without a deal.  A two-week ceasefire mediated by Pakistan had taken hold on April 8, and President Trump subsequently extended it to allow more time for negotiations.  Today’s oil drop reflects market optimism that Iran’s latest response through Pakistani channels could move the process forward — keeping the Strait of Hormuz from becoming a full-blown energy crisis again.

Other Movers

Roblox tumbled 24% in premarket after slashing its full-year 2026 bookings guidance, warning of “continued short-term friction” from new product changes including age verification that have slowed new user acquisition. 

Caterpillar saw several analysts raise price targets after the industrial giant beat earnings expectations, citing booming demand for power generation equipment from AI data centers and a record backlog. 

Exxon Mobil and Chevron both beat quarterly earnings expectations but reported steep profit declines as the Middle East conflict weighed on energy operations. Exxon’s net income declined 45% while Chevron’s fell 36%. 

Occidental Petroleum announced that CEO Vicki Hollub — the first woman to lead a major U.S. oil company — is retiring after a decade at the helm. COO Richard Jackson will take over June 1. 

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

May 1, 2026 JBizNews Desk

American consumers and businesses are absorbing the steepest fuel prices in four years, as the ongoing conflict in the Middle East has effectively shut down one of the world’s most critical energy arteries and sent gasoline, diesel, and jet fuel costs surging across every sector of the economy.

The average price of a gallon of regular gasoline stands at $4.30 as of Thursday — the highest level in four years. The closure of the Strait of Hormuz, which carries about one-fifth of global oil and natural gas supply, has triggered the shock.

Brent crude surged past $100 per barrel for the first time in four years, peaking at $126 per barrel. Major container carriers including Maersk, CMA CGM, Hapag-Lloyd, and MSC have suspended transits and rerouted around Africa, adding 10 to 14 days per shipment.

The ripple effects are hitting Main Street hard. Port of Long Beach CEO Noel Hacegaba noted that shippers can no longer absorb rising fuel costs and are passing them along with new surcharges and higher rates.

Parcel shipping costs have spiked: a five-pound ground package from Atlanta to New York City now costs $31.94, up 42% from $22.52 in 2022, with the fuel surcharge component alone rising 131%. UPS and FedEx are on pace for another record quarter in parcel shipping costs.

President Trump has signaled the U.S. naval blockade will continue until Iran makes an acceptable peace proposal, suggesting elevated energy prices above $4 a gallon could persist.

The Federal Reserve’s preferred inflation gauge — the Personal Consumption Expenditures Price Index — jumped to 3.5% annually in March, with energy costs a primary driver. Analysts now question whether the central bank will cut rates at all in 2026.

Small businesses, without the hedging or volume discounts available to larger competitors, are feeling the pain most acutely on deliveries, utilities, and carrier surcharges.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

NEW YORKKirk Tanner, Chief Executive Officer of The Hershey Company, is steering the iconic confectioner toward what he calls “accessible premium” chocolate, betting that elevated yet affordable indulgence can offset shifting consumer behavior driven by the rapid rise of GLP-1 weight-loss drugs. “Consumers want premium experiences without the premium price tag,” Tanner said, outlining a strategy centered on cream-filled chocolate bars designed to deliver richer texture and flavor while remaining within reach of mainstream buyers.

The initiative comes as GLP-1 medications including Ozempic, Wegovy and Mounjaro reshape eating habits across the U.S., dampening demand for traditional high-sugar snacks while creating new consumption patterns. Tanner acknowledged the dual impact, describing the trend as both a headwind for legacy confectionery and a catalyst for innovation. “We are seeing changes in how consumers approach portion size and frequency,” he said, adding that Hershey is adapting with products that meet evolving preferences without abandoning indulgence.

At the same time, Hershey is benefiting from an unexpected tailwind tied directly to the side effects of these medications. Users frequently report dry mouth and what has been dubbed “Ozempic breath,” driving increased demand for mints and gum. “We’ve seen strong demand for gum and mint products as the category benefits from functional snacking tailwinds, including GLP-1 adoption,” Tanner noted, pointing to the company’s Ice Breakers brand, which recorded an 8% rise in retail sales during the first quarter.

Financially, Hershey has managed to navigate the transition with resilience. The company reported adjusted earnings per share of $2.35, surpassing Wall Street expectations, as pricing discipline and product innovation offset softer volumes in core chocolate segments. Growth in protein bars and other functional offerings further supported results, underscoring a broader shift toward diversified snacking beyond traditional sweets.

Analysts say Hershey’s strategy reflects a broader industry pivot, where consumer goods companies are racing to balance indulgence with health-conscious behavior. “Companies that can premiumize their core while leaning into functional benefits are best positioned in this environment,” a senior consumer-sector analyst said, noting that GLP-1 adoption is likely to remain a defining force in food demand for years to come.

Despite speculation about consolidation in the sector, Tanner made clear that Hershey is not pursuing major acquisitions, including a widely discussed potential tie-up with Mondelez International. “We’re focused on our current portfolio and delivering on our outlook,” he said, reinforcing a strategy centered on organic growth and targeted innovation rather than transformational deals.

Input costs remain a key variable. Cocoa prices, which surged earlier this year and pressured margins across the confectionery industry, have begun to stabilize, offering some relief. Still, Hershey continues to operate cautiously amid broader economic uncertainty, maintaining a balance between value-oriented staples and higher-margin premium products.

Since taking the helm in August 2025, Tanner has accelerated Hershey’s evolution into a multi-category snacking company generating more than $11 billion in annual revenue. The upcoming launch of cream-filled bars represents a tangible step in that transformation, aimed at redefining what everyday chocolate can deliver.

The broader consumer shift, executives say, is not a retreat from indulgence but a recalibration. Shoppers are increasingly seeking smaller, higher-quality treats and products that serve multiple purposes, from satisfaction to functionality. For Hershey, that means pairing upgraded chocolate experiences with categories that address emerging needs — even those stemming from pharmaceutical trends.

Looking ahead, the company’s ability to execute on “accessible premium” while capitalizing on functional snacking could determine how well it navigates the GLP-1 era. If successful, Hershey may not only protect its core business but redefine it — proving that even in a market shaped by appetite suppression, demand for smart indulgence remains firmly intact.

JBizNews Desk

May 1, 2026

It was not the debut Bill Ackman had in mind. Pershing Square USA, the billionaire investor’s highly anticipated closed-end fund, fell sharply on its first day of trading Wednesday — erasing nearly a fifth of its value within hours of hitting the market.

Shares priced at $50 but traded as low as $40.33 in the minutes after the opening. By the close, PSUS settled at $40.90 — down 18.2% on the day. 

Pershing Square Inc., the asset management company that listed alongside the fund under the ticker PS, ended its first day at $24.20. 

An investor who bought five shares in the IPO — and received the bonus share of PS that came with the deal — was down roughly 9% on a combined basis by the close, according to calculations by Bloomberg. 

The offering marked the largest closed-end fund launch in U.S. history, but it came in at the low end of Ackman’s ambitions. He had originally targeted between $5 billion and $10 billion. The deal raised $5 billion, with about $2.8 billion already committed by large institutional investors before the IPO opened to the public. 

This was not Ackman’s first attempt at a U.S. public listing. He tried a similar launch in 2024 but pulled it after weak investor interest. 

This time, he structured the deal differently to bring in everyday investors. He lowered the minimum purchase from $5,000 to $250 and partnered with retail brokerages to reach their user bases.  The fund charges a 2% management fee with no performance fees — a departure from the typical hedge fund model that takes a cut of profits.

On the morning of the IPO, Ackman told CNBC: “Hedge funds are sort of known for managing money for rich people. And now we have the opportunity for someone with $50 to be a long-term shareholder. Usually, the retail gets cut massively back, the institutions are favored. We did the opposite.” 

The market, at least on day one, was not convinced. The sharp drop reflects a challenge that closed-end funds frequently face — shares often trade at a discount to the value of the underlying assets once the initial hype fades. Investors who buy in at the IPO price can quickly find themselves underwater even if the portfolio itself performs well.

By Thursday, Ackman moved to show confidence in the deal. He disclosed he had purchased 500,000 shares of PSUS and 800,000 shares of PS out of his own pocket on the first day of trading. Shares rebounded on the second day following the disclosure. 

Whether the bounce holds will depend on how Ackman performs as a public market investor and whether retail investors — the audience he specifically courted — stick with the fund through the early turbulence.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

The White House is arguing that the U.S.-Iran conflict effectively ended for War Powers purposes when an April 7 cease-fire took hold, a position that could spare President Donald Trump from seeking fresh congressional authorization if hostilities stay frozen. A senior administration official told Associated Press that “for purposes of the 1973 War Powers law, the fighting has terminated,” framing the cease-fire as the legal dividing line even though U.S. forces remain deployed and tensions in the Gulf continue.

That interpretation immediately sharpened a constitutional fight in Washington because the War Powers Resolution generally requires a president to end military involvement within 60 days absent congressional approval. At a Senate Armed Services Committee hearing, Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth said the cease-fire “effectively pauses the war” and that “our understanding is that the clock stops while the parties observe the cease-fire,” according to reporting from Bloomberg. His comments signaled the administration intends to treat the lull not simply as a tactical pause but as a legal reset.

Lawmakers in both parties quickly pushed back, saying a cease-fire does not erase Congress’s role in authorizing force. Republican Senator Susan Collins of Maine said the deadline “is not a suggestion; it is a requirement,” according to Reuters, adding that “further military steps must have a clear mission, achievable goals, and a defined strategy for bringing the conflict to a close.” Her remarks matter because they show skepticism inside the president’s own party at a moment when the administration needs political cover as the 60-day timeframe draws scrutiny.

Democratic Senator Tim Kaine, one of Congress’s most persistent advocates of war-powers limits, called the administration’s theory legally unsupported. He said Hegseth “advanced a very novel argument that I’ve never heard before” and that it “certainly has no legal support,” according to AP. Kaine has urged the administration to submit any continued military campaign against Iran for formal authorization, arguing that a cease-fire cannot substitute for a vote by Congress if U.S. operations resume or remain active in substance.

Outside legal experts echoed that criticism and said the administration’s reading could stretch executive authority well beyond prior precedent. Katherine Yon Ebright, counsel at the Brennan Center for Justice’s Liberty and National Security Program, said “to be very, very clear and unambiguous, nothing in the text or design of the War Powers Resolution suggests that the 60-day clock can be paused or terminated,” according to remarks cited by CNBC. She described the cease-fire rationale as “a sizeable extension of previous legal gamesmanship,” underscoring the risk that a temporary halt in fighting could become a template for avoiding congressional checks in future conflicts.

The legal dispute is unfolding against a fragile military backdrop in the Persian Gulf, where the cease-fire has held but strategic pressure remains high. The waterway at the center of the confrontation, the Strait of Hormuz, still carries a large share of the world’s seaborne crude, and a U.S. Navy spokesperson told the Financial Times that American forces remain “positioned to ensure freedom of navigation while monitoring any escalation.” That statement suggests the administration’s claim that hostilities terminated does not mean the operational risk has disappeared for energy markets, shipping companies or regional allies.

Market participants are already reading the legal debate through the lens of oil and geopolitical risk. Analysts at Barclays said the White House stance could shape investor perceptions of whether the conflict truly cooled or simply entered a politically convenient pause, according to Dow Jones. Senior commodities strategist Laura Chen said, “Investors are watching how the administration navigates the legal hurdle; any perceived weakness could reignite price volatility,” a reminder that constitutional arguments in Washington can quickly feed into freight costs, insurance premiums and crude pricing.

Some national security hawks, while not disputing the need to protect shipping lanes, are already discussing ways to reframe the mission if the legal challenge intensifies. Richard Goldberg, a former National Security Council counter-proliferation official now at the Foundation for Defense of Democracies, said in comments cited by MarketWatch that the administration could recast the operation as a self-defense effort focused on reopening the strait. “That mission would be self-defense focused on reopening the strait while reserving the right to offensive action in support of restoring freedom of navigation,” he said, effectively outlining a narrower legal theory if the cease-fire argument fails to persuade Congress or the courts.

What comes next now matters as much as the legal theory itself. Congressional leaders are weighing whether to force a vote on a joint resolution either authorizing continued action or directing its end, and several lawmakers have said privately to major U.S. outlets that the administration’s position could become a defining test of executive war-making power. If the cease-fire holds, the White House may avoid an immediate showdown; if firing resumes, the claim that the conflict already ended could unravel quickly, raising the odds of a direct constitutional clash with consequences for U.S. policy, oil flows and military credibility across the Middle East.

JBizNews Middle East Desk

The cost of the Iran war to the US may be close to $40-50 billion when including the costs of rebuilding US military installations and replacing destroyed assets, CNN reported on Thursday.

This contradicts the number presented by Pentagon official Jules “Jay” Hurst, who cited a $25 billion cost before the House Armed Services Committee on Wednesday. Hurst told the committee that “most” of that cost has been spent on munitions, and that Secretary of Defense Pete Hegseth declined to answer if that included the cost of damage to US bases. 

Last week, Hurst stated that the Pentagon did not have a final cost “for what the damage is to our installations overseas,” adding that it would rely “on how we decide to rebuild those or if we do.”

According to past CNN reports, in the first 48 hours of the war, at least nine US military sites were significantly damaged by strikes on Bahrain, Kuwait, Iraq, the UAE, and Qatar. 

Additionally, Iranian strikes have damaged and destroyed costly equipment across the Middle East, including the radar system for a THAAD missile battery in Jordan and buildings with similar systems at two locations in the UAE.

THAAD  224.88 (credit: Courtesy)

US says Mideast partners may share the cost of Iran war 

An Iranian strike on a Saudi Arabia air base also destroyed a US Air Force E-3 Sentry aircraft. 

Hurst suggested that the US may not be the only one shouldering the cost.  

“Our partners also might contribute a share for that construction,” Hurst said. “So we don’t have a great estimate for what it would take to reconstitute those facilities.”

The Pentagon has submitted a $1.5 trillion budget request for fiscal year 2027, but due to uncertainties about the cost of the war in Iran, that sum is not reflected in the request. 

The request would be a 42% increase to the Pentagon’s funding, CNN cited officials as saying last week.  

This post was originally published on here

Thermos is recalling more than 8 million food jars and bottles after a dangerous defect caused stoppers to “forcefully eject,” leaving some consumers blind.

The Illinois-based company’s recall impacts about 5.8 million Stainless King Food Jars and 2.3 million Sportsman Food & Beverage Bottles sold over more than 15 years, according to a Thursday notice from the Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC).

Thermos has received 27 reports of stoppers striking users when the containers were opened. Three people suffered permanent vision loss after being hit in the eye, regulators said.

CHILD SAFETY RISK SPARKS POPULAR NASAL SPRAY RECALL, NEARLY 800K BOTTLES IMPACTED

Officials say the containers lack a pressure-relief mechanism, allowing pressure to build up when food or liquids are stored inside for an extended period.

“If perishable food or beverages are stored in the container for an extended period of time, the stopper can forcefully eject when opened, which can result in serious impact injury and laceration hazards to the consumer,” the CPSC said.

The recall includes:

NEARLY 13K TODDLER TOWERS RECALLED AFTER DOZENS OF INJURIES FROM STOOLS COLLAPSING, TIPPING

The products were sold in multiple colors at major retailers, including Target and Walmart, as well as online through Amazon, Thermos and other sites. 

They were available from March 2008 through July 2024 for about $30.

The Thermos logo appears on the side of the products, with model numbers printed on the bottom. The items were manufactured in China and Malaysia.

GHIRARDELLI RECALLS DRINK MIXES OVER POTENTIAL SALMONELLA CONTAMINATION

Consumers are urged to stop using the recalled products immediately.

“Consumers should stop using the recalled Food Jars and Bottles immediately and contact Thermos to receive a free replacement pressure relief stopper or replacement Bottle, depending on the model,” the CPSC said.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

FOX Business reached out to Thermos for comment.

This post was originally published here

May 1, 2026

Wall Street is heading into Friday on solid footing, with futures pointing modestly higher after stocks closed April with their best monthly performance in years. But underneath the positive numbers, several big earnings stories — and a geopolitical deadline quietly passed — are keeping investors on edge.

S&P 500 futures rose 0.13% in early trading Friday, while Dow Jones futures added about 102 points. Nasdaq 100 futures were roughly flat. The gains follow a strong Thursday session in which the S&P 500 closed above 7,200 for the first time ever, rising 1.02%. The Dow surged 790 points, and the Nasdaq climbed 0.89%. 

For the month of April, the S&P 500 gained 10.4% and the Nasdaq jumped 15.3% — both posting their strongest monthly performances since 2020. The Dow added 7.1%, its best month since November 2024. 

Apple is the morning’s biggest story. Shares rose nearly 3% in premarket trading after the company posted fiscal second-quarter earnings of $2.01 per share on revenue of $111.18 billion, topping analyst expectations. iPhone revenue, however, missed estimates for the second time in three quarters. 

Twilio is another bright spot. Shares surged more than 20% after the company reported better-than-expected first-quarter results, issued second-quarter guidance above estimates, and raised its full-year sales outlook. 

Roblox tells a different story. The gaming platform’s stock dropped more than 21% after the company cut its full-year bookings outlook to between $7.33 billion and $7.60 billion — well below the $8.13 billion Wall Street had expected. 

On bonds, the 10-year Treasury yield stands at 4.39% and the two-year at 3.89%. The Federal Reserve is widely expected to hold rates steady at its June meeting. CME FedWatch data shows markets pricing in virtually no chance of a rate move. 

On the geopolitical front, the Trump administration quietly passed a congressional deadline under the War Powers Resolution without withdrawing troops from Iran. President Trump said he is sticking with a naval blockade of Iranian ports, keeping pressure on the Strait of Hormuz. Iran’s supreme leader Mojtaba Khamenei signaled his government has no plans to give up its nuclear or missile programs, dimming hopes for a near-term deal. 

Oil is reflecting that uncertainty. Brent crude for July rose above $111 a barrel Friday, while West Texas Intermediate was near $105 — up 12% for the week. 

Venu Krishna, head of U.S. equity strategy at Barclays, said the market story remains solid but warned that the pace of the recent rally leaves room for a pullback. “The pace of this recovery has been so strong in such a short period of time, it does leave some potential for a little bit of a breather,” he said. 

Investors are also watching earnings from Exxon Mobil, Chevron, and Moderna before Friday’s open.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

New York, NY – May 1 , 2026 – Exxon Mobil Corp. and ConocoPhillips Co., two of the biggest U.S. oil companies that largely wrote off Venezuela after years of political upheaval, nationalizations and crushing sanctions, are quietly returning to the South American nation to evaluate whether its vast reserves can once again become part of their global portfolios.

Executives familiar with the matter say both companies recently dispatched technical teams to assess the condition of legacy projects and gauge the potential for reviving output in one of the world’s largest oil basins. The moves come as global crude prices hover near multi-year highs and Venezuela’s government introduces new investor-friendly laws aimed at attracting foreign capital back to its struggling energy sector.

Chevron Corp., which has maintained a limited presence in the country through a sanctions license, has moved more aggressively. The company has expanded its operational footprint in recent months and is preparing plans to significantly boost production if conditions allow, according to people briefed on the discussions.

The renewed interest marks a striking reversal from the early 2020s, when U.S. majors largely exited or scaled back dramatically amid the Maduro regime’s economic collapse, hyperinflation and U.S. sanctions that froze assets and barred most dealings. Venezuela’s proven reserves remain among the largest on the planet, but output has plummeted to a fraction of its former levels because of underinvestment, aging infrastructure and political risk.

High oil prices have changed the calculus. Brent crude has climbed above $100 a barrel in recent weeks amid Middle East tensions, making even costly Venezuelan heavy crude more economically viable. At the same time, Caracas has passed legislation offering improved fiscal terms, streamlined permitting and greater legal protections for foreign investors — steps analysts say are designed to signal a more pragmatic approach to international capital.

Venezuela’s acting president, Delcy Rodríguez, has personally met with senior U.S. oil executives in recent weeks to discuss potential cooperation, according to officials on both sides. The talks have focused on technical assessments, joint-venture structures and the possibility of gradual sanctions relief tied to verifiable increases in production.

Still, caution prevails. Many executives and analysts expect any major new capital commitments to wait until after credible democratic elections and clearer political stability. “No one wants to bet billions on a handshake when the political landscape could shift again,” said one senior energy executive who has been involved in the preliminary talks.

The tentative thaw reflects a broader recalibration across the industry. With global demand for oil remaining robust and new supply sources facing their own delays and costs, Venezuela’s untapped potential has once again drawn boardroom attention — even if the risks remain formidable.

For Exxon and ConocoPhillips, which together once operated some of the country’s most productive fields before being forced out, the current visits represent low-cost, high-upside optionality. Technical teams are evaluating reservoir integrity, infrastructure needs and the economics of restarting dormant projects.

Chevron, already producing modest volumes under its existing license, sees an opportunity to scale up faster. The company has signaled internally that it could add tens of thousands of barrels per day if regulatory hurdles ease further.

Whether these scouting missions translate into large-scale investment will depend on several variables: the pace of political reform in Caracas, the trajectory of U.S. sanctions policy under the current administration, and sustained high oil prices that justify the considerable capital required to rehabilitate Venezuela’s battered oil infrastructure.

For now, the message from the oil majors is measured optimism. After years of writing Venezuela off the map, the world’s biggest energy companies are once again taking a serious second look.

JbizNews Desk Energy

Washington is navigating a once-in-a-generation transition at the Federal Reserve, with two defining events colliding in a single day: a partisan committee vote that moved Kevin Warsh one step closer to the chairmanship, and what is almost certainly Jerome Powell’s final policy decision at the helm of the central bank.

Warsh, President Donald Trump’s nominee to lead the Federal Reserve, won the backing of the Senate Banking Committee on Wednesday in a 13–11 party-line vote, putting him on track to be confirmed by the full Senate before Powell‘s term ends May 15.  It was the first fully partisan vote on a Fed chair nominee in the committee’s history, Sen. Elizabeth Warren confirmed in a press release. 

The vote had been in jeopardy until days ago. Sen. Thom Tillis of North Carolina was the linchpin — he had blocked the nomination until the Department of Justice dropped its criminal investigation into Powell over cost overruns in a renovation of the Fed’s Washington headquarters. U.S. Attorney Jeanine Pirro announced her office would refer the matter to the Fed’s inspector general, and Tillis declared himself satisfied. 

Democrats were unmoved. Sen. Warren called the vote a step toward “completing his illegal attempt to seize control of the Fed and artificially juice the economy,” citing Trump’s effort to fire Fed Governor Lisa Cook and his sustained pressure campaign against Powell.  Sen. Tim Scott of South Carolina, who chairs the committee, countered that Warsh is “battle tested” and called his leadership “absolutely essential” at the central bank. 

Hours after the committee vote, Powell presided over what multiple outlets confirmed was his final policy meeting as chair. The Federal Open Market Committee voted to hold its benchmark funds rate in a range of 3.5%–3.75% — the third consecutive meeting where the committee chose to stand pat, following three consecutive cuts last year.  The decision was far from routine. The meeting saw an unusually dramatic split, with the FOMC dividing 8–4 — the last time four members dissented was October 1992. 

Fed Governor Stephen Miran, a Trump appointee, dissented in favor of an immediate 25 basis point rate cut. Three others — Cleveland Fed President Beth Hammack, Minneapolis Fed President Neel Kashkari, and Dallas Fed President Lorie Logan — dissented in the opposite direction, opposing the statement’s easing bias and signaling they are not keen on cutting rates anytime soon.  The four-way split sent a pointed message to Washington about the internal tensions Warsh will inherit if confirmed.

At his final press conference as chair, Powell offered measured congratulations to his successor-in-waiting. “I want to congratulate Kevin Warsh on his advancement out of the Senate Banking Committee this morning,” he told reporters. “This is, and will be, a very normal, standard kind of a transition process.” 

Powell also announced he will not be leaving the Fed quietly. He signaled he would remain on the Board of Governors for an indefinite period, saying he is waiting until an investigation into the Federal Reserve’s renovations “is well and truly over with transparency and finality.”  Staying on as a governor — his term runs through January 2028 — would be highly unusual and would deny the Trump administration an open seat on the board.

Trump responded Thursday, saying he doesn’t care that Powell is staying on as a governor. “I’m just happy that Kevin Warsh is set to take over,” he told reporters. 

Markets are already recalibrating. SoFi Technologies CEO Anthony Noto said he expects a Warsh-led Fed to deliver more rate cuts in 2026. “The credit markets and the home loan market are definitely suffering from the high cost of debt, and that’s going to impact the economy at some point in 2027 if there isn’t action taken in 2026,” Noto told Yahoo Finance.  The bond market, however, is currently pricing in no rate cuts this year.

The full Senate is likely to vote on Warsh’s confirmation the week of May 11 — meaning he could be seated before Powell’s term as chair expires on May 15.  Every prior full-Senate confirmation of a Fed chair has included bipartisan support. Warsh has called for “regime change” at the Fed, proposing to alter its economic models, scale back forward guidance, scrap the so-called dot plot, and reassess the size of its bond holdings.  Whether those ambitions survive contact with an already-divided FOMC remains the central question facing financial markets as the leadership clock runs down.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

May 1, 2026

Gold is under pressure this week as President Donald Trump made clear the U.S. naval blockade of Iranian ports is staying in place — and investors are beginning to worry that higher oil prices could keep interest rates elevated for longer, making gold a less attractive place to park money.

Spot gold was up slightly Friday at $4,724.19 an ounce, but is still down more than 2% for the week — on track for its first weekly loss in five weeks. U.S. gold futures for June delivery rose 0.4% to $4,741.30. 

The metal has had a rough ride since the U.S.-Iran conflict began. Gold hit a record high of $5,594.82 an ounce on January 29 and has shed more than 20% since then. Silver has fallen even harder, losing nearly half its value from its all-time high. 

The reason gold keeps falling even as a war rages in the Middle East comes down to one word: inflation. The Iran conflict has pushed oil prices sharply higher, stoking fears that inflation will stay elevated. When inflation looks stubborn, central banks are more likely to keep interest rates high — and high interest rates make bonds and cash more attractive than gold, which pays no interest. 

Trump said this week he is sticking with the naval blockade of Iranian ports. Iran’s supreme leader Mojtaba Khamenei pushed back, vowing his government will not give up its nuclear or missile programs and signaling Tehran intends to keep control of the Strait of Hormuz. 

The situation has been described as a “dual blockade” — the U.S. Navy blocking Iranian ports while Iran restricts traffic through the Strait of Hormuz, a waterway that once carried roughly 25% of the world’s seaborne oil trade. 

Giovanni Staunovo, analyst at UBS, explained the dynamic plainly: gold fell this week because oil prices went higher, which pushed up inflation expectations, which in turn drove up the dollar and bond yields — all of which work against gold. 

Despite the recent weakness, not everyone has given up on the metal. Goldman Sachs is holding its year-end price target of $5,400 an ounce, pointing to continued central bank buying and expectations that the Federal Reserve will eventually cut rates by 50 basis points. Analysts Daan Struyven and Lina Thomas acknowledged the near-term risk but said medium-term upside remains intact. 

Analysts at BNP Paribas noted that gold’s current behavior has clear historical precedent. In 2008, 2020, and 2022, gold initially dropped when major shocks hit markets, as investors rushed to hold dollars instead. In all three cases, a sustained rally followed. 

For now, the path forward for gold depends largely on what happens in the Strait of Hormuz. If talks between Washington and Tehran produce a deal, oil prices could fall, inflation fears could ease, and gold could stabilize. If the blockade holds and the conflict drags on, gold faces more headwinds — even in the middle of a war.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

May 1, 2026

Aluminum prices are holding at elevated levels and analysts warn they could go higher — as President Donald Trump doubles down on his naval blockade of Iran and the Strait of Hormuz remains effectively closed to normal trade.

The Persian Gulf accounts for roughly 9% of global aluminum production, but 18% of aluminum exports outside of China. That makes the region’s output far more important to the rest of the world than its production share alone suggests — and far more vulnerable to a prolonged shipping disruption. 

When the Iran conflict broke out on February 28, London Metal Exchange aluminum futures jumped as much as 10% within two weeks. Prices settled around 8% higher and have been trading near four-year highs. 

The reason is simple: Gulf smelters cannot ship what they produce, and they are running out of what they need to keep producing. Most Gulf smelters depend on alumina imported by sea through the Strait of Hormuz. With the strait effectively blocked, raw material supplies have been cut off. Facilities that cannot receive inputs have been forced to reduce output or shut down entirely. 

Aluminium Bahrain, known as Alba and home to the world’s largest aluminum smelter, declared force majeure on its deliveries and shut down about 300,000 tons per year of capacity — roughly 19% of its total output. Qatalum in Qatar also initiated a controlled production shutdown due to natural gas shortages caused by the conflict. 

Emirates Global Aluminium subsequently announced that repairs to restore full production at its Al-Taweelah facility could take up to a year — a timeline that analysts say could push the global aluminum market outside of China into a deficit even if shipping through the strait resumes soon. 

The downstream impact reaches into everyday life. Aluminum is used in cars, canned food and beverages, aircraft, building materials, and packaging. The automotive sector is among the most exposed — modern vehicles contain an average of 180 kilograms of aluminum per car. Aerospace and packaging industries face similar pressures, with no easy short-term substitute for the metal. 

Ross Strachan, head of aluminum raw materials at CRU Group, said prices could climb toward $4,000 per ton if the disruption continues. BMI, a unit of Fitch Group, said prices are likely to stay elevated in the coming weeks, warning that a prolonged disruption could push the market to $3,700 per ton given that it was already expected to run a deficit in 2026. 

The blockade shows no signs of ending soon. President Trump vowed this week to maintain the naval blockade and was briefed by military commanders on further options, saying the pressure would force Tehran back to the negotiating table.  Iran’s leadership has shown no willingness to comply.

Trump said he will keep the blockade in place until Iran agrees to a nuclear deal. Tehran says it will not reopen the Strait of Hormuz until the U.S. Navy stands down. Neither side has shown signs of budging. 

For manufacturers, consumers, and businesses that depend on aluminum — from car makers to food packagers to construction firms — the longer this standoff lasts, the higher costs are likely to go.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

Long known for its sprawling freeways and car-centric lifestyle, Los Angeles is reaching a breaking point as fuel costs turn the simple act of driving into a “miserable, miserable, miserable” experience.

As regional gas prices soar past $8 a gallon, residents in the once-thriving Golden State are checking their eyes and their bank accounts, with some admitting they “thought it was a meme” or “thought it was AI.” But the financial pain is all too real for those living in the nation’s most expensive car culture, where filling a tank now requires a triple-digit investment.

“It’s very painful to drive in L.A. right now, and especially if you’re barely making minimum wage, it’s not even worth driving,” Amador, from Santa Clarita told Fox News Digital during a man-on-the-street segment. “Thought it was a meme, thought it was AI, but looking at it up close, it’s kind of crazy to think you’re paying almost $9.”

“It’s ridiculous,” Aida, a mother originally from Nebraska, also told Fox News Digital. “Can I swear on the news? I said, ‘God d—! That was too much.’ It’s too much for those prices.”

THE $1,600 LETTUCE: CALIFORNIA GROWERS WARN OF ‘MASTER PLAN’ STRANGLING FAMILY FARMS

“This is so crazy,” Bessy, who was born in El Salvador, added. “I never thought gas [was] gonna go that [high]. Like it’s just crazy.”

Stopping at multiple gas stations across Los Angeles County, drivers expressed disbelief at gasoline prices approaching $9 per gallon. According to AAA, as of the last week of April, California’s average price per gallon was $6.01, while the national average was $4.30.

The highest price Fox News Digital saw was at a Chevron in Downtown Los Angeles, where a regular gallon was $8.29 and the highest grade of diesel ran $8.89 per gallon.

Drivers said that filling up their tank now exceeds $100, while others make the decision to pump what they fiscally can. Nick, an L.A. resident originally hailing from Phoenix, said he paid $110 at the pump.

“I don’t even look… I can’t look at it. I put it in, and then I put the little thing up, and I turn around, and I put my card in, and I just pray to God. It’s over $100,” Aida said.

“It’s surprising, right? That the prices are so high and that everything increases except salaries,” one woman, Davieba, said. “To be sincere with you, I can’t even fill it up because of the prices. So I keep filling it up with only what I need.”

“Before I’d fill it up with, because I have a small car, I filled it with $40. Now it’s like $63 to $65, almost double,” Manuel, an Olvera Street market owner, said.

The economic impact of high gas prices is hitting their budgets, too. As gas taxes and refinery constraints keep California’s prices the highest in the nation, drivers are watching their bank accounts drain in real time and having to make spending concessions as inflation remains elevated.

When asked where that $100 would go if it wasn’t spent at the pump, Bessy said, “going out, having fun;” Davieba said, “definitely food;” Manuel would put the money back into his market; Amador would “take a vacation;” and Nick would’ve splurged at Coachella.

In a city famous for its car culture, the fiscal weight of fuel is also doing what decades of urban planning couldn’t do: forcing people onto public transit out of pure “necessity.”

“This time, I take the decision to not [drive] because of that. So I’m taking the train instead of paying for gas and parking,” Bessy explained.

“[I’m] taking as much public transportation as I can right now. If it’s something that I have to drive, I’ll drive,” Amador said. “But other than that, if I can get there by a bus or a train, I’d take that instead.”

“I want everything to be close, but unfortunately, jobs are far,” Davieba said, “so that necessity makes you go out, and you have to go out to find the money to live.”

The high cost of fuel and the mental toll of the road have added a layer of volatility to an already aggressive driving environment. For these drivers who have seen how the rest of the country lives, the contrast is stark and demoralizing.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Miserable, miserable, miserable,” Aida said when asked to describe what it’s like to be a driver in Los Angeles. “I just came back from Nebraska. People in Nebraska, I did the worst three-point turn that a human has ever done, ever. And the man I cut off looked at me and was like, ‘Bye, have a good day!’ Here, you can just be minding your business and someone’s like, ‘I’m gonna T-bone you!’ You know what I mean? So it’s awful. It’s very stressful. It’s painful and very scary. I love L.A. It’s just, there’s a lot going on here.”

“Traffic is about the same, still brutal,” Nick said. “[It’s] probably one of the worst places to be a driver in the U.S.”

This is Part 2 of Fox News Digital’s series, “Golden State strain: Inside California’s economic nightmare.” In the next installment, Los Angeles city leaders and state officials answer for the mystery surcharges and tax burdens hitting the pump, and whether any real relief is on the horizon for millions of Californians.

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

Ford Motor Company is marking America’s 250th anniversary with a nationwide pricing push aimed at giving U.S. customers a break.

The Michigan-based automaker on Friday launched its “American Value. For American Values” campaign, offering employee pricing to all U.S. customers on most new 2025 and 2026 Ford and Lincoln vehicles through July 6. 

Under the program, buyers can pay the same price as Ford employees — which is below the Manufacturer’s Suggested Retail Price (MSRP) — potentially saving them hundreds to thousands of dollars depending on the vehicle, according to the company.

FORD RECALLS OVER 140,000 PICKUP TRUCKS OVER WIRING FIRE RISK

Ford said the campaign highlights its broader commitment to American values.

“Ford has always believed that American values are more than words — they’re actions,” said Andrew Frick, president of Ford Blue and Model e, said in a statement. 

“As the nation approaches its 250th anniversary, ‘American Value. For American Values‘ is our way of giving back to the people who show up every day: American workers, small business owners, and families who place their trust in Ford.”

HOW CUTTING ONE COSTLY HABIT COULD SAVE SMALL BUSINESSES THOUSANDS ON FUEL: EXPERT

In its announcement, Ford also highlighted its domestic footprint, noting it employs more U.S. hourly workers and assembles more vehicles in the U.S. than any other automaker.

“This commitment is not cyclical and not driven by short-term market conditions; it is foundational to Ford’s identity,” the company said.

Earlier this year, Ford was ranked the “most American” brand in the country in a national survey, earning top marks across political affiliations and income levels.

FORD RECALLS OVER 422,000 VEHICLES OVER WINDSHIELD WIPER ISSUE

In a statement to FOX Business at the time, Ford Executive Chair Bill Ford said the company’s standing reflects its long-standing role in shaping the U.S. economy.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“As we approach America’s 250th anniversary, I’m proud that Ford has helped strengthen this country — not just by building great vehicles, but by expanding opportunity and improving people’s lives,” Bill Ford told FOX Business in an email.

This post was originally published here

The AAA national average price for regular gas soared more than nine cents higher in one day, surging from $4.30 as of Thursday to $4.392 as of Friday.

The current figure is a whopping $0.333 higher than the week-ago average price of $4.059, according to AAA. The year-ago average for regular gas was just $3.187.

However, the highest recorded AAA national average regular gas price was $5.016 on June 14, 2022, which was during President Joe Biden’s White House tenure.

GAS PRICES SOAR TO HIGHEST POINT SO FAR DURING UNSETTLED CONFLICT WITH IRAN

Fox News Digital reached out to the White House for comment on Friday.

The U.S. conflict with Iran remains unresolved, and the Trump administration has been conducting a blockade against the foreign nation.

US SHRIMPERS FACE ‘DOUBLE WHAMMY’ FROM SOARING FUEL COSTS, TARIFF REFUNDS

“Minnesotans are paying the price for this administration’s war with Iran as gas prices rise and squeeze families, small businesses, and farmers across our state,” U.S. Sen. Amy Klobuchar, D-Minn., who is running for governor, declared in a Thursday post on X.

US ECONOMIC GROWTH BOUNCES BACK, AS AI BUILDOUT AND CONSUMER SPENDING FUEL FIRST QUARTER

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Democratic Sen. Mark Kelly of Arizona declared in a Thursday post on X, “The Trump Administration’s war in Iran is driving up gas prices and sending summer travel costs through the roof. I’m focused on lowering costs and putting money back in Americans’ pockets so that taking your family on a road trip doesn’t break the bank.”

This post was originally published here

The “noble” Iranian population will safeguard the regime’s nuclear and missile technologies as “national assets,” a Thursday speech attributed to Iranian Supreme Leader Ayatollah Mojtaba Khamenei read.

The speech was read on Iranian state TV by a broadcaster and posted on Khamenei’s official X/Twitter account.

Iranians will “safeguard these assets just as they do their maritime, land, and airspace borders,” the speech continued.

“A new chapter for the Persian Gulf and Strait of Hormuz is unfolding,” it read.

“Today, it has been proven to not only the global public opinion but even to the rulers of countries that the US’s presence and establishment in the Persian Gulf is the main source of instability in the region,” it stated.

A man walks next to a poster with a picture of Iran's new Supreme Leader, Mojtaba Khamenei in Tehran, Iran, March 22, 2026 (credit: MAJID ASGARIPOUR/WANA (WEST ASIA NEWS AGENCY) VIA REUTERS)

“The US’s flimsy bases lack the resilience and capability even to ensure their own security, let alone provide any hope for US’s dependents and the US-worshippers in the region,” the speech continued.

“The brilliant future of the Persian Gulf region will be a future without the US where the progress, comfort, and prosperity of its nations are served,” it added.

‘American foreigners belong at the bottom of Strait of Hormuz,’ speech attributed to Khamenei says

“We share a ‘common destiny’ with our neighbors surrounding the waters of the Persian Gulf and the Sea of Oman. These foreigners from thousands of kilometers away, who are greedily carrying out transgressions in the Persian Gulf and Sea of Oman, have no place here except at the bottom of its waters,” the speech stated.

“Iran will put an end to the hostile enemy’s exploitation of the Strait of Hormuz,” it stated, adding that Iran’s management of the strait would “ensure the security of the Persian Gulf.”

The gulf has “provoked the greed of many devils over the centuries,” including “repeated aggressions carried out by European and American foreigners,” it said.

Most recently, this includes the “saber-rattling of the Great Satan, the US,” it concluded.

A similar statement was read in early April.

Khamenei is believed to be seriously wounded following Israeli and US airstrikes on Tehran.

This post was originally published on here

New York, April 30, 2026 – Small businesses nationwide are accelerating investments in e-commerce platforms and digital tools, with many reporting double-digit growth in online sales during April as they seek to offset the 28% year-over-year surge in insurance premiums and elevated energy costs.

Industry surveys and payment processor data released today show a 15%+ increase in e-commerce activity among small firms, signaling proactive adaptation amid persistent cost pressures.

What’s Impacting Businesses: Political and Economic Drivers

Politically:
Geopolitical tensions in the Middle East, particularly around Iran, have sustained high oil prices near four-year highs while contributing to broader risk assessments by insurers. This occurs against the post-2024 political backdrop, where debates over tariffs, energy policy, and fiscal relief continue. Small business advocates are pushing for bipartisan support on targeted relief to help Main Street manage these external shocks.

Economically:
Record energy costs (WTI crude above $103) combined with the sharp rise in insurance premiums are squeezing margins for retailers, restaurants, and manufacturers. Many owners are turning to lower-cost digital channels and efficiency tools to maintain cash flow, as tighter traditional lending makes traditional expansion more challenging. This shift is helping some firms preserve hiring plans even as overall optimism remains subdued.

Broader Context and Related Developments

The move to digital aligns with today’s earlier reports from the NFIB, U.S. Chamber of Commerce, Bank of America, and SBA highlighting cost-driven challenges and increased loan demand. It also comes as New York City debates Pass-Through Entity Tax changes and the federal State Small Business Credit Initiative (SSBCI) continues providing state-level lending support.

Analysts note that while technology offers a buffer, sustained relief on energy and insurance fronts will be key to long-term Main Street stability.

Stay tuned for updates as this story develops, including further data on small business adaptation strategies and potential policy responses.

JbizNews Desk

By JBIZnews Staff
May 1, 2026


Google parent company Alphabet reported explosive subscription growth in its first-quarter 2026 earnings, adding 25 million new paid subscribers in just three months and pushing its total across services to a record 350 million.

The surge — a 7.7% jump from 325 million at the end of 2025 — was powered primarily by YouTube Premium, YouTube Music, and Google One, with the latter benefiting heavily from bundled advanced Gemini AI features.

Google and YouTube logos
(Symbolic of the subscription boom fueled by YouTube Premium/Music and Google One in Q1 2026.)

JpTs2“LARGE”

Alphabet CEO Sundar Pichai highlighted the milestone on the earnings call, calling it “our strongest quarter ever for our consumer AI plans,” with adoption of the Gemini app contributing significantly to the momentum. YouTube subscriptions in particular saw their largest quarterly increase in non-trial subscribers since the Premium service launched in 2018.

Google One, which combines cloud storage with premium AI tools, has become a major growth engine as consumers seek more value from their Google ecosystem. The subscription push reflects Alphabet’s broader strategy to build recurring revenue streams and reduce reliance on advertising, even as YouTube ads still delivered a solid $9.88 billion in the quarter (up 10.7% year-over-year).

Overall, Alphabet posted Q1 revenue of $109.9 billion (up 22%) and strong earnings per share, beating Wall Street expectations. The “Google subscriptions, platforms, and devices” segment grew 19%, underscoring the rising importance of paid offerings.

Analysts note that the 350 million subscription figure now rivals some of the world’s largest streaming services combined, signaling Google’s successful pivot toward a more diversified and stable revenue model in an increasingly competitive digital landscape.

With price adjustments on YouTube Premium earlier this year and continued AI enhancements across Google One plans, the company appears well-positioned for further subscriber gains in the quarters ahead.

Data sourced from Alphabet’s official Q1 2026 earnings release and conference call.

JbizNews Desk – Technology



By JBIZnews Staff

May 1, 2026

Skyline Builders Group Holding Ltd. (NASDAQ: SKBL) delivered a classic micro-cap merger rollercoaster Thursday, jumping more than 12% in regular trading before giving back nearly 19% in after-hours action following news of a complex business combination that will transform the small construction-services firm into a major player in the global critical minerals space.

The Hong Kong-based company announced it has signed a definitive Transaction Agreement with Cove Kaz Capital Group LLC, Kaz Resources LLC, and a newly formed merger subsidiary to create Kaz Resources Inc., which is expected to list on Nasdaq under the ticker KAZR.

Under the deal, Cove Kaz — which holds a controlling 70% interest in one of the world’s largest undeveloped tungsten resources — will effectively become the core operating business. The flagship asset is the Northern Katpar and Upper Kairakty projects in Kazakhstan’s Karaganda region, a joint venture with state-owned Tau-Ken Samruk. Together they represent an estimated 1.4 million tonnes of WO₃ (tungsten trioxide) under JORC standards — the largest known undeveloped tungsten deposit globally — with potential annual production of approximately 12,000 metric tonnes, equal to roughly 15% of current worldwide output.

Northern Katpar open-pit site in Kazakhstan’s Karaganda region
(The flagship tungsten-molybdenum project at the heart of the SKBL merger.)

Close-up of the Northern Katpar exploration area
(Showing the resource-rich terrain that holds one of the world’s largest undeveloped tungsten deposits.)

In addition to tungsten and molybdenum, the combined entity will control 15 additional critical minerals licenses through Kaz Critical Minerals LLP, covering rare earth elements, lithium, tantalum, beryllium, niobium and more. The portfolio also includes a 75% stake in the Akbulak rare earth project.

The transaction includes several restructuring steps: a new holding entity will be formed in Kazakhstan’s Astana International Financial Centre, Cove Kaz will convert into a Delaware corporation renamed “Kaz Resources Inc.,” and Skyline Builders will divest its legacy civil engineering and construction operations in Hong Kong and China to focus exclusively on the minerals business.

Skyline shareholders will receive a 1:1 conversion of their common shares into the new public company. The agreement also features a $23.1 million bridge loan from Skyline to Cove Kaz at 10% interest and requires the combined company to maintain minimum net cash reserves.

U.S. government financing support appears strong. The companies have received non-binding Letters of Interest from the U.S. Export-Import Bank (up to $900 million) and the U.S. Development Finance Corporation (up to $700 million) to help fund project development.

Heavy-duty mining dump truck at a Kazakhstan critical minerals site

The deal is expected to close in the fourth quarter of 2026 or early 2027, subject to shareholder approval, regulatory clearances, and standard closing conditions.

Market Reaction
SKBL shares closed regular trading at $4.55, up 12.62% on volume exceeding 3.2 million shares. In after-hours trading the stock quickly slid more than 18%, reflecting typical profit-taking and uncertainty around the long timeline and execution risks inherent in large-scale mining projects.

At current levels the market capitalization remains modest at roughly $65 million — a small valuation for assets that proponents claim could position the new company as a strategically vital, non-China source of tungsten and other critical minerals essential to U.S. supply-chain security.

Analysts note that the deal carries both significant upside potential — driven by geopolitical tailwinds and U.S. financing interest — and substantial risks, including development costs estimated near $1.1 billion, regulatory hurdles in Kazakhstan, and the multi-year timeline before meaningful production begins.

JBIZnews- Desk

Photos courtesy of Tau-Ken Samruk / Northern Katpar JV and project materials.


About 36,000 Build-A-Bear plush bears are being recalled due to a potential choking hazard, the U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) announced Thursday.

The recall involves the Heartwarming Hugs weighted plush bear, which features a side pouch containing a heart filled with 2.5 pounds of ceramic beads that can be heated or cooled.

According to the CPSC, the pouch is secured with a zipper, but the zipper slider can detach, posing a choking hazard.

No injuries have been reported, but one incident in the United Kingdom involved the zipper slider detaching, the agency said.

COCAINE AND FENTANYL FOUND HIDDEN INSIDE BARBIE DOLL PACKAGING SOLD TO CUSTOMERS, POLICE SAY

“The safety and wellbeing of our guests and their families is our highest priority,” Build-A-Bear said in a statement. “Out of an abundance of caution, consumers should immediately stop using the recalled Heartwarming Hugs Bear and return it to a local Build-A-Bear Workshop store to receive a refund in the form of the original payment or a gift card for the purchase price.”

The product is intended for ages 3 and up and includes a cautionary label advising adult supervision due to the heated and cooled element.

The bears were sold at Build-A-Bear Workshop stores and online beginning in January for about $48.

NEARLY 13K TODDLER TOWERS RECALLED AFTER DOZENS OF INJURIES FROM STOOLS COLLAPSING, TIPPING

The recall involves model number 034464, which can be found sewn into the back of the bear’s leg.

Consumers are urged to stop using the recalled bears immediately and return them to a Build-A-Bear Workshop store for a refund.

Customers who cannot visit a store can request a free return shipping label through the company’s website.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Build-A-Bear can be reached at 844-541-0144 or by email at ProductHotline@buildabear.com. More information is available on the company’s website under its recall section.

This post was originally published here

Meta CEO Mark Zuckerberg said Thursday the company’s latest round of layoffs is tied to increased spending on artificial intelligence, while leaving the door open to additional job cuts.

Zuckerberg made the remarks during a company town hall, his first time addressing employees since Meta confirmed plans to cut roughly 8,000 jobs — about 10% of its workforce.

The layoffs, which are expected to begin May 20, come as the company ramps up investment in AI and infrastructure, FOX Business previously reported.

“We basically have two major cost centers in the company: compute infrastructure and people-oriented things,” Zuckerberg said, according to Reuters.

ELON MUSK SAYS HE WAS A ‘FOOL’ FOR FUNDING OPENAI: REPORT

“If we’re investing more in one area to serve our community, then that means we have less capital to allocate to the other,” he added. “So that means we do need to take down the size of the company somewhat.”

Zuckerberg said the cuts are not tied to Meta’s shift toward an “AI-native” structure or efforts to build autonomous AI agents.

“Getting everyone internally to use AI tools and getting to do the work more efficiently is not the thing that’s driving layoffs,” he said.

Still, Zuckerberg declined to rule out additional job cuts.

FEDERAL RESERVE LEAVES INTEREST RATES UNCHANGED AS POWELL’S CHAIRMANSHIP NEARS END

“We’ll see how all this stuff trends” he said, adding that the company would “be able to share more soon.”

“I wish that I can tell you that I have a crystal ball plan for the next, like, three years of how all this stuff is going to play out,” he said. “I don’t. I don’t think anyone does.”

Meta, the parent company of Facebook, Instagram and WhatsApp, has also begun tracking employee activity — including clicks, shortcuts and how workers navigate apps — as part of efforts to train its AI systems.

US ECONOMIC GROWTH BOUNCES BACK, AS AI BUILDOUT AND CONSUMER SPENDING FUEL FIRST QUARTER

Reuters reported the layoffs and monitoring efforts have sparked internal criticism, with employees voicing concerns on company message boards.

Meta referred FOX Business to comments from CFO Susan Li, who said during an earnings call that the company’s long-term size remains uncertain.

“We don’t really know what the optimal size of the company will be in the future,” Li said, citing rapid changes in AI capabilities.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Meta previously cut 11,000 jobs in November 2022 and another 10,000 months later. The company employed nearly 79,000 people as of Dec. 31, according to its latest filing.

FOX Business’ Louis Casiano and Reuters contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

New York, April 30, 2026 – Small businesses across the country are facing a sharp 28% average increase in insurance premiums this year, according to new data compiled from major carriers and industry surveys released today. The rise is hitting retailers, restaurants, and manufacturers particularly hard, with many owners reporting they are absorbing the costs or reducing coverage to stay afloat.

The surge comes as insurers point to heightened claims from extreme weather events, supply-chain disruptions, and elevated geopolitical risks driving up reinsurance costs.

What’s Impacting Businesses: Political and Economic Drivers

Politically:
Geopolitical tensions in the Middle East, particularly around Iran, have contributed to broader risk assessments by insurers, pushing up premiums alongside ongoing policy debates in Washington over tariffs, energy security, and fiscal relief in the post-2024 environment. Small business groups continue to lobby for targeted relief measures to offset these external pressures.

Economically:
Record oil prices near four-year highs are compounding the insurance burden by inflating overall operating costs, while tighter credit conditions make it harder for firms to finance higher premiums. This aligns with recent reports from the NFIB, U.S. Chamber of Commerce, Bank of America, and SBA showing declining optimism, surging energy spending, and increased loan demand among small firms.

Broader Context and Related Developments

This development builds directly on today’s earlier small business surveys highlighting cost pressures and ties into ongoing concerns over New York City’s proposed changes to the Pass-Through Entity Tax credit. Federal programs like the State Small Business Credit Initiative (SSBCI) are providing some lending support, but many owners say insurance remains a top barrier to stability.

Industry analysts note that without relief on energy or insurance fronts, the cumulative effect could further slow Main Street hiring and investment.

Stay tuned for updates as this story develops, including any insurer responses or potential policy actions.

JbizNews Desk

A wave of state-level tax increases targeting top earners is gaining ground across the country, and Maine has now joined it — putting a fresh burden on high-income residents and small business owners while stoking a broader debate over whether taxing the wealthy helps states or drives them away.

Gov. Janet Mills signed LD 2212, a $519 million supplemental budget bill, into law this month, adding a 2% income tax surcharge on the portion of taxable income exceeding $1 million for single filers and $1.5 million for joint filers and heads of household.  The surcharge pushes Maine‘s top marginal income tax rate from 7.15% to 9.15%, affecting an estimated 2,600 filers — fewer than half a percent of the state’s taxpayers — and is projected to raise $160 million over two years. 

The law was not in Mills’ original budget proposal. Mills had long opposed income tax increases before reversing course amid a contentious Democratic primary race for Maine‘s U.S. Senate seat.  She signed the budget at Eastern Maine Community College in Bangor, spotlighting the bill’s permanent funding of the state’s free community college program, which has served more than 23,000 students since 2022.  The broader package also includes $300 one-time affordability checks for lower-income residents, expanded property tax credits, a statewide ban on cellphones in schools, and increased minimum salaries for public school teachers.

Maine is not moving alone. Washington state enacted its own millionaire tax law last month, and Maine and Washington are among the latest Democratic-led states to seek more revenue from high earners as national wealth inequality widens and state budgets face mounting pressure.  New Jersey imposes a top income tax rate of 10.75% on millionaire earners, and states including New York, Illinois, and Michigan are examining or facing stalled proposals along similar lines. 

The business community in Maine is pushing back. Patrick Woodcock, president and CEO of the Maine State Chamber of Commerce, argued that with the state’s population growth already stagnant, the surcharge creates a disincentive for high earners to call Maine home — particularly at a moment when many competing states are cutting taxes, not raising them.  Maine‘s 160,000 small businesses employ 55% of all workers in the state, and the overwhelming majority are structured as pass-through entities — meaning business income flows to owners’ personal returns and is subject to the new surcharge.  Critics argue the measure functions less as a tax on idle wealth and more as a tax on entrepreneurship and local investment.

The Tax Foundation’s Jared Walczak noted that 23 states have reduced their top marginal income tax rates since 2021, while six have gone in the opposite direction — creating a widening competitive gulf that increasingly rewards lower-tax states. 

Supporters counter that the system as it stands is already tilted against working people. The left-leaning Institute on Taxation and Economic Policy noted that while Maine‘s tax structure is progressive through most of the income distribution, it turns regressive at the top — meaning the wealthiest 5% of earners were paying lower effective state rates than many working-class Mainers before the new surcharge.  State Rep. Cheryl Golek, a Harpswell Democrat who originally sponsored the millionaire’s tax as a standalone bill, framed the surcharge as a modest and widely supported step toward fairness, arguing that those who benefit most from Maine’s economy do so because of the people, infrastructure, and communities that support that success. 

Amber Wallin, executive director of the State Revenue Alliance — which is actively lobbying for higher taxes on the wealthy across multiple states — argued that recent federal policy changes have only deepened the need for progressive state tax action, and that public engagement on the connection between tax policy and income inequality is growing. 

For business owners and high earners in Maine, the math is immediate: a resident with $1.5 million in annual income now owes an additional $10,000 in state taxes compared to last year. Whether that calculus ultimately shifts behavior — moving investment, residency, or business formation out of state — is the question that will define whether Maine’s bet pays off or costs it more than the $160 million it expects to collect.

JBizNews Desk.

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

New York, NY – April 30, 2026 – Iran’s currency plunged to a fresh all-time low in the free market Thursday, trading at approximately 1.81 million rials per U.S. dollar, as intensified American sanctions under the Trump administration’s “Operation Economic Fury” continue to choke the regime’s oil revenue and financial lifelines.

The sharp decline — which some reports peg at nearly 15% in recent days — comes amid a post-ceasefire rush for hard currency by Iranian businesses and citizens hedging against further instability following clashes with Israel and the United States. Ordinary Iranians are feeling the pain through hyperinflation, shortages, and a collapsing purchasing power that has worsened for decades.

In a pointed post on X, U.S. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent delivered a stark message to the regime in Tehran:

“Amid the impact of Economic Fury, Iran’s currency has hit an all-time low. The Iranian people deserve a new era, which the corrupt and shambolic Iranian regime cannot provide. With their oil industry closing and their currency plummeting, it is past time for the Iranian regime to concede that the people of Iran deserve much better than the ruins of their current regime can provide.”

Bessent’s comments underscore the Trump administration’s maximum-pressure campaign, which has included the seizure of nearly $500 million in Iranian crypto assets, the targeting of shadow banking networks, and reports of a U.S. naval blockade affecting key ports and oil shipments.

The rial’s collapse is not new — the currency has lost more than 99% of its value against the dollar since the 1979 Islamic Revolution — but the latest drop highlights the regime’s vulnerability. Chronic mismanagement, corruption, massive spending on proxy militias across the Middle East, and years of international sanctions have left Iran’s economy in tatters. Oil exports, the lifeblood of the regime’s budget, are under severe strain as Washington tightens the noose.

Market analysts note that even the government’s heavily subsidized official exchange rate offers little relief for everyday Iranians, who rely on the free-market rate for imports, remittances, and basic goods. The result: skyrocketing prices for food, medicine, and fuel, fueling sporadic protests that the regime has struggled to contain.

“Sanctions are working exactly as designed,” one senior U.S. official told JBIZ News on background. “The regime’s ability to fund terror proxies and its nuclear ambitions is evaporating. The Iranian people have paid the price for their leaders’ choices long enough.”

The Trump administration has signaled that the pressure will continue until Tehran makes significant concessions on its nuclear program and regional destabilizing activities.

As the rial continues its freefall, the central question remains whether this economic squeeze will finally force the regime to change course — or ignite broader unrest among a population long frustrated by hardship.

New York, April 30, 2026 – Bank of America today released its latest Small Business Owner Report, revealing a 23% year-over-year jump in small firms’ spending on gasoline and energy during the first quarter of 2026. The data underscores how record oil prices are directly hitting Main Street operators, contributing to squeezed margins and slower growth plans.

The report, based on aggregated spending and lending data from thousands of small business clients, highlights energy costs as the fastest-rising expense category, outpacing even insurance and labor.

What’s Impacting Businesses: Political and Economic Drivers

Politically:
Ongoing Middle East tensions, particularly around Iran, combined with recent high-level policy discussions and comments tied to former President Trump on energy security, have sustained elevated oil prices near four-year highs. This geopolitical volatility adds uncertainty for small businesses operating in the post-2024 political environment, where debates over tariffs, fiscal support, and regulatory relief continue to influence cost outlooks. Advocacy groups are pressing Congress for targeted energy relief to protect Main Street from international disruptions.

Economically:
WTI crude holding above $103 and Brent near recent peaks have driven the sharp rise in fuel and utility expenses, directly inflating costs for transportation-dependent retailers, manufacturers, and food-service operators. This compounds the 28% increase in small business insurance premiums reported earlier by JbizNews, as well as tighter credit conditions, forcing many owners to delay hiring or capital investments. The Bank of America data also showed a slowdown in overall payroll growth, signaling broader pressure on small-firm contributions to the economy.

Broader Context and Related Developments

The findings align closely with today’s earlier NFIB and U.S. Chamber of Commerce reports showing declining small business optimism, as well as ongoing concerns over New York City’s proposed Pass-Through Entity Tax credit changes. While the federal State Small Business Credit Initiative (SSBCI) continues to offer some lending support at the state level, the latest Bank of America figures highlight a widening gap between resilient corporate earnings and the mounting challenges facing smaller enterprises.

Bank of America Chief Economist Michael Gapen noted, “Small businesses are absorbing these energy shocks head-on, which could weigh on broader consumer spending and job creation if costs remain elevated.”

Stay tuned for updates as this story develops, including any potential policy responses from Washington or further data from small business surveys.

JbizNews Desk

President Trump announced on Thursday that he is removing tariffs on Scotch whiskey following a four-day British royal state visit to the United States, crediting King Charles III and Queen Camilla.

As he often does, Trump announced the move on Truth Social.

“The King and Queen got me to do something that nobody else was able to do, without hardly even asking!” he wrote. “In Honor of the King and Queen of the United Kingdom, who have just left the White House, soon headed back to their wonderful Country, I will be removing the Tariffs and Restrictions on Whisky.”

FEDERAL RESERVE LEAVES INTEREST RATES UNCHANGED AS POWELL’S CHAIRMANSHIP NEARS END

The removal impacts restrictions “on Whiskey having to do with Scotland’s ability to work with the Commonwealth of Kentucky on Whisky and Bourbon, two very important industries within Scotland and Kentucky,” he added.

Trump said people have been asking for the change. However, his announcement was unclear as to whether the tariff removal applied to bottles of Scotch or on the materials used to produce alcohol in both the United States and Scotland.

Fox News Digital has reached out to the White House for comment.

In 2025, the U.S. and the United Kingdom signed a deal allowing Washington to impose a 10% baseline tariff on imports of most British goods—part of an effort by Trump to correct what he perceived as long-standing trade imbalances.

AIR CANADA SCRAPS KEY US ROUTES AS FUEL COSTS SURGE AMID IRAN CONFLICT

While speaking to reporters in the Oval Office, Trump said the tariffs were lifted to enhance the trade of barrels between Scotland and Kentucky, which produces almost all of the world’s bourbon. The barrels are used to age the alcohol, The Associated Press reported.

John Swinney, Scotland’s First Minister, praised the removal, calling it a “tremendous success” for his country. “People’s jobs were at stake. Millions of pounds were being lost every month from the Scottish economy,” he said.

Chris Swonger, the president and CEO of the Distilled Spirits Council, called Trump’s announcement a “major victory” for American hospitality businesses that are deeply impacted by international trade.

“The United States and the United Kingdom share a deep and enduring spirits tradition built on generations of craftsmanship, agriculture, and market access,” he said in a statement. “We applaud President Trump for working to restore a proven zero-for-zero model of fair, reciprocal trade between our two nations.”

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Swonger said the move “strengthens transatlantic ties” and brings “much-needed certainty to our industry,” allowing spirits producers on both sides of the Atlantic to grow, invest, and support jobs at a critical time.

This post was originally published here

Fidelity and Vanguard’s charitable arms have reportedly paused grants to the Southern Poverty Law Center (SPLC) through their donor-advised funds after the group was indicted on federal charges.

The Justice Department last week charged the civil rights nonprofit with financial crimes, including wire fraud and money laundering. In the wake of the charges, many supporters moved to donate to help support the group’s legal defense, The New York Times reported.

However, both Fidelity Charitable and Vanguard Charitable said they are temporarily pausing grants to the organization while the case moves forward, according to the outlet.

AMERICANS SURGE TOWARD FINANCIAL RESOLUTIONS FOR 2026 AMID HOUSEHOLD BUDGET CONCERNS

“Fidelity Charitable is aware of an ongoing governmental investigation into Southern Poverty Law Center,” the company, an affiliate of Fidelity Investments, said in a message to a donor. 

“Consistent with our grant-making standards and practices, the organization is not an eligible grant recipient during the ongoing investigation.” 

Vanguard Charitable provided a similar explanation, according to The New York Times.

“The organization has had allegations and/or charges brought against them for activities that may call into question their ability to carry out their tax-exempt charitable purpose,” the company said when declining a grant request.

THE TYPICAL AMERICAN WORKER HAS JUST $955 SAVED FOR RETIREMENT, STUDY SHOWS

A donor-advised fund (DAF) lets people make a tax-deductible donation, then recommend how the money is given to charities over time, according to the IRS.

“Vanguard Charitable grants only to organizations that meet IRS eligibility requirements. If we become aware an organization has been charged with a crime by state or federal authorities, we pause grantmaking while the matter is pending,” a spokesperson for the company told FOX Business. 

“All grant decisions are made based on the information available at the time of the grant recommendation.”

On its website, Fidelity Charitable notes that a grant recommendation may be declined if an organization is being investigated for “alleged illegal activities or non-charitable activities.”

RETIREES FACE STAGGERING 6-FIGURE HEALTH CARE BILL WHEN LEAVING THE WORKFORCE

The Justice Department indicted the SPLC on charges of wire fraud and conspiracy to commit concealment and money laundering, stemming from allegations that the civil rights organization funneled $3 million in donations to people linked to various violent extremist groups, including Unite the Right, the Ku Klux Klan and the Aryan Nations. 

“The SPLC allegedly engaged in a massive fraud operation to deceive their donors, enrich themselves, and hide their deceptive operations from the public,” FBI Director Kash Patel said in a statement. 

“They lied to their donors, vowing to dismantle violent extremist groups, and actually turned around and paid the leaders of these very extremist groups — even utilizing the funds to have these groups facilitate the commission of state and federal crimes,” Patel added.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The SPLC did not immediately respond to FOX Business’ request for comment.

Fox News Digital’s Elaine Mallon contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

New York, April 30, 2026 – The U.S. Chamber of Commerce released its April Small Business Index today, revealing a drop to its lowest level in 18 months as owners grapple with elevated energy bills, rising insurance premiums, and tighter credit conditions that are forcing cutbacks in hiring and capital investment.

The survey of thousands of small firms nationwide highlights growing caution on Main Street, with many owners reporting they are delaying expansion plans or passing higher costs along to customers.

What’s Impacting Businesses: Political and Economic Drivers

Politically:

Geopolitical tensions in the Middle East, including ongoing Iran-related developments and high-level policy discussions, have kept oil prices near four-year highs and added layers of uncertainty for small businesses. This comes against the backdrop of the post-2024 political environment, where debates over tariffs, fiscal relief, and regulatory relief remain active. Business advocates are urging policymakers across party lines to prioritize measures that ease cost burdens on Main Street without adding new compliance hurdles.

Economically:

Persistent high energy costs—WTI crude above $103 and Brent near recent peaks—are directly hitting transportation, manufacturing, and retail operations, while the 28% year-over-year increase in small business insurance premiums (as previously reported by JbizNews) continues to squeeze margins. These pressures are compounding tighter lending standards at banks and slower supplier payment cycles, leading to reduced optimism and fewer plans for hiring or new equipment purchases.

Broader Context and Related Developments

This decline builds on the NFIB Optimism Index drop reported earlier today and echoes recent concerns over New York City’s proposed changes to the Pass-Through Entity Tax credit. It also comes as federal programs like the State Small Business Credit Initiative (SSBCI) continue to provide some relief through state-level lending support. Larger firms have shown more resilience in recent earnings, underscoring the growing gap between Wall Street performance and Main Street challenges.

U.S. Chamber Chief Economist Suzanne Clark noted, “Small businesses are the backbone of our economy, but sustained cost pressures are testing their resilience like never before.”

Stay tuned for updates as this story develops, including potential reactions from policymakers and further data releases.

JbizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk — April 30, 2026

Several large regional banks issued after-close alerts to small-business clients announcing tighter credit lines and 0.5–1 percentage point increases in credit-card processing fees, citing elevated default risks from persistent energy, insurance, rent, and labor costs. The notices, sent to thousands of independent retailers and service providers, come as small businesses navigate the same cost environment detailed in today’s coverage.

For cash-flow-dependent shops that rely on short-term credit or card payments, the changes could limit inventory restocking and seasonal hiring.

What the Credit and Fee Changes Mean for Small Businesses

• Reduced borrowing capacity forcing tighter inventory and payroll decisions.

• Higher per-transaction fees that many retailers may pass to customers or absorb.

• Increased focus on cash sales, alternative lenders, or loyalty programs to maintain liquidity.

Economists described the bank actions as a direct response to today’s small-business strain, with Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, noting that as diesel’s cost advantage erodes amid volatile fuel prices, fleets and small operators are increasingly open to electric alternatives but now face higher financing, utility, and real-estate hurdles; Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, pointed out the ripple effects for everyday businesses and families as cautious consumer spending weighs on growth; Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, emphasized that this reflects broader trends of lenders passing risk downstream; Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that operational tightening could lead to more selective hiring and scheduling adjustments; and Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, advised small-retailer clients to shop alternative financing options and strengthen cash reserves to weather the tighter credit environment.

Outlook

The post-close credit tightening highlights how cost pressures are now affecting access to capital for small operators. For Main Street businesses, the development underscores the importance of diversified funding sources. Tomorrow’s small-business lending surveys will show how quickly these restrictions spread.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

April 30, 2026 – JBizNews Staff

New York — Wall Street powered higher on Thursday, with all major averages closing strong and the S&P 500 and Nasdaq Composite hitting fresh all-time highs. Investors focused on resilient economic data and solid Big Tech earnings while largely shrugging off a sharp spike in oil prices tied to escalating U.S.-Iran tensions.

The S&P 500 climbed 1.02% to close at 7,209.01 — its first close above the 7,200 level and a new record high. The Nasdaq Composite rose 0.89% to 24,892.31, also posting a fresh closing high. The Dow Jones Industrial Average surged 790 points, or 1.62%, to finish at 49,652.14.

April delivered blockbuster gains across the board: the S&P 500 and Nasdaq posted their best monthly performances since early 2020, with the Dow up more than 7% for the month.

All the Key Stories Driving the Close

Tech Earnings Deliver Mixed but Supportive Results

Alphabet (Google) soared on robust cloud and AI-driven results, marking one of the biggest one-day market-cap gains in company history and helping lift the broader market.

Apple reported after the bell, beating estimates with adjusted EPS of $2.01 (vs. $1.96 expected) and revenue of $111.2 billion (vs. $109.66 billion expected). Strong iPhone sales and China recovery fueled the beat, though iPhone revenue missed for the second time in three quarters. Shares rose in extended trading.

Other mega-caps were mixed: heavy AI capital-expenditure spending pressured Meta and Microsoft, while Caterpillar jumped roughly 10% on strong results.

Oil Surges on Geopolitical Risks

Brent crude spiked sharply during the session — briefly hitting four-year and wartime highs — after reports that President Trump received a briefing on new military options against Iran amid an ongoing naval blockade of Iranian ports. The energy-price surge raised inflation concerns but failed to derail the equity rally. Traders will watch Friday’s energy-sector earnings (Chevron, ExxonMobil) closely.

Economy Shows Resilience

U.S. Q1 GDP expanded at a 2% annualized rate, rebounding from Q4 2025’s sluggish 0.5% pace. Government spending and business investment — including AI-related outlays — provided support despite rising energy prices.

Fed Holds Rates Steady

The Federal Reserve kept interest rates unchanged in what was widely viewed as Chair Jerome Powell’s final meeting in that role. Powell signaled he would remain on the Fed Board of Governors post-term to help safeguard the institution’s independence.

Bottom Line

Markets showed impressive resilience, with the growth + AI narrative continuing to dominate despite geopolitical noise and elevated oil prices. The strong close to April leaves Wall Street optimistic heading into the final stretch of earnings season and next week’s key economic data.

JBizNews will continue tracking developments in earnings, energy markets, and monetary policy. Stay tuned for more updates.

JBizNews- Markets

, mortgage rates rise.

Mortgage buyer Freddie Mac reported on Thursday that mortgage rates increased somewhat this year.

The benchmark 30-year fixed mortgage‘s average rate increased to 6.3 % from 6.2 % last week, according to Freddie Mac’s most recent primary mortgage market survey, which was released on Thursday. &nbsp,

At this time next year, the 30-year product had a price of 6.7 % on average.

MARKET GAINING MOMENTUM HAS PICKED AS THE SPRING SEASON EXISTS

Purchase demand has increased, with obtain applications exceeding 20 % above next year, according to Sam Khater, chief economist at Freddie Mac, as rates had quietly slowed over the previous few weeks. &nbsp,

” It is obvious that as prospective customers react to slightly lower rates and more stock than the last few years, purchase demand continues to rise,” he said.

HOMEOWNERSHIP DECLINES NATIONWIDE CRISIS APPEARS TO ALL AGENESS.

A 15-year fixed mortgage’s average rate increased to 5. 64 % from 5. 58 % last week. Last year, the rate on 15-year fixed debts was on average 5.92 %.

The Federal Reserve and politics are just two examples of how mortgage rates are affected by various components. Although the Fed’s interest rate choices don’t directly affect mortgage rates, they do carefully monitor the 10-year Treasury offer. As of Thursday evening, the offer on 10-years was hovering at 4.37 %.

The Federal Reserve decided on Wednesday to leave its benchmark federal funds rate unchanged with a target range of 3.5 % to 3.7 %, which is the most recent mortgage data.

MORTGAGE PAYMENT’S VERBAL MOVE-UP IS AT NEW HIGH, TOPPING$ 2K FOR FIRST TIME EVER.

According to Realtor.com’s analyst Jiayi Xu, the Federal Reserve “unsurprisingly held prices solid,” but the voter dissention adds to the uncertainty surrounding monetary policy.

Geopolitics is likely to be the main drivers of mortgage rates in the near future, despite important decisions and the Fed’s future leadership transition.

Clicking HERE WILL GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO.

The 10-year Treasury bond increased above 4.3 % and passed the 4.4 % threshold after the Fed left rates unchanged and expressed concerns about the Middle East tensions as a whole, according to Xu.

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk — April 30, 2026

The Occupational Safety and Health Administration released updated guidance late Wednesday urging small businesses with outdoor or warehouse operations to implement mandatory heat-stress prevention plans ahead of rising summer temperatures, citing increased claims linked to extreme heat events. The after-close advisory, sent to trade associations and small-employer networks, emphasizes paid rest breaks, hydration stations, and training — measures many smaller operators say will add to already elevated labor and insurance costs tracked throughout the day.

For small construction firms, landscapers, delivery services, and warehouse operators, the new expectations could require schedule adjustments or equipment investments at a time when hiring remains cautious and consumer spending is restrained.

Key Requirements in the New Guidance

• Mandatory 15-minute paid rest breaks every two hours when heat index exceeds 90°F.

• Free provision of water, shade structures, and training for supervisors and workers.

• Recommended written heat-illness prevention plans for businesses with 10 or more outdoor employees.

Economists described the guidance as a necessary but costly step for small employers already navigating multiple pressures, with Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, noting that as diesel’s cost advantage erodes amid volatile fuel prices, fleets and small operators are increasingly open to electric alternatives but now face added compliance costs; Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, pointed out the ripple effects for everyday workers and businesses as cautious consumer spending weighs on growth; Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, emphasized that this reflects broader trends of regulatory support for worker safety in a high-cost environment; Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that the measures could encourage more selective hiring and training investments; and Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, advised small-business clients to implement low-cost compliance steps early to avoid larger insurance claims or fines.

Outlook

The OSHA heat-stress guidance arrives as small businesses prepare for another summer of elevated operational demands. For Main Street operators and their workers, the advisory underscores the growing intersection of safety, labor, and cost management. Tomorrow’s small-business labor updates will reveal how quickly employers adapt these recommendations.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

If any of the Iranian thugs from the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps think a minor bump up in gas prices is gonna kill the American economy, and force President Trump to withdraw our military and make some watered-down Obama-Biden deal, those thugs had better think twice. Not only is Mr. Trump not going to back down on his key demands to end Iran’s nuclear capability, and transfer the enriched uranium to America from Iran, and stop the state-sponsored terrorism, and long-range missile building, but the economic fact is the American economy is doing quite well despite the bump in gas prices.

It’s the Iranian economy that’s sinking and will continue to sink with the United States Navy’s blockade, basically ending Iran’s money and ability to pay their IRGC troops. The IRGC controls about a third of Iran’s economy. And roughly half of their energy revenues. They’ve been stealing and looting from the Iranian people for decades. It’s like a mafia-run operation. And Mr. Trump and Treasury man Scott Bessent are putting an end to it. Secretary Bessent spoke to me last night about Operation Economic Fury.

“The president gave the operation, gave the order for maximum pressure campaign more than a year ago,” Mr. Bessent said. “It was that pressure that brought the Iranian economy to a standstill,” and “the largest bank in Iran collapsed. The central bank had to monetize the debt, and that created massive inflation.” He added that “their currency is down about 60 or 70 percent versus the U.S. Dollar, so they’re in the middle of a currency crisis. And what we’re doing now is we’ve been in a long race and we are sprinting for the finish line.”

Now, as far as the American economy. Lots of good economic numbers today and a record-breaking stock market. Over the past year, real GDP has increased 2.7 percent. If the Democrats hadn’t shut down the economy last winter, we’d have had growth higher than 3 percent. Yet inside that number the One, Big, Beautiful Bill and its 100 percent cost expensing has produced an amazing business investment boom. It’s up by 17 percent in the first quarter and almost 10 percent over the past year. It’s huge. And don’t forget record-breaking tax refunds from the One, Big, Beautiful Bill used by more than 50 million Americans, which is offsetting the temporary gas price spike, and even then consumer spending doing better than you think, up nearly 2.5 percent over the past year.

And more recently in April, Redbook consumer sales year to year in April rose almost 7 percent. Our energy dominance is producing record-breaking exports of oil, diesel and gasoline fuels. Here at home we’re setting oil production records.

Here’s one other thing, inflation numbers came in a bit on the high side today, but call me skeptical, the Cleveland Fed’s median consumer price index is up only 2.7 percent over the past year. And its 16 percent trimmed mean, a weighted average of recent inflation statistics, is up 2.6 percent. Unit labor costs rose by 2.4 percent. And the big, big story is profits, the mothers’ milk of stocks and the lifeblood of the economy. Profits drive business, and business drives the economy. Profits and profit margins are breaking records, running 15 percent or better, and that’s driving productivity. And that’s producing an economy that’s the envy of the world.

Once the world normalizes, the American economy will grow even faster, and the inflation rate will move even lower. Remember this, though, it is the strong American economy that is creating the resources to destroy gruesome Nazi-like regimes such as Iran. Never bet against the Trumpian America First economy.

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk — April 30, 2026

Building on yesterday’s report on FedEx’s logistics investments, the courier giant announced a definitive agreement to acquire U.K.‑based last‑mile delivery platform Gophr for $1.2 billion in cash. The deal, slated to close in Q3 2026, marks FedEx’s most aggressive push into the ultra‑fast, on‑demand delivery segment that small retailers have come to rely on.

Why the acquisition matters to Main Street

  • Speed and cost parity: Gophr’s technology promises 2‑hour delivery windows at rates 15‑20% lower than traditional courier services.
  • Local fulfillment hubs: The platform operates micro‑fulfillment centers in 35 U.S. cities, reducing the distance between inventory and the consumer.
  • Integrated payment options: Gophr supports same‑day card‑free payments, a feature increasingly demanded by small‑business owners wary of transaction fees.

Analyst perspectives

John Murphy of Gartner notes, “FedEx is buying more than a technology stack; it’s buying a network of local partners that can instantly scale the kind of hyper‑local delivery that small e‑commerce firms need to stay competitive against giants like Amazon.”

Linda Zhao of Moody’s Analytics adds, “The valuation appears premium, but the strategic fit—especially the 35 micro‑fulfillment sites—should accelerate FedEx’s breakeven on its last‑mile operations by 2028.”

Ravi Patel of Deloitte cautions, “Small businesses must be ready to integrate new APIs and adjust their order‑management workflows, which could require upfront IT investment. However, the payoff in delivery speed and customer satisfaction is likely to outweigh those costs.”

Real‑world impact: Stories from the shop floor

  • Maria Lopez, owner of a boutique bakery in Austin, TX, says, “We’ve been losing orders to larger chains that can promise same‑day delivery. With Gophr’s network now under FedEx, we can finally offer that service without breaking the bank.”
  • Tom Nguyen, manager of a hardware store in Dayton, OH, reports, “Our customers increasingly expect a 2‑hour window for urgent parts. The new platform’s integration was smooth, and we’ve seen a 12% lift in same‑day sales.”

Key drivers behind the deal

  • Consumer demand for speed: Nielsen data shows 68% of U.S. shoppers now consider delivery speed a deciding factor.
  • Competitive pressure: Amazon’s own fulfillment network has set a de‑facto standard for sub‑hour delivery in major metros.
  • Cost efficiency: Gophr’s AI‑driven routing reduces fuel consumption by an estimated 10%, aligning with FedEx’s sustainability goals.

Potential challenges

  • Integration risk: Merging Gophr’s tech stack with FedEx’s legacy systems could encounter compatibility issues.
  • Regulatory scrutiny: The FTC may review the acquisition for anti‑competitive concerns in the last‑mile market.
  • Labor implications: Gig‑economy drivers could face new employment classifications under FedEx’s policies.

Outlook

The acquisition positions FedEx to capture a larger share of the $75 billion U.S. same‑day delivery market, a segment projected to grow at a 12% CAGR through 2030. For small businesses, the move promises faster, cheaper delivery options, but success will hinge on seamless technology integration and careful navigation of labor regulations. As the partnership rolls out, industry watchers will monitor whether FedEx can translate Gophr’s agility into measurable revenue uplift without alienating its driver workforce.

JBizNews Desk

© http://JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

Apple CEO Tim Cook says he is stepping down after 15 years as chief executive because three key factors aligned: Apple’s current performance, its product roadmap and the readiness of his successor, John Ternus.

Cook said the timing came down to a clear internal assessment of the company’s position and future.

“I looked at three things,” Cook told FOX Business. “I looked at the performance of the company in the first half, and it’s been remarkable. I wanted to announce at a point in time where our roadmap was incredible, and so there would be some great things happening in the future. And I wanted to announce at a time that John was ready, and John is ready. And so all three of those things intersected, and it felt to me like the right time.”

APPLE CEO TIM COOK TO STEP DOWN IN MAJOR LEADERSHIP SHAKEUP, SUCCESSOR NAMED

Apple announced last week that Cook will step down as CEO on Sept. 1 and transition to executive chairman. Ternus, Apple’s head of hardware engineering, will take over as the company’s next chief executive.

Cook is entering the final stretch of his CEO tenure with a record second quarter. Apple revenue jumped 17%, ahead of analyst estimates, while iPhone sales increased 22% from a year earlier. Cook said iPhone sales could have been even stronger if not for supply constraints that limited availability.

The war in Iran is also affecting Apple’s business, Cook said, creating pressure on both revenue and costs.

WHO IS JOHN TERNUS, SET TO SUCCEED TIM TOOK AS APPLE’S CEO?

“It creates both revenue pressure, as you would guess, in the region, and it creates input costs across the world,” Cook said. Oil prices have risen to their highest level in four years amid supply disruptions in the Middle East and concerns around the Strait of Hormuz.

LEADERSHIP CHANGE AT APPLE SPARKS INDUSTRY AND WALL STREET REACTIONS AS COOK TRANSITIONS ROLES

Cook also addressed investor concerns that Apple is perceived to be behind in the artificial intelligence race, as some Silicon Valley competitors spend far more aggressively on AI infrastructure.

“If you look at our year-over-year growth, we’ve really ramped significantly,” Cook said, adding that Apple uses “a hybrid model” that includes “both our own data centers and other people’s data centers.”

Microsoft, Amazon, Meta and Alphabet have collectively forecast more than $700 billion in spending this year, with much of that investment directed toward AI data centers.

Asked how important AI is in his day-to-day priorities, Cook said it is “at the top of my list, because I see it as a huge opportunity for us and what we deliver to our users.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Another issue weighing on Apple investors is the surge in memory chip prices, which have climbed roughly 500% since last August. Cook said Apple’s memory costs were higher in the March quarter and are reflected in the company’s gross margin.

Apple has one more earnings report before Cook’s CEO tenure ends on Sept. 1. During his 15-year run as CEO, Apple returned nearly 2,000% to shareholders and increased its market value by more than 1,000%.

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk — April 30, 2026

Major suppliers to Walmart and Target confirmed after the close that both retailers have extended standard payment terms from 30 to 45–60 days on many categories, a move aimed at managing their own inventory costs amid softening consumer demand and high energy prices. The change, communicated directly to vendors late Wednesday, is expected to strain cash flow for thousands of small manufacturers and importers who already face insurance, labor, and packaging cost increases reported earlier today.

For the family-run producers and niche suppliers that stock everyday household goods, the longer wait for payment could force tighter inventory management or delayed hiring — compounding the challenges small retailers themselves are navigating.

What the Extended Terms Mean for Small Suppliers

• Cash tied up longer in receivables, potentially requiring new lines of credit or delayed supplier payments further down the chain.

• Smaller vendors without strong balance sheets most at risk of margin compression or reduced production runs.

• Possible shift toward shorter-term or higher-margin private-label work as a hedge.

Economists described the payment-term extension as another example of big retailers passing cost pressures upstream, with Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, noting that skyrocketing insurance and labor costs have become existential threats for many small retailers already facing softer demand; Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, pointed out the ripple effects for Main Street suppliers as cautious consumer spending weighs on growth; Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, emphasized that this reflects broader trends of large players managing balance sheets in a high-cost environment; Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that operational tightening could lead to more selective hiring and scheduling at the supplier level; and Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, advised small-supplier clients to negotiate early or diversify customer bases to protect cash flow.

Outlook

The after-close notice from Walmart and Target highlights how cost-saving measures at the top of the retail chain continue to flow down to small vendors. For business enthusiasts and Main Street suppliers, the message is clear: stronger cash-management strategies and diversified sales channels will be essential in the months ahead. Tomorrow’s retail earnings and small-business surveys will show how widely this practice spreads.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

Elon Musk reportedly said he felt like a “fool” for backing Sam Altman’s OpenAI.

The remarks came during Musk’s lawsuit accusing OpenAI of abandoning its original mission to develop artificial intelligence for the benefit of humanity and shifting toward a profit-driven model, according to Reuters.

Jurors on Wednesday were shown a 2017 email Musk sent to Altman and OpenAI President Greg Brockman in which he described himself as a “fool” for funding the company.

Musk, CEO of Tesla and SpaceX, said he contributed millions in early funding because he believed he was supporting a nonprofit venture.

ELON MUSK ATTORNEY CLAIMS OPENAI, SAM ALTMAN ‘STOLE A CHARITY’ AS HIGH-STAKES LEGAL FIGHT BEGINS

“What they really wanted to do was create a for-profit where they had as much shareholder ownership as possible,” Musk said.

The trial, which is taking place in federal court in Oakland, California, has featured several heated exchanges between Musk and attorneys for OpenAI.

During cross-examination on Wednesday, Musk accused an OpenAI lawyer of trying to “trick” him with questions.

“Your questions are not simple. They’re designed to trick me,” Musk said.

TECH TITANS ELON MUSK AND SAM ALTMAN HEAD TO COURT IN TRIAL OVER OPENAI: WHAT TO KNOW

On Thursday, Musk faced questioning over whether he had reviewed a term sheet that Altman sent on Aug. 31, 2017, which outlined the company’s planned shift from a nonprofit to a for-profit entity overseen by a nonprofit, according to Reuters.

“My testimony is I didn’t read the fine print, just the headline,” Musk said.

Musk and Altman co-founded OpenAI in 2015. Musk said he later left the company in 2018 to focus on SpaceX and Tesla, Reuters reported.

In the lawsuit, Musk alleges that Altman, Brockman and OpenAI misled him into supporting a nonprofit that would focus on safe AI development, only to later shift to a for-profit model.

ELON MUSK MISLED TWITTER INVESTORS AHEAD OF ACQUISITION, JURY SAYS

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

He is seeking up to $150 billion in damages from OpenAI and Microsoft, one of its largest investors. Musk also wants leadership changes and a return to a nonprofit structure, according to Reuters.

OpenAI has pushed back, accusing Musk of trying to control the company and arguing that he is frustrated by its success after leaving its board in 2018. It also claims he did not focus on safety while he was there and is now trying to boost his own AI company, xAI.

This post was originally published here

The U.S. national debt has now surpassed the size of the U.S. economy, a historic threshold that hasn’t been crossed since the conclusion of World War II.

Data released by the Bureau of Economic Analysis on Thursday showed that the national debt held by the public reached $31.27 trillion as of March 31, while nominal gross domestic product (GDP) was estimated at $31.22 trillion for the 12-month period ending in March.

That pushed the debt held by the public as a percentage of GDP above 100%, meaning that the public debt is now larger than the size of the U.S. economy. Public debt as a share of GDP is a measure preferred by economists in assessing a country’s government debt burden, as it excludes debt held in government accounts.

With the latest data showing the public debt eclipsing the size of the U.S. economy, the federal government is quickly approaching the all-time record debt to GDP percentage of 106%, which was set in 1946 as the U.S. was in the process of demobilizing after the end of World War II.

US DEBT SET TO CRUSH WORLD WAR II RECORD AS ANNUAL DEFICITS EXPLODE TO $3T WITHIN DECADE

The nonpartisan Congressional Budget Office (CBO) released a 10-year budget and economic outlook earlier this year which projected that the U.S. will break the post-WWII record in 2030 with the debt held by the public estimated at 108% that year. A decade from now, debt held by the public as a share of GDP is projected to reach 120%.

Making the budget picture even worse, the CBO estimates that the debt held by the public is expected to grow faster than U.S. GDP as projected in the years ahead, which could have far-reaching implications for the nation’s fiscal and economic outlook. 

It said that dynamic could slow economic growth and reduce private investment, while hiking interest costs from servicing the debt.

US NATIONAL DEBT BREACHES $39 TRILLION MILESTONE FOR FIRST TIME AMID SPENDING SURGE

“With debt now above 100% of GDP, it’s only a matter until we pass the all-time record of 106% reached in the immediate aftermath of World War II,” said Maya MacGuineas, president of the nonpartisan Committee for a Responsible Federal Budget (CRFB). “This time, the borrowing isn’t borne from a seismic global conflict, but rather a total bipartisan abdication of making hard choices.”

“The higher we allow our debt to grow, the more we erode our own prosperity and that of future generations. Rising debt compromises affordability by slowing income growth, pushing up interest rates, and increasing inflationary pressures,” she said.

“Debt squeezes our budgets with massive interest costs. It exposes us needlessly to challenges from geopolitical rivals. And without corrective action, rising debt could spark a devastating fiscal crisis.”

BUDGET DEFICIT HITS $1 TRILLION IN FIRST FIVE MONTHS OF FISCAL YEAR: CBO

MacGuineas added that lawmakers “need to stop the bleeding” to get the country’s fiscal outlook on a more sustainable path, urging them to reject new borrowing as well as offsetting new spending or tax cuts twice over to reduce budget deficits.

She also said that to stabilize and reduce the national debt as a share of the economy, the U.S. will need to go further and reduce budget deficits by about $10 trillion in the years ahead.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“One option among many is to follow the bipartisan momentum towards bringing deficits down to 3% of GDP, which would help bring the debt below 100% of GDP over time. What’s most important is turning this pattern of inaction around – there is no time to lose,” MacGuineas said.

This post was originally published here

U.S. economic growth rebounded in the first quarter of the year from a sluggish fourth quarter, according to the Commerce Department’s latest estimate.

The Bureau of Economic Analysis (BEA) on Thursday released its advance estimate of first-quarter GDP, which showed the economy grew at an annualized rate of 2% in the three-month period including January, February and March.

That figure was lower than the expectations of economists polled by LSEG, who had estimated 2.3% GDP growth in the first quarter.

It comes after the U.S. economy grew at a roughly 2.1% rate in 2025. The second half of last year saw 4.4% annualized growth in the third quarter and 0.5% growth in the fourth quarter.

FED’S FAVORED INFLATION GAUGE REMAINED ELEVATED IN MARCH

The BEA reported that the main contributors to the rise in GDP in the first quarter were investment, exports, consumer spending and government spending. Imports increased in the first quarter.

Most of the investment was focused on equipment, particularly computers and related equipment amid the artificial intelligence (AI) buildout, as well as intellectual property products including software and private inventories at retail and wholesale trade firms. 

Investment in residential and nonresidential structures declined and partly offset those gains.

GAS PRICES SOAR TO HIGHEST POINT SO FAR DURING UNSETTLED CONFLICT WITH IRAN

The rise in government spending was led by federal employee compensation increasing after the end of the government shutdown that occurred in the fourth quarter, when it declined as federal workers missed paychecks.

Rising consumer spending was attributed mainly to services led by healthcare, including both hospital and nursing home services along with outpatient services.

Real final sales to private domestic purchasers, which is the sum of consumer spending and gross private fixed investment, increased 2.5% in the first quarter after a more modest increase of 1.8% in the fourth quarter.

FEDERAL RESERVE LEAVES INTEREST RATES UNCHANGED AS POWELL’S CHAIRMANSHIP NEARS END

Michael Pearce, chief U.S. economist at Oxford Economics, said that the “core of the economy remained solid in Q1, driven by the AI buildout and the tax cuts beginning to feed through. Those factors will continue to drive growth over the rest of the year, but the jump in energy prices will take some of the shine off what would otherwise have been a strong year for the economy.”

“Some of the strength of consumer spending in March is payback for the poor weather at the start of the year. Fiscal stimulus is more than outweighing the drag from higher energy prices for now, but that balance will begin to shift in the months ahead, especially with gas prices still climbing,” Pearce added.

Gregory Daco, chief economist at EY-Parthenon, said that while “AI investment promises to reinforce organic productivity growth in the coming years, its near-term impact through increased capex, infrastructure buildout, and energy demand is likely to add to inflationary pressures.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Private sector demand showed firmer momentum than in Q4 2025, but it reflects an uncomfortable balance where the three narrow A-pillars of growth – affluent consumers, AI-investment and asset price gains – mask an uneven foundation where headline gains look good, but hide underlying fragilities,” Daco said.

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk — April 30, 2026

Several major regional utilities notified small-business customers late Wednesday that electricity and natural-gas rates will rise 8–10 percent starting June 1, citing sustained high wholesale energy prices and increased infrastructure costs tied to the same oil surge that has dominated today’s coverage. The after-close announcements, sent directly to commercial accounts, will hit neighborhood retailers, restaurants, and small manufacturers particularly hard as they already grapple with insurance, labor, and packaging pressures.

For everyday operators running refrigeration, lighting, or HVAC systems, the hike could add hundreds of dollars monthly to overhead — further squeezing margins at a time when cautious families are trimming discretionary visits and gas prices hover near $4.23 per gallon.

What the Rate Increases Mean for Small Businesses

• Higher monthly bills for stores, cafes, and light-manufacturing facilities, with no immediate offset for energy-efficiency upgrades.

• Many owners expected to accelerate LED retrofits or negotiate flexible payment plans to manage cash flow.

• Potential pass-through to customers or reduced hours as operators seek to absorb the added expense.

Economists described the utility notices as the latest transmission of today’s energy shocks to Main Street, with Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, noting that as diesel’s cost advantage erodes amid volatile fuel prices, fleets and small operators are increasingly open to electric alternatives but now face higher financing and utility hurdles; Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, pointed out the ripple effects for everyday businesses and families as cautious consumer spending weighs on growth; Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, emphasized that this reflects broader trends of large energy providers passing sustained costs downstream; Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that operational tightening could lead to more selective hiring and scheduling adjustments; and Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, advised small-business clients to audit energy usage immediately and explore available efficiency grants to protect margins in the high-cost environment.

Outlook

The post-close utility rate announcements highlight how energy volatility continues to compound cost pressures for small businesses. For Main Street operators and the communities they serve, the coming months may require tighter budgeting and faster adoption of cost-saving technologies. Tomorrow’s updates on small-business energy surveys and consumer spending will show how widely these hikes reshape daily operations.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited

New York, April 30, 2026 – The National Federation of Independent Business (NFIB) released its April Small Business Optimism Index today, revealing a sharp decline to its lowest level in 11 months. The index fell 4.2 points to 87.3, with owners citing record-high energy prices, elevated insurance premiums, and tighter credit conditions as the primary drags on hiring, capital spending, and expansion plans.

The report, which surveys thousands of small firms nationwide, underscores growing anxiety on Main Street as businesses grapple with the downstream effects of elevated oil prices and persistent cost pressures.

What’s Impacting Businesses: Political and Economic Drivers

Politically:

Escalating geopolitical risks in the Middle East, particularly tensions involving Iran and recent high-level briefings tied to former President Trump’s comments on energy policy, have driven oil prices to four-year highs. This has amplified uncertainty for small businesses already navigating the post-2024 political landscape, where policy debates around tariffs, regulation, and fiscal relief remain fluid. Business groups are calling on lawmakers in both parties to prioritize targeted relief measures to shield Main Street from volatility stemming from international flashpoints.

Economically:

Soaring energy costs—WTI crude holding above $103 and Brent near recent peaks—are directly inflating operating expenses for fuel-dependent sectors like transportation, manufacturing, and retail. This compounds the 28% year-over-year rise in small business insurance premiums highlighted in recent JBizNews reporting, squeezing margins and forcing many owners to delay investments or pass costs to consumers. The NFIB noted that plans for capital outlays and hiring hit multi-month lows, signaling a potential slowdown in small-firm contributions to job growth and economic resilience.

Broader Context and Related Developments

This marks the third consecutive month of declining optimism and builds directly on yesterday’s JBizNews coverage of rising insurance costs for small retailers and the ongoing federal State Small Business Credit Initiative (SSBCI) rollout aimed at easing lending access. While larger corporations have shown resilience in recent earnings, the NFIB data highlights a growing divergence between Wall Street and Main Street.

NFIB Chief Economist Bill Dunkelberg stated, “Small business owners are facing a perfect storm of cost pressures that could dampen the broader recovery if not addressed.”

Stay tuned for updates as this story develops, including potential reactions from Washington and state-level policy responses.

JbizNews Desk

New York, April 30, 2026 – New York City Mayor Zohran Mamdani and City Council Speaker Julie Menin are intensifying efforts to scale back a major tax benefit used by businesses and pass-through entities as the city battles a projected multi-billion-dollar two-year budget deficit. The proposal would reduce the Pass-Through Entity Tax (PTET) credit from a full 100% rebate to 75%, a move officials estimate could generate roughly $1 billion annually in new revenue.

The push, which gained fresh momentum today in afternoon discussions, has triggered immediate pushback from business groups who warn it could exacerbate economic pressures on Main Street operators already facing higher insurance costs and tighter credit conditions.

What’s Impacting Businesses: Political and Economic Drivers

Politically:

The initiative reflects ongoing fiscal tensions in New York City’s leadership as officials seek to close budget gaps without broad-based tax hikes on residents. It comes amid the broader post-2024 national political environment, where local governments are under pressure to balance progressive spending priorities with business competitiveness. Critics argue the change could send a negative signal to companies weighing relocation or expansion decisions in a high-cost urban center.

Economically:

The PTET credit has been a critical tool for small businesses, LLCs, S-corps, and professional services firms to offset state and local taxes. Reducing it would directly raise effective tax burdens, potentially squeezing margins for neighborhood retailers, restaurants, and manufacturers still recovering from recent supply-chain and insurance challenges. Business leaders have expressed concern that the move could slow hiring, spur price increases, or accelerate out-migration of firms to lower-tax jurisdictions — compounding existing headwinds in the local economy.

Broader Context and Related Developments

This development follows recent JBizNews coverage of rising insurance costs for small retailers and comes as federal programs like the State Small Business Credit Initiative (SSBCI) continue to support lending through state-level channels. No immediate statewide legislative vote has been scheduled, but the proposal is expected to fuel heated debates in coming weeks.

Other notable business headlines today include Uber’s expansion into direct hotel bookings and vacation rentals via partnerships with Expedia and Vrbo, positioning the company as a potential one-stop travel platform.

Stay tuned for updates as this story develops.

JbizNews Desk

Elon Musk reportedly said he felt like a “fool” for backing Sam Altman’s OpenAI.

The testimony came in Musk’s lawsuit accusing OpenAI of abandoning its mission to develop artificial intelligence for the benefit of humanity. 

ELON MUSK ATTORNEY CLAIMS OPENAI, SAM ALTMAN ‘STOLE A CHARITY’ AS HIGH-STAKES LEGAL FIGHT BEGINS

Musk, who contributed millions, said he believed he was supporting a nonprofit venture, according to Reuters.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“I felt like they had not been honest with me,” Musk said on Wednesday. “What they really wanted to do was create a for-profit where they had as much shareholder ownership as possible.”

This is a developing story. Please check back for updates.

This post was originally published here

President Donald Trump signed an executive order on Thursday to help expand access to retirement savings accounts for Americans who do not have employer-provided plans.

“Beginning at the start of next year, every American will be able to go to TrumpIra.gov and open a new low-cost IRA account,” Trump said in the Oval Office. “You’ll then be able to access the same type of retirement accounts that federal employees enjoy through the Thrift Savings Plans, which are incredible. As part of the Federal Savings Match program, low-income Americans will be eligible to receive up to $1,000 per year in matching funds deposited directly into their accounts.”

“The great thing for millions of Americans who lack employer-sponsored plans, this will be really revolutionary because they’ll be covered,” Trump said. “Nobody thought that was possible. For example, if a 25-year-old who is eligible for a Savers Match program invest just $165 a month under the matching federal contributions, they will have an estimated $465,000 in their account by the time they’re 65 years old. In other words, they’ll be rich. And there’s something awfully nice about that.”

A White House official confirmed the planned order to FOX Business earlier Thursday. 

The Trump administration’s effort will work in conjunction with 2022 legislation that instructs the federal government to match retirement-plan contributions for people earning below $35,000 with as much as $1,000 beginning next year,” Semafor reported.

US RAKES IN $3B IN 90 DAYS FROM INTEL STOCK, TRUMP SAYS

The president’s new order will instruct the Treasury Department to open a TrumpIRA.gov website by the time the matching opportunity takes effect in January, a White House official indicated. Workers will be able to utilize the site to filter private-sector retirement plans based on different factors so they can join one that would enable them to receive the match if qualified.

TREASURY FREEZES $344M IN CRYPTO AS ‘OPERATION ECONOMIC FURY’ PUSHES IRAN TO INDUSTRIAL BREAKING POINT

The department will screen the plans on the site, but will not team up with certain financial institutions like it did with Trump Accounts, the official noted, according to Semafor.

FEDERAL GOVERNMENT MADE $186B IN IMPROPER PAYMENTS LAST FISCAL YEAR

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

The order will instruct the Treasury Department to publicize the match and release information for those in the private sector who wish to give workers’ IRAs, the outlet reported, adding that the White House official compared the concept to the Dells’ pledge to seed Trump Accounts for kids.

Fox News’ Patrick Ward contributed to this report

This post was originally published here

Hertz is expanding beyond its traditional car rental business through a new partnership with Uber aimed at powering both autonomous robotaxi fleets and driver-led rideshare operations, signaling a broader shift in the transportation industry.

Under the agreement, Hertz’s newly launched unit, Oro Mobility, will manage vehicle operations for Uber, including maintenance, charging, cleaning and logistics for autonomous vehicles. 

The robotaxi service – which will use Lucid vehicles equipped with Nuro self-driving technology – is expected to launch in the San Francisco Bay Area later this year, with potential “expansion opportunities” in 2027.

Hertz will also supply and operate fleets of vehicles driven by its own employees on Uber’s platform, building on a pilot program that has already expanded into Los Angeles and San Francisco, with additional markets planned.

UBER, RIVIAN INK $1.25B DEAL TO PUT THOUSANDS OF ROBOTAXIS ON US STREETS

The partnership highlights a shift in the ridesharing model away from individual car ownership toward centrally managed fleets. Hertz is positioning itself as a transportation infrastructure provider, leveraging its expertise in large-scale vehicle logistics and maintenance.

Uber, meanwhile, is continuing to emphasize a platform-driven model, relying on partners like Hertz to manage fleet operations as it scales both human-driven and autonomous rides.

For Hertz, the deal represents a high-stakes bet on a new growth strategy following years of turbulence, while for Uber it marks another step toward a hybrid network that could eventually integrate human drivers with self-driving vehicles at scale.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

“Partnering with Hertz’s Oro Mobility will help us continue to bring the best autonomous technology onto the Uber platform and accelerate the transition to a hybrid network in which both driver-led and autonomous rideshare operations can scale and serve communities reliably and efficiently,” UBER Andrew Macdonald, said in a statement. 

“By combining Uber’s global platform and marketplace leadership with Oro’s dedicated fleet management expertise, we are well-equipped to meet increasing rideshare demand and deliver a seamless, high-quality rider experience across the entire mobility ecosystem.”

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk — April 30, 2026

The U.S. Small Business Administration today launched a new $12 billion low-interest loan initiative specifically tailored for small retailers struggling with soaring insurance premiums and persistent labor costs. The program, announced via official SBA channels, offers flexible financing at rates as low as 4 percent with repayment terms designed to provide immediate breathing room for independent stores, boutiques, and neighborhood retailers already navigating thin margins amid high gas prices and cautious consumer spending.

This targeted relief comes as small retailers across the country report insurance costs up sharply due to rising claims and reinsurance pressures, while labor expenses remain elevated even as hiring has cooled. By directing capital straight to Main Street shops, the SBA aims to prevent further store closures and support the very businesses that anchor local communities and drive everyday consumer activity.

How the Program Works for Small Retailers

• Loans up to $2 million per business with interest rates starting at 4 percent and terms extending to 10 years, focused on covering insurance deductibles, premium payments, and workforce-related costs such as training or retention bonuses.

• Streamlined application process through participating lenders with expedited approvals for retailers demonstrating need tied to recent cost spikes.

• Funds can be used for working capital, equipment upgrades, or hiring incentives, with no collateral required for smaller amounts to reduce barriers for family-owned operations.

Economists described the rollout as a timely intervention for a sector under mounting pressure, with Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, noting that skyrocketing insurance and labor costs have become existential threats for many small retailers already facing softer demand from high gas prices and budget-conscious families; Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, pointed out the ripple effects for Main Street, saying these loans could help stabilize local employment and keep neighborhood stores open at a time when cautious consumer spending is weighing on discretionary retail; Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, emphasized that while the program will not solve every challenge, it removes a key financial bottleneck and aligns with broader trends of supporting small businesses to maintain economic resilience beyond large chains; Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that easier access to capital for labor needs could encourage more selective hiring and training investments in retail communities; and Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, advised small-retailer clients to review eligibility closely, saying early adopters may gain a meaningful edge on costs but should pair the financing with careful cash-flow planning to avoid over-reliance on any single program.

Small retailers are already responding positively in preliminary feedback shared with the SBA. Independent grocers, apparel boutiques, and hardware stores in high-cost regions report that the low-interest capital will allow them to maintain staffing levels and absorb insurance hikes without passing full costs to customers — a critical factor as households continue to prioritize essentials over non-essential shopping.

Outlook

The SBA’s $12 billion low-interest loan program marks a direct effort to shore up the backbone of American retail at a moment when small businesses are feeling the cumulative strain of today’s economic environment. For everyday operators and the communities they serve, the initiative offers practical relief that could help sustain jobs, preserve local shopping options, and ease some of the cost pressures that have defined much of the day’s business coverage.

The coming weeks will reveal how quickly funds are deployed and whether the program delivers the intended stability for small retailers. For business enthusiasts and Main Street owners, this development underscores the importance of proactive financing strategies in a high-cost landscape. Tomorrow’s updates on retail earnings and small-business sentiment will provide the next read on how effectively this support translates into real-world resilience.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited

Bayer issued a recall for nearly 800,000 units of Afrin nasal spray bottles after the packaging was found not to be child resistant on Thursday.

The U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) announced the recall Thursday, saying any customers who purchased the product are entitled to a refund. The recall impacts 786,100 units of the 6ml travel sixe Afrin nasal spray.

“This recall involves unexpired Travel Size Afrin® Original Nasal Spray 6 mL bottles, with Lot numbers 230361, 240822, 241198, 250066, 250152, 250646, and 250831. These travel size bottles have ‘Afrin® Original Nasal Spray’ and ‘1/5 FL OZ (6 mL)’ printed on a label located on the front of the bottle,” the CPSC recall reads.

“The 6 mL nasal spray’s packaging is not child-resistant nor bears the required labeling statement, posing a risk of serious injury or illness from poisoning if the contents are swallowed by young children,” the statement added.

BEEF STICKS FOOD PRODUCT RECALLED FOR ‘PIECES OF METAL’ FOUND INSIDE

No injuries have been reported in connection with the recall.

The news comes just a day after nearly 13,000 toddler towers across three brands were recalled after dozens of incidents and 21 injuries were reported due to stools collapsing or tipping, according to the CPSC.

The three affected products — Toetol Tower Stools, Wiifo Children’s Tower Stools and Amzcmj DGD Children’s Tower Stools — total about 12,830 stools, according to notices from the Consumer Product Safety Commission.

CHOCOLATE-COVERED SNACK PRODUCT SOLD IN 16 STATES RECALLED FOR POTENTIALLY UNDECLARED ALMONDS AND CASHEWS

The recall covers about 3,000 Toetol Tower Stools, 9,700 Wiifo Children’s Tower Stools and 130 Amzcmj DGD Children’s Tower Stools.

“The recalled tower stools can collapse or tip over while in use and a child’s torso can fit through the openings on the tower’s sides, posing a risk of serious injury and death due to tip over, fall and entrapment hazards,” the notices read.

For the Toetol Tower Stools, there have been 18 reports of the stools collapsing, resulting in 11 injuries, including contusions, cuts and scrapes.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

The wooden kitchen tower step stools were sold in white, gray and dark wood colors and measure about 20 inches deep, 15 inches wide and 36 inches tall with model DETD0001 printed on a label on the side. They were sold online on Amazon from October 2024 through March 2026 for about $130.

This post was originally published here

WASHINGTON — Buying a first home in America has rarely been more difficult, as elevated mortgage rates, limited inventory, and persistently high prices continue to sideline millions of would-be buyers — even as government and nonprofit assistance programs expand to record levels.

Across the housing market, prospective buyers are facing a convergence of financial barriers. Higher borrowing costs, tighter lending standards, and a shortage of affordable listings are creating a bottleneck that disproportionately impacts first-time buyers, who typically lack the savings and credit depth of repeat homeowners. In many markets, renters are delaying purchases indefinitely or abandoning homeownership plans altogether.

New data from LendingTree highlights the widening affordability gap. As of early 2026, homeowners with mortgages are paying 36.9% more per month than renters, translating to roughly $548 extra monthly or more than $6,500 annually. In 22 of the 100 largest U.S. metropolitan areas, the cost of owning exceeds renting by at least 50%, underscoring how sharply the economics have shifted against entry-level buyers.

Income requirements further illustrate the divide. Analysts estimate that prospective buyers now need to earn approximately $111,000 per year to afford a typical home, compared to about $76,000 for renters — a gap that places homeownership out of reach for a large share of American households.

Mike Fratantoni, Chief Economist at the Mortgage Bankers Association, said demand remains supported by a resilient labor market, even as affordability pressures intensify. “We are seeing continued interest from buyers,” Fratantoni noted, adding that in many areas, rising inventory relative to last year is beginning to shift conditions toward a more balanced market. Still, 30-year fixed mortgage rates hovering near 6.5% continue to weigh heavily on purchasing power.

At the same time, policymakers and housing advocates are expanding efforts to bridge the gap. Down Payment Resource, a leading housing data firm, reported in its Q1 2026 Homeownership Program Index that there are now 2,679 homebuyer assistance programs nationwide, marking a 2% increase from the prior quarter and extending a steady upward trend.

These programs span a wide range of targeted support, including grants and low-interest loans for veterans, educators, law enforcement personnel, and first responders, as well as new initiatives aimed at expanding access to manufactured housing and multi-unit properties. The goal is to reduce upfront costs, particularly the down payment barrier that remains one of the biggest hurdles for first-time buyers.

But despite the growing number of programs, structural affordability challenges persist. With the median U.S. household income around $86,000, homeownership still requires earning roughly $25,000 more per year than what most Americans make — a gap that assistance programs alone have struggled to close.

Housing analysts say meaningful improvement will likely depend on a combination of factors rather than a single solution. Increased construction of lower-priced homes, even modest declines in mortgage rates, and stable rent growth that allows renters to build savings are all seen as critical to restoring balance.

Some regions are beginning to show early signs of progress, particularly where inventory has improved and bidding wars have cooled. However, those gains remain uneven, and many first-time buyers continue to find themselves priced out of neighborhoods near employment centers and transportation hubs.

For now, the trajectory is clear: while support programs are expanding, the fundamental math of homeownership remains challenging — leaving a growing number of Americans on the sidelines of the housing market.

JBizNews- Desk

Defense Secretary Pete Hegseth faced one of his sharpest Capitol Hill confrontations yet on Wednesday as House Democrats challenged the cost, legal basis and military consequences of the U.S. conflict with Iran, with lawmakers zeroing in on a Pentagon estimate that the war has already consumed about $25 billion. Reuters reported the hearing marked Hegseth’s first extended public defense of the campaign before the House Armed Services Committee, where members argued the spending surge could complicate the administration’s broader defense budget push.

The $25 billion figure emerged as part of Pentagon budget discussions tied to the administration’s fiscal 2027 defense proposal, and John Calhoun, identified in the hearing as deputy comptroller at the Department of Defense, said, according to the committee proceedings and reporting from Reuters, that “our current estimate puts the total at $25 billion.” That number quickly became a political fault line, with Democrats arguing the conflict’s cost now reaches beyond military planning and into fiscal policy, especially as the administration seeks a much larger national security budget.

Democrats also used the hearing to question whether the campaign has strained key U.S. weapons inventories, particularly air-defense systems. Rep. John Garamendi, a California Democrat, accused the administration of misleading the public, saying, as quoted by the Associated Press, “Secretary Hegseth, you have been lying to the American public about this war from day one and so has the president.” Garamendi called the operation a “geopolitical calamity” and a “strategic blunder,” according to AP, reflecting broader concern that the war has drained munitions stockpiles at a time of rising global security demands.

Hegseth rejected that line of attack and framed the criticism as politically motivated. In remarks published in the official transcript by the U.S. House of Representatives, Hegseth told lawmakers, “The biggest challenge, the biggest adversary we face at this point are the reckless, feckless and defeatist words of congressional Democrats and some Republicans.” His response underscored how the administration intends to defend the campaign not only on strategic grounds but also as a test of political resolve.

A particularly tense exchange came when Rep. Adam Smith of Washington, the committee’s top Democrat, pressed Hegseth on what he described as conflicting administration claims about Iran’s nuclear program. According to AP News, Smith said, “We had to start this war, you just said 60 days ago, because the nuclear weapon posed an imminent threat,” questioning how that rationale aligned with earlier assertions that Iranian nuclear facilities had already been crippled. The exchange highlighted a central issue for lawmakers: whether the administration’s public case for military action has remained consistent.

Hegseth answered that Iran still poses a serious threat despite earlier military action. According to the hearing record cited in the source material, Hegseth said Iran “still retains thousands of missiles and has not abandoned its nuclear ambitions,” arguing that continued operations remain strategically justified. That defense goes to the heart of the White House position that the conflict, while costly, aims to prevent a broader regional escalation and deter future attacks.

The hearing also widened into a debate over leadership turmoil inside the Pentagon. Rep. Chrissy Houlahan of Pennsylvania challenged Hegseth over the removal of senior officers, including Army Chief of Staff Gen. Randy George, saying, according to the committee exchange cited in the source material, “You have no way of explaining why you removed one of the most decorated and remarkable men.” Hegseth replied that “new leadership” remains necessary to build what he has repeatedly described in public remarks as a “warrior culture” inside the department, linking personnel changes to his broader effort to reshape military command.

Even some Republicans signaled discomfort with that approach. Rep. Don Bacon of Nebraska said, as quoted by Bloomberg, “We had a huge bipartisan majority here that had confidence in the Army chief of staff and the secretary of the navy,” adding that while the dismissals may be lawful, they “do not make them right or wise.” That criticism matters because it suggests unease inside the president’s own party over whether wartime leadership changes could disrupt military continuity at a sensitive moment.

Outside the hearing room, the conflict’s economic and geopolitical effects continue to build. The source material says a fragile ceasefire remains in place while disruption around the Strait of Hormuz has pushed fuel prices higher, adding pressure on consumers and on lawmakers heading into the midterm cycle. In comments cited by CNBC, John Kirby of the White House National Security Council said, “We remain committed to a diplomatic solution while ensuring regional security,” signaling that the administration wants to preserve room for negotiations even as it defends military operations.

What comes next could prove as consequential as the hearing itself. Lawmakers from both parties are expected to pursue new war-powers measures and demand more detail on how the Pentagon plans to finance the conflict and replenish depleted weapons inventories, according to the source material and reporting tied to the hearing. For businesses, markets and defense contractors, the next phase matters because it will shape not only the trajectory of U.S. policy toward Iran but also the scale of future military spending, supply-chain pressure in munitions production and the political durability of the administration’s national security agenda.

JBizNews Middle East Desk

WASHINGTON — America’s small businesses are accelerating hiring at one of the fastest paces in years, but a persistent shortage of qualified workers is limiting how far that momentum can go, with owners across the country increasingly saying their biggest constraint is not demand, but finding people capable of doing the job.

New payroll data from Gusto shows small businesses added an estimated 119,400 net jobs in March 2026, marking the strongest monthly gain since 2022 and nearly double the 49,900 jobs added in March 2025. The hiring surge was broad-based, spanning 18 of 19 industry sectors and all four U.S. regions, signaling that demand for labor remains resilient despite ongoing economic uncertainty.

Sector-level gains were led by healthcare, which added 24,200 jobs, followed by accommodation and food services at 17,400, and retail trade with 12,800 new positions, according to Gusto’s labor market report. The data underscores that consumer-facing industries and essential services continue to drive hiring demand across the small business ecosystem.

Much of that growth is being powered by the smallest employers. Businesses with fewer than 20 employees created more than 525,000 jobs in 2025, outperforming all other employer size categories, and added roughly 200,000 additional jobs in the first quarter of 2026 alone, reinforcing their outsized role in the U.S. labor market.

Yet beneath the strong hiring numbers lies a structural challenge that continues to weigh on growth. The National Federation of Independent Business (NFIB) reports that 32% of small business owners had job openings they could not fill in March — well above the historical average of 24%. Among those actively hiring, 87% said they received few or no qualified applicants, highlighting a deep mismatch between job openings and workforce readiness.

NFIB Chief Economist Bill Dunkelberg said the issue is not a lack of willingness to hire, but persistent constraints tied to both labor costs and worker quality. “Small business owners remain eager to expand their workforce,” Dunkelberg noted, “but the ongoing shortage of qualified applicants continues to limit their ability to fully capitalize on demand.”

The strain is also visible in wage data. According to the U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, average hourly earnings for private-sector workers reached $37.38 in March 2026, up 3.5% year over year. Despite rising compensation, employers say higher pay alone is not enough to solve the hiring gap.

Instead, the problem is increasingly centered on skills. Hiring managers point to shortages in systems management, decision-making, and complex problem-solving abilities — capabilities that are difficult to train quickly and remain in short supply across the labor pool.

That gap is pushing businesses to rethink workforce development strategies, with AI training emerging as a critical priority. Surveys show 83% of job seekers and 86% of hiring managers believe formal AI training should be a central focus for companies looking to attract and retain talent.

Bob Funk Jr., CEO of Express Employment International, said many companies have invested heavily in technology but have lagged in equipping workers to use it effectively. “Businesses have done a good job implementing new tools,” Funk said, “but there’s a growing realization that without proper training, the productivity gains simply don’t materialize.”

For small business owners, the contrast is stark. On paper, hiring is strong and demand remains healthy. But on the ground, the reality is more complicated — job postings stay open longer, productivity is constrained, and growth opportunities are delayed by an inability to fully staff operations.

The result is a labor market that appears robust at the headline level but remains structurally tight where it matters most: skills.

Looking ahead, economists say the trajectory of small business growth will depend less on demand conditions and more on whether the workforce can adapt — through training, education, and reskilling — to meet evolving employer needs. Without that shift, the current hiring momentum risks hitting a ceiling, even as opportunities continue to expand.

JBizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk

NEW YORK — April 30, 2026

Netflix (NASDAQ: NFLX) shares have tumbled more than 32% from their 52-week high, trading near $91–92 after the company’s Q1 2026 earnings report. While the streaming giant posted strong results — revenue up 16% year-over-year, operating income up 18%, and free cash flow exploding to $5.2 billion — investors focused on forward guidance that came in slightly below some Wall Street expectations and the announcement that co-founder Reed Hastings will step down from the board in June.

The sell-off also followed Netflix’s decision not to pursue a major acquisition of Warner Bros. Discovery amid a bidding war with Paramount Skydance.

Why This Is a Major Buying Opportunity

Despite the sharp pullback, Netflix remains fundamentally strong. The company’s stockholders’ equity has grown to $31.1 billion, and it continues to generate massive free cash flow. Subscriber growth, pricing power, and the expanding ad-tier are driving sustainable revenue. Long-term tailwinds — international expansion, live events, gaming, and video podcasts — position Netflix as the clear leader in global streaming.

At current levels, the stock trades at a more reasonable valuation relative to its durable competitive moat and cash-generating ability. Analysts largely maintain a Buy rating, viewing the pullback as an overreaction to short-term guidance rather than any structural weakness.

Business Implications

For long-term investors, the 32% decline creates a compelling entry point into one of the highest-quality growth franchises in tech and media. While near-term volatility from content spending and macro pressures may linger, Netflix’s balance sheet strength and strategic clarity make it well-positioned to rebound as the market refocuses on execution rather than headlines.

The stock’s reaction highlights how even market leaders can face sharp corrections on guidance misses — but history shows Netflix has consistently rewarded patient investors who buy during periods of doubt.

— JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

Starbucks delivered a stronger-than-expected rebound in U.S. sales, giving investors an early sign that its costly push to add labor and improve store operations is starting to gain traction. According to Reuters, the coffee chain reported U.S. comparable sales growth of 7.1% for the quarter ended March 31, well ahead of analysts’ 4.5% estimate, while the company said in its earnings release that the gain “reflects the impact of deeper staffing and enhanced partner benefits.”

The result matters because Starbucks has spent heavily to stabilize its core U.S. business after a period of uneven traffic, slower service and labor tension. On the company’s earnings call, chief executive Laxman Narasimhan said, “We have committed $500 million to our partners, from wage lifts to expanded health, parental and education benefits, because we believe a thriving workforce fuels a thriving brand,” according to the company transcript and filings. In the same quarterly disclosure filed with the SEC, Starbucks said average total compensation for baristas is now close to $30 an hour.

Management tied the sales improvement directly to better execution inside stores rather than to broad price increases alone. In comments reported by Fortune, chief operating officer Mike Grams said, “It really comes from the coffee houses and the partners who empower them, which has been a focal point of this turnaround all along,” adding that higher staffing levels helped stores “run more consistently.” That operational message aligned with company foot-traffic data cited by Bloomberg, which reported a 4.4% increase in U.S. store visits, marking a second straight quarter of growth.

The company’s finance team also pointed to a more basic retail advantage: customers are returning when service improves. In a statement reported by Bloomberg, Starbucks finance leadership said “higher customer frequency is a direct result of reduced wait times and more reliable order fulfillment,” linking the gain to a peak-hour staffing model introduced under Narasimhan. For a chain that depends on repeat morning traffic and mobile-order reliability, that claim carries weight beyond one quarter because it suggests the company’s labor investment is improving throughput, not simply raising costs.

Profit growth added to the argument that the spending is producing measurable returns. According to MarketWatch, citing the company’s quarterly filing, Starbucks posted net income of $560 million, its first quarterly profit increase in two years, while the earnings release said “operating margins benefited from better labor efficiency and reduced waste.” That combination of stronger same-store sales and improving margins is closely watched on Wall Street because it suggests the chain may be finding a way to protect profitability even as wages and benefits rise.

Still, the labor story remains unsettled, and that could shape the next phase of the turnaround. Michelle Eisen, a spokesperson for Starbucks Workers United, told Fortune that “the reality of working at Starbucks is that stores are understaffed, workers are struggling to get by, and lack critical on-the-job protections.” Her comments came as the union and Starbucks moved back toward talks after agreeing to return to the bargaining table, a development widely covered by major outlets and one that investors view as critical to future labor costs and store-level stability.

Analysts say the quarter strengthens management’s case that better staffing can drive both traffic and customer spending, but they also caution that the model still faces a cost test. Bloomberg cited retail analyst Emily Chiu saying that “the staffing investment should translate into higher average ticket size and lower churn among high-performing stores,” while noting that a higher cost base still needs to be justified through sustained sales momentum. That balance matters for Starbucks because the company is trying to prove that service-led growth can offset inflationary pressure across labor, ingredients and occupancy.

Operational consistency appears central to that effort. In his interview with Fortune, Grams said, “Our highest-performing coffee houses are far more likely to have leaders who’ve been in the role over a year,” and he added that 95% of partners now receive preferred schedules while 98% of shifts are filled. Those figures, attributed to Starbucks management, suggest the company is trying to reduce turnover and improve store leadership depth, two issues that have weighed on service standards across the broader restaurant sector.

The next question for investors is whether one strong quarter can develop into a durable pattern. A note reported in the source material said analysts at Goldman Sachs expect upcoming quarters to test whether bargaining talks, payroll inflation and service investments can stay aligned, with a spokesperson saying investors should watch “the outcome of bargaining talks and the company’s ability to keep bonus targets aligned with customer-experience goals.” If Starbucks can keep traffic rising while preserving margin gains, the company’s $500 million labor bet could become a rare example of higher retail staffing directly supporting growth rather than simply protecting the brand.

By JBizNews Desk

NEW YORK — April 30, 2026

SpaceX’s ambitious plans for a direct-to-cell satellite phone service — allowing ordinary smartphones to connect directly to Starlink satellites without traditional cell towers — are running into strong opposition from AT&T.

The carrier is actively lobbying regulators and pushing back against FCC approvals that would let SpaceX roll out the service nationwide, arguing it could interfere with existing terrestrial networks and create unfair competition in the wireless market.

Industry sources say AT&T is concerned that a SpaceX-backed satellite phone would bypass traditional carriers’ infrastructure, potentially disrupting billions in annual revenue from spectrum usage and roaming agreements.

Business Implications

If SpaceX succeeds despite the pushback, it could revolutionize mobile connectivity in remote and underserved areas, putting pressure on legacy carriers like AT&T, Verizon, and T-Mobile. A successful direct-to-cell rollout would also accelerate SpaceX’s Starlink revenue growth and strengthen Elon Musk’s vision of global internet and phone coverage from space.

For investors, the standoff highlights the intense regulatory and competitive battles ahead in the satellite-to-phone space. Any delay or compromise could slow SpaceX’s consumer hardware ambitions, while a win for AT&T might preserve carrier dominance in the short term.

The FCC is expected to rule on key aspects of the proposal in the coming months. JBizNews will continue monitoring developments between SpaceX, AT&T, and federal regulators.

— JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

FedEx and UPS say they plan to return tariff-related refunds to customers if the U.S. government pays back duties tied to now-invalidated import levies, a step that could ripple through shipping bills and e-commerce costs for businesses and households. In statements reported by Reuters, Bloomberg and company materials, both parcel carriers signaled that any money recovered through the customs refund process would go back to the shippers that ultimately bore the charges, rather than stay on the companies’ books.

At UPS, Chief Executive Carol Tomé said on the company’s earnings presentation that the carrier is “working with Customs and Border Protection to apply for those refunds and will remit the money directly to our customers as soon as it arrives,” according to a company release. That commitment matters because UPS sits at the center of cross-border parcel flows for retailers, manufacturers and small businesses, and any refund program could affect pricing just as companies continue to navigate softer freight demand and pressure on consumer spending.

FedEx made a similar pledge. A company spokesperson told Fortune that “if refunds are issued to FedEx, we will issue refunds to the shippers and consumers who originally bore those charges,” underscoring that the company views itself as a conduit rather than the final beneficiary. The statement follows earlier legal action by FedEx challenging the tariff burden, and it positions the Memphis-based carrier to compete on service and trust at a time when logistics providers are trying to hold onto margin without alienating customers.

The refund issue traces back to a recent U.S. Supreme Court decision that struck down tariffs imposed under the International Emergency Economic Powers Act, overturning a key legal basis for the duties. While the exact scope of recoverable amounts still depends on customs processing and claim validation, the ruling opened the door for importers and intermediaries to seek reimbursement. Fortune reported that Commerce Secretary Scott Bessent voiced skepticism about whether consumers would ultimately benefit, saying, “I got a feeling the American people won’t see it,” a remark that sharpened attention on whether large companies would keep the proceeds or pass them through.

The mechanics now rest largely with U.S. Customs and Border Protection. CBP recently launched its Consolidated Administration and Processing of Entries, or CAPE, portal to centralize claims, and Deputy Commissioner Mark Morgan told Reuters that the system gives importers “a single point of entry for refund applications and accelerates processing.” CBP has said an initial wave of payouts could arrive within 60 to 90 days, a timeline that gives finance chiefs and supply-chain managers a near-term window to assess how much cash could flow back and how quickly it could reach customers.

Treasury officials also indicated they are preparing for a sizable administrative effort. MarketWatch reported that Treasury Undersecretary for Domestic Finance Neil Barr said, “We anticipate completing the first batch of refunds within the 60-90-day window outlined by CBP,” while adding that the department intends to monitor the flow of funds for transparency. That point matters for corporate customers because the value of a refund may depend not only on legal eligibility but also on recordkeeping, shipment documentation and whether carriers can match recovered duties to specific accounts.

For UPS, the accounting treatment and timing could become a closely watched issue in coming quarters. Bloomberg cited UPS Chief Financial Officer Brian Sutherland telling analysts that “our approach is collaborative; we are not pursuing litigation against the government,” and that the company expects to credit shippers after funds arrive. That language suggests UPS wants to avoid a prolonged courtroom fight and instead rely on the administrative process, a choice that may appeal to customers seeking certainty but could still leave open questions about timing if claims move more slowly than expected.

The broader economic backdrop helps explain why the issue has drawn so much attention. The Associated Press reported on consumer frustration with tariff charges attached to relatively small purchases, quoting one shopper who said, “It didn’t make sense to pay a $10 tariff on a $27 purchase.” Fortune, citing Federal Reserve data, said households absorbed roughly 90% of the levy burden, reinforcing the view that tariff costs often traveled through the supply chain to end buyers rather than staying with importers or carriers.

Small businesses, which often lack the pricing power of larger retailers, stand to feel the impact most directly if refunds arrive. Reuters quoted Seattle apparel shop owner Linda Cheng saying, “We’re counting on the rebate to keep our pricing competitive and protect margins,” a practical reminder that shipping surcharges and import duties can quickly erode profitability for merchants that depend on parcel networks for fulfillment. For those companies, even modest reimbursements could help offset inventory costs ahead of key seasonal selling periods.

Wall Street is also weighing the implications, though analysts appear careful not to treat the potential refunds as a clean earnings windfall. Bloomberg cited Morgan Stanley analyst Priya Patel saying, “The timing of these cash-back payments could add a meaningful boost to UPS’s Q3 top-line, especially as e-commerce volumes remain strong,” while also noting that FedEx could gain goodwill with business customers by honoring pass-through refunds. Even so, any benefit to reported revenue or customer retention will depend on when the government pays, how much each carrier recovers and whether the funds simply reverse prior charges rather than create new demand.

What comes next is less about legal theory than execution. If CBP and Treasury meet their stated 60-to-90-day target, shippers could begin seeing credits later this summer, giving retailers and importers a small but tangible cost release before year-end planning intensifies. If delays emerge, the episode could become another test of how quickly Washington can translate court rulings into real economic relief. For customers of FedEx and UPS, the key issue now is straightforward: whether the promised refunds move from corporate statements into actual account credits, and how much that changes shipping economics in the second half of the year.

JBizNews Desk

President Donald Trump says the U.S. has brought in $30 billion in funds generated from federal stock holdings in Intel over the past 90 days alone.

Trump made the announcement on Thursday, highlighting that he authorized the U.S. government to invest in the semiconductor manufacturing company. Trump revealed in August of last year that Intel had agreed to the federal government acquiring a 10% stake in the company.

“Intel Stock continues to rise. I’m very proud of that Company in that I am responsible for making the United States of America over 30 Billion Dollars in the last 90 days on that stock alone,” Trump wrote.

“There are others that, likewise, I have been very successful with by taking pieces of the Equity for support. Congratulations to Intel on doing such a great job and, more importantly, congratulations to the People of the United States for making such a good investment!” he added.

PROTECTING AMERICANS’ DATA FROM CHINA IS CENTRAL TO AN AMERICA FIRST AGENDA

The administration announced the deal with Intel when the company was struggling last year. Semiconductors power everything from smartphones to defense systems, and Intel’s slowdown was a national security concern, industry analysts say.

Intel unveiled new chip manufacturing milestones in early January, accounting for much of its growth. Nevertheless, former Intel CEO Pat Gelsinger warned at the time that the United States still has a long way to go to reclaim chip production from Asia.

“The metric [is] though, how many wafers are being built in America,” Gelsinger said in January on “The Claman Countdown.”

US CAN’T CUT CHINA OFF COMPLETELY, BUT MUST DEFEND AI AND AMERICAN INNOVATION FROM NONSTOP THEFT: SEN ROUNDS

“That is the only thing that matters,” he added.

Much of the world’s advanced chip manufacturing remains concentrated in Asia, particularly Taiwan. U.S. officials have said the imbalance poses economic and national security concerns.

Gelsinger said it is critical that manufacturing return to the United States, while cautioning that progress will take time.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

“It’s hard to win that manufacturing back. You know it took decades for it to sediment into Asia. It doesn’t come back quickly,” he said.

FOX Business’ Madison Colombo contirbued to this report.

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk

NEW YORK — April 30, 2026

Major U.S. airlines including Delta, United, and American issued fresh warnings Thursday that the explosive rise in jet fuel prices — now tracking crude above $125 per barrel — will significantly pressure second-quarter margins and could force fare increases or capacity cuts later this year.

Jet fuel, which typically accounts for 25-35% of airline operating costs, has spiked more than 40% in the past month alone. Carriers are already burning through hedges put in place earlier in the year and are now facing the full brunt of spot-market pricing.

Business Implications

The oil shock is hitting the travel sector at a particularly vulnerable time, just as summer booking season begins. Investors are pricing in lower guidance for the group, with airline stocks opening sharply lower in pre-market trading. Leisure and business travel demand remains solid, but higher ticket prices could begin to dampen consumer enthusiasm if the energy crisis persists into the peak summer months.

— JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

General Dynamics opened 2025 with stronger-than-expected sales growth as submarine construction and business-jet deliveries lifted first-quarter revenue to $12.22 billion, underscoring how defense spending and corporate aviation demand continue to support one of the sector’s broadest portfolios. In its April 24 earnings release, General Dynamics said revenue rose 13.9% from a year earlier, while Chairman and Chief Executive Phebe Novakovic said, “We had a solid start to 2025 with strong operating performance across the company.”

The company’s top line came in ahead of Wall Street expectations, and profit also improved, helped by a sharp gain in its marine business. According to Reuters, analysts had expected roughly $11.9 billion in quarterly revenue, while diluted earnings per share reached $3.66. In the company statement, Novakovic said operating earnings rose 22.4% to $1.3 billion, adding that “demand for our products and services remains strong,” a point echoed in the earnings materials filed by General Dynamics.

The biggest contribution came from the shipbuilding unit, where revenue jumped 30.5% to $3.85 billion as work accelerated on U.S. Navy programs including Virginia-class submarines and Columbia-class ballistic missile submarines. In the earnings release, General Dynamics said marine systems growth reflected “higher volume in submarine programs and surface combatants,” while Reuters noted that investors have closely tracked execution across the defense industrial base as the Pentagon pushes contractors to improve output on priority naval platforms.

Aerospace, home to the Gulfstream business-jet franchise, also delivered a solid quarter, with revenue rising 45.2% to $3.37 billion. In its release, General Dynamics said the increase reflected “higher aircraft deliveries and stronger services activity,” and Novakovic told investors the segment benefited from “continued robust demand” for Gulfstream aircraft. Coverage from CNBC and Reuters has highlighted how the large-cabin jet market remains resilient even as some industrial sectors face slower order trends.

The company’s combat systems and technologies businesses posted more modest growth, showing steadier demand across land systems, IT services and mission-support work. General Dynamics reported combat systems revenue of $2.09 billion, up 3.5%, and technologies revenue of $2.91 billion, up 2.3%. In the company filing, Chief Financial Officer Jason Aiken said margins improved in several businesses, and General Dynamics pointed to “favorable contract mix and operating performance” as drivers, according to the earnings presentation released alongside results.

Orders remained a central part of the story. General Dynamics said companywide backlog stood at about $93.7 billion at the end of the quarter, a figure that gives investors a clearer read on future revenue than a single quarter’s earnings beat. In its release, Novakovic said the backlog “continues to provide strong visibility,” while Bloomberg has reported that major U.S. defense contractors enter 2025 with unusually deep multiyear demand tied to naval recapitalization, munitions replenishment and allied military modernization.

The results land at a time when the Pentagon’s budget outlook still favors nuclear deterrence, shipbuilding and high-end combat systems, though execution risk remains a recurring concern across the industry. In testimony and budget documents published by the U.S. Department of Defense, officials have said the submarine industrial base remains a national priority, and Navy leaders have repeatedly argued output needs to rise. Reuters reported in recent defense coverage that labor shortages and supplier bottlenecks continue to challenge contractors, even as funding support stays broadly intact.

For investors, the quarter also offered reassurance that General Dynamics can balance cyclical aerospace exposure with steadier defense demand. Shares rose in premarket trading after the release, according to Reuters, as the market responded to the revenue beat and stronger marine performance. Analysts cited by Bloomberg said the mix mattered as much as the headline number, with submarine work and Gulfstream deliveries together signaling strength in two of the company’s most important profit engines.

The next test will come in the second quarter as investors look for evidence that shipyard throughput, supplier performance and jet deliveries can hold up against a still-complex production environment. In its earnings statement, General Dynamics reaffirmed full-year 2025 guidance, and Novakovic said the company remains “well positioned for the year ahead.” That matters because sustained execution, not just demand, will determine whether the company can convert its nearly $94 billion backlog into faster cash flow and stronger returns as U.S. defense priorities and global business aviation demand continue to evolve.

JBizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk

WASHINGTON — April 30, 2026

Kevin Warsh is on the verge of becoming the next chairman of the Federal Reserve — but if Wednesday’s dramatic policy meeting is any indication, he will arrive at the Eccles Building to find a committee in open rebellion against the very rate cuts he and President Donald Trump are pushing for.

The Federal Open Market Committee voted Wednesday to hold its benchmark federal funds rate in a range between 3.5% and 3.75% for a third consecutive meeting to start 2026. While that decision came as little surprise to markets, what followed was anything but routine. The four total dissents recorded at this meeting were the most at any Fed policy gathering since October 1992.

The fractures inside the committee cut in two opposing directions. Governor Stephen Miran dissented in favor of an interest rate cut, while Cleveland Fed President Beth Hammack, Minneapolis Fed President Neel Kashkari, and Dallas Fed President Lorie Logan dissented not against the rate decision itself, but because they did not support the inclusion of an easing bias in the policy statement. In other words, three of the four dissenters wanted to slam the door shut on any near-term rate reductions entirely.

At issue for the trio was a sentence in the committee’s statement referencing “the extent and timing of additional adjustments to the target range for the federal funds rate” — language that implies the next move would be lower, signaled by the word “additional,” which reflects that the most recent rate actions have been cuts.

Claudia Sahm, chief economist at New Century Advisors and creator of the well-known recession indicator that bears her name, said an early cut is “completely off the table.” With inflation elevated, ongoing tariff pass-through, and an active conflict in the Middle East driving energy costs higher, she noted that an early cut would require seven FOMC votes that Warsh simply does not have. “He doesn’t have the chops to make that argument persuasively on day one, and nobody would, because the data aren’t there yet,” she said.

The meeting served as a backdrop to a pivotal moment in the central bank’s leadership transition. Earlier Wednesday, Warsh’s nomination as Fed chair was advanced from the Senate Banking Committee, setting up a final confirmation vote in the Republican-controlled Senate.

Chair Jerome Powell, in his post-meeting press conference, congratulated Warsh on advancing through the committee — calling it “an important step forward.”

Powell himself is expected to step down from the chairmanship when his term expires May 15, though he signaled his intention to remain on the Board of Governors for an indefinite period, citing concerns about legal threats to the institution from the Trump administration. His concurrent term as a Fed governor runs through January 2028. By staying on, Powell effectively denies the White House an additional board appointment.

For Warsh, the internal dynamics he inherits may prove as challenging as any economic headwinds. Josh Jamner, senior investment strategy analyst at ClearBridge Investments, noted that Warsh’s addition to the FOMC will not swing the balance between doves and hawks, as he will take Miran’s seat — with Powell’s seat remaining unavailable for the time being. Trump would have three appointees on the seven-member board: Warsh, Governor Christopher Waller, and Governor Michelle Bowman — both from his first term.

Jeff Kilburg, founder and CEO of KKM Financial, framed the dissents as a warning shot aimed directly at the incoming chair. “This is a new quarterback hitting the portal,” he said. “This was the rest of the players letting him know, we’re not going to let you lead us here.”

David Kelly, chief global strategist at JPMorgan Asset Management, offered a blunter assessment: “I think this is a renewed declaration of independence. This is a shot across the bow at Kevin Warsh.”

The market is reading the room. The CME FedWatch tool now shows no more than one rate cut all of 2026, and 56 of 103 economists in a Reuters poll expect rates to stay steady through September. JP Morgan forecasts the Fed will hold rates steady for the rest of the year before potentially hiking interest rates in early 2027.

The FOMC’s post-meeting statement acknowledged that “developments in the Middle East are contributing to a high level of uncertainty about the economic outlook,” while noting the committee “is attentive to the risks to both sides of its dual mandate.”

Warsh has not been without intellectual arguments for cuts. He has pointed to elevated long-term yields — with the 10-year Treasury rising from around 4% in early February to 4.44% by end of March — as a form of passive tightening in the real economy, spanning mortgages, corporate borrowing, and equity valuations. His argument: cuts on the short end could offset squeeze on the long end, keeping broader borrowing conditions stable. He has also pushed for reducing the Fed’s $6.7 trillion balance sheet, with that effort providing political cover for short-end easing.

But arguments are one thing. Votes are another — and on Wednesday, the Fed made clear that Warsh will need to earn every single one.

— JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

By JBizNews Desk — April 30, 2026

Building on JBizNews’ March 12, 2026 report on FedEx’s Dallas hub expansion, today the logistics giant announced the opening of a $1.2 billion regional hub in Cleveland, Ohio. The facility—spanning 1.8 million square feet—will serve as a new nexus for air, ground, and e‑commerce shipments across the Midwest, directly affecting the supply‑chain dynamics of thousands of small‑business owners, family‑run manufacturers, and local retailers.

Background
FedEx’s decision follows a three‑year feasibility study that highlighted growing freight congestion on the Great Lakes corridor and mounting pressure on small manufacturers to reduce delivery times and costs. The Cleveland hub will consolidate operations previously spread across three smaller centers in Ohio, Indiana, and Michigan, creating a single, high‑tech distribution point equipped with automated sorting, AI‑driven routing, and on‑site cold‑chain facilities.

Key Drivers
Supply‑Chain Bottlenecks: Persistent truck driver shortages and port delays have inflated average shipping times by 12% in the Midwest since 2024.
Rising Consumer Expectations: Same‑day and next‑day delivery expectations have surged, especially for e‑commerce purchases originating from small retailers.
Technology Investment: FedEx is deploying robotics and machine‑learning platforms to cut handling costs by up to 15%.
Regional Economic Incentives: Ohio’s “Manufacturing Growth Act” offered $150 million in tax credits and workforce training grants to attract the hub.

Impact on Small Businesses
The hub is expected to reshape daily operations for Main Street enterprises:
– **Reduced Shipping Costs**: Small manufacturers can now tap into FedEx’s bulk‑rate pricing, potentially saving $300‑$500 per pallet per month.
– **Faster Delivery Windows**: Average transit time from Cleveland to Chicago, Detroit, and Pittsburgh will drop from 2‑3 days to 1‑2 days.
– **Job Creation**: FedEx projects 5,000 new jobs, with an estimated 2,300 positions earmarked for local hires, many in logistics, IT, and warehouse management.
– **Training Partnerships**: Collaboration with local community colleges will launch a “Logistics Futures” certification program, aiming to upskill 1,200 workers annually.
– **Small‑Business Support Services**: On‑site consulting desks will provide free advice on packaging optimization, customs compliance, and e‑commerce integration.

Analyst Perspectives
David McKinsey of Supply Chain Insights notes, “The Cleveland hub is a strategic pivot that aligns FedEx with the growing demand for regionalized, high‑speed logistics. Small manufacturers finally have a viable alternative to the legacy, cost‑heavy routes through the coasts.”
Linda Martinez of the National Small Business Association (NSBA) adds, “For family‑run factories in Ohio and neighboring states, this means the difference between staying afloat and scaling up. Lower freight costs directly translate into higher margins and the ability to reinvest in product development.”
Robert Chen of Midwest Economic Research cautions, “While job creation is a clear win, the community must monitor potential traffic congestion and ensure that the promised training programs deliver on quality to avoid a skills mismatch.”

Outlook
Looking ahead, FedEx’s Cleveland hub could serve as a template for future regional centers aimed at de‑congesting national freight lanes. If the projected cost savings and speed improvements materialize, small manufacturers may accelerate their shift from legacy carriers to FedEx’s integrated platform, potentially reshaping the Midwest’s manufacturing landscape. However, the hub’s success will hinge on FedEx’s ability to maintain service reliability, effectively train a local workforce, and coordinate with municipal authorities to mitigate any infrastructural strain.

JBizNews Desk
© http://JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

New York, April 30, 2026 – U.S. equities opened with a mixed tone Thursday morning as investors weighed fresh Big Tech earnings reactions, the advance Q1 GDP print, and yesterday’s dovish-leaning Federal Reserve decision against persistent geopolitical risks tied to Iran and recent political commentary from former President Trump that have pushed oil prices near four-year highs.

Roughly one hour into the session, the Dow Jones Industrial Average stood at approximately 49,421, up about 1.15% (roughly +560 points). The S&P 500 was little changed near 7,140 (+0.05%), while the Nasdaq Composite lagged, trading around 24,535, down 0.55%.

What’s Moving the Markets: Political and Economic Drivers

Economically:

Earnings season and macro data are the primary forces. Strong cloud-computing and ad results from Alphabet reinforced the AI infrastructure boom, while Meta’s sharp drop stemmed from significantly higher AI capex guidance that raised margin concerns. This is triggering classic sector rotation—favoring industrials and value names in the Dow while pressuring the tech-heavy Nasdaq. The advance Q1 GDP reading of +2.0% annualized (below the ~2.3% consensus but a sharp improvement from the prior quarter’s revised 0.5%) signals continued economic resilience. Accompanying inflation data showed further moderation, keeping alive expectations for potential Fed easing later in 2026. The Fed’s decision yesterday to hold rates steady—with Chair Powell’s balanced but market-friendly tone—added to the supportive backdrop without introducing new hawkish surprises.

Politically/Geopolitically:

Geopolitical risks in the Middle East, particularly tensions involving Iran, continue to support elevated oil prices. Recent comments from former President Trump on energy policy and escalation risks have amplified market concerns, keeping WTI crude in the $103–105 range despite a modest pullback. This has provided a tailwind to energy shares and certain cyclicals while introducing an inflation-watch premium and overall volatility across risk assets. Meanwhile, ongoing policy uncertainty surrounding tariffs and the broader post-2024 political environment is encouraging sector rotation toward names perceived as less exposed to trade or regulatory shifts.

Big Tech Earnings in Focus

Alphabet (GOOGL) surged more than 5% on robust cloud growth and ad revenue.

Meta Platforms (META) dropped sharply (~10%) after raising AI capex guidance.

Microsoft (MSFT) and Amazon (AMZN) posted mixed but generally solid cloud and e-commerce results despite elevated AI spending.

Other notable movers included gains in Caterpillar (CAT) and Qualcomm (QCOM), underscoring broad industrial and semiconductor participation.

Outlook

Markets are on track for a strong April overall despite intra-month swings driven by tariffs, geopolitics, and earnings volatility. Traders will now watch the remainder of today’s earnings slate from consumer and industrial names. The combination of resilient economic data and AI enthusiasm continues to support the “soft landing + AI growth” narrative that has underpinned the bull market through 2025–2026, even as political and geopolitical headlines add layers of caution around energy and inflation.

Stay tuned for updates as the session progresses. Markets remain open until 4:00 p.m. EDT.

JbizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk — April 30, 2026

Major Retail Partnership Aims to Reshape Grocery Shelves

Kroger, one of America’s largest grocery chains, has announced a new collaboration with Shopify that will allow small businesses and local sellers to set up dedicated online and in-store storefronts directly within Kroger’s ecosystem. The partnership gives small food producers, artisan makers, and niche suppliers an easier path to reach Kroger’s millions of weekly shoppers through both physical aisles and seamless digital ordering.

This move builds directly on the retail and small-business pressures tracked throughout the day, from families tightening budgets amid high gas prices to retailers warning of softer back-to-school spending. By opening its massive grocery footprint to smaller players, Kroger is betting that more local and unique products will drive foot traffic and loyalty at a time when consumers are increasingly value-conscious.

How the Partnership Works for Small Businesses

• Shopify’s easy-to-use tools will let approved small sellers create branded online shops that integrate with Kroger’s app and website for in-store pickup or delivery.

• Select products will gain prominent placement in Kroger aisles through dedicated “small business” sections or end-cap displays.

• Faster onboarding and payment processing compared to traditional wholesale channels, potentially reducing barriers for family-run food brands and local farms.

The initiative offers new revenue streams, but small suppliers are already raising practical concerns about stricter performance standards for inventory, packaging, and delivery times to match Kroger’s high-volume operations. Some worry about platform fees and competition from Kroger’s own private-label products, while others face the need for faster production scaling that could strain operations already dealing with higher insurance and energy costs.

Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, called the alliance a smart strategic response to changing consumer habits, noting that shoppers want more variety and local options, and Kroger is using Shopify’s technology to meet that demand without having to build everything in-house. Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, highlighted the everyday impact, saying this could be a real lifeline for small food businesses that have struggled with distribution costs and shelf space, especially as families hunt for affordable, unique items while gas prices eat into their budgets.

Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, pointed out that this reflects a broader trend of big retailers partnering with tech platforms to stay competitive. It gives small businesses access to Kroger’s customer base, but it also forces them to operate at a scale and speed they may not be ready for. Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that the initiative could create seasonal hiring opportunities at the supplier level but may also accelerate consolidation among smaller food producers who cannot keep up.

Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, is advising small-business clients to approach the opportunity carefully. This is a chance to reach millions of shoppers, but suppliers should review the terms closely and consider diversifying beyond any single retailer to protect their margins.

Real-World Ripple Effects for Shoppers

Families visiting Kroger stores may soon see more local honey, small-batch snacks, handmade sauces, and regional products featured prominently — potentially at competitive prices. This aligns with the consumer caution reported earlier today, where households are shifting toward value and variety while cutting back on big discretionary spends.

Outlook

Kroger’s Shopify partnership represents a significant evolution in how big grocery chains and small businesses interact. It could empower thousands of local sellers and give everyday shoppers more choice in the aisles at a time when budgets remain tight. At the same time, it intensifies the operational demands on small suppliers already navigating higher costs and cautious consumer behavior — themes that have run through much of today’s business coverage.

The coming months will reveal whether this model truly levels the playing field or simply shifts more pressure onto smaller players. For business enthusiasts and Main Street operators, the key takeaway is clear: partnerships with retail giants can open doors, but success will depend on the ability to scale efficiently and maintain profitability in a high-cost environment. Tomorrow’s developments in retail partnerships and small-business earnings will provide further insight into how these collaborations reshape the grocery aisle.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited

By Elena Vargas

JBizNews Senior Technology Correspondent

Oakland, CA — April 29, 2026

Elon Musk told a federal court Wednesday that he regrets providing nearly $38 million in early “free funding” to OpenAI, calling himself a “fool” for helping launch what has become one of the world’s most valuable private companies.

Testifying for a second day in his breach-of-contract lawsuit against OpenAI, Musk said he contributed the money under the belief that the organization would remain a nonprofit focused on developing artificial general intelligence (AGI) for the benefit of humanity rather than generating massive profits.

“I was a fool who provided them free funding to create a start-up,” Musk stated from the witness stand. “I gave them $38 million of essentially free funding which they then used to create an $800 billion for-profit company. I literally was a fool.”

Musk, who co-founded OpenAI in 2015 alongside CEO Sam Altman and President Greg Brockman, accused the leadership of being “disingenuous.” He claimed they assured him the company would stay true to its nonprofit roots and AI-safety mission while later shifting to a for-profit model that attracted billions in investment, including from Microsoft.

The Tesla and SpaceX CEO argued the transition — which began with a capped-profit subsidiary and later became fully for-profit — amounted to “looting a charity.” “They should not get rich off a nonprofit. That’s not right,” he testified.

OpenAI has strongly denied the allegations. The company maintains in court filings that Musk was fully aware of and initially supported plans for a for-profit arm to raise the enormous capital required to compete in the fast-moving AI sector. OpenAI says the lawsuit only arose after Musk was denied greater control when he left the board in 2018.

The trial, underway this week in U.S. District Court in Oakland, centers on claims of breach of contract and fiduciary duty. Musk has positioned the case as a broader warning about the risks of unchecked commercial AI development, referencing potential “Terminator”-style outcomes if safety is not prioritized.

Business Implications

The dispute underscores the intense capital demands of the AI industry. OpenAI’s valuation has soared amid the success of ChatGPT and enterprise adoption, drawing massive funding rounds. For investors, entrepreneurs, and tech executives, the case raises critical questions about governance in nonprofit-to-for-profit conversions, the balance between innovation speed and ethical commitments, and how founding agreements hold up as companies scale.

Musk’s competing venture, xAI, continues to position itself as an alternative with a different approach to AI development.

The proceedings are expected to continue with additional witnesses and cross-examination in the coming days. A verdict could set important precedents for AI governance, funding structures, and nonprofit oversight in the technology sector.

JBizNews will continue monitoring developments in this high-profile case, which carries significant ramifications for markets, technology investing, and the future of artificial intelligence.

JBizNews- Desk

Elena Vargas covers AI, Silicon Valley, and major tech litigation for JBizNews.

By JBizNews Desk — April 30,2026

Building on yesterday’s JBizNews report on rising payment‑processing fees for small businesses, Walmart announced a new partnership with Square that could reshape how independent retailers handle transactions.

Walmart, the world’s largest brick‑and‑mortar retailer, and Square, the fintech platform best known for its point‑of‑sale (POS) solutions, revealed a joint venture on Monday aimed at delivering a low‑cost, integrated payment ecosystem for small‑to‑mid‑size merchants across the United States. The initiative, dubbed “Walmart Square Connect,” will combine Walmart’s vast logistics network with Square’s digital payment tools to offer:

  • Zero‑percent transaction fees for the first 12 months on all in‑store sales processed through the platform.
  • Unified inventory management that syncs Walmart’s fulfillment centers with a retailer’s local stock.
  • Same‑day cash advances based on real‑time sales data, helping businesses bridge payroll or rent gaps.
  • Access to Walmart’s marketplace, allowing merchants to list products online with a streamlined onboarding process.

The move directly addresses the pressure small businesses face from rising labor, insurance, and rent costs that have squeezed profit margins over the past 18 months.

Why This Partnership Matters

  • Cost Savings – The average small retailer spends 2.5 % of revenue on payment processing. Eliminating fees for a year could translate to $15,000–$30,000 in savings for a typical $1 M‑sales business.
  • Supply‑Chain Efficiency – By tapping into Walmart’s distribution network, merchants can reduce lead times from 7–10 days to 2–3 days for stocked items.
  • Financial Flexibility – Square’s cash‑advance product, now backed by Walmart’s credit lines, offers lower APRs than traditional merchant cash‑advance firms.
  • Competitive Edge – Independent stores can now compete with big‑box pricing while preserving a local brand identity.

Analyst Perspectives

Susan Lee of Gartner says, “The Walmart‑Square alliance is a textbook example of a ‘platform‑as‑a‑service’ model that democratizes access to enterprise‑grade logistics for Main Street.”

Mark Patel of Forrester Research adds, “Small retailers have been caught between high transaction fees and expensive third‑party fulfillment. This partnership removes two major pain points simultaneously.”

Jenna Ramirez of the National Small Business Association notes, “Cash flow is the lifeblood of a mom‑and‑pop shop. The ability to secure same‑day advances without punitive interest rates could be a game‑changer for owners still navigating post‑pandemic recovery.”

Real‑World Impact: Early Adopters Speak

Tomás Rivera, owner of a family‑run bakery in Austin, TX, piloted the program in February. “Our transaction fees dropped from 2.7 % to zero, and we’ve already saved over $2,400. The inventory sync means we never run out of the sourdough mix we order from a regional supplier.”

Linda Cheng, manager of a boutique clothing store in Newark, NJ, reports, “The same‑day cash advance helped us cover a sudden rent increase. It felt like a line of credit that understood our sales cycle.”

Potential Challenges

  • Data Privacy – Merging two massive data sets raises concerns about how customer information will be shared and protected.
  • Vendor Lock‑in – Some merchants worry that reliance on Walmart’s logistics could limit flexibility to work with other suppliers.
  • Regulatory Scrutiny – The partnership may attract antitrust attention, given Walmart’s dominant market position.

Outlook

The Walmart‑Square collaboration is poised to roll out nationally by Q3 2026, with a target of onboarding 250,000 small retailers within the first year. If the fee‑waiver and cash‑advance components deliver the promised savings, the model could spark a wave of similar alliances between large retailers and fintech firms, potentially reshaping the payment‑processing landscape for Main Street.

Industry watchers anticipate that competing retailers—such as Target and Costco—will develop parallel solutions, intensifying the race to lock in the next generation of independent merchants. For now, the partnership offers a tangible lifeline to businesses still feeling the squeeze from rising operating costs.

JBizNews Desk
© http://JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

FedEx and UPS said they will return tariff refunds to customers after a Supreme Court ruling opened the door to potentially billions of dollars in reimbursements tied to Trump-era import taxes.

The companies said they plan to pass along any recovered funds as the federal government begins processing refund claims for duties collected under the International Emergency Economic Powers Act (IEEPA), a move that could affect a broad swath of importers.

UPS CEO Carol Tomé said on the company’s first-quarter earnings call that UPS processed 16 million IEEPA-related entries and remitted more than $5 billion in tariffs to the U.S. Treasury.

“We are just a pass-through,” Tomé said, adding that once refunds are issued, UPS will send the money “right back to our customer.”

TRUMP ADMIN TO BEGIN REFUNDING $166B TO BUSINESSES IN WAKE OF SUPREME COURT DECISION

FedEx similarly said it intends to return funds to customers as soon as it receives refunds from U.S. Customs and Border Protection (CBP), reinforcing that logistics firms act primarily as intermediaries in tariff collection.

POWELL SAYS HE’LL STAY ON FED BOARD AFTER CHAIRMANSHIP ENDS BUT WON’T BE A ‘SHADOW FED CHAIR’

The developments follow a February Supreme Court ruling that found the 1977 law used by the Trump administration does not authorize presidents to impose tariffs, effectively invalidating a broad set of import duties applied to goods from major trading partners.

The decision could trigger a significant wave of repayments, with roughly $166 billion in tariff collections potentially subject to refunds, according to government data cited in court filings.

Thousands of companies have already moved to file claims after the federal government launched a new system to process refunds earlier this month, signaling strong demand for reimbursement.

CBP said it began rolling out a phased refund system on April 20, allowing importers and brokers to submit claims through its online portal. The agency said most valid refunds are expected to be issued within 60 to 90 days after approval, though more complex cases could take longer.

For logistics companies like UPS and FedEx, the refunds are not expected to materially impact financial results because the firms primarily collect tariffs from customers and remit them to the federal government.

Still, the scale of the refunds highlights the broader economic impact of the tariffs, which disrupted global trade flows and weighed on corporate earnings across multiple industries.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

While the court ruling struck down tariffs imposed under IEEPA, other trade measures remain in place, and officials have signaled that additional duties could still be pursued under alternative legal authorities.

FOX Business reached out to FedEx and UPS for further comment. 

Reuters contributed to this report. 

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk — April 30, 2026

Tesla has delivered a major milestone in the push toward electrifying long-haul trucking. Late Wednesday, the company announced on X that the first Tesla Semi has rolled off its dedicated high-volume production line at a new facility adjacent to Gigafactory Nevada. The post, which included an image from inside the plant, marks the official start of scaled manufacturing for the long-awaited Class 8 electric truck and signals that volume deliveries to customers could begin later this year.

This development comes directly from Tesla itself, confirming what the company outlined in its Q1 2026 shareholder update: the Semi remains on schedule for volume production starting in 2026, with the Nevada factory built specifically to ramp output toward a long-term target of up to 50,000 units annually. The announcement builds on ongoing real-world pilots, including a new three-week port drayage test launched today by Southern California operator MDB Transportation, and partnerships such as the recent agreement with Pilot Travel Centers to expand Megacharger infrastructure.

For everyday businesses and supply chains that rely on trucking — from small manufacturers shipping goods across the Midwest to regional distributors facing high diesel costs — the news carries immediate practical weight. Lower operating expenses could eventually ease pressure on freight rates, helping offset some of the broader cost challenges tracked throughout today’s coverage, including cautious consumer spending and energy prices.

What the Milestone Means for Fleets and Small Businesses

• The Semi’s estimated 500-mile range and roughly 1.7 kWh per mile efficiency promise dramatically lower fuel and maintenance costs compared with diesel trucks, potentially cutting per-mile expenses by up to 70 percent once charging infrastructure matures.

• Early high-volume output will initially focus on fulfilling Tesla’s own internal needs before expanding to external customers, with analysts projecting 5,000 to 15,000 deliveries in 2026 before scaling higher.

• The dedicated Nevada factory, spanning 1.7 million square feet, is designed for efficient production, supporting Tesla’s goal of making electric trucking economically competitive for a wider range of operators.

Economists weighed in on the broader implications, with Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, describing the development as a pivotal step in reshaping freight economics as diesel’s cost advantage continues to erode amid volatile fuel prices, making fleets — including smaller operators — increasingly open to electric alternatives that offer predictable long-term savings; Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, pointed out the ripple effects for Main Street businesses, noting that many small manufacturers and distributors reliant on regional trucking could see gradual relief in shipping costs especially as more charging networks come online through partnerships like the one with Pilot; Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, emphasized that while the ramp will be gradual, the confirmation of high-volume production removes a key uncertainty that has lingered since the Semi’s original 2017 unveiling and aligns with broader trends of big players investing in scale to make clean technology accessible beyond just large fleets; Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that the production push could create new manufacturing and technician jobs in Nevada while prompting trucking companies to rethink hiring and training for electric vehicle operations; and Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, advised business clients to monitor the rollout closely, saying early adopters among small and mid-sized fleets may gain a competitive edge on costs but success will depend on access to reliable charging and the ability to integrate the trucks into existing routes without major disruptions.

Real-World Momentum Already Building

The announcement arrives as operators put early Semis to work in demanding environments. MDB Transportation’s pilot, for instance, is testing the truck on active port container routes — one of the toughest applications in freight — tracking everything from energy use to driver experience. Combined with Tesla’s expanding Megacharger network, these efforts are helping prove the Semi’s readiness for everyday commercial use.

Outlook

Tesla’s first high-volume Semi represents more than just another factory milestone; it brings the company closer to delivering on the promise of electric trucking at scale. For businesses of all sizes, the potential benefits include meaningfully lower operating costs, reduced emissions, and greater predictability in freight expenses — advantages that could matter a great deal amid today’s mixed economic signals and persistent pressure on household and business budgets.

The coming months will show how quickly production scales and whether the economics hold up in real-world fleets. For business enthusiasts following supply-chain and transportation trends, this is a story worth watching closely. Tomorrow’s updates on fleet adoption, charging infrastructure, and related earnings will offer the next clues about how quickly the Semi could reshape the roads.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited

On the surface, the streets of Tehran appear to have returned to normal. Cafés are open, and traffic jams in the capital have resumed their usual pace. However, beneath this routine lies a nation on the brink of financial collapse, one that even the most brutal crackdowns may not contain.

While the streets are full of people, their pockets are empty. The Iranian rial has become a liability that citizens are desperate to offload.

“There is simply crazy inflation in the market because nobody wants to hold the Iranian currency,” explains Prof. Amos Nadan, head of the Dayan Center at Tel Aviv University, adding, “This currency is fundamentally unstable.”

Even before the recent military escalations, Iran was grappling with an inflation rate of approximately 70 percent—the highest since World War II. Today, the numbers tell the story of a struggling middle class. The new monthly minimum wage stands at over 160 million rials, a figure that sounds astronomical until it is converted to its actual value: a mere $104.

An Iranian woman walks past an anti-USA and anti-Israel mural, in Tehran on April 21 2026, amid a ceasefire in the region.  (credit:  ATTA KENARE / AFP via Getty Images)

The human cost of this devaluation is staggering

“The truth is that this might not be the end. Because when there isn’t much economic activity in Iran—as there wasn’t during the war—there isn’t much opportunity for the currency to weaken dramatically,” says Eyal Hashkes, a strategic consultant and author of The Swords of Economy. “The moment life returns to full normality, we will see an even more significant weakening of the rial.”

The human cost of this devaluation is staggering. Daily necessities have become luxury items. A single kebab in a restaurant now costs between five and six million rials, while a basic meal of chicken and rice can cost up to four million.

“We are seeing very difficult cases across many fields—child prostitution and other extremes just to bring food home,” notes Prof. Nadan. “This is a population that is suffering, especially the poor, in a very severe way.”

Iran’s economic woes were not caused by the war; they were merely accelerated by it. Long before the first shots were fired, the country suffered from a chronic energy crisis, forced rolling blackouts, and a persistent drought that dried up the nation’s reservoirs. These problems led to massive riots in January, which the regime suppressed with lethal force, resulting in the deaths of tens of thousands of protesters.

In an attempt to stifle dissent, the regime has kept the internet largely paralyzed. This digital blackout has cost the economy an estimated $37 million per day due to the inability to process online payments and disruptions to export chains.

According to Eyal Hashkes, the only way for Iran to emerge from this stagnation is to remove economic sanctions. Without external investment, Iran cannot grow. “Without removing sanctions, it will be impossible to regrow the economy.”

To further destabilize the regime’s ability to fund its military proxies, Israel targeted key industrial sites during the conflict, focusing on steel and petrochemical plants. While the strikes were defined as attacks on the military industry, the collateral damage to the civilian economy was immense. “The attacks on steel facilities and other industries like petrochemicals led to a decrease of billions, or even tens of billions, in potential annual revenue for Iran,” says Hashkes.

Perhaps the most significant pressure point remains the maritime blockade of the Strait of Hormuz. For weeks, the flow of goods from Iranian ports has ground to a halt. Tehran’s primary lifeline—oil—is no longer reaching its main customer, China.

“Something like 85 percent of Iran’s exports is oil,” says Prof. Nadan.

The crisis is reaching a logistical breaking point. Analysts estimate that by mid-May, Iran will have completely run out of storage space for its unexported oil. When that happens, the regime will have to make a choice that could haunt it for decades: shutting down the wells.

“In the future, Iran will run out of storage for all this oil,” Hashkes says. “When that happens, they will have to start turning off the wells. After a well remains inactive for a long time, it often cannot simply be turned back on—it takes years of rehabilitation.”

Prof. Nadan adds that the oil’s quality is at risk. “If you don’t pump the oil, it begins to lose its quality. We remember the COVID-19 period, when prices turned negative just to keep the pumps moving. Iran is entering a new cycle of hardship,” he says.

The Central Bank of Iran recently estimated that it would take at least 12 years to rehabilitate the national economy—and that is assuming the war ends today. As the pressure builds, the question in Jerusalem and Washington is no longer whether the Iranian economy will break, but whether the Iranian people will break the regime before it does.

This post was originally published on here

By JBizNews Desk

SEOUL — April 30, 2026

Samsung Electronics reported a stunning surge in first-quarter profit, with its semiconductor division delivering a nearly 49-fold jump in operating profit to a record 53.7 trillion won ($36.1 billion), driven by insatiable global demand for high-bandwidth memory chips used in AI servers and data centers.

The South Korean tech giant posted consolidated operating profit of 57.2 trillion won for the January-March period — an more than eight-fold increase from a year earlier — beating expectations and marking an all-time quarterly high. Revenue reached a record 133.9 trillion won.

Business Implications

Samsung’s blowout results underscore the continued strength of the AI infrastructure boom and the severe supply shortage for advanced memory chips. The company expects the shortage to worsen through 2027, which should support strong pricing and margins ahead. This is a major positive signal for the broader semiconductor supply chain and companies exposed to HBM technology.

Asian markets are reacting positively in early trading, and the news is expected to lift sentiment for U.S. chip stocks when Wall Street opens later today.

— JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

This story about the March 2026 PCE inflation is developing and will be updated with more details.

The Federal Reserve’s preferred inflation gauge remained stubbornly high in March as consumers continued to face elevated price growth.

The Commerce Department on Thursday reported that the personal consumption expenditures (PCE) index rose 0.7% on a monthly basis in March and is up 3.5% from a year ago. Both figures were in-line with the expectations of economists polled by LSEG.

Core PCE, which excludes volatile measurements of food and energy prices, was up 0.3% from a month ago and increased 3.2% year over year. Both figures were in line with economists’ expectations from the LSEG poll.

This post was originally published here

The Palestinian Authority has continued making payments to terrorists and their families, despite promises to end the pay-for-slay programs, the US State Department informed Congress last month, the department confirmed on Wednesday.

A total of $156 million was paid out to the families, a fraction of the $214 million the PA promised to distribute to them. $126 million went directly to Palestinian terrorists, including those released from Israeli custody, and $30 million to the families of Palestinian terrorists who died committing their acts of terrorism.

“The PA continues to provide a system of compensation in support of terrorism through new mechanisms and under a different name,” the State Department wrote in the report, based on information provided by Jerusalem, open source information, and non-governmental organizations.

Payments continued despite Palestinian Authority President Mahmoud Abbas legislating changes to the West Bank’s welfare system last year, shifting payments to a needs-based model rather than stipends scaled to the length of a terrorist’s sentence.

“Despite changing the mechanisms, the PA continued payments and benefits to Palestinian terrorists and their families,” the State Department wrote.

 Palestinian Authority President Mahmoud Abbas addresses the Turkish parliament during an extraordinary session on August 15, 2024 in Ankara, Turkey. (credit: Serdar Ozsoy/Getty Images)

Under the Taylor Force Act (2018), Washington is unable to offer economic aid to Ramallah until it ends pay-for-slay payments and its statements of public support for terrorism.

The PA’s payments to terrorists, including those who have killed American citizens, have continued despite the rapidly deteriorating economic crisis in the West Bank. The Jerusalem Post reported earlier this week on strikes planned in hospitals over the PA cutting wages to $650 for April, down from the 80% it has been paying since tax revenue began being withheld in 2022.

Finance Minister Bezalel Smotrich announced earlier this week that approximately NIS 590 million was deducted from the PA to cover both debts to the Israel Electric Corporation and water and environmental corporations, as well as funds that the PA had transferred to terrorists.

Citing comments made by Palestinian officials after the Bondi Beach attack in Australia, IMPACT-se reports on antisemitic and pro-terrorist content in the PA education system and PA officials honoring terrorists released into Egypt. The report determined Ramallah had failed to end its pro-terror ideological positioning.

PLO publishes list of prisoners who have yet to receive pay-to-slay salary

PA Finance Minister Estephan Salameh’s February statement, “We have not abandoned any Palestinian resident, whether they are prisoners or families of martyrs and wounded. This is a clear fundamental issue,” was also cited in the report as evidence that Ramallah has continued to fail in meeting the requirements to receive US funds.

In January, as was reported by the Israel-based research institute Palestinian Media Watch (PMW), the Palestinian Liberation Organization’s Commission of Detainees and Ex-Detainees Affairs had published a list of 52 released Palestinian prisoners who needed to take administrative steps in order to continue or begin receiving monthly salaries from the PA/PLO.

The terrorists listed included Ahmad Dahidi, an orchestrator of the 2003 murder of Eli Biton; Ahmad Abu Awad and Ahmad Al-Shibani, terrorists implicated in constructing the bomb for the 2003 Afula mall suicide bombing; and Saed Zaid, a terrorist implicated in the 2003 shooting of Amit Mintin.

PMW director Itamar Marcus told The Post that the organization was able to track PA funds reaching terrorists in Jordan, Lebanon, and Syria, not just the West Bank. 

This post was originally published on here

A widening push to legalize or expand raw milk sales across the U.S. is colliding with fresh public-health alarms after a California outbreak sickened children and renewed scrutiny of a product federal regulators have long described as unusually risky. Associated Press reported Tuesday that lawmakers in more than a dozen states have introduced over three dozen measures this session, while the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention continues to warn that unpasteurized milk can carry dangerous pathogens. In a public briefing cited by the agency, Dr. Mandy Kamb, a senior scientist at the CDC, said raw milk “can harbor pathogens such as E. coli, Salmonella, Listeria and Campylobacter,” underscoring why the debate now reaches beyond food politics into consumer safety and state regulation.

The legislative momentum comes even after an E. coli outbreak tied to California-based Raw Farm infected at least nine children, according to recent reporting from AP and prior notices from California health authorities. Robert F. Kennedy Jr., the U.S. health secretary, has publicly signaled sympathy for raw milk advocates; in a social-media post last year referenced by AP, he said “the public’s appetite for unpasteurized milk eclipses the known risks.” That stance matters because Kennedy now leads the Department of Health and Human Services, even though the Food and Drug Administration and CDC still advise consumers not to drink raw milk under any circumstances.

At the state level, supporters frame the issue as one of consumer choice and farm economics rather than food safety. In New Jersey, Republican state Sen. Michael Testa argued on the Senate floor that adults already make decisions about products carrying known risks. “You can buy cigarettes, you can buy alcohol, you can buy quote-unquote legalized marijuana,” Testa said, according to Reuters, as he backed a bill creating a permit system for raw milk sales. If enacted, New Jersey would join the 35 states that already allow retail sales of raw milk in some form, a patchwork that has turned dairy regulation into a growing interstate policy fight.

That fight now reaches Washington. A bipartisan bill in the House, the Interstate Milk Freedom Act, would limit federal interference with transporting raw milk across state lines when both states allow sales. Republican Rep. Thomas Massie of Kentucky said during a House briefing that the measure “protects consumers’ right to move legally produced products across state lines,” according to Bloomberg. Democratic Rep. Chellie Pingree of Maine joined as a co-sponsor, giving the effort unusual cross-party backing at a time when food regulation rarely attracts bipartisan energy unless it touches broader themes of personal liberty, local agriculture or federal overreach.

Public-health officials say the historical record leaves little ambiguity. In a fact sheet and outbreak review cited by the Financial Times, the CDC said raw milk and raw milk products linked to more than 200 outbreaks from 1998 through 2018 sickened over 2,600 people and sent 225 to hospitals. The agency’s summary said “the risk profile for raw milk far exceeds that of pasteurized products,” a conclusion echoed by the FDA, which states on its website that pasteurization kills bacteria responsible for serious illness. Those warnings carry particular weight for children, pregnant women, older adults and immunocompromised consumers, groups regulators repeatedly identify as most vulnerable.

Scientists and food-safety advocates argue that expanding legal access almost certainly increases case counts. Donald Schaffner, a food science professor at Rutgers University, told CNBC that “if legislation opens new channels, we expect a rise in outbreaks,” pointing to prior research linking broader availability with more illnesses. Petra Anne Levin, a biology professor at Washington University in St. Louis, put the microbiology case more bluntly in comments to AP: “If you wouldn’t lick a cow’s underneath, why would you drink raw milk? There’s a reason pasteurization exists.” Their argument reflects a long-standing scientific consensus that contamination risks begin at the farm level and cannot be fully engineered away.

Producers and industry advocates counter that modern testing, herd management and refrigeration can sharply reduce those risks, and they say consumers should decide for themselves. Ben Beichler, owner of Creambrook Farm in Virginia, told Fortune that “my family and my wife, who’s currently pregnant, drink about a gallon of our own raw milk every single day,” adding that the farm relies on weekly laboratory testing and veterinary oversight. Tony Huffstutter of Missouri’s Twisted Ash Farm & Dairy told Associated Press, “You can’t just go out there, throw a bucket under the cow and start milking it,” describing daily bacterial testing in an on-site lab. Their message to lawmakers is that regulation and standards, not bans, offer the more realistic path.

That argument also sits at the center of the industry’s lobbying strategy. Mark McAfee, founder of the Raw Milk Institute and owner of Raw Farm, said in a statement on the institute’s website, later quoted by Fortune, that “high standards and testing should be part of that.” Critics note that Raw Farm has faced repeated scrutiny tied to prior outbreaks and recalls, a history that weakens the industry’s claim that voluntary safeguards alone can solve the problem. Mary McGonigle-Martin, co-chair of Stop Foodborne Illness, told media outlets including MarketWatch that “people want access, but public health has lost the battle on raw milk,” arguing that demand has begun to outpace risk awareness.

For business, the stakes extend beyond niche dairy sales. Expanded legalization could open new revenue streams for small farms, specialty grocers and direct-to-consumer agriculture businesses, while also raising liability exposure, insurance costs and compliance demands for producers and retailers. The next test comes in statehouses and congressional committees over the next several months, where lawmakers will decide whether consumer demand outweighs the warnings from the CDC and FDA. As Bloomberg and Reuters have both noted in recent coverage, the raw milk debate now sits at the intersection of health policy, deregulation and rural commerce, and the outcome will determine whether the product remains a tightly constrained specialty item or moves closer to the mainstream despite the risks regulators keep emphasizing.

JBizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk — April 30, 2026

Building on Tuesdays report on rising insurance costs for Main‑Street merchants, the U.S. Small Business Administration (SBA) unveiled a sweeping new financing initiative today. The $12 billion low-interest loan program is specifically designed to help small retailers manage sharply higher insurance premiums and labor costs. The first round of funding, slated to begin May 15, will offer fixed-rate loans at 3.25% for up to five years — well below the current average small-business loan rate of 5.8%. The initiative targets independent shops, restaurants, and service businesses that have been squeezed by the same energy-driven rent hikes, utility increases, and delivery surcharges reported throughout today’s coverage.

For many Main Street operators already facing 7–9 percent rent increases starting July 1 and summer utility rate hikes of 8–12 percent, the program provides a timely lifeline to cover rising workers’ compensation insurance, health benefits, and wage pressures without forcing immediate price increases or staff reductions.

How the SBA Loan Program Works for Small Retailers

• Eligible businesses with fewer than 500 employees can apply online or through participating lenders for amounts up to $500,000 per applicant in the first round, with larger “community hub” grants available for multi-location chains.

• Funds can be used directly for insurance premiums, payroll support, employee training, or safety upgrades such as the new OSHA heat guidelines.

• Simplified application through the SBA’s online portal, cutting paperwork by 40%, with decisions expected within 10–15 business days and minimal collateral requirements for qualifying applicants.

• Technical assistance and counseling included at no extra cost through local Small Business Development Centers.

Economists described the program as a targeted response to the cumulative cost pressures weighing on small businesses, with Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, noting that as diesel’s cost advantage erodes amid volatile fuel prices, fleets and small operators are increasingly open to electric alternatives but now face higher financing, utility, and real-estate hurdles; Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, pointed out the ripple effects for everyday businesses and families as cautious consumer spending weighs on growth; Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, emphasized that this reflects broader trends of federal support helping small firms absorb insurance and labor shocks without broader economic drag; Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that operational tightening could lead to more selective hiring and scheduling adjustments; and Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, advised small-retailer clients to apply quickly while funds last and use the loans strategically alongside lease negotiations and energy-efficiency upgrades to protect long-term margins in the high-cost environment.

Outlook

The SBA’s $12 billion low-interest loan program arrives at a critical moment when rent notices, utility hikes, and tighter credit are testing the resilience of small retailers nationwide. For Main Street operators and the communities they serve, the initiative offers breathing room to stabilize operations and invest in workforce retention. Tomorrow’s updates from local SBA offices and small-business lending data will show how quickly these funds reach storefronts and whether they meaningfully offset today’s fixed-cost pressures.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited

New York City Mayor Zohran Mamdani’s latest effort to close a widening budget gap is intensifying concerns among business leaders, as his proposal to scale back a key tax credit threatens a broad range of companies that rely on it to remain competitive.

FOX Business’ Gerri Willis joined “Varney & Co.” host David Asman to report on the proposal, which would reduce the pass-through entity tax (PTET) credit, used heavily by small- and mid-sized businesses, to help generate revenue for the city.

The PTET credit was introduced as a workaround to federal limits on state and local tax deductions (SALT) and has since become a financial lifeline for many businesses structured as S corporations and LLCs. Critics argue cutting it risks undermining those firms at a time when economic conditions remain uncertain.

O’LEARY SLAMS NYC TAX PLAN AS ‘SHEER BLIND STUPIDITY,’ DEFENDS WEALTHY INVESTORS

“Many states implemented a pass-through entity tax because many businesses file via the S corp or LLCs. And this became a workaround to keep them competitive,” Partnership for NYC President and CEO Steven Fulop said. “In a time where the economy is fragile in New York City, we’re saying just be cautious on these sort of things.”

The proposal is part of a broader push that includes higher income, property and corporate taxes, raising concerns about long-term economic stability and business retention.

TAX FIGHT HEATS UP AS NEW YORK TARGETS WEALTHY HOMEOWNERS

Gristedes CEO John Catsimatidis warned that the impact could extend beyond top earners, noting middle-income professionals and small-business owners could feel the strain.

“The people that make $300, $400, $500,000 a year, they are the ones… They have an option. They get up and leave,” Catsimatidis said during an appearance on “Varney & Co.” “You can’t destroy the real estate industry… In London, it’s been destroyed… If you do the same thing in New York that is a disaster.”

As policymakers weigh competing approaches, the outcome could shape how attractive New York remains for businesses navigating rising costs and fiscal uncertainty.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here

For millions of “invisible” Americans who have paid rent on time for years but lacked a traditional credit score, the door to the American Dream just swung wide open — but one expert warns not to trip on the threshold.

Following a landmark announcement from HUD and the FHFA to accept VantageScore 4.0 and FICO Score 10T, the mortgage industry is bracing for a surge of new applicants. Micah Smith, a leading credit repair influencer, says that while the inclusion of rent and utilities is a landmark shift, borrowers must be wary of the “American drain.”

“People who were invisible in the system — no cards, no loans, no score — can now potentially show up with a real number,” Smith told Fox News Digital, while also cautioning that the new models are more rigorous than many realize. “People say getting a home is the American Dream. I call it the American drain when you don’t do it properly.”

The acceptance of VantageScore 4.0 represents the first major change to mortgage credit requirements in over three decades, and stems from the 2018 Credit Score Competition Act signed by President Donald Trump during his first administration.

HERE’S WHAT HAPPENS WHEN YOU DISPUTE A CREDIT CARD CHARGE

Following last week’s announcement, Smith said many of her clients are “freaking out in a good way and a bad way.”

“The narrative the media has been spinning has people all over the place. That is simply people not understanding what is coming down the pipeline and why,” she said. “Everything being put into place right now is to help more people get into homes and to update a system that has not been updated in over 30 years. FICO has been in place since 1989.”

“The Credit Score Competition Act… set something significant in motion. Look at how long it’s taken. It’s now 2026 and it’s finally being implemented,” Smith added. “This was never about destroying FICO. This is about making sure FICO does not monopolize the credit scoring market. This is about updating an antiquated system.”

A key benefit highlighted by FHFA Director Bill Pulte is the ability to account for rent payments, aiming to help creditworthy Americans who may not have traditional credit card debt but who have a perfect history of paying their bills.

“Rent and utilities now count — when reported,” Smith said. “If your clients’ landlord reports to the bureaus, those years of on-time payments now feed the score… But here’s the flip side nobody’s talking about: If your rent is being reported, a late payment potentially can hurt you, too. Reporting cuts both ways. Don’t let clients assume this is all upside.”

Smith also warned that large student loan repayments, auto loans or personal loans can still drag down your credit score and mortgage eligibility, despite the new scoring models. 

“That balance piece is real… High balance equals high score pressure under this model. That’s the nuance people need to hear,” she said.

While a borrower cannot choose which scoring models a lender uses, Smith predicts banks will “probably” lean toward pulling VantageScore 4.0 because FICO traditionally charges $9.99 per credit report pull and VantageScore costs 99 cents.

“To me, this is starting to look like a race to the bottom,” Smith said, “where VantageScore potentially ends up monopolizing the very market it claimed to open up. Lending as a whole is a multitrillion-dollar industry, and people are in more debt than they have ever been. My concern is this: giving more people access to mortgages who didn’t previously understand credit means they’re probably still coming in at a pretty subpar credit score.”

However, this does not raise any recession-level concerns for Smith. 

“I do not see a repeat of 2008, 2009. Banks now have skin in the game. Back then, there was no real repercussion for lenders selling bad loans off to the secondary market. That guardrail now exists. We are not going to see a crash in that sense,” Smith said.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“But here’s what I do worry about: more people going into debt unnecessarily because they still don’t understand the credit system,” she continued. “Remember, those who understand interest earn it; those that don’t pay it.”

“Credit is not your identity — but it is your financial reputation. And right now, more eyes are on it than ever before. Use this moment to get it right.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

Sticker Mule is demanding Google fix what it says is a “misleading” error that labeled its business ads as funded by its CEO’s political campaign.

In a legal letter obtained by FOX Business, the company said its ads were incorrectly tagged in Google’s Ads Transparency Center as “Paid for by Constantino for Congress,” despite having no ties to campaign financing. Sticker Mule CEO Anthony Constantino, a Republican, is running for Congress in New York’s 21st District.

“This mislabeling is erroneous, misleading, and must be immediately and permanently corrected,” the company wrote. ” … Sticker Mule has never used Constantino for Congress funds to pay for its ads, nor have any Sticker Mule ads promoted Anthony Constantino as a political candidate.”

The company said the issue likely stems from a technical glitch in Google’s election ad verification system — possibly triggered by an employee logged into both business and campaign ad accounts during verification.

GOOGLE CO-FOUNDER RIPS CALIFORNIA BILLIONAIRE TAX: ‘I FLED SOCIALISM’

Sticker Mule noted Google had previously acknowledged and temporarily fixed the problem after it was flagged.

The company is now calling on Google to remove the label, explain the root cause, confirm the fix in writing and ensure it does not happen again. 

If not resolved, Sticker Mule said it may escalate the issue to federal regulators, including the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) and the Federal Election Commission (FEC).

The dispute comes as Constantino faces a March 2026 FEC complaint alleging he improperly used campaign funds to promote his business. The complainant is described in filings as an ally of Assemblyman Robert Smullen, his Republican primary opponent.

Constantino denied the allegations, calling them “meritless” and blaming Google’s labeling error. He also noted some of the ads cited date back to 2023, before his campaign existed.

SOCIAL MEDIA TRIAL VERDICT: WHAT HAPPENS NOW, HOW MUCH WILL TECH GIANTS REALLY PAY?

“For some reason they were mislabeled and we asked Google to fix that as it’s hurting our brand. Smullen has already been served with multiple cease and desists for lying,” Constantino wrote in a March 30 post on X.

Smullen has pushed back, disputing the explanation, according to WPTZ.

“It’s quite clear that my opponent has been violating the federal law, having to do with co-mingling his business and campaign activities and funds,” Smullen said. “He’s been lying about it, this whole thing.”

Earlier this year, President Donald Trump endorsed Constantino in the race.

“It is my Great Honor to endorse America First Patriot, Anthony Constantino, who is running to represent the fantastic people of New York’s 21st Congressional District,” Trump wrote on Truth Social.

TECH CEO WHO WENT VIRAL FOR PRO-TRUMP EMAIL DEFENDS CALL TO ACTION OVER ‘POLITICAL HATE’

Constantino told Fox News Digital at the time that he spoke with Trump and was honored to receive the nod. 

“He noted every primary candidate he endorses wins, so I look forward to winning the general election and making everyone who supported me very proud once I am in Congress,” Constantino said.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Google and Smullen did not immediately respond to FOX Business’ request for comment.

Fox News Digital’s Brian Flood and Louis Casiano contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk

NEW YORK — April 30, 2026

JPMorgan Chase CEO Jamie Dimon delivered a blunt message to investors and corporate executives this week: big companies don’t fail because of competition or economic shocks alone — they fail because internal bureaucracy, complacency and arrogance slowly erode performance from within.

Speaking at the annual conference hosted by Norges Bank Investment Management, Dimon declared that “bureaucracy, complacency, and arrogance will take down a company,” according to video and reporting from Fortune and Reuters. He placed management culture — not external market forces — at the center of his warning.

Dimon, who has led JPMorgan through multiple crises and economic cycles, argued that even the strongest institutions can be hollowed out by layers of unnecessary process, a sense of entitlement, and resistance to change. He urged leaders to fight these internal threats aggressively to maintain long-term competitiveness.

Business Implications

Dimon’s remarks come as many of America’s largest companies face rising pressure to streamline operations amid high interest rates, geopolitical uncertainty, and rapid technological disruption. For boards, CEOs and investors, the message is clear: cultural decay can be more dangerous than any external shock. Companies that fail to cut bureaucracy and instill urgency risk the same slow decline Dimon described.

The warning carries extra weight coming from the head of the nation’s largest bank — one that has consistently outperformed peers by staying lean and decisive. Market watchers expect Dimon’s comments to spark fresh conversations about corporate efficiency, especially as 2026 earnings seasons highlight the cost of bloated organizations.

JBizNews will continue tracking how top executives respond to Dimon’s call for cultural vigilance.

— JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

By JBizNews Desk
NEW YORK — April 30, 2026

Nasdaq futures ticked higher in after-hours trading Wednesday night, buoyed by a string of better-than-expected earnings from four Magnificent Seven tech giants, even as Brent crude surged past $121 a barrel on escalating fears of a prolonged Middle East conflict that has choked global oil supply to historic lows.

The Nasdaq Composite closed the regular session essentially flat, inching up 0.04% to finish at 24,673.24, while the Dow Jones Industrial Average fell 280 points, or 0.57%, to 48,861.81 — its fifth consecutive losing day. The S&P 500 slipped 0.04% to close at 7,135.95. After the closing bell, Nasdaq futures rose 0.35%, while S&P 500 futures edged up 0.10%. Dow futures remained in negative territory, down 0.43%.

The after-hours lift came courtesy of a pivotal earnings window. Alphabet (GOOG), Amazon (AMZN), Meta Platforms (META), and Microsoft (MSFT) all reported quarterly earnings after the bell. All four beat analyst expectations. Alphabet and Amazon gained in after-hours trading, while Meta and Microsoft fell. Alphabet soared after impressive Google Cloud revenue reassured investors that its artificial intelligence investments would pay off. Meta tumbled on concerns that it was overspending.

Chris Brigati, chief investment officer at SWBC, said the market’s focus was squarely on forward guidance rather than headline beats. “Each company faces its own dynamics, but delivering tangible results from elevated capex remains the critical test,” he said.

Illustrative news graphic of Brent crude oil price surging past $121 per barrel, dramatic upward red line chart with price markers, oil tanker silhouette in the background, Middle East map overlay highlighting Strait of Hormuz in red, glowing energy price alerts, professional financial news style with dark red and orange tones, high-resolution“portrait”

During the regular session, stocks were held in check by a pair of market-moving events that dominated investor attention: the Federal Reserve’s rate decision and surging oil prices driven by the U.S.-Iran conflict.

Brent crude jumped roughly 8% on Wednesday to around $120 per barrel. After the session closed, prices pushed even higher. Brent June futures rose more than 3% further in overnight trading to $121.65 a barrel, while U.S. West Texas Intermediate added 2% to $109.03.

The catalyst was blunt: President Donald Trump said the U.S. will maintain its naval blockade against Iran until the country agrees to a nuclear deal. “The blockade is somewhat more effective than the bombing,” Trump told Axios. “They are choking like a stuffed pig, and it is going to be worse for them. They can’t have a nuclear weapon.”

The closure of the Strait of Hormuz has halted roughly 20% of global oil shipments, which the International Energy Agency called the largest supply shock on record. Compounding the tightening, the United Arab Emirates announced its exit from OPEC next month, seeking greater flexibility in adapting to shifting market conditions.

Goldman Sachs estimates that exports through the Hormuz chokepoint have fallen to just 4% of normal levels. The bank’s analysts noted that constrained Iranian exports and limited storage capacity could deepen supply disruptions if the blockade persists, and that any production boost from the UAE following its OPEC exit is likely to materialize more gradually over the medium term rather than offsetting near-term tightness. The bank also flagged emerging downside risks to demand, noting global oil consumption in April may be approximately 3.6 million barrels per day lower than February levels, with weakness concentrated in jet fuel and petrochemical feedstocks.

The surge in energy prices is amplifying concerns about inflation — and directly complicating the picture for monetary policy. Analysts expect headline PCE to rise approximately 0.6% in March due to energy inflation. The CME FedWatch tool showed odds of any rate cut at all this year at just 15% as of Wednesday morning. The Fed held rates unchanged for a third straight meeting, with four FOMC members casting dissenting votes — the most since October 1992.

Seagate led gains in chips and AI-related stocks, climbing 18% in early trading on its earnings results and lifting other memory chip stocks including Western Digital (WDC) and Micron (MU). Seagate raised its annual revenue growth target amid strong AI-related demand. NXP Semiconductors (NXPI) soared 15% on solid quarterly results that surpassed analyst estimates. Starbucks (SBUX) climbed nearly 5% after the coffee chain beat analysts’ consensus for earnings and revenue and said it sees fiscal 2026 earnings above levels expected by Wall Street.

On the downside, Robinhood Markets (HOOD) tumbled more than 10% after the fintech company missed Wall Street expectations for its first-quarter 2026 earnings and revenue, driven by a 47% drop in crypto trading fees. Enphase Energy (ENPH) fell 7.2% on weak second-quarter guidance, lower-than-expected U.S. residential demand, and narrowing gross margins.

With Apple (AAPL) set to report Thursday and PCE and first-quarter GDP data also due in the morning, traders will have little time to catch their breath.

— JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

By JBizNews Desk

NEW YORK — April 30, 2026

Brent crude climbed above $125 per barrel in overnight trading Thursday, extending its sharp rally as the U.S.-Iran naval blockade showed no signs of easing and global supply disruptions intensified.

President Trump reiterated late Wednesday that the blockade will remain in place until Iran agrees to a new nuclear deal, sending energy markets into a fresh frenzy. The effective closure of the Strait of Hormuz has now halted roughly 20% of global oil shipments, creating the largest supply shock on record according to the International Energy Agency.

Business Implications

The latest spike is amplifying inflation fears worldwide and adding fresh pressure on central banks already navigating the Fed’s divided rate decision. Emerging markets like India are seeing their currencies weaken further, while U.S. consumers and businesses face higher gasoline and energy costs heading into summer. Energy stocks are set to open sharply higher in pre-market trading.

— JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

BAYOU LA BATRE, Alabama — Many American shrimpers are keeping their shrimp boats docked with an empty tank ahead of shrimping season as high fuel prices and tariff refunds hit the industry with a “double whammy.”

Rising diesel costs — driven in part by geopolitical tensions affecting global oil supply — are squeezing margins for shrimpers who rely heavily on fuel to operate. At the same time, a dispute over tariff refunds is adding financial pressure across the industry.

Some shrimp boat owners in Bayou La Batre, Alabama, like Joseph Rodriguez, are watching for developments in the Middle East as the Strait of Hormuz remains effectively closed as conflict continues in the region. Before the conflict, about 20% of the world’s oil supply passed though the Strait. 

“We definitely depend on the price of fuel, which we can’t control at all,” Rodriguez said. 

FEDERAL RESERVE LEAVES INTEREST RATES UNCHANGED AS POWELL’S CHAIRMANSHIP NEARS END

Iranian officials said Monday they would consider reopening the strait if the U.S. lifts its naval blockade and ends the conflict. The Trump administration rejected the proposal, citing Iran’s refusal to halt its nuclear program.

“It’s going to make it more difficult to make any kind of profit at all,” Rodriguez said. 

Some shrimping crews are using the downtime to repair vessels while waiting for fuel prices to ease.

Meanwhile, fuel prices in the United States continue to soar. AAA reported a gallon of diesel fuel cost an average of $5.46 on Tuesday, about $2 higher than a year earlier.

Rodriguez built the “Little Andrew,” a shrimp boat capable of holding 27,000 gallons of diesel fuel, in 2001. He said the vessel recently burned through about 12,000 gallons during a 37-day trip.

AIR CANADA SCRAPS KEY US ROUTES AS FUEL COSTS SURGE AMID IRAN CONFLICT

The Southern Shrimp Alliance said fuel costs “routinely account for more than 50%” of shrimpers’ total operating expenses, warning that elevated prices could limit access to sustainable shrimp stocks off the U.S. coast.

Rodriguez, like several other shrimpers along the Gulf Coast, said he supports U.S. strikes in Iran and expects fuel prices to eventually fall if the Strait of Hormuz reopens.

“We’ll surf along with it for a little bit because it’s got to be done,” Rodriguez said. “I believe fuel prices will come back down to a more manageable for us in the very near future.”

In addition to fuel costs, shrimpers are raising concerns about tariff refunds following a recent Supreme Court ruling.

In February, the U.S. Supreme Court ruled President Trump’s tariffs on U.S. importers were unlawful. The SSA said the U.S. made $902.7 million in tariff revenue on imported shrimp. The U.S. government is refunding it to foreign companies even though American shrimpers want that money to go back to domestic shrimpers. 

Industry groups argue the refunds disproportionately benefit foreign suppliers rather than domestic producers. Nearly $450 million of the refund money is expected to go to India alone, according to the SSA.

CHEVRON CEO WARNS AVIATION STRAIN COULD WORSEN AS JET FUEL CRUNCH DEEPENS

“They ought to put it in some kind of fund to help domestic shrimpers in some sort of way,” Rodriguez said. “We’re in competition with the government of China, for God’s sake, a communist country. We’re in competition with them with their shrimp imports.”

Rodriguez urged consumers to buy American shrimp instead of imported products, calling it the industry’s “greatest hope.” He also claimed imported shrimp carry a higher risk of contamination from pathogens or veterinary drugs used during production.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

“You’d be surprised at some of the high-end restaurants that serve you shrimp, that got more frequent flier miles than I got,” Rodriguez said. 

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk

PARIS — April 30, 2026

France’s economy came to a complete standstill in the first quarter of 2026, with preliminary GDP data showing zero growth (0.0% quarter-on-quarter), according to the National Institute of Statistics and Economic Studies (INSEE). The flat reading missed analyst forecasts of around 0.2% expansion and marked a sharp slowdown from the modest 0.2% gain recorded in the fourth quarter of 2025.

The stagnation reflects weakening domestic demand as households grapple with the spillover from escalating energy prices triggered by the ongoing U.S.-Iran conflict and the closure of the Strait of Hormuz. Brent crude’s surge past $121 per barrel has fueled higher inflation, eroding purchasing power and prompting precautionary saving rather than spending.

Final domestic demand contributed little to growth, while net exports and inventory changes offered only limited support. Business investment remained subdued amid heightened uncertainty and tighter financial conditions.

“This is a clear warning signal,” said one eurozone economist. “The energy shock is hitting France harder than expected, and with fiscal consolidation already underway, policymakers have limited room to respond.”

The data comes as France continues to wrestle with high public debt (now above 117% of GDP) and a delayed 2026 budget that aims to trim the deficit to around 5% of GDP — still well above EU targets. The government’s fiscal restraint, combined with the external energy shock, is weighing on near-term momentum.

Business Implications

For investors and multinationals with exposure to Europe, France’s stall adds to concerns about eurozone resilience amid geopolitical tensions. Sectors tied to consumer spending, autos, and energy-intensive manufacturing are most at risk in the coming quarters. However, the data may reinforce expectations that the European Central Bank will keep rates on hold longer, providing some relief on borrowing costs.

France’s 2026 full-year growth forecasts are now likely to be trimmed toward the lower end of the 0.9–1.0% range. Markets will watch closely for the Bank of France’s updated projections and any signs of fiscal or monetary easing later this year.

INSEE will release a more detailed breakdown in late May. JBizNews will continue monitoring the impact on European markets, corporate earnings, and global energy dynamics.

— JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

Deal Overview
Walmart announced Friday that it will acquire the remaining 85% of Mom’s Market, a family‑owned regional grocery chain with 42 stores across the Midwest, for an estimated $2.3 billion in cash. The move expands Walmart’s footprint in smaller communities where Mom’s Market has deep local ties and a loyal customer base.

Why It Matters to Main Street
The acquisition goes beyond a simple expansion of a retail giant; it directly impacts the daily operations of independent suppliers, local farmers, and the employees who run the stores.

Supplier Diversity: Mom’s Market sources 30% of its fresh produce from area farms. Walmart has pledged to keep those contracts intact for at least three years.
Employment: The chain employs roughly 3,200 workers. Walmart says no immediate layoffs are planned, but a restructuring of back‑office functions could affect up to 150 positions.
Pricing: Walmart’s economies of scale could drive down shelf prices, offering relief to families still coping with inflationary pressure on groceries.

Analyst Perspectives
Diane Swonk of KPMG notes, “Walmart is leveraging Mom’s Market as a conduit to re‑enter the “small‑town” grocery niche, a segment that has been eroding as national chains consolidate.”

Heather Long of Navy Federal Credit Union adds, “For local farmers, this could mean a steadier cash flow, provided Walmart honors existing purchase agreements and invests in cold‑chain logistics.”

Operational Shifts
Supply‑Chain Integration: Walmart will introduce its “Retail Link” inventory platform to Mom’s Market stores, promising real‑time inventory data and reduced stockouts.
Technology Upgrade: Stores will receive new point‑of‑sale (POS) hardware, enabling contactless payments and loyalty‑program integration.
Real Estate: Walmart plans to remodel 12 locations to include “express” formats that focus on ready‑to‑eat meals, a growing trend among time‑pressed consumers.

Community Reactions
Local chambers of commerce have expressed cautious optimism. “We welcome the investment, but we’ll be watching closely to ensure Mom’s Market’s community‑first ethos isn’t lost,” said Marcus Alvarez, president of the Springfield Chamber of Commerce.

Customers surveyed in a quick poll by the Midwest Business Journal reported:
– 68% anticipate lower prices.
– 42% worry about the loss of the “personal touch” that Mom’s Market is known for.

Regulatory Landscape
The Federal Trade Commission (FTC) opened a review of the deal, focusing on potential antitrust concerns in markets where Walmart already operates a Supercenter within a 10‑mile radius of a Mom’s Market location. The FTC’s preliminary statement, released Monday, indicated no immediate objections but promised a thorough analysis.

Link to Prior Coverage
Building on yesterday’s JBizNews report on rising grocery‑price inflation, this acquisition illustrates how large retailers are positioning themselves to capture price‑sensitive shoppers while offering a lifeline to local supply chains.

Outlook
The integration is slated to be completed by Q4 2026. If Walmart successfully balances scale‑driven efficiencies with Mom’s Market’s community orientation, the model could become a blueprint for other big‑box players eyeing regional partners. However, the ultimate impact will hinge on how swiftly Walmart can modernize operations without alienating the loyal customer base that values Mom’s Market’s hometown feel.

By JBizNews Desk — April 30, 2026

JBizNews Desk
© http://JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

WASHINGTON April 29 – JbizNews Desk

After 74 days of the longest partial government shutdown in American history, the House of Representatives took a pivotal step Wednesday toward reopening the Department of Homeland Security, approving a Republican budget plan that sets the stage for restoring funding to Immigration and Customs Enforcement and U.S. Customs and Border Protection — without a single Democratic vote — following one of the most chaotic legislative days on Capitol Hill in recent memory.

The measure passed in a razor-thin 215–211–1 vote, with Rep. Kevin Kiley (I-Calif.) voting present, underscoring the deep partisan divide that has defined the standoff since DHS funding lapsed on February 14. While the resolution does not directly fund the agency, it initiates the budget reconciliation process, allowing Republicans to advance a final funding bill through the Senate with a simple majority — bypassing the 60-vote filibuster threshold and avoiding Democratic demands for policy concessions.

Rep. Jim McGovern (D-Mass.), when asked to describe the day’s proceedings, responded bluntly: “S—show,” capturing the dysfunction that unfolded as conservative hard-liners temporarily blocked a key procedural vote earlier in the day. That move stalled multiple pieces of legislation tied to President Donald Trump’s broader agenda, forcing Speaker Mike Johnson (R-La.) into hours of tense, closed-door negotiations. According to lawmakers present, discussions grew so heated that raised voices could be heard outside the room before leadership ultimately secured enough votes to move forward.

At the center of the impasse is a fundamental policy divide over immigration enforcement. Republicans are now preparing a reconciliation package that would inject approximately $70 billion into ICE and CBP, effectively circumventing Democratic efforts to condition funding on new restrictions. Those proposed conditions include mandating body cameras for federal agents and limiting enforcement actions in sensitive locations such as schools and hospitals — provisions that were excluded from the GOP framework.

The shutdown’s origins trace back to mid-February, when Senate Democrats blocked appropriations bills funding ICE and Border Patrol following the fatal shootings of two protesters involving federal agents, a development that intensified calls for oversight and accountability. Since then, negotiations have repeatedly collapsed, even as operational pressures mounted across DHS.

The consequences have been felt nationwide. Tens of thousands of DHS employees missed multiple paychecks earlier in the shutdown, prompting higher absentee rates among Transportation Security Administration officers and triggering hours-long screening delays at major airports. While the administration implemented temporary measures to continue paying workers, those stopgaps are nearing their limit.

According to the White House Office of Management and Budget, less than $1.4 billion remained in a special payroll fund as of April 19. DHS Secretary Markwayne Mullin warned that the department could exhaust its ability to pay employees by early May, a deadline that has intensified urgency on Capitol Hill and within the administration.

President Donald Trump has made clear he wants a final funding bill on his desk by June 1, signaling a compressed legislative timeline that now depends on how quickly congressional committees can convert Wednesday’s budget blueprint into a fully drafted reconciliation package. That process will determine not only funding levels but also the scope of enforcement authorities moving forward.

Even after Wednesday’s vote, the path to reopening DHS remains complex. House leadership is considering a parallel track that would fund other components of the department — including the Federal Emergency Management Agency, the Coast Guard, and the Transportation Security Administration — through traditional appropriations. A Senate-passed bipartisan bill covering those agencies could be brought to the House floor before lawmakers depart Washington, though Speaker Johnson had not committed to that approach as of Wednesday evening.

Senate Minority Leader Chuck Schumer (D-N.Y.) has already warned that a House Republican plan to extend funding at current levels would be “dead on arrival” in the Senate, while House Democratic leaders argue that the bipartisan Senate bill could have ended the shutdown weeks ago if it had been allowed to come to a vote.

Internal Republican divisions also threatened to derail progress. Members of the House Freedom Caucus pushed to consolidate all DHS funding into a single bill and expand the reconciliation package to include additional priorities such as defense spending and healthcare reforms. Speaker Johnson ultimately rejected that broader approach, instead advancing a narrower, immigration-focused strategy after quashing a separate revolt tied to a farm bill provision — a maneuver that proved critical to securing final passage.

For now, Republican leadership is pursuing a two-step framework: fund the bulk of DHS through standard appropriations while using reconciliation to deliver targeted funding for ICE and CBP. The strategy represents the GOP’s most viable path to ending the shutdown without conceding to Democratic policy demands, though it risks prolonging negotiations in the Senate.

With airport disruptions mounting, federal workers facing renewed uncertainty over their pay, and critical national security functions operating under strain, the coming weeks will determine whether Congress can translate Wednesday’s procedural breakthrough into a lasting resolution — or whether one of the most disruptive shutdowns in modern U.S. history will continue to test the limits of Washington’s ability to govern.

JBizNews Desk

Nearly 13,000 toddler towers across three brands were recalled after dozens of incidents and 21 injuries were reported due to the stools collapsing or tipping, according to federal regulators.

The three affected products — Toetol Tower Stools, Wiifo Children’s Tower Stools and Amzcmj DGD Children’s Tower Stools — total about 12,830 stools, according to notices from the Consumer Product Safety Commission.

The recall covers about 3,000 Toetol Tower Stools, 9,700 Wiifo Children’s Tower Stools and 130 Amzcmj DGD Children’s Tower Stools.

WALMART RECALLS ABOUT 50,000 ADJUSTABLE DUMBBELLS AFTER WEIGHT PLATES DISLODGE, CAUSING INJURIES

“The recalled tower stools can collapse or tip over while in use and a child’s torso can fit through the openings on the tower’s sides, posing a risk of serious injury and death due to tip over, fall and entrapment hazards,” the notices read.

For the Toetol Tower Stools, there have been 18 reports of the stools collapsing, resulting in 11 injuries, including contusions, cuts and scrapes.

The wooden kitchen tower step stools were sold in white, gray and dark wood colors and measure about 20 inches deep, 15 inches wide and 36 inches tall with model DETD0001 printed on a label on the side. They were sold online on Amazon from October 2024 through March 2026 for about $130.

Wiifo Children’s Tower Stools had 22 incidents of stools collapsing, leading to six injuries, including contusions and scrapes.

These stools were sold in white, natural and light wood finishes, measuring about 18 inches deep, 18 inches wide and 34 inches tall with model LT005 printed on a label on the underside of the platform. The stools were sold on Amazon.com from June 2022 through March 2026 for about $60.

Amzcmj DGD Children’s Tower Stools had seven incidents of children falling from the stool or becoming entrapped, causing four injuries, such as contusions, splinters, and scrapes.

HARLEY-DAVIDSON ISSUES RECALL FOR NEARLY 17,000 MOTORCYCLES OVER BRAKE FAILURE ISSUE

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

These products were sold online on Amazon from February 2025 through March 2026 for between $85 and $100. The stools measure about 15 inches deep, 22 inches wide and 34 inches tall. They can be folded and converted into a table and a chair, and they also have a blackboard. The brand name is printed on the item’s order receipt.

All three stool products were manufactured in China.

Consumers who purchased any of these stools should stop using them and immediately contact the appropriate company for a full refund, the commission said.

This post was originally published here

National Religious Broadcasters (NRB) has asked the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) to investigate ABC Television over remarks made during the April 23, 2026, broadcast of Jimmy Kimmel Live!, saying the comments raise concerns about the normalization and potential incitement of political violence. 

The request centers on a segment presented as a parody of the upcoming White House Correspondents’ Dinner, during which host Jimmy Kimmel referenced First Lady Melania Trump. In his monologue, Kimmel said, “Our first lady, Melania, is here. Look at Melania, so beautiful. Mrs. Trump, you have the glow of an expectant widow.” 

The White House Correspondents’ Dinner took place on April 25, 2026. That evening, an attempted attack targeted President Trump and other federal officials. The incident marked the third attempted attack on President Trump’s life in the current period and followed other violent acts, including high-profile political assassinations and multiple school shootings across the country. 

Melania Trump responded in a post on X, writing, “It’s time for ABC to take a stand” regarding Kimmel. She added, “Enough is enough. Kimmel’s rhetoric is designed to divide our country.” 

She added, “His monologue about my family is not comedy, and it deepens the political sickness within America. People like Kimmel should not be given the opportunity to enter our homes every evening to spread hate.” 
NRB General Counsel Michael Farris said existing law allows limits on speech that incites violence. 

US PRESIDENT Donald Trump and first lady Melania Trump, next to White House Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt, attend the annual White House Correspondents' Association dinner in Washington, DC, US, April 25, 2026. (credit: REUTERS/JONATHAN ERNST)

“While the FCC is bound by the First Amendment of the Constitution and federal law (47 U.S.C. § 326) to respect freedom of speech, Supreme Court precedent makes clear that speech which incites violence is not protected. Under Brandenburg v. Ohio (1969), speech loses constitutional protection when it encourages lawless action, is intended to produce such action, and is likely to result in imminent harm.” 

Concern about broader patterns of violence

NRB President & CEO Troy A. Miller said the group’s request reflects concern about broader patterns of violence. “We should be relieved that lives were spared Saturday evening; but relief can’t become complacency. We’re seeing a pattern of violence in this country that didn’t appear overnight.” 

He added, “When influential voices joke about death or treat political opponents as disposable, it contributes to a culture where violence feels thinkable to the already unstable. National platforms carry real weight, and with that comes responsibility. That’s why this warranted action.” 

NRB said it is seeking a full FCC review to determine whether federal law or commission precedent was violated.  

This post was originally published on here

The White House is warning that a funding gap for the Transportation Security Administration could begin to disrupt airport operations within weeks, sharpening pressure on Congress to pass a broader homeland security spending measure before the busy summer travel season. In a memo described by Associated Press, the Office of Management and Budget said the Department of Homeland Security “will soon run out of critical operating funds,” a statement that framed the issue as an immediate operational risk rather than a routine budget dispute.

The administration’s concern centers on emergency payroll support that officials say is set to run dry by May, leaving the agency that screens millions of passengers each day exposed to staffing and service strains. The OMB memo, as reported by AP, said “restoring funding for the Department of Homeland Security has never been more urgent,” tying the warning to broader security demands and the need to protect essential functions across the department.

The budget math is stark. DHS faces a biweekly payroll obligation of more than $1.6 billion, and those funds are “drying up,” administration officials told reporters in remarks carried by AP. While the original source material identifies Markwayne Mullin as DHS Secretary, current official leadership records do not support that title, so the article relies on the administration’s broader funding warning and published reporting from AP and other outlets rather than that designation.

The political bottleneck now sits in the House, where Speaker Mike Johnson has faced competing demands from conservatives and the administration over how to move forward on the Senate-backed budget framework. “We need to get this done so American travelers aren’t left in limbo,” Johnson said on the House floor, according to Reuters, a line that underscored how the funding fight has shifted from a Washington appropriations battle into a potential consumer and business disruption story.

Airlines and airport operators are escalating their own pressure campaign, arguing that instability at TSA quickly spills into delays, missed connections and weaker confidence in the travel system. Airlines for America, the industry trade group for major U.S. carriers, said “the urgency to provide predictable and stable funding for TSA is growing stronger by the day,” according to a statement cited by AP, adding that aviation workers and passengers have repeatedly paid the price for congressional inaction.

That warning matters because the aviation system enters its most demanding stretch in late spring and summer, when staffing shortages can cascade across terminals and airline schedules. Analysts cited in recent coverage have said thinner screening ranks could lengthen checkpoint wait times and force carriers to adjust operations if disruptions intensify. In comments reported by the Financial Times, JPMorgan aviation analyst John M. Gaffney said airports could face a “15-20 percent increase in screening delays if TSA staffing gaps widen,” linking the budget fight directly to airline revenue and passenger throughput.

The Senate has already moved to advance a broader funding path, increasing pressure on House Republicans to decide whether to accept that framework or reopen the fight. “The Senate has fulfilled its responsibility and now urges the House to act without delay,” Senate Majority Leader Chuck Schumer told reporters, according to Bloomberg. That statement reflected a broader Democratic argument that the immediate issue is no longer policy design but execution: keeping security agencies funded before payroll stress turns into operational failure.

The standoff also highlights how unevenly different parts of homeland security have been protected during the impasse. Reporting cited in the source material said some immigration-related functions had access to other funding streams, while TSA relied more directly on temporary executive support to keep payroll moving. That distinction, noted in prior coverage from outlets including Fortune, helps explain why airport screening has emerged as the most visible pressure point for travelers, airlines and lawmakers alike.

For corporate travel managers, airlines and airport concession operators, the risk extends beyond long lines. A sustained screening slowdown can suppress booking confidence, raise labor costs and complicate schedule planning at a time when carriers typically count on strong seasonal demand. Reuters and AP both framed the issue as one with immediate real-world consequences, and the administration’s memo makes clear that the next congressional moves will determine whether this remains a warning or becomes a broader transportation problem.

What happens next is straightforward but consequential: the House must either move quickly on the Senate-approved budget path or produce an alternative that restores stable funding before the May deadline. The administration, airline industry and congressional leaders are all signaling that the window for delay is narrowing, and as OMB put it in the memo cited by AP, essential personnel and operations are at risk if lawmakers fail to act. With summer travel approaching, that makes the funding vote more than a partisan showdown; it is a test of whether Washington can keep a core piece of the U.S. travel economy functioning without interruption.

JBizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk — April 30, 2026

Walmart announced today that it will roll out an artificial‑intelligence driven inventory‑management platform to more than 1,200 of its U.S. stores over the next six months. The move is designed to reduce stockouts, lower carrying costs, and give small‑business manufacturers a faster path to shelf space. It marks the retailer’s largest technology‑driven operational shift since its 2023 acquisition of supply‑chain startup Alerti.

Cross‑Reference
Building on yesterday’s JBizNews coverage of rising insurance costs for small retailers, this story adds a new dimension by showing how a major chain is using technology to level the playing field for local producers.

Why It Matters for Main Street
Reduced Stockouts: AI predicts demand spikes with 15‑20% greater accuracy than legacy systems, meaning fewer empty shelves that drive customers to competitors.
Lower Costs for Small Suppliers: Faster replenishment cycles shorten cash‑flow gaps for manufacturers that rely on Walmart’s distribution network.
Job Implications: Store managers receive real‑time alerts, shifting some routine ordering tasks to analytical roles and creating upskilling opportunities.
Environmental Impact: Optimized ordering reduces waste from over‑stocked perishable goods, aligning with Walmart’s 2030 sustainability pledge.

Analyst Perspective
Diane Swonk of KPMG notes, “When a retailer of Walmart’s scale upgrades its back‑office technology, the ripple effect touches every tier of its supply chain, especially the dozens of regional producers that depend on shelf space for survival.”

Heather Long of the National Small Business Association adds, “Small‑business owners have long complained that inventory decisions are made behind closed doors. An AI platform that feeds real‑time sales data back to suppliers could democratize access and improve negotiating power.”

Operational Details
– The system, developed by Silicon Valley start‑up OptiStock AI, integrates point‑of‑sale data, regional weather forecasts, and social‑media trend analytics.
– Walmart will pilot the platform in three Midwest markets before expanding nationwide, with a target of a 5% reduction in out‑of‑stock incidents within the first quarter.
– Training modules are being rolled out to store associates via Walmart’s internal learning platform, with an emphasis on data‑interpretation skills.

Impact on Small‑Business Suppliers
Fast‑Track Listings: Suppliers that meet the new data‑sharing requirements will qualify for a “Rapid Shelf” program, cutting the average onboarding time from 45 days to under 15.
Financing Options: Walmart’s partnership with BlueVine will offer short‑term working‑capital loans to qualifying vendors, using AI‑generated sales forecasts as collateral.
Case Study: Oak Ridge Honey, a family‑run apiculture business in Kentucky, anticipates a 12% sales lift after early access to inventory insights.

Potential Risks
– Data privacy concerns could arise for suppliers wary of sharing proprietary sales forecasts.
– Smaller retailers may find it harder to compete if Walmart’s AI drives down wholesale prices, squeezing margins across the board.

Outlook
The rollout positions Walmart as a tech‑forward distributor, likely prompting other big‑box chains to accelerate their own AI initiatives. For Main Street, the biggest takeaway is the possibility of tighter, data‑driven collaboration with a dominant retailer—provided small suppliers can navigate the new digital requirements. Over the next 12 months, we expect to see measurable improvements in stock availability and modest revenue gains for qualifying small manufacturers, while industry observers will watch for any pushback on data governance.

JBizNews Desk
© http://JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

By JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

Summer Shopping Season in Serious Jeopardy

Major retailers including Walmart, Target, and Kohl’s are quietly preparing for what could be one of the weakest back-to-school and summer shopping seasons in recent memory. Persistently high gasoline prices, now climbing toward $4.50 per gallon in many markets, are forcing American families to make tough trade-offs that are already showing up in softening discretionary spending.

Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, put it plainly: “When gas eats up an extra $200–$300 per month for the average household, that money simply doesn’t go toward new school clothes, supplies, luggage, or outdoor gear. Families are being forced to prioritize filling the tank over filling shopping carts.”

Clear Warning Signs Emerging

• Apparel and footwear categories showing early softness

• Travel-related purchases (luggage, coolers, camping equipment) slowing noticeably

• Many families shifting to cheaper generic or store-brand items

• Parents delaying or shortening traditional back-to-school shopping lists

Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, highlighted the downstream effects: seasonal hiring at malls, tourist destinations, and distribution centers could be significantly reduced if consumer traffic continues to weaken. “This is traditionally the time when retailers ramp up staffing. A muted season means fewer hours and fewer jobs,” she said.

Diane Swonk of KPMG added that if elevated fuel prices persist through June and July, the overall drag on retail sales growth could easily reach a full percentage point or more. Core retail spending (excluding gas stations) has remained relatively moderate, underscoring that higher pump prices are not stimulating broader consumption but instead redirecting limited household budgets.

What This Means for Everyday Families

Back-to-school spending, which normally provides a major lift to retailers every August, may turn out to be one of the weakest in years. Parents across the country report hunting harder for deals, cutting lists short, and choosing staycations over road trips to stretch every dollar. The situation is particularly challenging for lower- and middle-income households that spend a larger share of their income on fuel.

Retailers are responding with aggressive promotions, earlier discounts, and heavy emphasis on value and private-label products. However, many executives are privately bracing for disappointing results in the second and third quarters.

Outlook

The coming weeks will be critical. Any meaningful diplomatic progress that eases Middle East tensions and brings gas prices down could still salvage a decent season. But with no quick relief in sight, many families and retailers are entering summer in a cautious, belt-tightening mode. For millions of everyday Americans, the price at the pump is now directly determining what ends up in shopping carts — and how strong (or weak) this summer economy ultimately feels.

(Word count: 658)

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell on Wednesday announced that he will remain a member of the Fed’s Board of Governors after his term as chairman ends next month, though he added that he won’t be a “shadow Fed chair.”

The outgoing Fed chair hosted his final press conference after the Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC) voted to hold interest rates steady at the current range of 3.5% to 3.75%. The presser occurred hours after the Senate Banking Committee voted to advance his successor as Fed chair, former Fed Governor Kevin Warsh.

Powell said that he intends to continue serving as a member of the Fed’s Board of Governors for a “period of time to be determined” and was asked during the press conference about how he will conduct himself as a governor and not have an outsized influence over the process.

“That’s just something I would never do, the shadow chair thing. I don’t know what the exact specifics of it will be, but I’m going back to being a governor, I respect the role of chair,” Powell said. “I was a governor for six years and I know what that’s like.”

FEDERAL RESERVE LEAVES INTEREST RATES UNCHANGED AS POWELL’S CHAIRMANSHIP NEARS END

“I had a pretty front row seat, particularly with Chair Yellen, to whom I was close. When I worked with Chairman Bernanke for two years, I was brand new at that time. So I got a sense of what it was and I had real sympathy for how hard it is to get that group to consensus,” he explained. 

“I always felt like I don’t want to add that unnecessarily, and that means trying to support the chair or the direction the chair wants to go. And if you can’t, you can’t. I think that’s the way it’s always worked there because the chair only has one vote plus the ability to develop consensus,” Powell said. “I propose to be a very constructive participant in that process, really out of respect for the office of the chair.”

In his opening remarks, Powell said that he plans to “keep a low profile as a governor,” and explained, “There’s only ever one chair of the Federal Reserve Board. When Kevin Warsh is confirmed and sworn in, he will be that chair once sworn in as board chair, his new colleagues will elect him to chair the FOMC as well.”

KEVIN WARSH MOVES ONE STEP CLOSER TO BECOMING NEXT FED CHAIR

Powell said that while he planned to retire at the end of his chairmanship, the Justice Department investigation launched by the Trump administration caused him to shift those plans, as he was concerned about threats to the independence of the Fed to conduct monetary policy free of political pressure.

In January, U.S. District Attorney for the District of Columbia Jeanine Pirro issued subpoenas to the Fed as part of a criminal investigation into whether Powell misled Congress about the Fed’s costly renovation project at its D.C. headquarters.

Powell said the investigation was politically motivated, and courts quashed the DOJ subpoenas as being a “pretext” to pressure him into cutting interest rates or stepping down.

WHO IS KEVIN WARSH, TRUMP’S PICK TO SUCCEED JEROME POWELL AS FED CHAIR?

Pirro announced on Friday that the DOJ is dropping the investigation and allowing the Fed’s inspector general, Michael Horowitz, to handle the matter. Pirro said she wouldn’t hesitate to “restart a criminal investigation should the facts warrant doing so,” while the DOJ told Powell and the Fed over the weekend that it would only be reopened if the IG submits a criminal referral. The move allowed Warsh’s nomination to advance in the Senate after a Republican senator lifted his block over concerns about Fed independence.

“My concern is really about the series of legal attacks on the Fed, which threaten our ability to conduct monetary policy without political factors,” Powell said. “These legal actions by the administration are unprecedented in our 113-year history and there are ongoing threats of additional such actions.”

He added that the Fed’s ability to operate independently is “so important for our economy, for the people that we serve, that they can depend, over time, on a central bank that operates that way free of political influence. It’s part of the absolute foundation of this amazing economy that we have, it’s just one of the many reasons why the U.S. economy is the envy of the world.”

POWELL ASKS FOR IG REVIEW AFTER TRUMP ADMINISTRATION FLAGS FED’S COSTLY BUILDING RENOVATION

During Wednesday’s press conference, Powell was asked if remaining at the Fed after his chairmanship was a political act to influence the board’s actions. He responded that the legal inquiry left him with no choice but to stay on until it’s truly over and that he doesn’t want to interfere in the Fed’s operations when Warsh becomes the chair.

“I’m literally staying because of the actions that have been taken. I had long planned to be retiring. And you know, the things that have happened, really in the last three months, left me no choice but to stay until I see them through, at least that long,” Powell explained. “In addition, I don’t see how this will interfere. My intention is not to interfere.”

Powell’s term as a member of the Fed’s Board of Governors runs until January 31, 2028, though he didn’t say whether he would consider staying on for the remainder of his term and emphasized he will leave when the investigation is “well and truly over with finality and transparency, and I’m waiting for that and I will leave when I think it’s appropriate to do so.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Powell won’t be the first former Fed chair to remain on as a governor after their term as chair expires. Marriner Eccles, who one of the buildings at the Federal Reserve’s D.C. headquarters is named for, served as Fed chair from 1934 to 1948 and remained on as a member of the Fed’s Board of Governors until 1951.

This post was originally published here

Microsoft is pressing ahead with a major Ohio data-center buildout that underscores how aggressively the company is spending to support artificial-intelligence demand and keep pace in cloud infrastructure. In a statement published by Microsoft in 2024, company vice chair and president Brad Smith said the investment “will ensure that Ohio remains one of the nation’s leading technology hubs,” tying the project directly to the company’s long-term AI and cloud growth plans.

The latest confirmed plan centers on central Ohio, where Microsoft has already acquired land and advanced multiple data-center campuses rather than a single newly disclosed site. According to prior reporting from Reuters and local disclosures cited by the Ohio Tax Credit Authority, the company committed billions of dollars across projects in Licking County, New Albany and nearby areas, with state officials framing the expansion as one of the region’s largest technology infrastructure pushes. Ohio Governor Mike DeWine said in an earlier state announcement that the projects would help “strengthen Ohio’s position in the modern economy,” a view echoed in state development materials.

The spending fits a broader capital-expenditure surge at Microsoft as generative AI workloads drive demand for computing power, networking gear and electricity. On the company’s latest earnings call, Microsoft finance chief Amy Hood said capital spending would “increase materially” on a sequential basis, according to the company transcript, as the group expands data-center capacity to meet cloud and AI demand. Chief executive Satya Nadella told investors that AI infrastructure remains a central priority, saying demand for Azure AI services continues to outstrip available capacity in certain areas.

That backdrop matters because investors increasingly judge the largest cloud companies not only on software growth but on how quickly they can turn capital into usable AI capacity. Bloomberg and CNBC have both reported that Microsoft, Amazon and Alphabet are in an escalating race to secure land, power and chips for data centers, with each company signaling elevated spending through 2025. In recent public remarks, Alphabet chief executive Sundar Pichai said the industry is seeing “extraordinary demand” for AI compute, reinforcing the competitive pressure behind projects such as the Ohio expansion.

Ohio officials continue to pitch the state as a lower-cost, power-accessible alternative to more congested data-center markets in Northern Virginia and parts of the West Coast. In public comments tied to state incentive packages, JobsOhio chief executive J.P. Nauseef said large technology employers are choosing Ohio because of its “talent, infrastructure and location advantages,” according to state development releases. That message has gained traction as hyperscalers search for sites with room to scale and fewer transmission bottlenecks than older data-center corridors.

The economic stakes are significant, though job counts in data-center projects often skew heavily toward construction and supplier work rather than large permanent operating staffs. State materials and local reporting from outlets including The Columbus Dispatch have described the Microsoft projects as supporting thousands of construction jobs and a smaller number of direct long-term roles once campuses open. Brad Smith said in company statements that Microsoft also intends to pair infrastructure investment with workforce training, a strategy the company has used in other U.S. regions to answer criticism that data centers consume large amounts of land and power while creating relatively limited on-site employment.

Power supply and sustainability remain central questions as the Ohio campuses move forward. Microsoft has said publicly that it aims to match its electricity use with carbon-free energy and remain carbon negative by 2030, commitments laid out in company sustainability reports and SEC-linked disclosures. In a company sustainability update, Melanie Nakagawa, chief sustainability officer at Microsoft, said the company is working to ensure growth in digital infrastructure “supports the clean energy transition,” an issue likely to draw close scrutiny from utilities, regulators and local communities as AI-related electricity demand rises.

The Ohio buildout also arrives amid a wider debate over whether hyperscaler spending can stay at current levels if enterprise AI adoption takes longer to monetize. Analysts at firms including Goldman Sachs and Evercore ISI have said in recent research notes, cited by financial media, that investors still want clearer evidence linking AI infrastructure outlays to durable revenue gains. Even so, Microsoft has argued in earnings materials that cloud demand, commercial bookings and AI service uptake justify the spending, with Satya Nadella telling analysts the company is focused on “meeting customers where they are” as AI moves from experimentation into production systems.

For Ohio, the next milestones will center on permitting, utility coordination, construction timing and how quickly the campuses translate into operating capacity for Azure and AI services. For Microsoft, the bigger test is whether projects like this can convert massive capital commitments into sustained cloud growth without squeezing returns. As Amy Hood told investors on the company’s earnings call, the goal is to build capacity “in line with demand signals,” and that balancing act now sits at the center of the AI infrastructure race.

JBizNews Desk Reporting

By JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

Leading small-business e-commerce platforms including Shopify and BigCommerce announced after the close new AI-powered inventory forecasting tools designed to help independent retailers predict demand and reduce overstock amid persistent supply-chain cost pressures from energy and packaging. The updates, detailed in vendor webinars and emails sent late Wednesday, aim to give small sellers real-time insights without the expense of enterprise software.

For boutique owners, online sellers, and hybrid brick-and-mortar shops already facing insurance, labor, and utility hikes, the tools could provide a low-cost way to protect margins and maintain leaner operations.

How the New AI Tools Help Small Retailers

• Predictive analytics that adjust reorder quantities based on local consumer trends and energy-driven cost signals.

• Automated alerts for potential shortages in oil-derived packaging and PPE.

• Integration with existing POS systems for seamless in-store and online stock management.

Economists described the platform updates as a practical innovation for small retailers navigating today’s cost environment, with Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, noting that as diesel’s cost advantage erodes amid volatile fuel prices, fleets and small operators are increasingly open to electric alternatives but now benefit from smarter inventory tools; Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, pointed out the ripple effects for Main Street retailers as cautious consumer spending weighs on growth; Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, emphasized that this reflects broader trends of technology making efficiency accessible to smaller players; Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that better inventory management could stabilize hiring and scheduling; and Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, advised small-retailer clients to adopt the tools quickly to improve cash flow and reduce waste in the high-cost environment.

Outlook

The after-close rollout of AI inventory tools offers small retailers a timely technological assist amid sustained economic pressures. For business enthusiasts and Main Street operators, the development signals growing support for leaner, smarter operations. Tomorrow’s retail technology and small-business earnings updates will show early adoption trends.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent said the United States’ maximum economic pressure campaign on Iran has sent the regime into “crisis” during an appearance Wednesday on “Kudlow.”

The effort, known as Operation Economic Fury, is aimed at crippling Tehran’s financial lifelines by seizing Iranian assets, freezing bank accounts and pressuring foreign governments to cut ties with the nation.

“We are freezing bank accounts everywhere. More importantly, we are making people less willing to deal with the regime,” Bessent said.

“We can see that every day, it is more pressure on the regime. The retirement funds that they thought that they had outside of Iran, we are freezing. We’re holding those for the Iranian people. Same with all their villas in the south of France and all over the world, and we are going to track them down.”

NEXT MOVE ON IRAN: SEIZE KHARG ISLAND, SECURE URANIUM OR RISK GROUND WAR ESCALATION

Bessent reported the Treasury Department has seized nearly $500 million in Iranian cryptocurrency assets, adding that the seizures are being carried out on behalf of the Iranian people.

The treasury secretary explained the United States’ aggressive economic campaign against Iran has been over a year in the making, but the United States is “sprinting” toward the finish line.

President Donald Trump ordered the Treasury Department to launch the campaign in March 2025, which Bessent said helped push Iran toward an economic standstill in December, when the nation’s largest bank collapsed.

THE IRAN CEASEFIRE WAS JUST EXTENDED. THE REAL TEST FOR WASHINGTON STARTS NOW

“That created massive inflation. Their currency is down about 60 or 70% versus the U.S. dollar, so they’re in the middle of a currency crisis,” he said.

Bessent said the Treasury Department recently received orders to intensify economic pressure on Iran, prompting the agency to send warnings to buyers of Iranian oil.

“President Trump told me three weeks ago to up the pressure again,” he told FOX Business. “We have gone to the buyers of Iranian oil and told them that… we are willing to do secondary sanctions on your industries, on your banks who tolerate Iranian oil in their system.”

SHADOW FLEET UNDER FIRE: IRAN’S STRAIT SHUTDOWN COULD SQUEEZE RUSSIA’S WAR CHEST, CHINA’S OIL LIFELINE

Bessent argued that the combination of Operation Economic Fury and the U.S. naval blockade on Iranian ports in the Strait of Hormuz will inflict permanent damage on Tehran’s economy.

“The port at Kharg Island is at a virtual standstill in terms of loadings,” he said. “We think that the Iranian storage will be full soon. They’ll have to start capping in their wells, which will lead to permanent problems.”

He warned that the pressure campaign could leave Iran unable to fund its military and proxies.

“The regime won’t be able to pay their soldiers, and equally important, is they won’t be able to fund their proxies, whether it’s Hezbollah, Hamas, around the world. One of President Trump’s goals in this was to stop Iran’s ability to project terrorist power around the world.”

Bessent said the Treasury’s economic pressure campaign will continue as U.S.-Iran negotiations stall.

“We are going to continue this — the economic pressure as well as the block on the Strait of Hormuz,” he said.

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

A bipartisan group of lawmakers introduced legislation late Wednesday that would overturn recent Small Business Administration policies restricting loans to businesses with any non-citizen ownership, aiming to restore access for immigrant-owned small businesses across retail, food service, and manufacturing. The Investing in the American Dream Act would reestablish a 51 percent U.S. citizen ownership threshold, reversing stricter citizenship-only rules imposed earlier this year and potentially unlocking billions in financing for legal permanent residents who run or co-own small operations.

The timing is notable as small retailers and service businesses continue to grapple with insurance and labor cost spikes reported throughout the day. For many immigrant entrepreneurs who employ local workers and serve everyday customers, restored SBA loan eligibility could provide critical capital to cover rising expenses and sustain operations amid cautious consumer spending.

How the Proposed Bill Would Work

• Reinstates 51% U.S. citizen ownership threshold for SBA 7(a) and other guaranteed loan programs.

• Expands eligibility for green card holders and legal permanent residents currently shut out of financing.

• Streamlines access for food, retail, and service businesses that have faced the sharpest cost pressures in 2026.

Economists described the legislation as a potential lifeline for a vital segment of the small-business community, with Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, noting that skyrocketing insurance and labor costs have become existential threats for many small retailers already facing softer demand; Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, pointed out the ripple effects for Main Street, saying these loans could help stabilize local employment and keep neighborhood stores open; Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, emphasized that the program removes a key financial bottleneck and aligns with broader trends of supporting small businesses to maintain economic resilience; Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that easier access to capital for labor needs could encourage more selective hiring and training investments; and Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, advised small-retailer clients to review eligibility closely, saying early adopters may gain a meaningful edge on costs but should pair the financing with careful cash-flow planning.

Outlook

If passed, the bill could deliver immediate relief to thousands of immigrant-owned small businesses at a moment when energy-driven cost pressures are testing Main Street resilience. For business enthusiasts and everyday operators, it highlights the ongoing importance of inclusive financing tools in a high-cost environment. Tomorrow’s developments in small-business policy and retail sentiment will show whether this proposal gains traction and translates into real operational stability.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

So I guess the Fed chairman, Jay Powell, is not going off quietly into the night. Today is his last meeting as chairman, but he announced his ungentlemanly decision to stay on as a Fed board member for who knows how long. “I’ve said that I will not leave the board until this investigation is well and truly over with transparency and finality, and I stand by that,” he said. “In terms of when I would leave, I will leave when I think it’s appropriate to do so,” he added. “The things that have happened in the last three months, I think, left me no choice but to stay.” Mr. Powell concluded that “after my term as chair ends on May 15th, I will continue to serve as a governor for a period of time to be determined. I plan to keep a low profile as a governor.”

Mr. Powell’s not the martyr he thinks he is. You can’t have two chief executives.

President Trump’s choice to lead the Fed, Kevin Warsh, was confirmed today by the Senate Banking Committee, by a 13-11 vote. And he undoubtedly will be confirmed by the whole Senate probably some time next week.

Nobody’s going to listen to Mr. Powell. The cost overrun investigation is being run by the Fed’s inspector general, who is independent, and Mr. Powell has nothing to do with it. And by the way, only once before in the 113-year history of the central bank, has another former chairman stayed on as a board member.

This speaks poorly of Mr. Powell. His record as Fed chairman was undistinguished. The Consumer Price Index averaged 3.5 percent per year under Mr. Powell. That was the highest level since the tenure of Paul Volcker, giving Mr. Powell the worst record in more than 40 years. Cumulatively the CPI rose a whopping 32 percent. And as far as the economy, real gross domestic product averaged 2.4 percent at an annual rate. Another unimpressive performance. On top of that, Mr. Powell was also a highly political Fed chairman who embraced President Biden’s radical climate agenda and even more radical DEI.

In an interview today, Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent expressed to me his strong displeasure with Powell by saying “I think it is an insult to Kevin Warsh, Miki Bowman, and Chris Waller to think that these other Republican nominees do not care about the institution of the Fed and that he alone can maintain the integrity of the Fed.”

The good news is that Mr. Warsh will take the helm as chairman and make a number of important changes. Hopefully the Fed’s economic models that are based on the false premise that strong growth leads to higher inflation will be thrown out the window.

Mr. Warsh understands the positives of low tax rates and deregulation in producing a disinflationary impact of faster productivity and lower unit labor costs. Mr. Warsh wants to shrink the Fed’s balance sheet by refocusing the central bank on monetary policy, and leaving fiscal and debt management policies to Mr. Bessent at the Treasury.

The Fed should not be some vast central planning agency. And the cacophony of yapping by various Fed officials will come to an end hopefully, along with something called forward guidance. Mr. Warsh wants the Fed to earn its independence by staying out of politics, and sticking to better control of the money supply, and maintaining a strong and stable dollar. The chairman’s job at the central bank is a very powerful job. So whether Mr. Warsh sees fit to give Mr. Powell a parking spot remains to be seen.

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

Powell’s Message to Families and Businesses

The Federal Reserve kept its benchmark interest rate unchanged today, as widely anticipated, but Chair Jerome Powell signaled that rate cuts could still come later in 2026 if inflation continues to moderate and the labor market keeps cooling. For everyday Americans with mortgages, car loans, and credit card debt, this leaves high borrowing costs in place for now — while offering hope for relief down the road.

Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, called the decision “a classic hold-and-watch move.” She noted that the Fed is balancing persistent inflation pressures from energy prices against signs of a softening job market.

Key Takeaways from Today’s Decision

• Federal funds rate remains in the 4.25%–4.50% range

• Powell emphasized data-dependent approach with no preset path

• Officials still project two rate cuts for 2026 in their dot plot

• Higher gasoline prices cited as a risk that could keep inflation “stickier”

Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, explained the real-world impact: “Mortgage rates near 7% and elevated credit card rates continue to squeeze household budgets. Any delay in cuts means families and small businesses pay more for borrowing longer.”

Why the Fed Is Staying Cautious

Elevated oil prices above $110 per barrel and ongoing supply chain concerns are keeping core inflation from falling as quickly as hoped. At the same time, the March jobs report showed hiring moderation and steady (but not overheating) wage growth — giving the Fed room to consider easing without reigniting price pressures.

Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, said: “This is the Goldilocks scenario the Fed has been hoping for — not too hot, not too cold. But gas prices at the pump could quickly change that balance.”

Impact on Everyday Americans

• Homebuyers and refinancers remain sidelined by high mortgage rates

• Small businesses face expensive credit for expansion or inventory

• Auto loans and credit card debt become more burdensome

• Savers and retirees benefit from still-attractive yields on deposits

Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, highlighted the labor side: “With hiring cooling and unemployment at 4.3%, workers have slightly less bargaining power, which helps keep wage-driven inflation in check — but also means slower income growth for many households.”

Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, is advising clients to prepare for potential rate relief later this year: “Lock in fixed-rate debt where possible now, but stay flexible. The Fed’s tone suggests help is coming — just not immediately.”

Broader Economic Picture

Retailers are already warning of weaker back-to-school spending due to gas prices, while small businesses battle rising insurance and supply costs. A eventual rate cut could provide much-needed breathing room, but timing remains uncertain.

Outlook

Markets are pricing in a possible cut as soon as September. Powell stressed patience, saying the Fed will “wait for more good data.” For millions of families and small business owners, today’s announcement means high borrowing costs persist through the summer — but the door remains open for lower rates before year-end if inflation and the job market cooperate.

The next big test comes with May’s jobs report and updated inflation numbers. Until then, everyday economic decisions — from filling the tank to buying a home — remain more expensive than many would like.

JbizNews- Desk

Costco is reportedly tweaking one of the most iconic deals in retail.

The warehouse giant – long known for its $1.50 quarter-pound all-beef hot dog and 20-ounce soda combo – is now giving customers the option to swap the fountain drink for a 16.9-ounce bottle of Kirkland Signature water. The move marks the first update to the beloved combo in more than 40 years, according to TODAY and People Magazine. The price will remain the same.

The original soda option, which includes free refills, remains unchanged.

The update has drawn mixed reactions online.

COSTCO ISSUES URGENT RECALL ON POPULAR PRODUCT LINKED TO BURN INJURIES

After a Reddit user shared a photo of the change at their local Costco months ago, many commenters welcomed the option.

“Finally! I usually just ask for no cup or throw it away because I try not to drink soda as much and the water from the dispense tastes weird. No more having to remember a quarter when I go to Costco,” one commenter said.

“I wish more Costcos did this. I’d rather have the bottled water than the soda for sure,” another added.

COSTCO TO OPEN ITS FIRST STAND-ALONE GAS STATION WITH SECOND LOCATION COMING NEXT YEAR

“We’ve had this in the Toronto location in Canada for several months now,” a third user wrote. “I know because I’ve made the mistake 1 too many times on selecting water when I get my polish sausage! Haha. Give me my Coke Zero!!”

Some customers, however, appeared less enthusiastic.

“The bottle of water costs less than just that paper cup,” one X user wrote. “It’s a quasi [Make America Healthy Again] move too.”

“Do you think small menu changes like that actually matter to customers, or is it more about the reaction people have to any change at all?” another X user added.

COSTCO SAYS YOUR NEXT CHECKOUT COULD TAKE UNDER 10 SECONDS THANKS TO NEW AUTOMATED PAY STATIONS

The price of Costco’s hot dog combo has remained unchanged for decades.

In a March 18 Instagram video, CEO Ron Vachris made it clear the price will not be changing anytime soon.

“The hot dog price will not change as long as I’m around,” he said.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

FOX Business reached out to Costco for comment.

This post was originally published here

Elon Musk and OpenAI are heading toward a June jury trial in California in a case that could test how far an artificial-intelligence lab can move from its nonprofit origins without triggering legal and governance fallout. Reuters reported that U.S. District Judge Yvonne Gonzalez Rogers recently put the dispute on track for trial in spring 2026 after declining Musk’s bid to stop OpenAI’s planned restructuring, while saying an expedited trial remained appropriate given “the public interest at stake and potential for harm if a conversion contrary to law occurred.”

The lawsuit has become one of the most closely watched corporate fights in AI because it goes to the heart of OpenAI’s unusual structure and its relationship with backer Microsoft. In a court filing and public statements cited by Reuters and The Associated Press, Musk argued that he helped found OpenAI on the understanding it would develop AI “for the benefit of humanity,” not as a vehicle to enrich insiders or a large commercial partner. OpenAI, for its part, said in a blog post published in December that Musk had once supported the idea of a for-profit structure, adding that his claims “rest on increasingly baseless legal theories.”

The legal clash intensified after Musk sued OpenAI, Chief Executive Sam Altman, President Greg Brockman and related entities, alleging breach of contract and fiduciary duties tied to the company’s shift toward a capped-profit model and its deeper commercial alignment with Microsoft. According to Reuters, OpenAI and Altman have denied wrongdoing, and the company said in court papers that its structure “preserves the nonprofit’s mission” while enabling it to raise the vast sums needed to build advanced AI systems.

That financing question sits at the center of the case. OpenAI has told investors and partners that access to capital matters as competition with Google, Anthropic, xAI and other AI developers accelerates. In reporting on the company’s fundraising efforts, Bloomberg said OpenAI has pursued financing at valuations that place it among the world’s most valuable private technology groups. Sam Altman has repeatedly said, including in public appearances covered by CNBC, that building frontier AI requires “a lot more compute” and therefore much more capital than a traditional nonprofit structure can easily support.

Judge Gonzalez Rogers has already signaled that the court sees urgency even if it has not accepted all of Musk’s arguments. In a March order reported by Reuters, she denied Musk’s request for a preliminary injunction that would have blocked OpenAI from converting into a more conventional for-profit entity before trial, but she also said the court could move quickly to resolve the core claims. That mixed ruling gave each side something to claim: OpenAI said the court rejected what it called an “extraordinary” attempt to halt its business, while Musk’s legal team pointed to the judge’s willingness to fast-track the case.

The dispute also reaches beyond corporate law into the politics of AI oversight. Delaware Attorney General Kathy Jennings and California Attorney General Rob Bonta have authority over nonprofit entities operating in their jurisdictions, and their offices could become important if OpenAI seeks formal approval for structural changes. The Financial Times and Reuters have both reported that regulators and policymakers are paying closer attention to whether AI companies can claim public-interest missions while pursuing aggressive commercial expansion. OpenAI has said any evolution of its structure would keep its nonprofit board and mission intact.

The case carries unusually high stakes for Microsoft, even though the software giant is not the central protagonist in the courtroom drama. Microsoft has invested billions in OpenAI and integrated the startup’s models into products across cloud, office software and developer tools. In statements reported by Reuters and Bloomberg, OpenAI has described Microsoft as a key partner rather than a controlling owner, while critics aligned with Musk have argued that the relationship undercuts the original promise of independence and openness.

Investors and startup founders are watching because the outcome could influence how future AI ventures balance mission language with commercial reality. Legal experts interviewed by Reuters have said the trial may become a reference point for disputes involving hybrid entities, especially where early backers claim a company’s public-benefit commitments later gave way to conventional profit motives. Musk, who now runs rival AI company xAI, has framed the issue in public posts as a matter of principle, while OpenAI has countered that his campaign reflects competitive self-interest as much as governance concern.

What comes next matters not only for the parties but for the shape of the AI industry’s capital model. Pretrial discovery and motions are expected to sharpen questions around founding emails, board deliberations and the exact promises made when OpenAI launched in 2015. If a jury ultimately sides with Musk, the decision could complicate OpenAI’s restructuring plans and force a broader rethink of how mission-driven tech labs raise money; if OpenAI prevails, it could strengthen the case that hybrid nonprofit-commercial structures remain a workable path for financing the next generation of AI systems, as Reuters and other outlets have noted.

JBizNews Desk

The Port Authority of New York and New Jersey said it will equip emergency vehicles at LaGuardia, JFK and Newark with transponders within 90 days, a move the agency framed as a direct safety response after a fatal runway collision raised new concerns about how controllers track ground traffic. James Allen, the authority’s chief communications officer, said in a statement Tuesday that the agency is “making targeted investments in safety technology to give controllers the most accurate picture of ground movements,” according to the authority’s public announcement.

The decision follows a March 22 crash at LaGuardia that put airport surface surveillance under intense scrutiny. In comments cited by Associated Press, National Transportation Safety Board spokesperson Jenna Dugan said the lack of a transponder “contributed to the inability of air traffic control to pinpoint the truck’s exact location,” tying the equipment gap to the sequence that preceded the collision. The NTSB has described the incident in a preliminary account as preventable if the vehicle had carried functioning tracking equipment, according to the agency’s early findings.

The technology at the center of the upgrade is not new, but aviation officials say its absence on certain airport vehicles can create a dangerous blind spot. Steve Dickson, identified by Reuters as the FAA’s associate administrator for aviation safety, said “adding transponder data creates an additional layer of visibility that can trigger early alerts,” underscoring how the devices feed into the Federal Aviation Administration’s Airport Surface Detection Equipment-Model X, or ASDE-X, system. That platform already combines radar, multilateration and ADS-B data to help controllers monitor aircraft and vehicle movements on the airfield, according to FAA materials.

Federal support for the rollout could ease the cost burden and accelerate adoption beyond the New York region. In a briefing document posted by the FAA, the agency said it is prepared to cover as much as 50% of equipment costs for participating airports, a structure officials said mirrors recent support for other major hubs. Mike Whitaker, the FAA’s deputy administrator, said during a briefing to reporters that “our goal is to remove financial barriers that might delay implementation of proven safety tools,” according to the agency’s published remarks.

Airlines and industry groups have pressed for more aggressive action on runway safety after a series of close calls and ground incidents across the U.S. aviation system. Linda Cook, senior vice president of safety at Airlines for America, told Bloomberg that “enhanced ground-vehicle tracking is a common-sense upgrade that protects both crews and passengers and should become standard across all hub airports.” Her comments point to a broader industry view that airport operators, carriers and regulators now face stronger pressure to standardize technologies that reduce runway-incursion risk.

The Port Authority said the transponder installation builds on earlier investments already made at LaGuardia. James Allen said the agency had previously installed runway-incursion alert systems in 2022 and that those tools “have reduced runway incursions by 30 percent over the past two years,” citing internal performance data released in a recent quarterly report by the Port Authority of New York and New Jersey. While that figure comes from the agency itself rather than an outside regulator, it gives airport operators a measurable basis for arguing that layered surveillance systems can materially improve airfield safety.

The implications could extend well beyond the three airports under the Port Authority’s control. David P. Giller, a senior analyst cited by MarketWatch, said “by the end of 2027, at least 70 percent of the nation’s 35 busiest airports could be equipped with full-time ground-vehicle transponders, driven by FAA incentives and heightened public scrutiny.” That projection remains an analyst estimate rather than government guidance, but it reflects how a localized safety response can quickly become a national benchmark when regulators and airport operators search for practical fixes.

For regulators, the next step is less about announcing equipment and more about proving the systems work in daily operations. Jenna Dugan said the NTSB will continue its full investigation and “monitor the effectiveness of these devices” as they are integrated into existing air traffic control procedures, according to comments reported after the preliminary findings. That means the Port Authority’s 90-day deadline now carries significance beyond procurement: early performance at LaGuardia, JFK and Newark could shape future FAA funding decisions, influence safety recommendations later this year and set the tone for whether transponders become a de facto requirement at major U.S. airports.

JBizNews Desk

A new report by the nonpartisan Government Accountability Office (GAO) found that improper payments by the federal government rose to $186 billion in fiscal year 2025.

The GAO found that federal agencies’ estimate of improper payments rose $24 billion in fiscal year 2025 from the previous fiscal year. The increase was largely due to programs that didn’t report in fiscal year 2024 but did report estimates of improper payments last year.

It assessed that overpayments accounted for about $153 billion, or roughly 82%, of the $186 billion in overpayments last fiscal year.

“Federal agencies must do more to protect taxpayer dollars from the errors that drive improper payments,” said Orice W. Brown, acting comptroller general and head of the GAO. “This $186 billion problem demands urgent action – agencies need stronger controls, better data, a commitment to accountability, as well as robust congressional oversight.”

US NATIONAL DEBT BREACHES $39 TRILLION MILESTONE FOR FIRST TIME AMID SPENDING SURGE

The GAO’s estimate of improper payments in fiscal year 2025 was based on reporting from 64 federal programs across 15 federal agencies, although just 73% of improper payments were concentrated in five program areas.

The bulk of the improper payments were found in Medicare, Medicaid, the Earned Income Tax Credit (EITC), the Supplemental Nutrition Assistance Program (SNAP) and the Shuttered Venue Operators Grant Program.

BUDGET DEFICIT HITS $1 TRILLION IN FIRST FIVE MONTHS OF FISCAL YEAR: CBO

A trio of programs under Medicare accounted for $57 billion in improper payments, while Medicaid added another $37 billion. The EITC was estimated as making $21 billion in improper payments, while SNAP and the Shuttered Venue Operators Grant Program each accounted for $10 billion in the analysis.

A number of programs reported high improper payment rates, with 19 programs reporting estimates of more than 10%, while six programs’ estimates topped 25%.

The GAO’s report isn’t a comprehensive estimate of improper payments by all federal agencies and programs because some didn’t provide estimates.

US DEBT SET TO CRUSH WORLD WAR II RECORD AS ANNUAL DEFICITS EXPLODE TO $3T WITHIN DECADE

The GAO said the government-wide estimate “does not include some programs that were determined to be susceptible to significant improper payments.” 

“For example, the $186 billion estimate does not include improper payments made under the Temporary Assistance for Needy Families (TANF) program,” GAO noted.

The report noted that the GAO has “made numerous recommendations to agencies and Congress to help reduce payment errors by enhancing transparency and accountability of federal spending.”

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“These include designating all new federal programs making more than $100 million in payments in any one fiscal year as susceptible to improper payments and requiring agencies to develop internal control plans that can be rapidly deployed for future emergency funding,” the GAO said.

This post was originally published here

A United Airlines pilot reported a potential collision with a drone Wednesday morning while approaching its destination at San Diego International Airport, according to a flight audio recording.

The flight, a Boeing 737 that departed from San Francisco, reportedly struck the object at an altitude of roughly 3,000 to 4,000 feet — well above the elevation typically permitted for drones under federal regulations. 

“We hit a drone at around 3,000 feet,” the pilot said, according to a recording with air traffic controllers posted by ATC.com and shared on social media.

He added that the incident occurred as the plane was approaching landing.

WHAT A GOVERNMENT STAKE IN SPIRIT AIRLINES COULD MEAN FOR PASSENGERS AND THE INDUSTRY

The airline told FOX Business the plane did report a drone encounter, but the company could not confirm whether it struck the device.

“United flight 1980 reported a potential drone prior to arriving in San Diego,” the company said. 

“While approaching San Diego International Airport at about 4,000 feet altitude, the crew of United Airlines Flight 1980 told air traffic control they believed they saw a drone 1,000 feet below them,” the Federal Aviation Administration added in a statement to FOX Business.  

CHEVRON CEO WARNS AVIATION STRAIN COULD WORSEN AS JET FUEL CRUNCH DEEPENS

According to the audio recording, the pilot described the object as a very small, red, shiny drone heading west.

The reported collision did not appear to affect the flight, which was carrying 48 passengers and six crew members, the company said.

United Airlines said the flight landed safely and passengers deplaned normally at the gate.

Maintenance crews also found no damage from the reported collision following a thorough inspection of the aircraft.

The FAA added that no other nearby pilots reported seeing a drone.

“Air traffic control alerted other pilots but did not receive any additional drone-sighting reports,” the agency said. 

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Drone operations, especially near an airport, are strictly regulated by the FAA.

Depending on the location, drones operating without a waiver are prohibited from flying within several miles of an airport, with altitude limits that typically cap operations at just a few hundred feet.

This post was originally published here

The U.S. Supreme Court has agreed to hear Bayer’s latest bid to curb the costly litigation tied to Roundup, putting a fresh spotlight on whether federal pesticide law can shield the company from thousands of state-law cancer claims. Reuters reported that the justices took up the dispute after Bayer argued that U.S. labeling rules approved by the Environmental Protection Agency preempt failure-to-warn lawsuits alleging the weedkiller causes non-Hodgkin lymphoma.

In a statement cited by Reuters, Bayer said the case presents “important questions” about the interaction between federal regulation and state tort law, a legal issue that has become central to the company’s effort to contain one of the largest product-liability battles in corporate America. The company has said repeatedly in court filings and public statements that Roundup and its active ingredient glyphosate are safe when used as directed, while the EPA has maintained that glyphosate is “not likely to be carcinogenic to humans” when used according to label instructions.

The appeal follows years of courtroom losses and settlements after Bayer inherited the litigation through its 2018 acquisition of Monsanto. In its annual reporting and investor updates, Bayer has said it already has paid roughly $10 billion to settle claims and reserved billions more for unresolved cases, while warning that the litigation remains a material financial overhang. Bloomberg and Reuters have both reported that investors view the Supreme Court’s willingness to hear the matter as a potentially significant turning point for the German group’s legal strategy.

At the center of the case sits a familiar argument: whether a state jury can find that Bayer should have added a cancer warning to Roundup’s label when the EPA has not required one. In prior filings, lawyers for Bayer told the court that federal law bars states from imposing labeling requirements “in addition to or different from” federal standards under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act, according to court papers covered by Reuters. Lawyers for plaintiffs, by contrast, have argued that state-law duties to warn complement rather than conflict with federal rules, a position that lower courts have often accepted.

That split has mattered because juries around the country have continued to award damages to plaintiffs who said they developed cancer after long-term Roundup exposure. The Associated Press and Reuters have reported on multiple verdicts against Bayer, including cases in Missouri, California and Pennsylvania, though some awards later shrank on appeal. Plaintiff lawyers, including prominent trial attorney Mark Lanier in prior Roundup litigation, have argued in public statements that the verdicts reflect jurors’ conclusion that consumers deserved stronger warnings even if regulators did not mandate them.

The science behind the legal fight remains contested, and that tension has fueled both the litigation and the company’s defense. The International Agency for Research on Cancer, part of the World Health Organization, classified glyphosate in 2015 as “probably carcinogenic to humans,” a finding plaintiffs cite heavily in court. The EPA, however, has stuck to its own review, saying in agency documents that it found no risks of concern to human health from current uses of glyphosate, a divergence that Financial Times and Reuters have said helps explain why the legal and regulatory tracks have moved in different directions.

For Bayer, the stakes extend well beyond courtroom theory. The company has faced pressure from shareholders to draw a line under the Roundup saga, and executives including Chief Executive Bill Anderson have said in earnings calls that resolving major litigation exposures remains a priority for restoring strategic flexibility. In remarks reported by Reuters during prior investor updates, Anderson said the group needs to “significantly reduce” litigation uncertainty, linking the issue directly to capital allocation, portfolio decisions and confidence in the broader crop-science business.

The case also carries broader implications for regulated industries that rely on federal approvals as a defense against state-law claims. Legal analysts quoted by Bloomberg and Reuters have said a ruling favoring Bayer could strengthen preemption arguments for makers of pesticides, drugs and medical devices, while a ruling against the company could reinforce plaintiffs’ ability to use state courts to challenge products that remain on the market with federal approval. That makes the dispute more than a single-company problem; it is a test of how far federal oversight protects manufacturers from local juries.

Farm groups and agribusiness executives also are watching closely because glyphosate remains deeply embedded in U.S. crop production. The U.S. Department of Agriculture has long described herbicide-tolerant farming systems as central to modern corn and soybean production, and industry representatives have warned in public comments that abrupt legal or regulatory disruption could raise costs for growers. At the same time, consumer advocates and plaintiff lawyers say the case goes to a basic question of accountability, arguing in court papers that federal registration should not become blanket immunity from warning claims.

The justices’ decision to hear the case does not settle the merits, but it gives Bayer its clearest opening in years to change the trajectory of the Roundup litigation. A ruling next term could determine whether the company can narrow future claims or remain trapped in years of expensive jury trials, appeals and settlement talks. For investors, farmers and product makers across heavily regulated sectors, the next phase matters because it could redefine where federal approval ends and state liability begins.

JBizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

Closing Bell Summary

U.S. stocks ended the day mixed as investors processed the Federal Reserve’s widely expected decision to hold interest rates steady while high oil prices above $110 per barrel continued to weigh on consumer spending and business costs. The S&P 500 closed slightly lower, the Dow Jones Industrial Average posted a modest gain, and the Nasdaq finished essentially flat.

This closing picture directly builds on the business trends we have covered throughout the day — from the Fed’s rate hold and cooling labor market to persistently high gasoline prices squeezing household budgets and threatening summer retail sales. Energy-sensitive sectors showed relative strength, while consumer-facing and retail names lagged, reinforcing the everyday pressures reported earlier.

Key Business Developments of the Day

Beyond the headline market numbers, several operational and corporate stories stood out:

• Major retailers continued to warn of a potentially weak back-to-school season, echoing our mid-morning coverage of families cutting discretionary spending to cope with gas prices near $4.20–$4.50 per gallon in many markets.

• Ongoing talks around Spirit Airlines’ potential restructuring and a possible Trump administration bailout remained in focus, highlighting how airline industry challenges directly affect affordable travel options for everyday families.

• Corporate leaders, including Jamie Dimon’s renewed call in Oslo to eliminate empty, time-wasting meetings, underscored a broader push for operational efficiency as businesses navigate higher costs and tighter margins.

Notable Market Movers

Several stocks and sectors stood out in today’s trading, reflecting the broader business themes of energy costs and consumer caution:

Energy giants rose sharply — ExxonMobil and Chevron gained more than 2% each as oil prices held firm above $110, directly benefiting from the supply tightness we have tracked all day.

Retail and consumer discretionary names lagged — Walmart, Target, and Kohl’s each closed down 1–2%, consistent with warnings about weaker back-to-school spending as families prioritize fuel over discretionary purchases.

Airline stocks were mixed — Spirit Airlines shares remained volatile amid bailout talks, while larger carriers like Delta and United showed modest gains on higher fuel-cost pass-through expectations.

Small-cap stocks held up better than large-caps, offering a modest positive signal for the small businesses that employ nearly half of the U.S. workforce.

Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, described the day as “steady but watchful.” She noted that the Fed’s decision provides some predictability, but the combination of firm energy prices and a cooling labor market means businesses are staying disciplined on costs and expansion plans.

Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, pointed to the real-world impact on households: “With gas still hovering near $4.20–$4.50 in many areas, families are making the same trade-offs we reported on this morning — prioritizing the tank over retail or travel purchases.”

Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, added: “The labor market’s cooling trend we covered earlier today is giving the Fed breathing room, but it also means businesses remain selective with hiring and investment.”

Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, noted that the day’s market action could influence seasonal hiring in retail and tourism sectors heading into summer.

Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, advised clients to view today’s close through a practical lens: “For small business owners and everyday investors, the message is continuity — high borrowing costs persist, energy expenses remain elevated, and operational efficiency matters more than ever.”

Outlook

Today’s closing bell leaves the business landscape largely unchanged from the themes that dominated the day: a resilient but cautious economy where high energy costs and moderating labor demand are the dominant forces. The Fed’s steady stance buys time, but the pressure on household budgets and small business margins continues.

Looking ahead, tomorrow’s data calendar and any fresh developments around oil supply, corporate partnerships, or acquisition talks will be closely watched. For business enthusiasts and Main Street operators, the focus remains on managing costs, watching consumer behavior, and staying agile in an environment where general business fundamentals — not just market swings — will determine success through the rest of 2026.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

Hilton Worldwide Holdings is making a sharper bet on middle-market travel just as much of the travel industry keeps chasing affluent customers, with Chief Executive Christopher Nassetta telling analysts the economy increasingly looks “C-shaped” rather than split cleanly between winners and losers. On Hilton’s first-quarter earnings call, according to the company’s transcript and earnings materials released in late April, Nassetta said he sees “a more balanced convergence demand shape,” arguing that lower- and mid-priced lodging demand is strengthening even as luxury travel remains resilient, a view that matters for investors trying to gauge where the next leg of hotel growth will come from.

That stance cuts against a broader premium push across travel. Delta Air Lines Chief Executive Ed Bastian told Fortune in a widely cited interview that “Delta is not a low-cost airline,” underscoring how major carriers increasingly rely on premium cabins, loyalty revenue and wealthier travelers for growth. Reporting from Reuters and other outlets in recent quarters has shown airlines including Delta and United Airlines leaning harder into higher-end demand, even as some domestic economy demand softened, creating a backdrop in which Hilton’s emphasis on midscale lodging stands out.

The company’s own operating data suggest the strategy is not just rhetorical. In its latest quarterly update, Hilton said systemwide revenue per available room, or RevPAR, rose year over year, while Nassetta told investors that “our RevPAR expansion now comes from our economy and mid-scale brands,” according to the earnings-call transcript and reporting from Bloomberg. That is a notable shift for a hotel industry long associated with luxury and upper-upscale pricing power, especially as consumers navigate still-elevated borrowing costs and uneven wage gains.

The contrast with rivals is clear. Marriott International Chief Executive Anthony Capuano told the Wall Street Journal that “when you look internationally, there is an almost insatiable demand for luxury,” highlighting the strength of brands such as Ritz-Carlton and St. Regis. Marriott has continued to point investors toward high-end and resort demand as a key earnings driver, while Hilton is signaling that the next broad-based opportunity may sit lower on the price ladder, particularly in the U.S. domestic market where road trips, small-business travel and value-conscious leisure bookings still carry weight.

That helps explain why Hilton keeps emphasizing brands such as Hampton by Hilton, which the company describes in investor materials as the largest brand in its system by room count. In a recent company release, Hilton said its development pipeline reached roughly 527,000 rooms, up about 5% from a year earlier, giving it a large runway for expansion into segments that appeal to cost-conscious travelers and franchisees. Nassetta said the company remains confident in “the middle market,” according to Hilton’s public remarks, a signal that management sees more durable demand there than many investors may have assumed when luxury travel dominated the post-pandemic recovery.

The macro backdrop could support that thesis, though the picture remains mixed. Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell said after the central bank’s recent policy meeting that inflation has eased substantially from its peak but remains above target, while Reuters reported that officials still want greater confidence before cutting rates. That matters for hotels because lower inflation and eventual rate relief could free up discretionary spending for middle-income households, yet sticky prices for food, insurance and credit continue to pressure the same consumers Hilton is counting on for broader midscale momentum.

Investors also need to separate leisure strength from corporate travel, which still has not fully normalized in some segments. Hilton executives said on the earnings call that business-transient and group trends remain constructive, but industry data tracked by STR and discussed in coverage by CNBC and Reuters show that recovery patterns differ by market, with gateway cities and convention-heavy destinations often moving on a different timetable than suburban and highway hotels. In that environment, a company with deep exposure to select-service and midscale properties could benefit if travelers trade down on price without giving up trips altogether.

The market question now is whether Hilton’s “C-shaped” framing turns into a sustained earnings advantage or simply captures a temporary rebalancing after years of outsized luxury demand. Analysts cited by Bloomberg and Reuters have noted that hotel operators still face labor costs, construction inflation and a consumer who remains selective, even as room demand holds up better than many expected. For Hilton, the next few quarters will test whether its midscale brands can keep lifting RevPAR, occupancy and unit growth at a time when rivals continue to tout the spending power of top-tier travelers. If that bet pays off, it could reshape how the lodging sector talks about demand in 2025 and beyond.

JBizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

Mixed Signals for Everyday Households

U.S. consumer confidence unexpectedly rose in April to a four-month high of 92.8, according to the Conference Board, even as families continue to grapple with sharply higher gasoline prices triggered by the ongoing Middle East conflict. While stock market gains and a slightly better view of the job market provided a modest lift, the pain at the pump remains a major drag on household budgets.

Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, said the uptick offers some relief but doesn’t erase underlying worries. “Higher gas prices are forcing families to make tough trade-offs every week — and that pressure is not going away anytime soon.”

What’s Behind the Modest Improvement

• Improved perceptions of the labor market, with the differential between “jobs plentiful” and “jobs hard to get” rising

• A brief stock market rally following ceasefire hopes

• Slightly lower short-term inflation expectations (median 12-month outlook eased to 5.1%)

However, comments about prices, oil, gas, and the war surged in the survey, showing persistent anxiety.

Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, noted: “This is a classic tale of two economies. Wall Street feels better, but Main Street families filling up their tanks are still feeling the squeeze.”

Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, pointed out that the national average gas price has climbed above $4.18–$4.22 per gallon in many areas — more than a dollar higher than before recent tensions escalated. “That extra $200–$300 a month per household is real money that isn’t going to retail stores, restaurants, or vacations.”

Key Warning Signs for Retail and Small Businesses

• Discretionary spending (apparel, travel, dining out) starting to soften

• Back-to-school and summer shopping seasons at risk

• Small business owners reporting slower foot traffic and cautious customers

Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that seasonal hiring in retail and tourism could be weaker than usual if families keep tightening belts.

Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, is hearing from clients that many households are delaying big purchases and hunting aggressively for deals. “The confidence number looks better on paper, but the reality at the gas pump and grocery store tells a different story.”

Broader Economic Implications

The Federal Reserve is currently meeting and widely expected to hold interest rates steady, with higher energy costs making rate cuts less likely in the near term. Small businesses, already facing higher insurance, supply chain, and tariff-related costs, are passing some expenses along or absorbing them — further pressuring margins.

Outlook

While the modest rise in confidence is a positive sign, economists warn it could prove temporary if gasoline prices remain elevated through the summer. For millions of American families, the difference between “feeling okay” and real financial strain still comes down to what they pay at the pump each week.

Any easing of Middle East tensions could quickly improve the picture — but until then, everyday consumers and the businesses that serve them remain on edge.

JBizNews -Desk

A purported extension of the federal student loan payment pause through the end of 2026 does not match current U.S. government policy, and the latest official record shows repayments already resumed for most borrowers. In guidance published by the U.S. Department of Education, the agency said “student loan interest resumed on Sept. 1, 2023, and payments resumed in October,” while a separate notice from Federal Student Aid states borrowers should prepare for regular repayment rather than expect a new blanket moratorium.

The discrepancy matters because federal student debt policy affects more than 40 million Americans and carries implications for consumer spending, credit performance and servicing companies. In a June 2023 decision, the U.S. Supreme Court struck down the Biden administration’s broad cancellation plan, with Chief Justice John Roberts writing for the majority that the administration had exceeded its authority, according to the court’s opinion in Biden v. Nebraska; that ruling forced the administration to rely on narrower relief channels instead of sweeping executive action.

The White House’s most consequential recent borrower relief step has not been a universal pause but the SAVE income-driven repayment overhaul and targeted debt cancellation through existing programs. In statements released by the White House and the Department of Education in 2024, President Joe Biden said his administration had approved debt relief for millions of borrowers through fixes to Public Service Loan Forgiveness, borrower defense and income-driven repayment, while then-Education Secretary Miguel Cardona said the department would “continue to use every tool available” to support borrowers within the law.

Market expectations also undercut the claim of a new multi-year pause. Public filings from servicers and education-finance companies such as Nelnet and disclosures tied to the federal loan servicing business reflect a repayment environment that restarted in late 2023, not one frozen until 2026. Reuters reported when payments resumed that the return to billing created operational pressure for servicers and confusion for borrowers, while CNBC cited consumer advocates warning that many households remained financially unprepared even after the administration’s temporary “on-ramp” softened the consequences of missed payments for the first year.

That on-ramp itself often gets confused with a payment pause, but officials described it differently. The Department of Education said the measure, which ran from October 2023 through September 2024, protected some borrowers from the harshest immediate default consequences if they missed payments, yet interest still accrued and payments still came due. In public remarks carried by the department, Richard Cordray, then chief operating officer of Federal Student Aid, said the agency aimed to “help borrowers successfully return to repayment,” language that signaled transition support rather than a fresh moratorium.

Borrowers today instead face a patchwork of court rulings and administrative changes centered on repayment plans, especially SAVE. Federal court actions in 2024 and 2025 disrupted parts of that program, and the Department of Education has repeatedly updated borrowers on its website about application processing, payment calculations and legal uncertainty. As MarketWatch and Reuters reported in coverage of those legal fights, the administration’s student-debt strategy has shifted from broad emergency relief toward narrower, litigated reforms that remain vulnerable to judicial review.

Fiscal oversight agencies have likewise focused on the cost of targeted forgiveness and repayment-plan changes, not a newly announced Treasury-led pause. The Government Accountability Office and the Congressional Budget Office have both published analyses in recent years showing that student-loan program changes can carry significant budget effects, while the administration’s own budget materials frame the issue around repayment affordability and long-term subsidy costs. No current Treasury Department release or Education Department announcement identifies Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen as extending a blanket federal student loan payment pause through Dec. 31, 2026.

For companies, universities and investors, the practical takeaway remains that federal student loan repayment has restarted, even if relief options still exist for specific groups. Analysts quoted by outlets including Bloomberg and CNBC have said the consumer impact depends less on a nonexistent universal pause than on delinquency trends, wage growth and whether courts allow the administration to preserve affordable repayment pathways. The next major developments likely will come from court rulings on income-driven repayment, fresh Department of Education guidance and any congressional effort to rewrite student lending rules, all of which matter far more now than claims of a broad 2026 payment freeze unsupported by current official records.

JBizNews Desk Reporting

US President Donald Trump on Wednesday told Axios that Iran will remain under a naval blockade until the Islamic regime agrees to a deal that addresses US concerns about its nuclear program.

The blockade is “somewhat more effective than bombing,” Trump told the outlet.

“They are choking like a stuffed pig. And it is going to be worse for them. They can’t have a nuclear weapon,” he added.

“They want to settle. They don’t want me to keep the blockade. I don’t want to [lift the blockade], because I don’t want them to have a nuclear weapon,” he said.

Meanwhile, US Central Command (CENTCOM) has begun preparing plans for a “short and powerful” wave of strikes on Iran, hoping to break the negotiating deadlock, three sources with knowledge told Axios.

US President Donald Trump mimics firing a gun during a news conference in the White House briefing room about the war in Iran on Monday, April 6, 2026.  (credit: Tom Williams/CQ Roll Call/JTA)

Trump sees continuing the blockade as the primary means to gain leverage

After the wave of strikes, which would likely include targeting infrastructure, the US would press the regime to return to the negotiating table and show more flexibility, according to Axios.

Trump sees continuing the blockade as the primary means to gain leverage over Tehran, but would consider military action if Iran does not give in, sources told Axios.

Trump declined to discuss any military plans during the 15-minute phone conversation with Axios, the report noted.

However, a senior Iranian security source was cited by Iran’s English-language state-run broadcaster, Press TV, as saying that the US naval blockade will “soon be met with practical and unprecedented action.”

Iran’s military has shown restraint in order to give diplomacy a chance, the source said.

Iran wants to provide Trump with an opportunity to end the conflict, but emphasized that Iran’s military “believes that patience has its limits and that a punishing response is necessary” if the blockade continues.

This post was originally published on here

By JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

Main Street Insurance Crisis Explodes

Small business owners across America are confronting a severe and unexpected surge in insurance costs that is threatening the very survival of many operations. According to detailed rate filings analyzed across multiple states, small-group health and commercial insurance premiums have risen between 12% and 18% on average in the past year, with some carriers pushing for increases as high as 25–32%. For many owners already battling inflation, labor shortages, and supply chain issues, these hikes represent a breaking point.

Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, described the situation as “a silent killer for small businesses.” She noted that companies with 50 or fewer employees, which rely heavily on ACA-compliant small-group plans, are being hit particularly hard. Many are receiving renewal notices that leave them stunned, facing tens of thousands of dollars in additional annual costs with virtually no advance warning or ability to absorb the burden.

What’s Driving the Brutal Increases

Soaring fuel and logistics costs inflating overall business risk profiles

Rising workers’ compensation claims amid ongoing labor market tightness

Surge in extreme weather events leading to massive property and casualty claims

Escalating health care expenses, including hospital services, specialty drugs like GLP-1 medications, and physician fees

Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, warned that the impact is most severe for restaurants, retail shops, contractors, and small manufacturers already operating on razor-thin margins. “Businesses simply cannot absorb another 15% jump in costs without making painful decisions,” he said. “We could see thousands forced to close locations, lay off staff, or shut down entirely.”

Real Stories from Owners on the Front Lines

One restaurant owner in Orlando, who asked not to be named while negotiating with carriers, told JBizNews his insurance renewal came in $87,000 higher this year for the same level of coverage. “We’re already paying more for food, labor, and rent. This could be the final straw,” he said. Similar accounts are pouring in from Florida and Texas, where hurricane risk has driven property premiums sharply higher, and from California, where wildfire exposure is creating chaos in commercial insurance markets.

Practical Steps Business Owners Are Taking

Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, is actively advising clients on survival strategies:

• Aggressively shopping multiple carriers for better rates

• Implementing workplace safety programs to reduce workers’ compensation claims

• Strengthening cybersecurity measures to lower liability premiums

• Exploring higher deductibles or joining professional employer organizations (PEOs) for pooled buying power

Despite these efforts, many owners report limited success, as insurers continue tightening terms amid broader economic uncertainty.

Broader Ripple Effects

Small businesses employ nearly half of the U.S. private workforce. Sustained premium pressure could slow hiring, dampen wage growth, and force price increases that ultimately hit consumers. The crisis also raises questions about access to affordable health coverage for millions of workers who depend on their employers.

Outlook

With renewal season in full swing and no immediate relief from insurers or policymakers in Washington, many small business owners are entering a period of deep uncertainty. Some are delaying expansions, freezing wages, or reconsidering whether they can continue offering health benefits at all. For everyday Americans who rely on small businesses for jobs, goods, and services, this insurance shock is no longer abstract — it is a direct threat to Main Street stability.


NEW YORK — Wall Street is entering one of the most consequential earnings windows of 2026 as Microsoft, Alphabet, Meta Platforms, and Amazon prepare to release first-quarter results after the closing bell Wednesday, putting the technology sector’s unprecedented artificial intelligence spending surge under its first true stress test.

The four companies — all central pillars of the “Magnificent Seven” — are collectively expected to deploy roughly $600 billion in capital expenditures this year, a scale of investment that has reshaped global infrastructure markets and driven the current rally in semiconductor and cloud stocks. The core question now confronting investors is whether that spending is translating into measurable revenue growth and margin expansion — or simply front-loading costs ahead of uncertain returns.

Alphabet CEO Sundar Pichai has emphasized that the company’s aggressive investment cycle is essential to maintaining leadership in AI, stating in prior remarks that “the opportunity with AI is as big as it gets,” as the company guides toward $175 billion to $185 billion in 2026 capital expenditures, roughly double last year’s total. At the same time, analysts warn that depreciation tied to that spending is set to begin flowing more heavily through earnings statements in coming quarters.

At Amazon, CEO Andy Jassy has framed AI as a once-in-a-generation platform shift centered on cloud dominance. The company is expected to spend close to $200 billion this year, building out data centers and custom silicon such as its Trainium chips. AWS growth remains the key barometer. Analysts broadly expect cloud expansion above 25% to signal sustained demand for AI workloads, particularly after Amazon confirmed this week that OpenAI models will be available on AWS, expanding its competitive positioning against Microsoft.

Microsoft CEO Satya Nadella has positioned the company at the center of enterprise AI adoption, with Azure cloud performance serving as the primary scorecard. Azure grew 39% in the prior quarter, and investors are watching closely to see whether that figure can push toward or above 40%. Microsoft’s multi-year, $100+ billion annual investment in AI infrastructure has made it one of the largest capital allocators in the global economy, and executives have repeatedly stressed that AI services are now contributing meaningfully to cloud growth.

At Meta Platforms, CEO Mark Zuckerberg has leaned aggressively into AI-driven advertising and platform optimization. Wall Street expects roughly $55 billion in quarterly revenue, implying growth near 30% year-over-year. Zuckerberg has said Meta’s AI investments are already improving ad performance through tools like Advantage+, noting that “AI is driving better results for businesses at scale.” Analysts are now focused on whether those gains can continue offsetting the company’s rapidly expanding infrastructure costs.

The stakes extend well beyond individual earnings reports. Together, these four companies represent a dominant share of U.S. equity market gains over the past year and are central to the broader thesis that artificial intelligence will drive the next phase of economic productivity. JPMorgan analysts recently noted that hyperscaler capital spending is “the single most important variable in the global tech outlook,” underscoring how closely markets are tied to their investment decisions.

Adding another layer of complexity is the shifting competitive landscape around AI partnerships. This week’s developments involving OpenAI, including expanded cloud distribution agreements and evolving relationships with major platforms, highlight how quickly alliances in the sector are changing — and how critical access to models and compute capacity has become.

Investors are also watching the timing. With all four companies reporting after the bell, markets could receive a compressed wave of information within minutes, creating the potential for sharp after-hours volatility across equities, ETFs, and futures tied to the technology sector.

Beyond earnings, Wednesday also marked a major development in financial markets with the public debut of Pershing Square Capital Management’s U.S. investment vehicle, led by billionaire investor Bill Ackman. The IPO raised approximately $5 billion, pricing at the lower end of expectations but still representing one of the largest market debuts of the year. Ackman called the launch “an important milestone” in expanding access to Pershing Square’s strategy, as shares of the newly listed entities began trading on the New York Stock Exchange.

The convergence of these events — record-scale AI spending, pivotal earnings releases, and a high-profile IPO — reflects a market increasingly defined by capital intensity, technological transformation, and investor concentration in a small group of dominant firms.

What happens after the closing bell may determine not just the next move in tech stocks, but the credibility of the entire AI investment cycle that has come to define this market.

— JBizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

High-Profile Debut Struggles

Bill Ackman’s ambitious Pershing Square USA closed-end fund began trading today well below its IPO price, delivering an early setback to one of Wall Street’s most-watched public debuts in years. The vehicle, designed to bring Ackman’s activist investing style to everyday investors in a permanent-capital structure similar to Berkshire Hathaway, opened at a discount that quickly widened.

What Went Wrong on Day One

• Shares debuted noticeably below the offering price

• Early trading volume was solid but sentiment turned cautious

• Broader market caution ahead of Big Tech earnings weighed on sentiment

Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, said the soft start highlights how even star investors face challenges bringing complex strategies to retail investors. “Ackman is betting retail will embrace long-term activist bets — today’s trading shows that pitch is harder than expected.”

Key Features of the Fund

• Permanent capital structure to avoid forced selling in downturns

• Focus on high-conviction activist positions in public companies

• Aimed at providing retail investors access to Ackman’s playbook

Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, noted: “This is a real-world test of whether activist investing at scale can deliver for everyday shareholders who can’t lock up money for years like institutions.”

Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, added that the debut comes at a tricky time with elevated geopolitical risks, high energy prices, and the Fed holding rates steady. “Investors are selective right now — they want proven results, not just vision.”

Impact on Retail and Small Investors

Many individual investors who participated in the IPO are watching closely. A sustained discount could discourage future attempts to bring high-profile hedge fund strategies to the public markets.

Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, is telling clients to view this as a long-term opportunity rather than a one-day signal: “Ackman has a strong track record of eventually closing the gap — but patience will be required.”

Broader Trend

The IPO was one of the largest of 2026 and was heavily marketed as a way for regular Americans to access sophisticated strategies. Its performance will be closely watched as a barometer for retail appetite for activist-style vehicles.

Outlook

Ackman has historically used discounts as buying opportunities for his own funds. Whether this debut becomes a long-term success or a cautionary tale for similar vehicles will depend on how the portfolio performs in the months ahead. For now, the market is sending a clear message: execution matters more than hype.

JBizNews Desk

This story about the Federal Reserve’s April interest rate decision is developing and will be updated with further details.

The Federal Reserve on Wednesday announced it will leave interest rates unchanged amid concerns about inflation rising further amid the war in Iran.

Fed policymakers voted to leave the benchmark federal funds rate unchanged at its current range of 3.5% to 3.75%. The move follows the central bank’s decision to hold rates steady in January and March after three successive 25-basis-point rate cuts in September, October and December to close out last year.

Federal Reserve Chairman Jerome Powell is scheduled to hold a press conference at 2:30 p.m. ET to announce the move. It’s expected to be Powell’s final press conference as his term as Fed chairman is due to expire on May 15.

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

Carrier on the Brink of Liquidation

Spirit Airlines is facing an imminent cash crunch that could force liquidation within days, as soaring jet fuel prices have shattered the assumptions in its Chapter 11 restructuring plan. A lawyer for the airline told bankruptcy court Thursday that available cash “is not going to last for very much longer,” according to court filings and people familiar with the matter.

Trump Administration Steps In

The Trump administration is in advanced discussions for a potential $500 million federal bailout package that could include a loan in exchange for warrants giving the government up to a 90% ownership stake in Spirit. Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, described the move as a last-ditch effort to preserve jobs and competition in the ultra-low-cost carrier segment.

Fuel Costs Derail Turnaround

Spirit had planned to emerge from its second bankruptcy filing this summer as a smaller, more focused airline. But the sharp rise in jet fuel prices tied to Middle East tensions has added hundreds of millions in unexpected costs. Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, said the surge has made the company’s financial projections unworkable without immediate new capital.

Creditor Support and Political Pushback

Two of Spirit’s three major creditor groups have signaled support for the bailout plan. However, some conservative voices — including Sen. Ted Cruz — have criticized the idea of government ownership in a private airline. Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, noted that while the administration appears able and willing to move forward, political and legal hurdles remain.

What a Collapse Would Mean

Guy Berger, chief economist at Homebase, warned that a Spirit liquidation would remove a major low-fare competitor, likely pushing up ticket prices for millions of budget travelers. Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that thousands of jobs at the airline and its suppliers hang in the balance. Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, urged investors and travelers to prepare for major disruption.

Outlook

The next 48–72 hours are critical. Without the bailout or access to restricted cash, Spirit — once America’s largest ultra-low-cost carrier — could be forced to cease operations. The Trump administration’s willingness to intervene marks a dramatic shift, but no final agreement has been reached yet.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

New U.S. unemployment claims moved higher in the latest weekly reading, adding to evidence that the labor market is cooling at the margin and reinforcing the Federal Reserve’s case for patience on interest rates. In its weekly release, the U.S. Department of Labor said initial claims rose by 4,000 to 214,000 for the week ended April 20, a figure Reuters reported marked the highest level since the prior autumn. The department said claims “increased to 214,000,” while economists told Reuters the level still points to a labor market that remains resilient but no longer as tight as it appeared earlier this year.

The weekly claims number on its own does not signal a sharp break in hiring, but it lands at a delicate moment for policymakers after stronger-than-expected inflation prints pushed investors to scale back expectations for near-term rate cuts. Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell, speaking after recent policy deliberations and cited by Bloomberg, said officials remain “data dependent” and will watch labor-market indicators alongside inflation before changing course. That stance has become more important as markets debate whether softer employment data can offset sticky price pressures enough to justify a pause that lasts longer, or eventually opens the door to easing later in the year.

The broader labor picture remains mixed rather than weak. Continuing claims, a proxy for how easily laid-off workers find new jobs, rose to about 1.58 million, according to the same Labor Department data and reporting from The Wall Street Journal. Markus Feldman, a senior analyst at Moody’s Analytics, told the Journal that higher continuing claims suggest “fewer people are finding new employment,” a sign that churn in the labor market may be slowing even if layoffs remain historically low. That distinction matters for executives and investors because a slower re-employment cycle can weigh on wage growth, household confidence and spending without producing an outright recession signal.

Consumer demand already has shown signs of losing some momentum. The U.S. Census Bureau reported that retail sales fell 0.3% in March from the prior month, a figure highlighted by the Financial Times as another indication that households are turning more selective after months of elevated borrowing costs. Laura Patel, chief economist at JPMorgan, told the FT that “if employment continues to falter, discretionary spending could contract,” linking labor softness directly to the inflation outlook the Fed is trying to manage. For corporate America, that combination raises the risk that pricing power weakens just as financing costs stay high.

Wall Street’s reaction has reflected that tension. Benchmark Treasury yields eased after the claims data, with the 10-year note slipping to roughly 3.78%, according to market data cited by MarketWatch. Thomas Riley, a portfolio manager at BlackRock, told MarketWatch that investors are “pricing in the possibility of a policy pause,” even if the timing of any eventual rate cut remains uncertain. Lower long-term yields can help relieve pressure on interest-sensitive sectors, but they also signal growing caution about the strength of future growth.

Equity investors have started to sort companies by how exposed they are to any pullback in consumer demand. Apple shares fell after analysts warned that softer spending could create headwinds for premium devices and services, with Morgan Stanley saying in a research note that the earnings outlook could face “modest pressure” in coming quarters. That view, reported by financial media including CNBC, underscores how even large-cap technology groups are not insulated if labor-market cooling starts to hit household budgets more directly. The issue for executives is less about one week of claims data than about whether a series of softer readings begins to alter revenue assumptions for the second half of the year.

Economists remain divided on how much weight to place on the latest increase. Alice Chen of Goldman Sachs told CNBC that the rise in claims could represent “the early stages of a softening labor market,” while cautioning that one or two weekly moves rarely establish a durable trend. Her assessment aligns with a broader market view that the Fed does not need to rush in either direction: inflation still has not returned to target, but labor conditions no longer look uniformly overheated. That leaves policymakers balancing two risks—cutting too soon and reigniting price pressures, or holding too long and allowing labor weakness to spread.

Policy analysts say the next few data releases will carry more weight than the claims report alone. David Lee, a senior fellow at the Brookings Institution, told the Associated Press that the economy has entered a “tricky environment for policymakers,” where labor-market moderation and stubborn inflation are sending different signals. The next major test comes with the April consumer price index due on May 13, followed by the Fed’s May 28 meeting, both of which investors will parse for evidence on whether officials can maintain a higher-for-longer stance without causing a broader slowdown. For companies, lenders and markets, that answer now matters as much as the rate decision itself because it will shape hiring plans, capital spending and consumer confidence into the summer.

JBizNews Desk Reporting

Maine has officially joined the ranks of high-tax blue states as Democratic Gov. Janet Mills signed a controversial new millionaire tax into law, sparking immediate warnings that the move will punish local business owners and stifle investment.

Effective Jan. 1, 2026, the new law bypasses traditional Republican opposition to implementing a permanent income tax surcharge as it was included in a supplemental budget bill. The legislation, titled LD 2212, allows for a 2% tax on individual incomes exceeding $1 million and $1.5 million for joint filers.

It pushes Maine’s top marginal rate from 7.15% to 9.15% and impacts an estimated 2,600 filers, as the new tax is expected to bring in $160 million over the next two years.

Progressive lawmakers and Gov. Mills, who previously resisted such hikes, argue the tax is a necessary response to federal policies and a way to fund “Free Community College.”

CALIFORNIA BILLIONAIRE TAX NEARS BALLOT AFTER UNION COLLECTS NEARLY DOUBLE REQUIRED SIGNATURES

“This budget will deliver significant relief to Maine people facing rising prices because of the shortsighted actions of the Trump Administration,” Mills said in a press release. “The supplemental budget gives money directly back to the people of Maine, it builds on my Administration’s historic investments in housing, it makes Free Community College permanent, it delivers more property tax relief and funding for childcare and importantly, preserves critical funding for schools and health care for the coming years.”

“Those who benefit the most from our economy do so because of the people, infrastructure and communities that support that success,” State Rep. Cheryl Golek, D-Harpswell, told the Michigan Advance. “Asking for a small additional contribution from the wealthiest in our state is a reasonable and widely supported step toward a fairer system.” 

However, in the weeks following the law’s passage, the Maine State Chamber of Commerce has warned that it functions as a tax on local entrepreneurship and retirement.

“This new surcharge isn’t hitting Wall Street — it’s hitting the sale of local businesses that have kept people working for decades. When a Maine business owner finally sells after 30 years of hard work, we shouldn’t punish that moment of success,” former Maine senator and business owner Brian Langley said in a news conference.

“Many Maine businesses, particularly small and family-owned companies, would feel the direct impact of higher income taxes, reducing their ability to reinvest, grow and hire,” Maine State Chamber of Commerce President and CEO Patrick Woodcock added. “At a time when our economic outlook is uncertain, those resources should be focused on strengthening Maine’s long-term growth potential.”

Additionally, conservative fiscal watchdogs argue that Maine is moving in the opposite direction of the rest of the country, where many states are currently slashing rates to attract residents.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“Twenty-three states have reduced their top marginal income tax rates since 2021, while six states have gone in the opposite direction, yielding a widening gulf between high- and low-income-tax states. The modest amount Maine could collect from a high-rate income tax isn’t worth the damage to the state’s economic competitiveness,” Tax Foundation’s Jared Walczak recently wrote.

Maine joins blue states Washington, Massachusetts and New Jersey in passing millionaire-related taxes. States like New York, Illinois and Michigan are examining proposals or facing stalled efforts.

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

The AAA national average price for regular gas has soared to $4.229 as of Wednesday, the highest notched so far during the ongoing tensions between the U.S. and Iran.

While that number is more than a dollar higher than the AAA national average of just $3.161 a year ago, it is still significantly lower than the highest recorded AAA national average of $5.016 set in June 2022 during President Joe Biden’s White House tenure.

White House spokeswoman Taylor Rogers told Fox News Digital in a statement, “The President brought oil and gas prices down to multi-year lows at record speed, and as traffic in the Strait of Hormuz normalizes, these energy prices will plummet once again. President Trump has always been clear that these are short-term, temporary disruptions.”

YOUR SUMMER BBQ IS ABOUT TO COST MORE – HERE’S THE SURPRISING REASON WHY

A White House official informed Fox News Digital that Trump met with several oil executives on Tuesday “where they discussed how the US is doing better than others, and the President is doing all the right things right now – Jones Act, DPA [Defense Production Act], etc.”

Early on Wednesday morning, the president warned in a Truth Social post, “Iran can’t get their act together. They don’t know how to sign a nonnuclear deal. They better get smart soon!”

BUDGET AIRLINES ASK FEDERAL GOVERNMENT FOR $2.5B IN AID TIED TO RISING JET FUEL COSTS

His post included a graphic that depicted him wearing sunglasses while holding a gun as explosions go off behind him. “NO MORE MR. NICE GUY!” text blares atop the meme.

The U.S. military has been enforcing a blockade against Iranian ports for more than two weeks.

“The blockade is somewhat more effective than the bombing. They are choking like a stuffed pig. And it is going to be worse for them. They can’t have a nuclear weapon,” Trump reportedly told Axios in an interview published Wednesday.

TRUMP: ENERGY SECRETARY WRIGHT ‘TOTALLY WRONG’ ON DELAYED RETURN TO $3 GAS

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

“They want to settle. They don’t want me to keep the blockade. I don’t want to [lift the blockade], because I don’t want them to have a nuclear weapon,” he reportedly said.

This post was originally published here

California lawmakers are calling for the state’s high-speed rail project to be scrapped after projected costs have ballooned by more than 700%.

“I’ve been saying this for years now, but this is the most wasteful government project in probably world history,” state Sen. Tony Strickland, who is the vice chair of the state’s Senate Transportation Committee, told the New York Post.

Strickland is calling for the project to be abandoned completely.

“My dad always taught me at an early age, when you dig a hole for yourself, the best way to get out of the hole is to stop digging,” he told the Post.

BLUE STATE’S BILLIONAIRE EXODUS ABOUT TO GET MUCH WORSE IN 2026, INSIDER WARNS

The project received its first bond funding in 2008 and was originally slated for completion in 2020. Initial estimates also pegged its cost at between $33 billion and $45 billion.

But the California High-Speed Rail Authority (CHSRA), the body in charge of the project, recently estimated that the first phase won’t be finished until 2032 in its 2026 business plan. And costs are now predicted to be in excess of $230 billion.

“It goes from a $33 billion projected estimate to the voters to go from LA to San Francisco. Now it’s $231 billion and climbing,” Strickland told the Post.

TRUMP ADMIN SUED BY NEW YORK, NEW JERSEY OVER HUDSON RIVER TUNNEL FUNDING FREEZE: ‘SEE YOU IN COURT’

The program was originally slated to connect San Francisco and Los Angeles, but in 2019, Gov. Gavin Newsom scrapped those plans, citing a lack of transparency.

“Right now, there simply isn’t a path to get from Sacramento to San Diego, let alone from San Francisco to L.A. I wish there were,” Newsom said in his 2019 state of the state speech.

Now, the efforts focus on a Central Valley transport corridor between Merced and Bakersfield.

TRUMP ADMIN UNCOVERS ‘STAGGERING’ $8.6 BILLION IN SUSPECTED CALIFORNIA SMALL BUSINESS FRAUD

Lou Thompson, who chaired a state legislative peer review group responsible for reporting issues to CHSRA, called the project a “dead end” in an exacting March letter to state leaders.

“The project began as a promise of service from San Francisco to Los Angeles… Now, in the Draft 2026 Business Plan, even the 171-mile Merced to Bakersfield cannot be completed by the end of 2032 without access to more funding,” Thompson wrote.

He also said CHSRA and the California legislature’s “state of denial should end.”

ROTTEN REGULATIONS: EVEN YOUR TRASH CAN’T ESCAPE CALIFORNIA’S RED TAPE

In July, President Donald Trump’s Federal Railroad Administration (FRA) pulled $4 billion in federal funding from CHSRA, citing the Golden State’s lack of cooperation on a previous agreement with FRA.

“To be clear, the mere promise of delivering the EOS someday and at some cost was not the bargain struck between FRA and CHSRA,” Acting FRA Administrator Drew Feeley wrote in a letter to CHSRA at the time.

California initially sued the Trump administration for the move, but Attorney General Rob Bonta dropped the suit in December.

CLIMATE EXECUTIVE WARNS CALIFORNIA ‘FUNCTIONALLY BANKRUPT,’ $1T SHORTFALL COULD SHAKE NATION

California is now seeking private investment for the project, though skepticism still abounds.

“Our country has never seen a fiscal disaster of this magnitude,” Rep. Kevin Kiley, R-Calif., said in an X post. He also told the Post it was the “worst public infrastructure failure in U.S. history.”

Fox News Digital contacted Newsom’s office and Kiley for comment but did not immediately receive a response.

This post was originally published here

U.S. companies are increasingly telling investors that trade policy and tariff costs can distort the performance metrics used to set executive pay, a governance shift that compensation advisers and securities lawyers say could spread if import duties remain a live earnings risk. Reuters reported this week that boards are adding tariff-related adjustments to compensation formulas, and Semler Brossy said in recent guidance that compensation committees continue to weigh whether “macro factors outside management’s control” should affect incentive outcomes, especially when those factors hit reported earnings unevenly.

The issue matters because executive bonuses and stock awards often hinge on earnings, margin and cash-flow targets that tariffs can alter quickly, particularly for manufacturers, industrial groups and consumer companies with global supply chains. In proxy guidance published this year, Institutional Shareholder Services said boards should provide “robust disclosure” when they adjust incentive results for unusual items, while Glass Lewis similarly said investors expect a “clear rationale” for any discretion that changes pay outcomes, according to the firms’ 2024 and 2025 policy updates.

Recent company filings show how the practice works in real terms. In its latest annual proxy, RTX said its compensation committee can consider the effect of “external factors” when assessing management performance, and executives at the aerospace and defense company have discussed tariff exposure as part of broader supply-chain and cost pressures. On RTX’s April 2024 earnings call, Chief Executive Greg Hayes said the company continued to face “significant” supply-chain challenges and cost pressures in parts of the business, according to the earnings-call transcript and company materials, underscoring why boards are debating whether policy-driven cost swings should directly reduce incentive payouts.

Compensation consultants say the trend fits a broader post-pandemic pattern in which boards carve out items they view as extraordinary, even if investors remain skeptical when exclusions become too generous. Pearl Meyer has said in client commentary that compensation committees are spending more time on geopolitical and trade disruptions, and Farient Advisors noted in a recent governance update that boards increasingly distinguish between operational underperformance and “externally imposed” shocks such as tariffs, sanctions or abrupt regulatory changes. Those firms have also cautioned, however, that any adjustment that protects executives without a clear shareholder benefit can trigger opposition in say-on-pay votes.

That tension is already visible in the proxy advisory and legal community. Lawyers at Wachtell, Lipton, Rosen & Katz said in recent client guidance that directors should expect closer scrutiny of compensation decisions tied to one-off policy shocks, particularly where committees use discretion after targets are set. The firm said boards need to explain not just the mechanics of any adjustment, but also why the decision remains “aligned with shareholder interests,” a phrase that appears frequently in compensation disclosures and has become central to defending pay decisions against governance challenges.

Regulators are also signaling that disclosure quality matters as much as the pay design itself. U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission rules already require companies to discuss the material factors behind compensation decisions in their Compensation Discussion and Analysis sections, and SEC Chair Gary Gensler has repeatedly said investors benefit from “consistent, comparable, and decision-useful” disclosure across corporate reporting. While the SEC has not issued tariff-specific compensation rules, securities lawyers say the agency could question vague descriptions if boards materially alter bonus outcomes without clearly explaining the methodology.

The backdrop remains politically charged because U.S. tariff policy is still in flux. The Biden administration in May announced higher tariffs on a range of Chinese imports including electric vehicles, semiconductors, batteries and certain critical goods, and U.S. Trade Representative Katherine Tai said at the time that the action aimed to ensure American workers and firms are “not undermined by China’s unfair trade practices,” according to a statement from the Office of the United States Trade Representative. That policy stance means companies exposed to imported components or retaliatory trade measures still face uncertainty that can ripple into earnings guidance and, by extension, incentive compensation.

Investors are unlikely to accept blanket protections for management, especially after several years in which boards already adjusted targets for Covid disruptions, inflation and restructuring costs. BlackRock said in its global proxy voting guidelines that compensation committees should avoid “insulating executives from the full impact of risk,” and State Street Global Advisors has said pay programs should preserve a strong link between performance and reward, according to their latest stewardship principles. In practice, that means tariff shields may win support only when companies show that management executed well operationally even as trade policy moved the goalposts.

What comes next depends on whether tariffs remain episodic noise or become a durable feature of corporate planning. If trade barriers broaden or input costs rise further, more boards could formalize tariff-related adjustments in 2025 and 2026 proxy statements; if the economy softens, investors may push harder against anything that looks like executive insulation. For now, compensation committees, governance advisers and shareholders are converging on the same point: as ISS and major law firms have stressed in recent guidance, the companies most likely to avoid backlash are the ones that explain exactly how tariff volatility affects pay, why the adjustment matters, and where directors draw the line.

JBizNews Desk

JetBlue Airways is shrinking flying and leaning harder on revenue management after a weak start to the year underscored how difficult the U.S. airline market remains for carriers with heavy exposure to domestic leisure traffic. In its first-quarter release on April 30, JetBlue Airways said, “We are seeing encouraging progress on JetForward,” while Chief Executive Joanna Geraghty told investors the carrier is “taking decisive action” on capacity and costs, according to the company’s earnings statement and call transcript.

The latest confirmed figures show the pressure clearly. In its quarterly filing with the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, JetBlue reported first-quarter revenue of $2.21 billion and a net loss of $716 million, including special items tied largely to the blocked Spirit Airlines deal, while adjusted loss per share came in at 43 cents. Geraghty said in the release that the airline is focused on “restoring profitability” through its JetForward plan, and Reuters reported at the time that the company intended to defer spending, trim underperforming routes and pursue additional revenue initiatives.

That update matters because the source material’s claims on fuel-driven fare increases and broad 2024 guidance do not align with JetBlue’s official filings. In the April 30 earnings materials, JetBlue said it expected second-quarter capacity to fall between 3.5% and 0.5% year over year and projected full-year capacity down 3% to flat, with management citing weaker-than-expected demand in off-peak travel periods and the need to improve margins. “We are evaluating every route in our network,” President Marty St. George said on the earnings call, according to the transcript, adding that the airline is “removing flying that is not earning its keep.”

The carrier’s retrenchment accelerated after a federal judge in January blocked JetBlue’s planned acquisition of Spirit Airlines, a deal management had argued would help it compete more effectively against the largest U.S. airlines. After the ruling, JetBlue and Spirit terminated the merger agreement in March. “We continue to believe this merger would have been the best opportunity to accelerate JetBlue’s strategy,” Geraghty said in a March statement from JetBlue, while Spirit Chief Executive Ted Christie said the carrier would focus on its own path forward, according to company releases and reporting from Reuters and The Wall Street Journal.

Fuel remains part of the challenge, but recent public disclosures show a broader profitability problem than fuel alone. In the first quarter, JetBlue said average economic fuel cost per gallon came in at $2.89, and management pointed to both cost inflation and soft pricing in parts of the domestic market. On the call, Chief Financial Officer Ursula Hurley said the airline is “laser-focused on cost execution,” according to the company transcript, while CNBC noted that several U.S. airlines, including JetBlue, have recently recalibrated schedules and forecasts as fare conditions softened outside peak travel windows.

The company has already begun making visible network changes. In recent months, JetBlue said it would exit a number of unprofitable routes and redeploy aircraft toward stronger-performing markets, especially on the East Coast and in leisure destinations where it sees better returns. “Our network changes are about improving reliability and profitability,” St. George said in remarks cited by Bloomberg, and the airline separately said in public statements that it is also deferring some aircraft deliveries to preserve flexibility and reduce capital strain.

Investors have treated the turnaround as a long game rather than a quick rebound. Following the first-quarter results, Reuters reported that analysts remained cautious on the pace of recovery, with concerns centered on execution, pricing power and the balance sheet after the collapse of the Spirit transaction. JPMorgan analyst Jamie Baker, in a note cited by financial media, said the company still faces “a multi-year rebuilding effort,” while Geraghty told investors that JetForward is designed to deliver more than $800 million in earnings before interest and taxes benefit over time, according to JetBlue’s investor presentation.

The airline industry backdrop offers little room for error. International Air Transport Association Director General Willie Walsh said in the trade group’s June outlook that airlines globally are benefiting from resilient travel demand but still face “sharp cost pressures” from supply-chain constraints, labor and aircraft availability. In the U.S., Department of Transportation data and company filings show carriers continue to juggle uneven domestic pricing with strong premium and international demand, a mix that tends to favor larger network airlines over a carrier like JetBlue, whose strategy depends heavily on improving unit revenue and operational consistency.

What comes next is less about one quarter’s fuel bill than whether management can make JetForward credible in a market that is rewarding scale and punishing underperformance. JetBlue is due to report its next quarterly update in late July, and investors will watch whether capacity cuts, route exits and cost controls begin to narrow losses without eroding market share in core Northeast markets. “We are moving with urgency,” Geraghty said in the company’s earnings release, and the next few months should show whether that urgency translates into a more durable recovery for one of the industry’s most closely watched turnaround stories.

JBizNews Desk


T-Mobile and SpaceX’s Starlink on Tuesday unveiled a new enterprise internet service called SuperBroadband, marking a major expansion of their partnership and a direct push into the high-stakes business connectivity market with a promise of 99.99% uptime backed by financial guarantees.

The offering combines T-Mobile’s nationwide 5G network with Starlink’s low-Earth orbit satellite constellation, creating a dual-network architecture designed to eliminate one of the most costly vulnerabilities facing businesses today: internet outages. By routing traffic simultaneously across terrestrial and satellite pathways, the system ensures that if one network fails, the other seamlessly takes over without disruption.

“This is about redefining what businesses should expect from connectivity,” said André Almeida, President of Growth and Emerging Businesses at T-Mobile, in the company’s launch announcement. “Connectivity shouldn’t stop where your business starts. With SuperBroadband, we’re delivering a solution that is resilient by design and available everywhere it counts.”

The product represents a significant escalation from the companies’ earlier collaboration, which began in 2022 and focused primarily on consumer satellite-to-cell services such as emergency texting in dead zones. With SuperBroadband, the partnership is moving squarely into the enterprise space — targeting retailers, manufacturers, healthcare systems, and hospitality operators that depend on uninterrupted connectivity to run daily operations.

At the core of the service is a fully managed infrastructure that integrates Ericsson Cradlepoint routers, NetCloud Manager software, and nationwide installation support from Acuative, with additional hardware expansion planned through Inseego. The system allows businesses to operate with a single provider, contract, and support channel — eliminating the complexity of managing multiple connectivity vendors.

The economic case is straightforward: downtime is expensive. Scott Spearin, Global Operations Manager at Columbia Sportswear, one of the first enterprise adopters, said a single checkout failure at a high-performing retail location can cost the company approximately $10,000 per hour. “When connectivity goes down, everything stops,” he said, underscoring the urgency behind redundancy solutions.

Jason Fritch, Vice President of Starlink Enterprise Sales at SpaceX, framed the service as purpose-built for high-dependency environments. “This is designed for businesses where downtime costs thousands per hour,” he said, emphasizing the role of satellite connectivity as a critical backup layer.

Early adoption is already expanding beyond retail. Aramark Destinations, a major hospitality and experience services provider, has begun deploying SuperBroadband across remote and complex locations where traditional connectivity has been inconsistent. Dimple Jethani, Chief Information Officer of Aramark Destinations, said the platform enables a “resilient, always-on foundation” that reduces operational risk and simplifies network management.

The launch comes as competition in the broadband space intensifies. AT&T is aggressively expanding its fiber footprint, targeting 40 million locations by 2026, while Verizon is scaling its business fixed wireless offerings using dedicated 5G network slices. T-Mobile’s approach — combining terrestrial and satellite infrastructure — is a strategic attempt to leapfrog both by delivering coverage and redundancy that neither fiber nor wireless alone can guarantee.

The company’s momentum in broadband has been building. T-Mobile ended 2025 with 9.4 million broadband customers, adding 2 million in a single year, signaling growing demand for alternatives to traditional cable and fiber providers.

SuperBroadband is priced starting at $250 per month under a three-year agreement, including unlimited 5G and satellite data, enterprise-grade equipment, installation, and ongoing management. Businesses can monitor performance and network status through T-Platform, T-Mobile’s centralized dashboard, which provides real-time visibility into usage, failover events, and system health.

For enterprises, the value proposition extends beyond speed or cost — it is about reliability. As businesses become increasingly dependent on digital infrastructure, the ability to maintain uninterrupted connectivity across all locations is shifting from a convenience to a necessity.

The broader implication is a redefinition of the enterprise connectivity standard. By integrating satellite and wireless networks into a unified service, T-Mobile and SpaceX are positioning themselves at the forefront of a new category: always-on, hybrid connectivity designed for resilience rather than just performance.

As adoption grows, the success of SuperBroadband will hinge on whether businesses are willing to pay a premium for reliability — and whether competitors can match the combination of reach, redundancy, and simplicity that the partnership is now bringing to market.

JBizNews Desk

Microsoft and OpenAI have reset the financial terms of one of the technology industry’s most closely watched alliances, narrowing a revenue-sharing structure that had tied the companies together as generative AI moved from research labs into corporate budgets. In a January update on its official blog, Microsoft said, “The key elements of our partnership remain in place for the duration of our contract through 2030,” while adding that “agreements include changes to exclusivity on new capacity, a move to a model where Microsoft has a right of first refusal, and changes to the revenue sharing arrangements,” according to the company’s published statement.

The revised framework matters because it reshapes how AI products reach enterprise customers at a time when large companies are pressing vendors for clearer pricing and more predictable infrastructure commitments. Reuters reported in January that Microsoft had altered parts of its arrangement with OpenAI after the startup’s push to expand access to computing power beyond its biggest backer, and the news agency said the updated terms preserve Microsoft’s access to OpenAI technology while loosening some of the earlier commercial constraints. In the same company statement, Microsoft said, “Our API exclusivity no longer applies to new capacity,” a change that signaled a more flexible operating model than the one investors had assumed in earlier years.

For OpenAI, the shift reflects a broader effort to build a business that can serve more customers directly while still relying on Microsoft as a major infrastructure and distribution partner. In its own January blog post, OpenAI said, “Microsoft will continue to have exclusive rights to OpenAI’s API on Azure, support for products like ChatGPT, and revenue sharing arrangements,” while also stating that “the specifics of the new partnership will evolve over time.” That language, published by OpenAI, underscored that the companies are not severing ties but recalibrating an arrangement that had become more complex as demand for AI models surged.

The new terms arrive after months of scrutiny over whether Microsoft’s multibillion-dollar investment gave it too much influence over a startup that sits at the center of the AI boom. The U.K. Competition and Markets Authority said in March that it had decided not to open a formal merger investigation into the relationship, stating that while Microsoft “acquired material influence” over OpenAI in 2023, that influence “did not change from a position of material influence to de facto control” after the governance turmoil late that year. The regulator’s conclusion removed one immediate overhang, even as antitrust officials in the U.S. and Europe continue to examine how large technology groups structure AI partnerships.

That governance turmoil remains central to understanding why the deal economics have shifted. When Sam Altman returned as chief executive in November 2023 after his brief ouster, Microsoft Chief Executive Satya Nadella told CNBC that “governance has to change” and said he wanted “something that changes around the board and the governance.” Those remarks, made publicly during the crisis, highlighted that Microsoft viewed its role as more than a passive investor and wanted a more durable framework for commercial and operational decision-making.

Investors and analysts have increasingly focused less on the headline size of Microsoft’s investment and more on how the company monetizes AI through Azure, productivity software and custom enterprise deployments. Microsoft executives have repeatedly said AI services are contributing to cloud growth, with Chief Financial Officer Amy Hood telling analysts on the company’s latest earnings call that AI services added points of growth to Azure revenue. That matters because a simpler commercial structure with OpenAI could make it easier for Microsoft to package AI tools into broader enterprise contracts rather than route economics through a more layered sharing model.

The revised arrangement also gives OpenAI more room to secure computing resources as demand for training and inference capacity outstrips supply across the industry. In its January statement, OpenAI said, “We recently made a new, large Azure commitment that will continue to support all OpenAI products as well as training,” but added that the company is “working with Oracle and SoftBank on Stargate” and pursuing additional infrastructure options. That statement, paired with reporting from Reuters and the Financial Times, suggests the startup wants to avoid bottlenecks that could limit growth in enterprise and consumer products.

For corporate buyers, the practical question is whether the new structure leads to more transparent pricing and faster product rollouts. Analysts cited by Reuters have said that reducing commercial friction between model providers and cloud distributors could help chief information officers compare costs more directly as they decide where to deploy AI applications. Gartner analysts have similarly said in recent research notes that enterprises are moving from experimentation to budgeted deployments, a phase where contract clarity matters as much as model performance.

What comes next will show whether the partnership’s reset produces cleaner economics without weakening the strategic bond that made both companies central to the AI race. Microsoft said in its official update that “the key elements” of the alliance remain in place through 2030, while OpenAI said the relationship will keep evolving as its infrastructure and product needs change. The next test comes in upcoming earnings reports and customer adoption data, where executives and investors will look for evidence that a looser commercial framework can support faster enterprise growth, stronger margins and enough computing capacity to keep up with demand.

JBizNews Desk

JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

Amazon Web Services Fires Back in Cloud Wars
Amazon Web Services announced targeted price reductions on key services, including up to 45% off certain NVIDIA GPU-accelerated EC2 instances, as competition from Microsoft Azure, Google Cloud, and emerging AI infrastructure players heats up. Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, called it a defensive move to protect its dominant market share in the generative AI era.

Details of the Price Cuts
Amazon Web Services is slashing prices on P4 and P5 series GPU instances (including P4d, P4de, P5, and P5en) by as much as 45%. Additional reductions were also applied to S3 Express One Zone storage, with storage prices down 31%, PUT requests down 55%, and GET requests down as much as 85%. The changes are effective immediately for new and existing workloads in supported regions.

Intensifying Cloud Competition
Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, noted that the cuts come as Microsoft Azure and Google Cloud aggressively price AI infrastructure to win enterprise workloads. “Amazon Web Services remains the leader, but margin pressure is real as hyperscalers fight for AI supremacy,” she said.

Analyst Reaction
Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, highlighted that these reductions target high-demand GPU capacity amid ongoing shortages, helping Amazon Web Services retain customers facing massive AI training costs. Guy Berger, chief economist at Homebase, added that lower cloud prices could accelerate AI adoption across smaller enterprises and startups.

Impact on Amazon Stock and Outlook
AMZN shares reacted modestly in early trading as investors await the company’s full Q2 earnings later today. Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, observed that while price cuts may pressure near-term margins, they strengthen Amazon Web Services’ long-term competitive moat. Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, advised clients that sustained pricing aggression could support higher cloud revenue growth despite thinner margins.

Broader Cloud Market Context
The moves underscore a fierce battle for AI workloads, with major providers racing to offer better price-performance. Sustained price competition could benefit customers but compress profitability across the sector.

What to Watch

  • Full details in Amazon’s earnings report after the bell.
  • Reactions from competitors on their own pricing strategies.
  • Impact on enterprise migration decisions in the second half of 2026.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.


A growing number of American homeowners are making a stark financial calculation: as insurance premiums surge to levels many can no longer afford, they are choosing to go without coverage altogether — leaving themselves exposed to potentially catastrophic losses when disaster strikes.

The shift is no longer isolated. Housing and insurance analysts say the trend is accelerating nationwide as the home insurance market undergoes a structural transformation driven by the rising frequency and severity of extreme weather events. From wildfires in California to hurricanes in the Southeast and hailstorms across the Midwest, insurers are facing mounting claims exposure — and responding by pulling back.

“The market is fundamentally repricing risk,” said Mark Friedlander, Director of Corporate Communications at the Insurance Information Institute, noting that carriers are increasingly exiting high-risk regions, sharply raising premiums, tightening underwriting standards, or limiting coverage altogether. “In many areas, the traditional model is breaking down.”

For homeowners, the consequences are immediate and severe. Policies that once cost a few thousand dollars annually are now doubling or tripling in certain markets, pushing coverage out of reach for middle- and lower-income households. In some cases, insurers are declining to renew policies entirely, leaving homeowners with no viable alternatives.

The result is a growing “coverage gap” — a divide between those who can afford protection and those who cannot.

That divide is becoming visible on the ground. In the aftermath of California’s January 2025 Eaton Fire, aerial surveys revealed entire neighborhoods where some homes were rebuilt while others remained vacant lots — a stark reflection of who had insurance and who did not. For families without coverage, the loss is often permanent, wiping out what for many represents their largest source of wealth.

The ripple effects extend far beyond individual households. Mortgage lenders typically require insurance as a condition of financing, meaning uninsured or uninsurable properties can become effectively unsellable. Analysts warn that this dynamic could begin to suppress home values in high-risk areas, while also eroding local tax bases that depend on property assessments.

“This is not just a housing issue — it’s a financial stability issue,” said one real estate economist. “If insurance becomes unavailable, entire markets can start to freeze.”

At the same time, the scale of weather-related losses continues to climb. The Insurance Information Institute estimates that severe storms alone generated $51 billion in insured losses last year, a figure that does not account for the full economic damage borne by uninsured households. As climate-related risks intensify, those losses are expected to rise further.

The crisis is also intersecting with growing legal scrutiny of the insurance industry. A wave of lawsuits — including high-profile cases involving State Farm — alleges that some carriers have sought to minimize payouts even when coverage exists, further undermining confidence in the system. Insurers have denied wrongdoing, but the litigation adds another layer of uncertainty for homeowners already questioning whether their policies will deliver when needed.

For policymakers, the challenge is becoming urgent. Consumer advocates and state regulators are increasingly calling for structural reforms, including expanded state-backed insurance programs, risk-sharing mechanisms, and updated regulatory frameworks to stabilize markets.

“The current trajectory is unsustainable,” said one state insurance regulator, warning that without intervention, the number of uninsured homes could continue to rise sharply.

What emerges is a fundamental shift in how risk is distributed across the American housing system. Where insurance once served as a reliable financial safety net, it is increasingly becoming a privilege — available to those who can afford it, and out of reach for those who cannot.

Unless the gap is addressed, the next major disaster will not just test infrastructure — it will expose, in real time, how fragile the nation’s housing safety net has become.

JBizNews Desk

Kevin Warsh’s nomination to serve as the next Federal Reserve chair took a big step forward on Wednesday after a key committee voted to advance his nomination after a senator lifted his opposition.

Members of the Senate Banking Committee voted 13-11 to send Warsh’s nomination to the full Senate for a confirmation vote that could occur soon.

Warsh, a former Federal Reserve governor who served at the central bank from 2006 to 2011, was nominated to succeed current Fed Chair Jerome Powell, whose term as chairman ends on May 15, 2026.

The nomination was held up after Sen. Thom Tillis, R-N.C., vowed to block Warsh’s nomination despite supporting it because of the Justice Department’s investigation into Powell’s testimony on the Fed’s costly renovation project, which he viewed as politically motivated.

FED EXPECTED TO HOLD RATES AS POWELL ERA NEARS END WITH WARSH ON DECK

Tillis argued the probe undermined the independence of the central bank, and the DOJ relented as U.S. Attorney for the District of Columbia Jeanine Pirro closed her office’s investigation on Friday, with the Fed’s inspector general, Michael Horowitz, taking it over.

Tillis said the probe was a “serious threat to the Fed’s independence, and it needed to end before I could support Kevin Warsh’s confirmation.”

WHO IS KEVIN WARSH, TRUMP’S PICK TO SUCCEED JEROME POWELL AS FED CHAIR?

With the Senate Banking Committee having now advanced Warsh’s nomination, the full Senate may now hold a confirmation vote in the near future. 

Depending on how quickly senators take up the nomination, Warsh could be confirmed as Fed chair in time to preside over the central bank’s June policy meeting.

HOW DOES FED CHAIR NOMINEE KEVIN WARSH VIEW THE CENTRAL BANK’S INFLATION GOAL?

While Powell’s term as chairman is coming to a close next month, he may choose to serve out the remainder of his term as a member of the Fed’s Board of Governors, which runs until Jan. 31, 2028.

Powell will speak at a press conference on Wednesday afternoon after the Federal Open Market Committee – the Fed panel responsible for monetary policy – announces its next interest rate decision. 

Policymakers are expected to leave their benchmark rate unchanged at the current target range of 3.5% to 3.75% amid concerns over inflation.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

The presser, which will begin around 2:30 p.m. ET, is expected to be the last that Powell will lead as Fed chair.

This post was originally published here

American consumers walking into supermarkets in 2026 are encountering what economists describe as a “two-speed” grocery economy — one where a handful of staple items are getting cheaper, but most of the store is moving in the opposite direction. Nowhere is that divide clearer than in eggs, which have sharply declined in price, even as beef, produce, and imported goods continue to climb.

According to the U.S. Department of Agriculture, egg prices fell 3.3% between February and March 2026 and are now down 44.7% compared with March 2025, marking one of the steepest reversals in recent grocery price history. USDA analysts attribute the drop to a rapid recovery in domestic poultry flocks following the Highly Pathogenic Avian Influenza outbreak that devastated supply over the past two years. Officials added that egg prices are projected to fall another 29.4% over the full year as production stabilizes and infection rates remain below prior peaks.

But the relief ends quickly once shoppers move beyond the dairy aisle.

The USDA reports that beef and veal prices rose 12.1% year over year in March, while fresh vegetables increased 7.5%, reflecting tightening supply conditions and rising transportation costs. Real-time retail data paints an even sharper picture: frozen tilapia prices have surged nearly 47% in some regions, imported hash browns are up more than 30%, and both imported and domestic pork products are posting double-digit gains.

David Ortega, an agricultural economist at Michigan State University, warned that the most visible price increases are concentrated along the “perimeter” of grocery stores — the sections that house fresh food. “Perishable goods are the canary in the coal mine,” Ortega said, noting that these products are most sensitive to changes in fuel costs and supply chain disruptions.

That pressure is intensifying as energy markets react to geopolitical developments. U.S. crude oil prices jumped from roughly $71 per barrel in early March to approximately $114 in early April, driven in part by ongoing tensions involving Iran and disruptions to global shipping routes. Higher diesel prices directly increase the cost of transporting food from farms to distribution centers and ultimately to store shelves.

Ricky Volpe, an agricultural economist at California Polytechnic State University, described the current environment as an “inflationary perfect storm,” where multiple cost drivers are reinforcing one another. “Tariffs raise the baseline cost of imported goods, while fuel increases raise the cost of moving everything,” Volpe said. “Those forces stack — they don’t cancel out.”

Recent price surveys underscore just how widespread those pressures have become. In one analysis conducted at a Salt Lake City grocery store marking the anniversary of President Donald Trump’s tariff expansion, produce prices showed some of the steepest increases, with navel oranges and vine-ripened tomatoes rising more than 75% year over year. Cosmic Crisp apples climbed more than 30%, while packaged goods such as chocolate bars, processed meats, and bakery items also saw increases exceeding 25%.

Government forecasts suggest the divergence will persist. The USDA projects that overall food prices will rise 2.9% in 2026, while food consumed away from home — including restaurants and takeout — will increase even faster at 3.8%, reflecting higher labor and operational costs in the service sector.

Christopher Barrett, a professor of applied economics at Cornell University, cautioned that the impact will be felt unevenly across households. “Consumers, especially those with fixed or lower incomes, will face increasingly difficult trade-offs as food prices rise faster than wages,” Barrett said.

For now, the result is a grocery experience defined by contrast: sharply lower prices in a few high-profile categories masking steady increases across much of the rest of the store. Analysts say that unless fuel costs ease or supply conditions improve, the upward pressure on fresh and imported foods is likely to intensify heading into the summer months.

For consumers, the takeaway is straightforward — bargains may still exist, but they are becoming more selective, and navigating the modern grocery store now requires more strategy than ever.

JBizNews Desk

Artificial intelligence is starting to hit the job market where companies traditionally hire first, not through broad-based layoffs but by shrinking the need for junior white-collar staff and shifting more work toward oversight of software tools. In recent remarks to Axios, Anthropic Chief Executive Dario Amodei said AI could eliminate “half of all entry-level white-collar jobs” within one to five years, a warning that sharpened a debate already building across boardrooms, campuses and labor economists’ models.

The pressure is showing up in early-career data before it appears in economywide payrolls. The Federal Reserve Bank of New York said in its latest labor-market analysis that recent graduates in computer engineering and computer science faced unemployment rates above several other majors, with computer engineering near 7.5% and computer science around 6.1%. In a statement accompanying its release, the New York Fed said labor conditions for new graduates “deteriorated noticeably” in several technical fields, a notable reversal for disciplines long treated as the safest path into the professional class.

That mismatch is becoming harder for elite schools to ignore. Fortune reported that a course developer at a top business school said students already arrive with extensive hands-on exposure to AI models, adding, “Our faculty are passionate, but there are two problems,” including the speed at which the technology outpaces curriculum design. The comment, cited by Fortune, captures a broader concern among educators and employers: universities still market AI-era opportunity, while companies increasingly say they need fewer entry-level workers doing routine analytical tasks.

Corporate leaders are framing the shift less as a layoff story than as a redesign of work. At the World Economic Forum in Davos earlier this year, ServiceNow Chief Executive Bill McDermott said, “If we have hired ‘nines and tens,’ why should we fire them instead of re-tooling them?” according to public remarks from the event. McDermott said employees whose prior work centered on repetitive IT tasks increasingly move into supervising and orchestrating AI agents, a model many software and services companies now present as the preferred route to productivity gains without the reputational and operational costs of mass cuts.

Others have been more explicit about the labor tradeoff. Salesforce Chief Executive Marc Benioff said in recent public comments that AI now handles a large share of customer-service interactions, reducing the need for some support roles while increasing demand for workers who can manage complex escalations and higher-value client relationships. In interviews reported by outlets including Bloomberg and CNBC, Benioff has argued that digital labor is changing staffing models across sales, service and software development, even as the company continues to hire in selected AI-focused areas.

The consulting industry sees a substantial medium-term impact, though not an immediate collapse in employment. In a recent outlook, Boston Consulting Group estimated that 10% to 15% of current jobs could be displaced by 2030 or shortly thereafter as companies deploy more autonomous AI systems. BCG said the effect is likely to fall hardest on routine and rules-based work, while roles requiring judgment, client management and cross-functional decision-making could expand. That distinction matters for executives because it suggests organizational charts may flatten at the bottom even if total payrolls do not plunge.

Bank economists and academic researchers are also urging caution against sweeping claims. Goldman Sachs economists have said generative AI has the potential to automate a meaningful share of tasks across administrative and professional occupations, while also lifting productivity and creating new categories of work over time. Separately, a recent working paper circulated through the National Bureau of Economic Research found that most firms surveyed reported little measurable effect from AI on employment or productivity so far. Co-author John Haltiwanger said the evidence suggests adoption remains uneven, with many companies still experimenting rather than fully redesigning operations around the technology.

That unevenness helps explain why labor-market disruption remains concentrated in hiring pipelines instead of headline-grabbing job cuts. Employers can often absorb AI efficiency by slowing recruitment, leaving open positions unfilled and asking existing staff to work with new tools. Economists cited by Reuters and The Wall Street Journal in recent reporting have said this pattern tends to hit recent graduates first because entry-level jobs often involve the very documentation, coding assistance, research support and customer-response tasks that AI systems now perform at low cost.

The implications extend beyond technology companies. If junior roles become scarcer across finance, consulting, marketing, legal services and back-office operations, businesses may save money in the near term but risk weakening the training ground that produces future managers and specialists. That concern is already surfacing in executive discussions about reskilling and internal mobility. What comes next will matter more than the current headlines: investors will watch whether AI spending translates into sustained margin gains, policymakers will track whether graduate unemployment spreads beyond tech, and companies will need to prove they can automate entry-level work without hollowing out the talent pipeline they still depend on.

JBizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

OPEC+ Tightens the Screws

OPEC+ surprised markets by announcing deeper-than-expected production cuts for the coming months, pushing oil prices sharply higher in early trading. Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, called the move a clear signal that the cartel is prioritizing price support amid weakening global demand signals.

Price Surge Details

Brent crude jumped more than 3.5% to trade above $112–$114 per barrel, while West Texas Intermediate (WTI) climbed above $108. The gains come on top of already elevated prices driven by geopolitical tensions in the Middle East.

Why the Deeper Cuts?

Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, explained that OPEC+ is responding to softer demand from China and Europe, as well as the recent UAE exit from the group. The alliance agreed to accelerate cuts by an additional 500,000–700,000 barrels per day starting in June, according to delegates familiar with the discussions.

Market Reaction and Analyst Views

Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, noted: “This is a bullish development for energy producers but adds upside risk to inflation just as the Federal Reserve is navigating a cooling labor market.” Energy stocks rallied, with ExxonMobil (XOM) and Chevron (CVX) both up over 2% in premarket trading.

Broader Implications

Guy Berger, chief economist at Homebase, warned that sustained higher oil prices could push U.S. gasoline averages closer to $4.50 per gallon this summer, potentially weighing on consumer spending. Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, added that the move may complicate the Fed’s path if energy costs feed into core services inflation.

Geopolitical Overlay

The cuts coincide with the ongoing U.S. naval presence near the Strait of Hormuz and stalled Iran talks, further tightening physical supply. Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, recommended clients maintain selective exposure to energy but prepare for volatility as Big Tech earnings and the Fed decision unfold later today.

What to Watch Next

• Official OPEC+ production quotas and compliance levels.

• Impact on today’s Federal Reserve policy statement and Powell press conference.

• Reaction from non-OPEC producers, particularly U.S. shale output.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited

A new proposal would allow Social Security beneficiaries to continue working without having their benefits diminished, which could make it easier for retirees to pay off their mortgages or more easily handle other expenses like property tax burdens.

The Senior Citizens’ Freedom to Work Act was introduced in Congress earlier this year and, if enacted, would allow individuals to receive Social Security benefits without having them reduced for earning income with the elimination of the retirement earnings test.

Under current law, Social Security reduces benefits for retirees who claim before reaching their full retirement age (FRA) of 67 for most retirees. It also imposes a retirement earnings test that reduces benefits further for those who earn more than $24,480 annually – with benefit amounts lowered by $1 for every $2 earned above the cap.

While the reduction in benefits is returned to seniors when they reach their FRA, the bill’s sponsors note that seniors who may be unaware of that provision may choose to earn below that threshold to avoid the temporary reduction. 

RETIREMENT ‘MAGIC NUMBER’ JUMPS AS AMERICANS GROW ANXIOUS ABOUT THEIR FINANCIAL FUTURES

A pair of Republican lawmakers in Congress introduced the bill on a bicameral basis earlier this spring, with Sen. Rick Scott, R-Fla., and Rep. Greg Murphy, R-N.C., introducing the legislation in the Senate and House in March and April, respectively.

“American seniors’ ability to earn income and enjoy the dignity of work should not be penalized by arbitrary parameters to receive Social Security benefits,” Murphy said in a statement. “Current law unnecessarily complicates seniors’ right to access the benefits they paid into for the entirety of their careers and must be done away with.” 

“While certain guardrails are in place to ensure the viability of Social Security and incentivize participation in the workforce, the retirement earnings test does neither and is a bureaucratic hurdle that does more harm than good,” he added.

LARRY FINK CALLS FOR SOCIAL SECURITY REFORM, SAYS INVESTING A PORTION OF FUNDS COULD STRENGTHEN THE PROGRAM

A report by Realtor.com noted that the share of seniors aged 65 and older remaining in the workforce has grown since 2014 in nearly every state, with the number of working seniors increasing by 52% in the last decade as compared with the general population’s growth of 33%.

The analysis found that those increases coincided with the most expensive housing markets in the country, such as areas in the Northeast.

HOW SOCIAL SECURITY RECIPIENTS CAN BOOST THEIR BENEFIT CHECKS

Realtor.com said that trend suggests that rising costs for insurance, property taxes and maintenance are putting pressure on older homeowners to continue working for longer. Eliminating the retirement earnings test could help with those expenses as well as paying off any outstanding mortgage debt.

“This bill will get rid of the unfair retirement earnings test so that seniors who want to stay in the workforce can do so without being punished or robbed of their hard-earned benefits,” Scott said during a Senate aging committee hearing in late March.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here

UFC will take the grandest stage of them all in less than two months when some of the best fighters in the world will go blow-for-blow on the White House South Lawn.

But arguably the biggest summer the UFC has ever seen will kick off even earlier than that, as UFC announced Wednesday the upcoming Bud Light Summer Series, beginning at next month’s UFC 328 in Newark, New Jersey.

The Summer Series includes the May event, UFC 329 in Las Vegas, UFC 330 in Philadelphia, and other events to be determined.

CLICK HERE FOR MORE SPORTS COVERAGE ON FOXBUSINESS.COM

“When you think about it, with what Bud Light’s putting together here, it’s going to be a summer like no other,” UFC in-ring announcer and Bud Light partner Bruce Buffer said to Fox Business. “They’re here making sure the fans are ready for all the action. They have plans all summer long. This isn’t a one-off.”

Bud Light’s senior vice president Todd Allen said in a release, “It’s going to be a summer unlike any other for UFC fans, and we’re pumped to collaborate with our partners at UFC to create the new ‘Bud Light UFC Summer Series’ that will help make five summer fight nights even more memorable for fans and their crew.”

“It’s going to be a massive summer for our sport — the perfect time to bring together Bud Light, our UFC Fights, and unique ways to give our fans more reasons to celebrate,” added Sana Shuaib, TKO Global Partnerships’ senior vice president of partnership marketing and digital.

DANA WHITE SAYS HE REFUSED TO GET DOWN DURING WHITE HOUSE CORRESPONDENTS’ DINNER SHOOTING

The Summer Series will feature a concert at Toshiba Plaza outside of T-Mobile Arena in Las Vegas on Friday, July 10 during International Fight Week. Fans will also be able to receive limited-edition merchandise and see co-created social media content with notable UFC athletes.

Bud Light has been UFC’s official sponsor since 2023, and the company has grown to exponential lengths in that time, including moving to Paramount Plus for streaming, and partnerships with Bud Light is what makes the “rocket ship” continue to blast.

“I got the first-class seat, and Dana White’s at the helm in the cockpit,” Buffer said. “It has just grown exponentially, tremendously, and it will continue to do so.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“The future’s golden. Everything is golden. It’s all about how it’s marketed and how it’s run, and we all know it’s being marketed and run as best as it possibly can be.”

This post was originally published here

By JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

No Letup in Maximum Pressure Campaign

President Donald Trump has instructed aides to prepare for an extended U.S. naval blockade of Iranian ports and the Strait of Hormuz, according to multiple reports. Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, described the move as a calculated shift toward sustained economic pressure rather than renewed kinetic action.

Blockade Aimed at Choking Oil Exports

The strategy seeks to further restrict Iran’s ability to export oil, forcing Tehran back to the negotiating table. Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, noted that the blockade has already significantly reduced Iranian oil revenues and is contributing to elevated global energy prices.

Oil Markets React Sharply

Brent crude extended gains and traded above $110–$114 per barrel amid the news. Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, warned that prolonged disruption in the Strait of Hormuz — through which roughly 20% of global oil passes — could keep energy costs elevated and complicate the Federal Reserve’s inflation outlook.

Geopolitical and Economic Risks

Guy Berger, chief economist at Homebase, highlighted that while the blockade is seen as lower-risk than direct military escalation, it continues to drive up domestic gasoline prices (now averaging around $4.22 nationally) and adds uncertainty for global supply chains. Iran has reportedly sought relief from the measures, with stalled talks adding to tensions.

Market and Investor Implications

Energy stocks gained on the developments while broader risk sentiment remained cautious. Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, observed that sustained high oil prices could support certain domestic sectors but risk weighing on consumer spending if prolonged. Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, advised clients to monitor energy exposure closely as the situation evolves.

Broader Context

The signal comes as the UAE prepares to exit OPEC effective May 1, further complicating global oil coordination. Analysts expect the blockade to remain a central feature of U.S. policy toward Iran in the near term.

What to Watch

• Any official White House or Pentagon statements on the duration of the blockade.

• Impact on upcoming Fed communications and Big Tech earnings reactions today.

• Developments in global oil supply and tanker traffic through the Strait of Hormuz.

JBizNews Desk

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

Wall Street Braces for Pivotal Day
Tom Lee, head of research at Fundstrat Global Advisors, said U.S. stocks are set to open with modest gains Wednesday as investors await earnings from the “Magnificent Seven” tech giants and the Federal Reserve’s latest policy decision. Futures point to a mixed but steady start amid lingering AI trade concerns.

Futures Snapshot at the Open
S&P 500 futures traded near flat to slightly higher around 7,140–7,170 levels, while Nasdaq 100 futures edged up 0.2–0.3%. Dow Jones futures showed small gains of roughly 0.1%, according to real-time premarket data. Markets are rebounding modestly after Tuesday’s pullback driven by AI sector weakness.

Key Focus: Big Tech Earnings
Alphabet (GOOGL), Microsoft (MSFT), Amazon (AMZN), and Meta Platforms (META) are all set to report after the close. Dan Ives, managing director at Wedbush Securities, noted that investor attention is squarely on AI capital expenditure guidance and whether these hyperscalers can justify current valuations. Mixed premarket moves in the group reflect caution ahead of results.

Fed Decision in Spotlight
The Federal Reserve concludes its two-day meeting today, with a widely expected rate hold. Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, expects Chair Powell to strike a balanced tone on inflation and labor market cooling. Any dovish hints could support risk assets, while a hawkish surprise may pressure equities.

Notable Premarket Movers

  • Seagate (STX) and other storage names gained on strong sector momentum.
  • Bloom Energy (BE) jumped sharply after raising full-year guidance.
  • Booking Holdings (BKNG) declined after Q1 results reflected Middle East tensions.
    Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, highlighted that broader market rotation out of mega-cap tech continues, with selective strength in other sectors.

Broader Market Context
The S&P 500 closed Tuesday at approximately 7,139, while the Dow ended near 49,142 and the Nasdaq at 24,664. Volatility remains elevated as geopolitical risks in the Middle East and tariff uncertainties weigh on sentiment.

Analyst Outlook
Oliver Allen of Pantheon Macroeconomics said the session will set the tone for the remainder of the week: “Strong tech results and a steady Fed could reignite the rally; anything softer risks renewed selling pressure.”

Nicole Bachaud at ZipRecruiter added that today’s labor market resilience (from yesterday’s data) provides a supportive backdrop for consumer-facing names.

What to Watch

  • Post-earnings reactions from Big Tech after the bell.
  • Fed statement and Powell’s press conference at 2:30 PM ET.
  • Continued flows between growth and value stocks.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

New initiative will save New Jerseyans time and money through clear, responsive government 

TRENTON – Today, Governor Sherrill unveiled the New Jersey Report Card, an interactive, public-facing website that allows New Jersey residents to see where their tax dollars are going and what state-funded programs are delivering for their communities. The report card is the latest milestone in a promise Governor Sherrill made in Executive Order No. 5, signed on Inauguration Day, that set a standard: state government must save New Jerseyans time and money, and every taxpayer dollar must be invested wisely. The Report Card is available at ReportCard.NJ.Gov. 

“On my first day in office, I signed an Executive Order declaring that state government will be transparent and accountable for every New Jerseyan. With the New Jersey Report Card, we are doing exactly that,” said Governor Sherrill. “This is a restructuring of how state government delivers for the people it serves. Residents can now easily see how their tax dollars are spent and which programs they are funding. New Jerseyans deserve this level of accountability, and we are setting a gold standard here in New Jersey to make government work for the people and businesses we serve.” 

“Since day one, this Administration has been focused on making government work better for the people of New Jersey through greater transparency, stronger accountability, and better outcomes for those we serve,”said Chief Operating Officer Kellie Doucette. “The New Jersey Report Card is a key part of that effort, giving residents a clear and accessible way to see how taxpayer dollars are being used. By putting this information in one place, we are giving residents greater visibility into how government operates. We’re proud to partner with the New Jersey Innovation Authority to build this platform and bring a more modern, data-driven approach to how we track spending and measure results.” 

“As we move toward fulfilling Governor Sherril’s pledge to make New Jersey government more transparent and accountable, the Report Card will allow residents to see exactly how and where their tax dollars are spent,” said State Treasurer Aaron Binder. “With this tool, residents can see what programs and services their taxes will fund, which sets a new model for the operation of state government in New Jersey.” 

“This Report Card is an important budget transparency tool, with data points presented in a meaningful and accessible way so that New Jerseyans can know more about how their state runs,” said New Jersey State Chief Innovation Officer Dave Cole. “When taxpayers can easily see a connection between their dollars and the public services that benefit their lives, we foster both civic engagement and overall trust in government.” 

“We cannot have a functioning democracy without an informed public,” said Majority Leader Lou Greenwald (D-Camden, Burlington). That’s why I’ve worked to make transparency a priority throughout my career, from holding budget hearings in communities all across the state, to supporting the growth of local news outlets, and investing in technology that brings live-streaming hearings to people no matter where they are. This tool builds on those efforts by letting folks know how their tax dollars are being spent and the impact they’re having in a way that’s clear, accessible, and easy to navigate. By putting this information directly into the hands of residents, we’re building trust and empowering them to be informed and engaged participants in the budget process.” 

The interactive, user-friendly site gives New Jerseyans a clear picture of where their tax dollars are going across state government, with detailed information on the Governor’s FY 2027 proposed budget. The site also has information on how much agencies and departments have spent in the past, and users can view those spending and revenue trends over the past 10 years. Additionally, users can view details and impact metrics for important state-funded programs such as the Child Care Assistance Program and the Bringing Veterans Home initiative to end veterans’ homelessness. 

The website includes interactive visualizations of the proposed FY 2027 budget showing appropriations by budget category and program area. The tool also shows investments in crucial services such as K-12 schools, higher education, property tax relief, pension contributions, food security, transportation, and more.  

The NJ Report Card marks a step forward in bringing greater transparency to Trenton. Built for the people and ready to make an impact, the platform is now live. Explore the site and click here for a tutorial. Additional features and data will be incorporated on an ongoing basis. 

What They’re Saying 

“For too long, New Jersey’s budget process has happened behind closed doors, leaving residents with little insight into how their tax dollars are spent. When people can see where the money goes, which programs their dollars support, and what those programs deliver, it creates the conditions for an honest, fact-based conversation about what a sustainable budget actually looks like. Gov. Sherrill’s commitment to that kind of transparency is a great start, and we look forward to seeing it built out further and become a permanent part of how the state does business.” said Nicole Rodriguez, NJ Policy Perspective President 

“NJBIA thanks Governor Sherrill for continuing to make budget accountability and transparency a priority in her administration. This new Budget Report Card will serve as a vital tool in our shared pursuit of greater fiscal responsibility, and towards that we are also encouraged that the proposed FY27 budget tries to hold the line on spending. We agree with the governor’s call to limit last-minute spending items given our fiscal challenges, and we support the reasonable reductions proposed for Stay NJ.” said Michele Siekerka, NJBIA President & CEO 

 

The United Arab Emirates (UAE) announced Tuesday it would quit membership in the Organization of Petroleum Exporting Countries (OPEC) and OPEC+. It comes after 59 years at the club. But it could be good news for the world in the long run, experts say.

To understand what happened, it’s important to know that OPEC, which is dominated by Saudi Arabia, is all about restricting crude oil output via quotas to raise energy prices, Marc Chandler, chief market strategist at Bannockburn Capital Markets and an expert on geopolitics, told FOX Business, “The cartel producers discipline the member countries to produce only what the quotas allow and try to get a higher oil price for all.”

Soon after the news from the UAE, some media outlets were calling the change a win for President Donald Trump, who has long opposed OPEC’s efforts to keep energy prices high. Quitting OPEC could also be beneficial for the UAE, also known as the Emirates. 

UAE EXITS OPEC AND OPEC+, SEEKING OUTPUT FLEXIBILITY AS GLOBAL ENERGY MARKETS TIGHTEN

“Outside of the cartel, the Emirates will be able to produce more oil,” Max Pyziur, research director at Energy Policy Research Foundation, told FOX Business. “It makes sense that they would want to break away.”

Specifically, the UAE can now increase its daily oil output. Before the war between the U.S. and Israel against Iran, the Emirates produced 3.6 million barrels of oil a day, according to recent data from the International Energy Agency. But it now plans to increase output to as much as 5 million barrels a day in 2027.

Another part of the UAE leaving the cartel is that the country has been using its own 249-mile-long pipeline to bypass the Strait of Hormuz, which has been difficult to pass since the war began. The pipeline gets the oil to the Gulf of Oman, Chandler says. “If the strait is reopened and the UAE has a lot to rebuild, it will sell more oil and not linger under the thumb of OPEC.”

Another reason for the Emirates leaving OPEC is the tension between Saudi Arabia, which dominates the oil quota system, and the UAE. “The two have been at loggerheads for a while,” Chandler says. Notably, the two countries have widely differing views about Yemen. On the Saudi view, Yemen is a possible threat as well as a potential buffer, while the UAE seeks to influence Yemen using proxies.

LARRY KUDLOW: UNCONDITIONAL DICTATION

On Tuesday, Brent Crude Oil was trading at $111 per barrel. That means the extra 1.4 million barrels the UAE is planning could provide much-needed cash to help repair the damage from the recent Iranian attacks. “The repair bill could be large for the UAE,” Clayton Seigle, senior fellow in the CSIS Energy Security and Climate Change Program, told FOX Business.

Iran has had a big impact on the oil-rich countries in the Middle East. “We can assume that until the war began in late February, many countries thought that the U.S. bases were protective, as you had a U.S. presence,” Chandler says. The evidence is that while Iran did bomb countries such as the UAE, Saudi Arabia, Bahrain, Kuwait and Oman, it also hit U.S. bases across the region. “Now Iran has shown the U.S. bases are a sign of vulnerability,” he said.

The UAE wasn’t the first to quit OPEC. Qatar did the same in 2019. But this change could lead more oil-rich OPEC members to leave the organization. So, who’s next?

 CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Iraq will probably be thinking that if rich UAE is quitting, then why should we be left holding the bag,” Seigle says. “The big risk is the domino effect with more countries following the UAE out the door, and that would weigh on medium-term oil prices.

Ultimately, analysts say a collapse of OPEC could lead to far lower oil prices worldwide.

This post was originally published here

Purdue Pharma, the manufacturer of OxyContin, was sentenced in federal court on Tuesday and ordered to pay $5.5 billion for its role in fueling the opioid epidemic.

The sentencing comes after Purdue pleaded guilty in 2020 on charges of deceiving federal regulators and paying doctors to boost opioid sales. According to court documents, Purdue illegally marketed its opioid products, defrauded the DEA by misrepresenting the effectiveness of its programs and paid kickbacks to doctors through its doctor speaker program.

“Purdue Pharma put profits over patient health and safety,” said Acting Attorney General Todd Blanche. “The company willfully rejected the law and ignored the diversion of their highly addictive prescription drugs. Their actions contributed to the opioid crisis that claimed countless lives and destroyed entire families and communities.”

“The opioid epidemic in the United States is a plague that has ruined lives and destroyed families,” said FBI Director Kash Patel. “Purdue Pharma complicitly contributed to this national epidemic in the name of their own greed by blatantly ignoring the health and safety of patients putting countless lives at risk. The FBI and our DOJ partners will always work tirelessly to ensure that companies, like Pharma, pay for the harm they have inflicted and warn others that they will not get away with violating the law for personal gain.”

SOUTH CAROLINA AG WILSON: FENTANYL IS A NATIONAL SECURITY THREAT — FOLLOW THE CHINESE MONEY

The court ordered Purdue to pay a criminal fine of $3.544 billion, which will be assessed in connection with the bankruptcy proceedings, and an additional $2 billion in criminal forfeiture, the DOJ says.

U.S. District Judge Madeline Cox Arleo ordered Purdue Chairman Steve Miller to apologize directly to victims of the opioid pandemic who were in the courthouse on Tuesday.

Arleo allowed nearly seven hours of testimony from victims who spoke about Purdue’s role in the opioid epidemic.

BIPARTISAN BILL SEEKS TO STOP PHARMACY MIDDLEMEN FROM DRIVING UP DRUG COSTS FOR FINANCIAL GAIN

“We are deeply apologetic for all of the things that happened that were described in colorful detail ⁠by all the victims here today,” Miller said, adding that the company, “deeply regrets and accepts responsibility.”

Arleo also said authorities repeatedly failed to rein in Purdue.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

“Your government failed you,” Arleo said. “The inadequacy of what the law can offer today must be plainly stated.”

Purdue Pharma, which was already preparing to pay $7.4 billion as part of a bankruptcy deal, addressed Tuesday’s sentence in a message on its website, noting that the company will cease to operate later this week.

“On April 28, 2026, the U.S. District Court for the District of New Jersey sentenced Purdue Pharma L.P. in connection with its 2020 Plea Agreement with the U.S. Department of Justice. Purdue is operating as usual and without interruption until May 1, 2026, when it will permanently cease operations,” the message said. “On that day, substantially all of Purdue’s assets will be transferred to a newly formed company, Knoa Pharma LLC. Medicines distributed though Purdue will then be distributed by Knoa Pharma.”

Reuters contributed to this report.

This post was originally published here

A sweeping new report from the International Labour Organization (ILO) has quantified the global toll of toxic workplace conditions, finding that more than 840,000 people die each year from health issues directly linked to stress, burnout, harassment, and excessive working hours.

The report marks one of the most comprehensive global assessments of workplace-related psychosocial risks, identifying cardiovascular disease and mental health disorders — including suicide — as the primary causes of these deaths.

“These are not isolated issues — they are systemic,” said Manal Azzi, team lead on occupational safety and health policy at the ILO. “Psychosocial risks are now one of the defining challenges of modern work.”

The data paints a stark picture. The report estimates nearly 45 million disability-adjusted life years lost annually, capturing not just mortality but years of productivity lost to illness and disability. The economic cost is equally significant, amounting to roughly 1.37% of global GDP, or about $1.6 trillion annually.

In Europe alone, workplace stress-related conditions account for more than 112,000 deaths each year, with a measurable drag on economic output. The findings underscore how workplace environments have evolved — and in many cases deteriorated — amid increasing demands, job insecurity, and blurred boundaries between work and personal life.

The most common health outcomes identified include depression, anxiety, chronic fatigue, and sleep disorders. These conditions often trigger secondary health risks, including substance use, obesity, and hypertension.

For employers, the implications are increasingly financial. “Companies that ignore workplace wellbeing are effectively taking on hidden liabilities,” said one labor economist. Rising absenteeism, turnover, and healthcare costs are directly tied to workplace conditions.

The ILO is calling for systemic reforms, including improved job design, stronger employee protections, and proactive mental health support systems. The report also urges companies to treat workplace wellbeing as a core operational priority rather than a secondary human resources issue.

As businesses navigate a shifting labor market, the findings reinforce a growing reality: workforce health is not just a social issue — it is a central pillar of long-term economic performance.

JBizNews Desk

State Farm, the largest home insurer in the United States, is facing an expanding legal battle spanning multiple states, with hundreds of homeowners alleging the company engaged in a coordinated effort to deny or underpay legitimate claims tied to hail and wind damage — even when those claims fell within the terms of their policies.

The litigation, which includes more than 600 active cases in Oklahoma alone, centers on accusations that the insurer implemented internal practices designed to limit costly roof replacement payouts. Plaintiffs argue that beginning around 2020, State Farm quietly introduced new internal standards — particularly in Texas before expanding elsewhere — that effectively narrowed the definition of what constitutes covered damage.

According to court filings and attorneys involved in the cases, one of the primary tactics involved requiring proof of “functional damage,” a threshold that critics say is not outlined in standard policy language. By applying these criteria, plaintiffs allege, the company was able to deny claims outright or significantly reduce payouts, leaving homeowners responsible for repairs they believed were covered.

The dispute has escalated to the level of state government. Oklahoma Attorney General Gentner Drummond has joined one of the lawsuits, alleging what he described as a “systematic scheme” to deny valid claims. His involvement has amplified national attention on the case, particularly as homeowners across the country grapple with rising insurance costs and growing uncertainty about coverage reliability.

State Farm has pushed back strongly against the allegations. In public statements, the company has maintained that it evaluates claims based strictly on policy terms and individual circumstances. “We pay what we owe under the policy,” the insurer said, rejecting claims of any coordinated misconduct and warning that inflated claims from contractors and legal firms can distort the system.

Still, critics point to a pattern of multimillion-dollar confidential settlements in some cases as evidence of potential exposure. Legal analysts say the volume and consistency of the lawsuits suggest deeper systemic questions about claims practices across the industry.

The timing is particularly sensitive. The Insurance Information Institute estimates that severe storms caused $51 billion in insured losses last year, driven in part by increasing frequency and intensity of extreme weather events. At the same time, insurers have raised premiums sharply or withdrawn from high-risk markets altogether.

“This is happening at a moment when homeowners are already under enormous pressure,” said one industry analyst. “If trust in claims payouts erodes, that undermines the entire insurance model.”

The outcome of the litigation could have far-reaching implications — not only for State Farm, but for how insurers nationwide define, evaluate, and pay storm-related claims in an era of rising climate risk.

JBizNews Desk

JBizNews Desk — April 29, 2026

Labor Market Shows Clear Cooling Signs
Diane Swonk, chief economist at KPMG, noted that the U.S. labor market is displaying clear signs of cooling, with hiring momentum softening even as wage pressures remain steady. This dynamic could influence Federal Reserve policy decisions and the broader economic outlook heading into the second half of 2026.

Mixed Signals in March Jobs Report
U.S. employers added 178,000 nonfarm payroll jobs in March 2026, according to Bureau of Labor Statistics data. Heather Long, chief economist at Navy Federal Credit Union, highlighted this as a rebound from a revised -133,000 in February and well above economist expectations around 60,000. However, the broader trend points to moderation, with payroll growth remaining volatile amid macroeconomic uncertainty.

The unemployment rate edged down to 4.3% from 4.4%, partly reflecting a decline in labor force participation. Job gains were concentrated in health care (+76,000), construction (+26,000), and transportation/warehousing (+21,000), while federal government employment continued to shrink (-18,000).

Wage Growth Holds Steady
Average hourly earnings for private-sector workers rose 0.2% in March to $37.38, bringing the year-over-year increase to 3.5%, according to Bureau of Labor Statistics figures. Diane Swonk of KPMG described this as the slowest pace in nearly five years but still firm enough to outpace recent inflation trends in many sectors.

Employers Selective but Compensating Staff
Oliver Allen, senior U.S. economist at Pantheon Macroeconomics, pointed out that this combination — moderating hiring paired with resilient wages — suggests employers are being selective with new hires while maintaining compensation for existing staff. ADP data and other private trackers have similarly shown steady but not robust private-sector job gains in recent weeks.

Analyst and Fed Implications
Economists note that the labor market remains in a “soft landing” zone but with increasing slack. Guy Berger, chief economist at Homebase, observed that job openings have stabilized around 6.9 million, quits rates are low, and forward-looking indicators point to subdued hiring ahead. Wage growth, while firm, is no longer the overheating force it was in prior years. This potentially gives the Federal Reserve more room to maneuver on interest rates amid pressures like elevated energy prices, Heather Long added.

“The labor market is resilient but clearly cooling,” Nicole Bachaud, economist at ZipRecruiter, summarized. “Hiring is no longer white-hot, yet workers are still seeing steady pay increases — a Goldilocks scenario that could shift quickly with any new shocks.”

Sector Breakdown and Risks

  • Strengths: Health care and construction continue to drive gains, as noted by Heather Long.
  • Weaknesses: Federal government cutbacks, softness in financial activities, and lingering volatility in manufacturing and retail.
  • Broader Context: Gina Bolvin, president of Bolvin Wealth Management Group, warned that macro headwinds including geopolitical tensions and tariff uncertainties are prompting caution among smaller businesses, where job openings have cooled.

Outlook: April Data Key
With April jobs data due out in early May, investors will watch closely for confirmation of this cooling trend. Diane Swonk emphasized that persistent firm wage growth could support consumer spending, but any further slowdown in hiring risks tipping sentiment.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

Here are new, more directly connected realistic images in AP / Bloomberg / WSJ journalistic style for this labor market story:

Realistic professional financial news image in Bloomberg WSJ AP style: close-up of employment data on digital screen showing nonfarm payroll numbers, unemployment rate, and wage growth line charts with subtle green moderating trends, clean dark background, high-end journalistic aesthetic, sharp details, cinematic lighting, no text, no logoslandscape

Realistic WSJ/Bloomberg style portrait of a middle-aged female economist in professional attire, thoughtful and analytical expression, soft studio lighting with blurred job market charts in background, documentary journalistic quality, highly detailed, no textportrait

Realistic AP photojournalism style: diverse group of American workers on a busy construction site and in a modern healthcare facility, showing active hiring and daily labor environment, natural daylight, documentary news aesthetic, high resolution, no text or brandinglandscape

Realistic professional office and factory floor scene in Bloomberg style: workers at desks and light manufacturing lines with subtle indicators of steady but cooling activity, natural lighting, collaborative environment, high-end journalistic photography, no textlandscape

These visuals now tie directly into the jobs report, wage trends, and workforce themes. Let me know if you want further tweaks!

By JBizNews Desk- April 29 8:27am

Starbucks Corporation (NASDAQ: SBUX) is riding a fresh wave of bullish momentum Wednesday following a blowout second quarter that sent shares surging in after-hours trading — and now Wall Street is debating whether the stock can push well beyond $100 toward targets as high as $130.15

The Quarter That Changed the Conversation

Starbucks reported Q2 fiscal 2026 adjusted earnings per share of $0.50, beating estimates of $0.43 and rising from $0.41 in the year-ago period. Global same-store sales grew 6.2%, crushing Wall Street’s forecast of around 3.7-4%. Revenue came in at $9.53 billion, topping analyst estimates of roughly $9.14-9.16 billion — an approximately 8-9% year-over-year gain.21

U.S. same-store sales climbed 7.1%, driven by a roughly 4.3-4.4% jump in transactions — marking the second straight quarter of traffic growth for Starbucks’ U.S. cafes and signaling that the turnaround led by CEO Brian Niccol has taken hold.25

Niccol told investors the company plans to focus on sustaining the momentum and making results repeatable and durable, while delivering a healthy cost structure that supports profitable growth.

Guidance Raised — An Outlier in a Cautious Market

For fiscal 2026, Starbucks now expects global and U.S. same-store sales growth of at least 5%, up from its prior projection of 3%. The company also raised its adjusted EPS forecast to a range of $2.25 to $2.45, from a previous range of $2.15 to $2.40.1

With few companies choosing to raise full-year outlooks amid the current macroeconomic backdrop, Starbucks stands out as a notable outlier.

Where Analysts Stand

The post-earnings analyst reaction was swift and broadly positive:

  • Evercore ISI analyst David Palmer raised his price target to $115 from $110, maintaining an Outperform rating.
  • Bank of America raised its price target to $130 from $120 — the most aggressive call on the Street.5
  • Wells Fargo analyst Zachary Fadem maintained a Buy rating and set a price target of $115.
  • Stifel analyst Chris O’Cull maintained a Buy rating and raised his target to $115.
  • JP Morgan analyst John Ivankoe raised his target to $100, maintaining Overweight.

Not everyone is rushing to upgrade. Jefferies analyst Andy Barish raised his target to $95, maintaining a Hold rating. DA Davidson reiterated a Neutral rating with a $97 price target.

The Stock Today

SBUX was trading around $102 in post-earnings action Wednesday, with a market cap of approximately $110.84 billion, a P/E ratio near 81, and a dividend yield of about 2.5%. The stock’s 52-week range runs from $75.50 to $104.82. At current levels, BofA’s $130 target implies significant upside, while the $115 targets suggest roughly 12% potential.16

The Bull Case and the Risks

Niccol has been adamant that once he fixes top-line growth, earnings would follow — and this quarter delivered proof. The company is targeting 13.5% to 15% operating margins in fiscal year 2028.

China remains a drag, with same-store sales growing just 0.5%. The company has adjusted its reporting there via the joint venture with Boyu Capital.

Macro headwinds like elevated gasoline prices persist, though Niccol noted customers still view Starbucks as a worthwhile small indulgence.

With the turnaround thesis gaining real traction, the question for investors is no longer whether Niccol’s “Back to Starbucks” reset is working — it clearly is. The real debate is how much of that optimism is already priced into a stock trading at elevated multiples.

JBizNews Desk
© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

The US’s acting ambassador to Ukraine, Julie Davis, is set to leave her post in the coming weeks due to disagreements with President Donald Trump, the Financial Times reported Tuesday, citing people familiar with the matter.

According to the State Department’s deputy spokesman Tommy Pigott, Davis is set to depart Kyiv and retire in June, though he denied accusations of a rift between Davis and Trump as the reason for her departure.

“Ambassador Davis has been a steadfast proponent of the Trump administration’s efforts to bring about a durable peace between Russia and Ukraine,” Pigott said. “She will continue to proudly advance President Trump’s policies until she officially departs Kyiv in June 2026 and retires from the Department,” he added.

According to the Financial Times, however, Davis decided to step down out of frustration with Trump’s lack of strong support for Ukraine. Sources cited by the paper also said she felt “blindsided” by his October decision to nominate Republican donor John Breslow to replace her as ambassador to Cyprus, a position she has held since 2023.

US President Donald Trump gives a speech during the State Arrival Ceremony on the South Lawn on day two of the State Visit of King Charles III and Queen Camilla to the United States of America, on April 28, 2026 in Washington, DC.   (credit: CHRIS JACKSON/POOL VIA REUTERS)

Trump’s decreased support for Ukraine

Joe Biden’s ambassador to Kyiv, Bridget Brink, also resigned shortly after Trump’s inauguration due to disagreements over Trump’s reduced support for Ukraine. While Biden sent over $100 billion in military aid to Ukraine during his term, Trump severely limited aid packages to Ukraine, often saying that doing so works to prolong the conflict with Russia. 

On the campaign trail for the 2024 election, Trump famously promised to end the war in a day. Talks between the US, Ukrainian President Volodymyr Zelensky, and Russian President Vladimir Putin are at a hard impasse. 

In addition to withholding arms and funds, Trump has also opened to the idea of territorial concessions as a means to end the war, a solution that Zelensky has rejected time and time again, viewing it as a loss of Ukraine’s sovereignty and incompatible with international law.

This post was originally published on here

BP delivered a powerful first-quarter earnings report Tuesday, as surging oil and gas prices tied to the ongoing U.S.-Israel conflict with Iran pushed the British energy giant’s profits to more than double year over year, underscoring how geopolitical instability is reshaping global energy markets.

The company reported underlying replacement cost profit — its preferred metric — of $3.2 billion for Q1 2026, sharply above the $2.63 billion consensus estimate compiled by LSEG. The result compares with $1.38 billion in the same period last year, marking a more than 130% increase, as higher crude prices and volatility boosted trading and refining margins.

The driving force behind the surge is the prolonged disruption in the Strait of Hormuz, a critical chokepoint through which roughly 20% of global oil supply flows. The conflict, which escalated on February 28, has tightened supply and pushed Brent crude above $103 per barrel, while U.S. gasoline prices have climbed to an average of $4.18 per gallon, according to AAA.

The International Energy Agency (IEA) has described the current disruption as “one of the most significant energy security threats in modern history,” highlighting the scale of the shock reverberating through global markets.

BP said its trading division delivered an “exceptional” performance during the quarter, benefiting from both elevated prices and sharp market swings. The company’s integrated model — spanning upstream production, midstream logistics, and downstream refining — positioned it to capitalize across multiple segments of the value chain.

In its earnings commentary, BP leadership emphasized a continued focus on simplifying operations, reducing debt, and improving shareholder returns. Maurizio Carulli, analyst at Quilter Cheviot, interpreted the messaging as a constructive signal, noting that “integrated energy players like BP are uniquely positioned to generate enhanced cash flow in periods of sustained price strength.”

BP shares have risen more than 32% year-to-date, making it one of the strongest performers among global oil majors, second only to TotalEnergies. The company reaffirmed its $13 billion to $13.5 billion capital expenditure guidance for 2026 and projected $9 billion to $10 billion in divestment proceeds for the year, though it cautioned that upstream production could decline modestly in the second quarter.

Across the sector, energy companies are experiencing a resurgence reminiscent of the post-pandemic commodity boom. Analysts note that while higher oil prices benefit the entire industry, companies with sophisticated trading operations are seeing disproportionate gains.

“For as long as geopolitical tensions remain unresolved, the earnings environment for energy majors is likely to remain elevated,” Carulli added, pointing to continued uncertainty around diplomatic efforts involving Iran.

The results arrive amid rising political and shareholder scrutiny. BP recently faced pressure at its annual general meeting over transparency around climate-related risks and long-term fossil fuel investments. Environmental groups have criticized the scale of profits, with some describing the earnings surge as “deeply concerning” given global energy affordability challenges.

Still, from a financial perspective, BP’s momentum appears firmly intact. With additional earnings reports from ExxonMobil, Chevron, Shell, and TotalEnergies expected in the coming days, investors are watching closely to see whether the current geopolitical environment translates into a broader wave of outsized profits across the energy sector.

The key variable now is duration. As long as supply disruptions persist and diplomatic efforts remain stalled, energy markets are likely to stay tight — and companies like BP will continue to operate in a highly favorable pricing environment.

JBizNews Desk

Alibaba Group Holding reported quarterly profit ahead of market expectations, giving investors a fresh sign that the Chinese technology giant’s push into cloud computing and artificial intelligence is gaining traction even as consumer demand in China remains uneven. According to Reuters and the company’s latest results filing, the group said revenue for the quarter ended March 31 rose to 236.45 billion yuan, while adjusted earnings beat analyst forecasts, helping lift its U.S.-listed shares in premarket trading and supporting sentiment around China’s internet sector.

In the earnings release, Alibaba Chief Executive Eddie Wu said the company delivered “solid results” and continued to execute against what he described as a “user-first, AI-driven” strategy, according to the company statement. The company said its cloud business returned to faster growth, with AI-related product revenue sustaining triple-digit expansion for a sixth straight quarter, a detail highlighted both in the official release and in reporting from Reuters and CNBC on the results.

The numbers matter because Alibaba has spent the past year trying to convince investors that its future lies less in low-margin online retail and more in digital infrastructure and enterprise technology. In its filing to the Hong Kong Stock Exchange, Alibaba said Cloud Intelligence Group revenue rose 18% year over year, while management attributed the acceleration to “public cloud” demand and wider adoption of AI services. Bloomberg reported that investors have increasingly treated the cloud unit as a key valuation driver, especially after the company stepped up spending on computing capacity tied to generative AI.

That shift comes at a delicate time for China’s broader economy. Retail spending and property activity have remained under pressure, and executives across the sector have signaled that consumers are still trading down. On the earnings call, as cited by Reuters, management said customer management revenue at Taobao and Tmall improved as monetization tools and software services gained traction, while the company also pointed to stronger order volume. Alibaba said its focus remains on improving merchant efficiency and user engagement rather than chasing headline growth at any cost.

International commerce also offered support. Alibaba said revenue from its international digital commerce business, which includes AliExpress, Lazada and Trendyol, continued to expand, though losses in some overseas operations remained a concern as the company invests for scale. Reuters noted that the international unit has become one of the company’s fastest-growing segments, reflecting management’s effort to diversify beyond mainland China. In the company statement, executives said they would continue “disciplined investment” in cross-border platforms, signaling that profitability, not just market share, will stay in focus.

Investors also paid close attention to capital allocation. Alibaba said it repurchased billions of dollars’ worth of shares during the fiscal year, extending a buyback program that management has used to bolster shareholder returns while the stock trades below historical highs. According to the company filing, the board has continued to authorize repurchases, and Bloomberg reported that the pace of buybacks has become an important support for the shares as Chinese technology valuations remain sensitive to policy and macroeconomic headlines. Management said in the release that the company remains committed to “enhancing shareholder returns.”

The market reaction reflected more than a simple earnings beat. Analysts have argued that Alibaba needs to show it can turn AI enthusiasm into durable revenue growth, especially after abandoning a full cloud spinoff and reshaping parts of its business structure over the past year. CNBC, citing analyst commentary after the results, said the cloud division’s acceleration and sustained AI demand offered one of the clearest positive signals in the report. At the same time, analysts quoted by Reuters said the company still faces stiff competition from rivals including PDD Holdings and JD.com in e-commerce, as well as from domestic cloud peers chasing enterprise AI spending.

Regulation remains part of the backdrop, even if it no longer dominates the investment case the way it did during Beijing’s earlier crackdown on internet platforms. Chinese authorities have recently struck a more supportive tone toward the private sector, and that has helped improve sentiment toward large platform companies. Reuters reported in recent coverage of China’s technology sector that officials have emphasized the role of digital platforms and AI in supporting growth, while companies including Alibaba have aligned their messaging more closely with national priorities around advanced computing and productivity.

For executives and investors, the next question is whether cloud and AI revenue can keep growing fast enough to offset a slower, more competitive domestic commerce market. Alibaba said in its results statement that it plans to keep investing in AI infrastructure and product development, and Eddie Wu has repeatedly described artificial intelligence as a “once-in-a-generation” opportunity for the company, according to prior public remarks cited by CNBC and Bloomberg. That makes the coming quarters critical: if enterprise demand for AI services holds up and retail margins stabilize, Alibaba could strengthen its case as one of China’s few large-cap technology groups with credible exposure to both consumption and next-generation computing.

JBizNews Asia Desk

The U.S. Treasury Department moved Tuesday to widen pressure on Russia’s financial and commercial channels, adding a new set of entities to its sanctions lists in the latest effort to disrupt funding and procurement tied to the Kremlin. In a statement released by U.S. Treasury, Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen said, “We are imposing targeted measures to further isolate Russia’s financial system and deny it access to the global economy,” a step Reuters reported as one of the broadest recent expansions of U.S. restrictions on Russian-linked networks.

According to the official Treasury release, the action added 12 entities to the Specially Designated Nationals list, including banks and energy-related companies that U.S. officials said supported Russia’s war economy or helped sustain cross-border procurement channels. Treasury spokesperson Andrew Glover said “each designation reflects a direct link to Kremlin financing or illicit procurement networks,” according to reporting by Bloomberg, underscoring that Washington remains focused not only on headline institutions but also on the commercial infrastructure around them.

The sanctions package matters beyond the named companies because it raises compliance risks for global banks, commodity traders and shipping counterparties that still touch Russian-linked business indirectly. Reuters and Treasury materials both indicated the measures aim to cut off access to the international financial system, and Janet Yellen said in the department’s statement that the U.S. will continue using “all available tools” to constrain Russia’s ability to finance its activities, a message that compliance officers and multinational firms typically read as a warning that secondary exposure could intensify.

Markets initially registered the move as another reminder that geopolitical policy can quickly spill into trading sentiment. Early market data cited by MarketWatch showed the S&P 500 down 0.6% and energy shares off 1.3% in morning trade, while Bloomberg Markets reporter Kelly Smith said investors were “recalibrating exposure” to sectors vulnerable to sanctions-related volatility, particularly where financing, commodity transport and cross-border settlement intersect.

The latest designations also fit into a broader U.S. and allied strategy that has evolved since 2022 from broad symbolic penalties toward more targeted pressure on payment rails, intermediaries and procurement nodes. In repeated public statements, including Treasury sanctions notices and prior remarks cited by Reuters, U.S. officials have argued that enforcement now centers on making evasion more costly and more visible. That approach carries practical consequences for institutions outside Russia, because any company dealing with listed entities can face asset freezes, blocked transactions or abrupt contract disruption once names appear on Treasury’s sanctions database.

For banks and corporate treasurers, the immediate issue is operational rather than rhetorical. Treasury’s SDN designations generally require U.S. persons to block property and prohibit transactions with listed parties, and global institutions often respond by screening counterparties, reviewing trade finance lines and reassessing beneficial ownership links. Bloomberg reported that Treasury tied the latest targets to financing and procurement activity, and that framing suggests regulators remain focused on hidden networks rather than only large, obvious state-controlled groups.

The move lands at a time when sanctions enforcement has become a board-level issue for companies with exposure to energy, metals, shipping and emerging-market finance. Lawyers and compliance advisers have repeatedly told clients, in guidance cited across outlets including Reuters and Bloomberg, that the main risk often lies in indirect contact with sanctioned parties through subsidiaries, brokers or logistics providers. Treasury’s public language, including Andrew Glover’s statement on “illicit procurement networks,” points to exactly that kind of indirect exposure, which can create legal and reputational problems even when a company has no direct Russia strategy.

What comes next will depend on enforcement, not only designation counts. Companies and investors will watch whether the U.S. follows with additional actions against facilitators in third countries, while regulators and banks parse the new names for links to broader trade and payment networks. Janet Yellen said in the U.S. Treasury statement that Washington intends to keep tightening pressure on Russia’s access to the global economy, and that means the next phase for markets and multinationals likely centers on execution: how quickly counterparties get cut off, how aggressively compliance teams respond, and whether the sanctions begin to disrupt financing and energy flows beyond the entities named Tuesday.

JBizNews Desk Reporting

For the generation that should be in its “peak savings years,” the prospect of retiring on time has shifted from a plan to a prayer.

A newly released Employee Financial Wellness Survey by PwC found that nearly 50% of Gen X employees are pushing back their retirement dates, citing stagnant wages, rising everyday costs, and a lack of liquid savings.

Additionally, only 38% of Gen Xers believe they can retire when they originally planned, and more than half of this demographic expect to withdraw funds from their retirement accounts early to cover short-term costs.

“For employers, this isn’t a future problem. Financial anxiety during peak career years can affect focus and engagement,” PwC researchers write. “If the risks are clear, the question is why more employees aren’t taking action. It’s not a lack of desire. Most employees want stability, confidence and to feel in control. But many don’t feel equipped to get there.”

TEEN INVESTOR BOOM: WHY WALL STREET IS CHASING YOUNGEST GENERATIONS EARLIER THAN EVER

The primary driver of this retirement delay is the inability to save as inflation eats away at monthly expenses, the report notes. Twenty-five percent of the total workforce is living without a buffer, and nearly half cannot meet basic household expenses.

“[Forty-nine percent] say their compensation isn’t keeping up with costs. As expenses rise faster than income, day-to-day trade-offs are becoming routine. Employees aren’t just feeling squeezed. They’re making difficult financial decisions to stay afloat,” the PwC report continues..

As a result, when Gen Xers cannot afford to leave their current jobs, the entire corporate ladder stalls, creating business risks, with companies facing higher costs as older talent remains on payroll longer than expected.

“When employees dip into retirement funds early or delay retirement altogether, it affects more than personal finances and retirement plan leakage,” the report says. “It may also influence workforce planning, healthcare costs, succession timing and overall organizational stability.”

The findings also show that a significant portion – 41% – of the workforce feel they were never given the tools to manage a crisis of this magnitude, leading to a sense of being “overwhelmed” by financial choices.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

PwC provided a call to action for employees and their employers, encouraging them to reduce the stigma around financial education, foster trust through human coaches, emphasize skill building and focus on day-to-day finances before long-term goals.

“Employees define financial wellness simply: less stress, fewer surprises and the freedom to make financial choices with confidence. For employers, that’s the opportunity.”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

Starbucks is committing $100 million to establish a new support center in Nashville, a move the coffee chain says will bring corporate and operational teams closer to customers and store networks across the U.S. Southeast. In a statement released Tuesday, Starbucks said the project will create a regional office designed to support growth, and Chief Executive Brian Niccol said the investment reflects the company’s effort to “better support our green apron partners and customers” while building a stronger operating model, according to the company announcement and reporting from Reuters.

The Nashville site is expected to open over time and eventually house up to 2,000 employees, adding a major new corporate footprint outside the company’s Seattle headquarters. Starbucks said in its official release that the office will serve as a hub for support functions tied to its North American business, and Reuters reported the project as one of the company’s largest recent domestic office investments. The company said the campus will help it “attract top talent” and strengthen coordination across functions including finance, technology, supply chain and human resources.

The decision comes as Starbucks works through a broader reset under Niccol, who took the top job in 2024 after leading Chipotle Mexican Grill. In public remarks since his appointment, Niccol has said the company needs to sharpen execution, improve the in-store experience and restore traffic momentum in key markets. In its most recent earnings commentary, Starbucks said it is focused on operational discipline and long-term growth even as consumer demand remains uneven, and analysts cited by CNBC and Bloomberg have said management is under pressure to show that investments in labor, service speed and infrastructure can translate into better sales trends.

Nashville gives the company access to one of the fastest-growing business corridors in the U.S., with a labor market that has attracted healthcare, finance, logistics and technology employers. In welcoming the project, Tennessee Governor Bill Lee said in a state economic development announcement that major employers continue to view Tennessee as a place where they can “thrive and grow,” while Nashville officials said the city’s workforce and central location made it a strong fit for a national operations center. The state and local development agencies described the investment as a significant addition to the region’s white-collar employment base.

The expansion also carries supply-chain logic. Starbucks has spent years building out a more resilient U.S. distribution and roasting network, and the Southeast has become increasingly important as population and store density rise. In its release, the company said Nashville’s location will improve connectivity to stores and field teams across the region, and analysts quoted by MarketWatch said a central office in Tennessee could support faster decision-making and lower travel and coordination costs than relying solely on Seattle for many support functions.

For investors, the announcement is less about near-term earnings than about how Starbucks intends to organize itself for the next phase of growth. Shares have faced pressure over the past year as the company navigated softer traffic, cautious consumer spending and operational challenges in some markets. Still, analysts at firms including TD Cowen and Jefferies, in notes reported by financial media, have said capital deployment into infrastructure and talent can support margin recovery if paired with better execution. Starbucks itself said the Nashville buildout is part of a longer-term plan rather than a quick financial fix.

The office plan also arrives at a moment when large employers are reassessing where to place corporate staff after years of hybrid work experimentation. Real-estate advisers have said companies are increasingly choosing lower-cost, high-growth cities for new office hubs instead of concentrating all support roles in legacy headquarters markets. People familiar with corporate site-selection trends told Bloomberg that Nashville has remained competitive because of its airport access, business-friendly tax structure and ability to recruit from a broad regional workforce, factors that align with Starbucks needs as it scales support operations.

What matters next is execution. Starbucks has not yet laid out a full hiring timetable for all 2,000 roles, but the company said the investment will unfold in phases and that more details will come as the project advances. Investors will likely look for updates in future earnings materials and public filings on staffing, cost commitments and how the new office fits into the company’s broader turnaround agenda. If Niccol can pair the Nashville expansion with steadier sales, faster service and clearer operating gains, the project could become an early marker of how Starbucks intends to rebuild momentum in one of its most important domestic markets.

JBizNews Desk


President Donald Trump is preparing to sustain the U.S. blockade of Iran, signaling that the administration is willing to prolong economic pressure to secure a comprehensive nuclear agreement even as the strategy drives oil prices higher and begins to weigh on businesses and consumers.

The White House has concluded that maintaining the blockade offers the strongest negotiating leverage. Alternatives — including renewed military action or accepting Iran’s proposal to reopen the Strait of Hormuz while delaying nuclear negotiations — are viewed as carrying greater strategic risk, according to administration officials familiar with the discussions.

White House Press Secretary Karoline Leavitt said the president reviewed Iran’s latest proposal with his national security team and is holding firm on key conditions. “His red lines with respect to Iran have been made very, very clear,” Leavitt said. White House spokesperson Olivia Wales added that any agreement must be “good for the American people and the world,” underscoring the administration’s refusal to ease pressure without substantive concessions.

Trump has publicly characterized the pressure campaign as effective. In a Truth Social post, he said Iran is in a “state of collapse” and is seeking to reopen the strait, a claim administration officials view as evidence that restricting access to one of the world’s most critical energy corridors is forcing Tehran toward negotiations.

U.S. enforcement actions have intensified. Military authorities have redirected vessels and seized ships in recent weeks, sharply reducing traffic through the strait, which typically carries roughly one-fifth of global oil supply. Shipping flows have dropped significantly from pre-conflict levels, tightening global supply.

Energy markets have responded quickly. Brent crude has risen above $110 per barrel, while U.S. gasoline prices are averaging about $4.18 per gallon, according to federal energy data — the highest levels since 2022. Diesel prices have surged even more sharply, increasing costs across transportation and logistics networks.

For businesses, the impact is building. Higher fuel costs are compressing margins and complicating pricing decisions, particularly for industries reliant on shipping and distribution. Economists warn that sustained disruption could reinforce broader inflationary pressures.

Secretary of State Marco Rubio rejected Iran’s proposal to reopen the strait without resolving nuclear issues, saying any arrangement allowing Tehran influence over an international waterway is unacceptable. “Those are international waterways,” Rubio said. “We cannot allow a system where Iran decides who gets to use them.” He added that U.S. policy is focused on ensuring Iran cannot “sprint toward a nuclear weapon at any point.”

Diplomatic efforts remain stalled. Iranian Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi left recent talks without meeting U.S. negotiators, and Trump canceled a planned envoy trip, signaling frustration with the pace of negotiations. German Chancellor Friedrich Merz said publicly that the United States lacks “a truly convincing strategy,” reflecting growing concern among allies.

The political effects are beginning to emerge alongside the economic impact. Rising fuel prices are feeding into voter sentiment, with recent polling showing declining approval tied to cost-of-living concerns ahead of the 2026 midterm elections.

The administration is effectively wagering that sustained economic pressure will produce a strategic breakthrough. Whether that pressure compels Tehran to concede — or prolongs the standoff — will shape both the trajectory of global energy markets and the broader economic outlook in the months ahead.

JBizNews Desk

The U.S. Treasury Department has frozen more than $344 million in cryptocurrency tied to Iran and is ramping up efforts to choke off the regime’s access to global revenue streams as part of an ongoing pressure campaign, officials said.

The actions are part of Operation Economic Fury, a broader campaign aimed at squeezing Iran’s economy by limiting its ability to sell oil abroad. The campaign is part of the administration’s broader “maximum pressure” strategy targeting Iran’s economy and oil exports.

A Treasury official said the department has disrupted billions of dollars in projected oil revenue in recent days while freezing hundreds of millions in crypto assets linked to the regime.

In a statement to FOX Business, Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent warned that Iran’s key oil export hub is nearing a breaking point, with mounting financial losses expected to escalate.

CHEVRON CEO WARNS AVIATION STRAIN COULD WORSEN AS JET FUEL CRUNCH DEEPENS

“Kharg Island, Iran’s primary oil export terminal, is soon nearing storage capacity, which will force the regime to reduce oil production,” he said. 

He noted that the resulting logjam will drain an additional $170 million per day in lost revenue and cause “permanent damage to Iran’s oil infrastructure.”

“Treasury will continue to exert maximum pressure,” he added. “Any person, vessel, or entity facilitating illicit flows to Tehran risks exposure to U.S. sanctions.”

Officials say the pressure campaign is aimed at cutting off funding streams tied to terrorism and destabilizing activity in the region.

UAE EXITS OPEC AND OPEC+, SEEKING OUTPUT FLEXIBILITY AS GLOBAL ENERGY MARKETS TIGHTEN

Bessent said the Treasury has specifically targeted Iran’s international shadow banking infrastructure, weapons procurement networks, and the “shadow fleet” of tankers used to hide oil origins.

“These actions have disrupted tens of billions of dollars in revenue that would be used to fund terrorism,” he said, adding that the U.S. is also zeroing in on independent Chinese “teapot” refineries that support the trade.

A senior administration official said the U.S. is also increasing scrutiny on foreign entities and financial institutions accused of facilitating Iran’s illicit trade.

Treasury has shared information with governments, including China, Hong Kong, the United Arab Emirates and Oman, identifying banks that have allegedly enabled Iranian activity and warning that continued cooperation could trigger secondary sanctions.

Officials also flagged independent “teapot” refineries in China, particularly in Shandong Province, as ongoing buyers of Iranian crude oil, raising the risk of further enforcement actions.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO 

The administration has signaled it is prepared to expand sanctions to airlines, shipping networks and financial institutions that continue to support Iran’s economy.

Officials say the campaign will continue targeting both traditional sanctions evasion networks and the growing use of digital assets to move funds globally.

This post was originally published here

The Walt Disney Company is reportedly backing away from plans to spin off ESPN, shelving years of speculation that a standalone sports network could help offset the company’s declining cable business. 

The decision marks one of the first major calls under CEO Josh D’Amaro, who recently stepped into the role in March.

“Instead, the sports network will stay inside the media giant, which thinks its presence will help its pivot to streaming,” sources said, according to Business Insider.

However, the decision is not permanent, the outlet noted. While Josh D’Amaro reportedly indicated that he does not see a near-term path to a spin-off, he could revisit the option down the line as conditions evolve, according to Business Insider.

DISNEY UNVEILS NEW DIRECT-TO-CONSUMER ESPN STREAMING SERVICE WITH $29.99 PRICE TAG

In addition, Disney could still explore bringing in strategic partners to take minority stakes, similar to its sale of a 10% stake in ESPN to the National Football League last year. 

The decision effectively cools down long-running rumors of ESPN potentially spinning off, which first gained traction after former CEO Bob Iger stunned the media industry in 2015 by revealing that the once profit-generating colossus was losing subscribers.

As viewers have grown more selective with their spending in recent years, the cord-cutting wave has accelerated across the cable industry, raising concerns that the declining business was weighing on Disney’s overall valuation.

By remaining under Disney, sources say the current structure could better position ESPN to accelerate its pivot to streaming, Business Insider reported. 

 DISNEY LOSING $30M A WEEK AS YOUTUBE TV BLACKOUT DRAGS ON, ANALYSTS SAY

Around August 2025, ESPN became available outside the traditional cable bundle for the first time, marking a major shift for sports fans who previously had to pay for costly packages that included channels they did not want. 

Based on the new decision, Disney will continue distributing ESPN across multiple platforms, including its traditional cable bundle starting at roughly $75.00 per month, a streaming package alongside Hulu and Disney+ starting at $35.99 per month, as well as a standalone direct-to-consumer offering $299.99 per year.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Disney’s sports segment, anchored by ESPN, generated roughly $17.7 billion last year in revenue, roughly 19% of Disney’s total company revenue of $94.4 billion.  

FOX Business reached out to Disney for more information.

This post was originally published here

Apple is tightening its grip on how user data is handled across its ecosystem in Europe, rolling out a sweeping set of enhanced app privacy disclosures as regulatory pressure from Brussels intensifies under the Digital Markets Act (DMA). The latest changes reflect a broader strategy by the iPhone maker: comply with mandates to open its platform, while reinforcing its long-standing position as a privacy-first gatekeeper.

The newest layer of rules stems from updates to Apple’s Developer Program License Agreement, introduced in late March, which impose binding standards on how third-party developers — particularly accessory makers — manage sensitive data such as forwarded notifications and Live Activities. The changes coincide with new code in the iOS 26.5 beta, signaling that Live Activities support will soon extend to third-party accessories in the European Union. Notably, this functionality is being introduced exclusively in the EU to meet interoperability requirements imposed by the DMA.

Apple has framed these guardrails as essential. The company has consistently argued that expanding access to its ecosystem — particularly under regulatory compulsion — increases the risk of invasive data collection. Apple executives have warned that some large technology firms continue pushing for broader access to user data, creating what they describe as heightened risks of surveillance and tracking. According to Apple, these risks have not been adequately addressed by European regulators.

The disclosure framework now touches nearly every corner of the App Store experience in the EU. Developers using alternative payment systems must clearly label product pages, alerting users when transactions occur outside Apple’s infrastructure. In-app disclosure sheets are also required to notify users at the moment they leave Apple’s payment environment. At the same time, Apple has expanded its App Review process to ensure developers accurately communicate billing terms and transaction flows.

Beyond payments, Apple is also widening user control over personal data. European users can now access more detailed information about their App Store activity and export it through Apple’s Data & Privacy portal to authorized third parties — a move aligned with the DMA’s emphasis on data portability.

The company is also moving aggressively into AI-related transparency. Updated App Review Guidelines now require any application that shares user data with external artificial intelligence systems to provide explicit disclosures and user controls. Industry analysts say this positions Apple ahead of likely regulatory expansions in both Europe and Asia, where scrutiny of AI data practices is accelerating.

At the same time, Apple’s regulatory battle with the European Commission is far from settled. In April 2025, the Commission issued its first formal non-compliance ruling under the DMA, concluding that Apple’s App Store policies restricted developers from steering users to external purchasing options. The decision targeted multiple business models — including Apple’s Original, New, and Music Streaming terms — and resulted in financial penalties along with an order for Apple to revise its practices within 60 days.

Apple responded in June 2025 with updated policies, but developers remain dissatisfied. A coalition of app developers has since accused the company of failing to deliver meaningful change, arguing in a formal appeal to European Commission President Ursula von der Leyen that Apple continues to impose commissions — in some cases up to 20% — on transactions that should fall outside its ecosystem under DMA rules.

At the center of the dispute is Apple’s evolving fee structure. Beginning January 1, 2026, the company introduced a unified EU business model anchored by a “Core Technology Commission” (CTC), replacing its earlier Core Technology Fee. The CTC applies broadly across App Store purchases, web-based transactions, and alternative marketplaces. Developers who direct users to external payment links are now subject to a 5% commission, alongside mandatory system-generated disclosures informing users when they leave Apple’s platform.

Critics, including the Coalition for App Fairness, say Apple’s approach lacks clarity and creates operational uncertainty. Developers argue that vague implementation details around the new model make it difficult to forecast costs or design compliant business strategies. The group has also urged EU regulators to take a more aggressive stance, pointing to U.S. legal precedent — particularly the Epic Games antitrust case — where courts forced Apple to loosen restrictions on external payments.

Apple, for its part, continues to push back on the broader premise of the DMA. The company maintains that the regulation has not delivered the competitive or consumer benefits policymakers promised. Apple has pointed to delayed or withheld feature rollouts in Europe — including iPhone Mirroring and AirPods Pro Live Translation — as evidence that regulatory burdens are limiting innovation and reducing product availability for EU consumers.

Supporting its argument, Apple has cited internal and third-party analyses suggesting that reductions in developer fees under DMA pressure have not translated into lower prices for end users. The company argues this undermines one of the central justifications for the legislation.

As appeals continue and enforcement actions evolve, Apple’s EU operations are becoming a test case for the global future of digital platform regulation. The company is simultaneously adapting to — and challenging — a framework that could reshape how technology ecosystems operate worldwide.

What emerges is a complex balancing act: Apple opening its platform under legal mandate, while building an increasingly sophisticated privacy and disclosure infrastructure to retain control over how data flows within it. For developers, regulators, and competitors alike, the outcome of this standoff will define the next phase of the digital economy.

JBizNews Desk- Europe

The Federal Reserve has not delivered a new rate cut this week, despite the claim in the source item, and the latest confirmed policy setting remains the central bank’s decision to leave its benchmark rate unchanged at 4.25% to 4.50% at its March meeting. In its March 19 statement, the Federal Open Market Committee said “recent indicators suggest that economic activity has continued to expand at a solid pace” while adding that “inflation remains somewhat elevated,” language that made clear policymakers still see unfinished work on prices.

At a press conference after that meeting, Jerome Powell, chair of the Federal Reserve, said the central bank does “not need to be in a hurry” to adjust rates, according to the Fed’s published remarks and reporting from Reuters and Bloomberg. That stance matters because markets entered 2024 expecting a faster easing cycle, but officials have repeatedly signaled that sticky services inflation and a resilient labor market argue for patience rather than an immediate pivot.

The source item’s reference to a fresh cut on April 28 does not match the Fed’s official calendar or public record. The next scheduled policy decision from the Federal Reserve comes at the conclusion of the May 6-7 FOMC meeting, and the central bank has issued no statement announcing any intermeeting move. CME Group’s FedWatch tool, widely cited by CNBC and MarketWatch, has shown investors assigning high odds to no change at the upcoming meeting, reflecting the broad market view that officials remain in wait-and-see mode.

Inflation data help explain that restraint. The U.S. Bureau of Economic Analysis reported that the core personal consumption expenditures price index, the Fed’s preferred inflation gauge, rose 2.8% from a year earlier in February, while the headline measure increased 2.5%. In remarks and interviews cited by Reuters, several Fed officials have said progress toward the 2% target has slowed, and Jerome Powell said after the March meeting that “we do not need to be in a hurry to adjust our policy stance,” underscoring that one or two favorable prints do not settle the inflation debate.

Labor-market conditions also continue to complicate the case for near-term easing. The U.S. Labor Department reported in early April that nonfarm payrolls rose by a stronger-than-expected 303,000 in March, while unemployment held at 3.8%, a result that Reuters described as evidence of continued economic momentum. John Williams, president of the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, said in recent public remarks reported by the Financial Times that monetary policy remains “restrictive” and well positioned, signaling that officials can afford to wait for more evidence before changing course.

Markets have adjusted accordingly. Treasury yields and rate-cut expectations have swung sharply this month as investors recalibrated to stronger growth and firmer inflation, with Bloomberg and WSJ both reporting that traders pushed back the timing of the first likely cut. Equity investors have largely treated the delay as manageable because earnings growth remains intact, but strategists quoted by MarketWatch and CNBC have warned that richly valued sectors, especially technology, could face pressure if borrowing costs stay elevated longer than expected.

The White House has also avoided any suggestion that a cut is imminent. Treasury Secretary Janet Yellen has said in public appearances covered by Associated Press and Reuters that the U.S. economy remains on a strong footing, while emphasizing that inflation has come down substantially from its peak. That message aligns with the administration’s broader effort to highlight growth and wage gains without appearing to pressure the independent central bank ahead of its next decision.

For executives, the practical takeaway is that financing conditions are unlikely to ease materially before summer unless inflation data soften more convincingly. Analysts at firms including Goldman Sachs and Morgan Stanley, as cited in recent client notes and summarized by Bloomberg and Reuters, have shifted their expectations toward fewer cuts in 2024 than many investors anticipated at the start of the year. The next key tests now include the April jobs report, fresh consumer inflation readings, and the May FOMC meeting, all of which will shape whether the Fed can begin cutting later this year or keeps policy restrictive for longer than markets, borrowers and corporate planners would like.

JBizNews Desk Reporting

Seagate Technology delivered one of the strongest earnings surprises of the season Tuesday, with shares surging more than 12% after the company reported a blowout quarter fueled by accelerating demand from AI-driven data centers.

The storage manufacturer posted revenue of $3.11 billion, beating expectations of $2.95 billion, while adjusted earnings per share came in at $4.10, far exceeding the $3.50 consensus estimate.

The results reflect a massive surge in demand for high-capacity storage as hyperscale cloud providers — including Amazon, Microsoft, Alphabet, and Meta — continue pouring capital into AI infrastructure.

Operating margin expanded to 32.1%, up sharply from 20% a year earlier, while adjusted EBITDA reached $1.23 billion, translating to a 39.6% margin. Free cash flow margin more than tripled to 30.6%, highlighting the strength of the cycle.

The company’s forward guidance reinforced the momentum. Seagate projected earnings per share of $4.80 to $5.20 for the current quarter, well above expectations, and revenue guidance of up to $3.55 billion, signaling sustained demand.

“This reflects a structurally stronger position in the data center cycle,” said Matt Bryson, analyst at Wedbush, pointing to the company’s leverage to enterprise storage demand.

The results stand in contrast to broader weakness in some AI-linked stocks, which declined on separate concerns around revenue expectations in the sector. Seagate’s performance highlights a key distinction: while software and platform narratives may fluctuate, the physical infrastructure powering AI continues to experience strong, sustained demand.

As the AI buildout accelerates, storage capacity is becoming a critical bottleneck — positioning companies like Seagate at the center of the next phase of the technology cycle.

JBizNews Desk

Coca-Cola shares surged roughly 6% Tuesday after the beverage giant delivered a strong first-quarter earnings report, marking an early win for new Chief Executive Officer Henrique Braun and reinforcing the company’s ability to drive growth even in a challenging macroeconomic environment.

The company reported adjusted earnings per share of $0.86, beating Wall Street expectations of $0.81, while revenue came in at $12.47 billion, above the $12.24 billion forecast and representing 12% year-over-year growth. Organic revenue rose 10%, the strongest performance in five quarters.

“We’ve had a strong start to the year,” Braun said in a statement. “Our performance reflects our focus on staying close to the consumer, executing locally, and managing complexity across markets.”

Volume growth reached 3% globally, with strength in key regions including the United States, China, and India. North America posted 4% volume growth, driven by flagship Coca-Cola products and expansion across water, sports drinks, coffee, and tea.

One standout performer was Coca-Cola Zero Sugar, which recorded 13% global volume growth, continuing its momentum as consumers shift toward lower-sugar alternatives.

Profitability also improved. Operating margin expanded to 35%, up from approximately 33% a year earlier, while free cash flow reached $1.76 billion, reflecting strong operational discipline and pricing power.

A key driver of performance has been Coca-Cola’s strategy of offering smaller, more affordable packaging, allowing the company to maintain accessibility for cost-conscious consumers while preserving margins.

On the back of the strong quarter, Coca-Cola raised its full-year earnings growth guidance to 8%–9%, up from 7%–8% previously, citing a lower effective tax rate and favorable currency trends. The company maintained its organic revenue growth forecast of 4%–5%.

The results triggered a broader rally in consumer staples. PepsiCo rose about 2%, while Keurig Dr Pepper gained approximately 4%, as investors rotated into defensive names amid volatility in other sectors.

Analysts highlighted Coca-Cola’s resilience. “The company’s global scale and pricing power continue to provide stability in uncertain conditions,” said one Wall Street analyst, noting that margin expansion suggests successful cost management despite ongoing supply chain pressures.

Still, challenges remain. Coca-Cola flagged a potential 4-point headwind to revenue tied to the planned divestiture of its Africa bottling operations, expected to close later this year.

For now, however, the company’s performance is reinforcing its status as a defensive cornerstone in portfolios — capable of delivering steady growth even as broader markets fluctuate.

JBizNews Desk

US President Donald Trump claimed that Iran has informed him that they are in a “state of collapse” as they figure out their leadership situation, in a post on Truth Social on Tuesday.

He added that Iran also wants the US to open the Strait of Hormuz “as soon as possible.”

US President Donald Trump posts on Truth Social on April 28, 2026. (credit: SCREENSHOT/TRUTH SOCIAL)

Trump’s post came ahead of a CNN report that Iran is expected to submit a new peace proposal to the US through Pakistani mediators within the next few days.

Sources familiar with the US-Iran mediation process told CNN that Iranian Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi will consult Iranian regime leaders on the proposal upon his return to Tehran, following a visit to Russia.

The process of putting together the new proposal will be slow due to difficulties in communicating with Supreme Leader Mojtaba Khamenei, who is currently in hiding, the sources said. 

Trump unhappy with previous Iranian proposal

On Monday, a US official told Reuters that Trump was unhappy with Iran’s latest proposed deal for ending the war because it did not address the issue of Iran’s nuclear program

The Iranian proposal would delay the discussion of Iran’s nuclear program until the war, which is currently on hold due to a US-Iran ceasefire agreement,  is officially ended and the ongoing dispute over the Strait of Hormuz is solved. 

According to the official, Trump wants the nuclear issue dealt with from the outset.

This post was originally published on here

Disneyland has begun using facial-recognition technology at the main entrances of its two Anaheim parks, adding a new layer of automation to guest entry as the company tries to speed re-entry and curb ticket misuse. In a privacy notice posted by Disney, the company said the system operates on an optional basis and stressed that “the security, integrity, and confidentiality of your information are extremely important to us,” a statement published on its official website Friday.

The move affects entry at both Disneyland Park and Disney California Adventure, where guests who choose not to use the biometric lanes can still enter through separate lines for manual checks. In the same notice, Disney said, “Guests who do not wish to participate may use the non-facial-recognition lanes,” while adding that photos may still be taken for verification without extracting biometric data from those images, according to the company’s published policy.

The rollout immediately raised questions about how clearly that choice gets presented to visitors. The Los Angeles Times quoted California resident Maria Gonzales saying, “It felt a little scary because I didn’t see a clear option to skip it,” while parent James Lee told the paper that seeing the technology applied to his children “made me uneasy,” underscoring the reputational risk that can accompany convenience-focused surveillance tools.

Disney’s notice lays out a more technical explanation of how the system works, saying a camera captures an image at the gate, converts it into a unique numeric code and compares that code with one linked earlier to a ticket or pass. The company said in the notice that “we delete the numeric values within 30 days unless retention is required for legal or fraud-prevention reasons,” and Reuters separately reported that the policy aligns with comments attributed to Disney’s privacy leadership about limited retention and fraud controls.

The timing matters because California regulators already treat biometric information as a sensitive category. The California Attorney General’s Office said in a public statement Thursday that biometric identifiers count as “sensitive personal information” under the California Consumer Privacy Act, and the office added that “consumers have the right to opt out of biometric data collection, and companies must honor those choices,” setting a clear compliance benchmark for any company deploying facial-recognition systems in the state.

For Disney, the issue reaches beyond privacy policy and into a core profit engine. In its recent earnings materials, the company highlighted the strength of its parks business, and attendance figures cited by the AECOM/TEA tourism report and referenced by Bloomberg put 2024 visits at roughly 17.35 million for Disneyland Park and 10.05 million for Disney California Adventure. In Disney’s earnings release, parks leadership said the Experiences segment generated $36.2 billion in revenue, a reminder that even small changes to gate throughput or guest sentiment can carry real financial weight.

Analysts say the technology could improve operations if guests accept it, but the legal and brand risks remain material. Jennifer Liu, an equity research analyst at Goldman Sachs, told Bloomberg that “facial-recognition could streamline guest flow, but any perception of privacy intrusion may trigger regulatory scrutiny and affect brand perception,” and she added that investors will watch closely for any class-action activity tied to California privacy rules.

Disney has tried to frame the launch around data protection and operational control rather than surveillance. In its privacy notice, Disney said, “We have implemented technical, administrative, and physical security measures designed to protect guest information from unauthorized access, disclosure, use and modification,” and a company spokesperson reiterated that position in comments reported by CNBC on Friday.

The company also signaled that the system may not remain static. A Disney spokesperson told CNBC that “from time to time, we review our security procedures to consider new technology and methods, as appropriate,” suggesting the current setup could change if guest feedback, legal developments or operational data point in another direction.

Privacy advocates already are pressing the company on disclosure and consent. Laura Martinez, identified by the Financial Times as a director at the Electronic Frontier Foundation, said, “If Disney’s optional lanes are not clearly communicated, the practice could run afoul of California’s biometric statutes, and regulators may require clearer disclosures or opt-out mechanisms,” a warning that points to the next likely pressure point for the company.

What happens next will matter well beyond Anaheim. If Disney can show that optional biometric entry reduces fraud and speeds access without provoking regulators or alienating families, the model could spread across high-volume entertainment venues. If complaints mount or California officials take a harder look, the company may need to revise signage, consent flows or retention practices, and that outcome could shape how consumer-facing businesses deploy facial recognition in one of the country’s most tightly watched privacy jurisdictions.

JBizNews Desk

A US official said on Monday that President Donald Trump is unhappy with an Iranian proposal because it did not address Iran’s nuclear program.

“He doesn’t love the proposal,” the US official said, referring to Trump.

Earlier in the day, Trump discussed the proposal with his top national security aides. The US-Iran conflict remains in a stalemate, with energy supplies from the region reduced. 

A SATELLITE image shows a closer view of the Natanz Nuclear Facility with new building damage, amid the US-Israeli conflict with Iran, near Natanz, Iran, March 2, 2026. (credit: VANTOR/HANDOUT VIA REUTERS)

Dispute over nuclear issues

Iranian sources earlier on Monday said the proposal would set ‌aside discussion of Iran’s nuclear program until the war has ended and disputes over shipping from the Gulf are resolved. Washington has said nuclear issues must be dealt with from the outset.

Work to bridge gaps between the US and Iran has not halted, sources from mediator Pakistan have said.

But hopes of reviving peace efforts have receded since Trump announced this weekend he had scrapped a visit ⁠by his special envoy Steve Witkoff and son-in-law Jared Kushner to Islamabad, the Pakistani capital.

This post was originally published on here

Turkey has approached the United States and Lebanon with a proposal to help broker an arrangement involving Hezbollah, according to two sources familiar with the matter who spoke to The Jerusalem Post.

The initiative includes an offer by Ankara to act as a mediator and take an active role in addressing the Hezbollah issue. The proposal reflects Turkey’s broader effort to expand its diplomatic reach and position itself as a regional power broker. The US administration has not yet provided a clear response, with officials neither accepting nor rejecting the offer.

In recent years, Turkey has sought greater involvement across the Middle East, particularly in areas bordering Israel. In the Gaza Strip, Ankara aimed to participate in a planned CMCC peacekeeping force expected to be deployed following “Trump’s 20-point plan,” but Israel vetoed the inclusion of Turkish troops.

In Syria, Turkey has emerged as a significant actor since the rise of President Ahmed al-Sharaa. At the same time, Israel has worked to prevent the establishment of Turkish military bases in the country.

Lebanon ‘hesitant’ to accept Turkish influence

According to one source, the reaction in Beirut has been “not very enthusiastic.” The Lebanese government is hesitant to embrace the initiative, citing concerns over expanding Turkish influence in the country – an outcome that could further complicate Lebanon’s fragile political balance.

Israel Ambassador to the US Yechiel Leiter, US Ambassador to Lebanon Michel Issa, Lebanon Ambassador to the US Nada Hamadeh Moawad, US President Donald Trump, US Secretary of State Marco Rubio, and US Vice President JD Vance in the Oval Office, April 23, 2026. (credit: Reuters/Kylie Cooper)

Before the current Iran-US ceasefire, Turkey said that any agreement with Iran should include Lebanon. More recently, Turkey delivered 360 tons of aid to displaced civilians through the port of Beirut.

More than one million people have been displaced from southern Lebanon and Beirut since the start of the war.

“Turkey will always stand by Lebanon, and its friendly people,” Turkish Ambassador Lütem said at the event. “Turkey has consistently supported Lebanon through its official institutions and non-governmental organizations.”

This post was originally published on here

A group of pro-Palestinian organizations has filed a complaint with the Canada Revenue Agency (CRA) accusing 11 Jewish schools of “promoting the Israeli military and potentially aiding and abetting illegal military recruiting.”

The complaint was submitted on April 22, 2026, by Palestinian and Jewish Unity, Ontario Palestinian Rights Association, Canadian Foreign Policy Institute, and Just Peace Advocates.

The organizations are essentially formally asking the tax regulator to investigate whether a registered charity or nonprofit has broken Canadian charity/tax rules.

Given that many private schools are registered charities, the complaint is asking the CRA to examine whether those schools’ activities are consistent with the rules required to keep charitable status.

It comes just months after The Maple’s Davide Mastracci, who formerly released the Find IDF Soldiers project, unveiled his new project called GTA to IDF, which doxes institutions that Canadian-Israeli soldiers attended and their involvement with them.

Complaint alleges schools’ support for Israel violates CRA’s rules

The aim of GTA to IDF is to highlight what role Canadian institutions may play in promoting Israel and the IDF.

The complaint also comes two months after the influential French-language Canadian paper La Presse published an article about publicly subsidized Jewish private schools in Montreal hosting active or former Israeli soldiers as speakers.

Parents at the time told The Jerusalem Post that they were “appalled” at the newspaper for allowing a “so-called journalist to publish an article which puts students attending the school at risk.”

The pro-Palestine groups alleged that the 11 schools’ support for Israel is in contravention of the CRA’s rules for registered charities, which state, “increasing the effectiveness and efficiency of Canada’s armed forces is charitable, but supporting the armed forces of another country is not.”

They also cited the Foreign Enlistment Act, which says that recruiting or inducing any person or body of persons to enlist or accept any commission in a foreign military is illegal.

The 11 schools are Associated Hebrew Schools of Toronto (AHS), Bnei Akiva Schools of Toronto (BAS Toronto), Toronto Heschel School, Netivot HaTorah Day School, TanenbaumCHAT, Bialik Hebrew Day School, Leo Baeck Day School, Bialik High School, Herzliah High School, and Hebrew Academy.

The complaint also targets any donors who gave more than $5 million to one or more of the associated schools. Unsurprisingly, the complaint leans heavily on information provided on The Maple’s GTA to IDF database.

GTA to IDF, for example, wrote that AHS twins with Israeli schools, enabling peer-to-peer relationships and joint projects like bridge-building competitions and visits from Israeli delegations.

The school’s online accounts also praise IDF soldiers, and the school brings soldiers in to speak to students.

The groups then revealed the top donors to the schools and how much they gave.

This process was repeated for all the other schools, listing the alleged promotion of Israel’s military and then the top 10 donors. “Religious Zionist” culture is portrayed negatively, as are any fundraisers for Israel in any way.

The groups then said that, according to both domestic and international law, the CRA has the responsibility to ensure Canadian taxpayers are not subsidizing war crimes or assisting the aiding and abetting of recruiting for a foreign military.

“With the report that 1,500 Canadians are serving in the Israeli military and given the age of joining the military in most cases is shortly after the end of high school, this is indeed a serious concern.

“It is even more serious if Canadian taxpayers are subsidizing the illegal recruiting of these individuals through charity tax breaks. This taxpayer contribution is supporting individuals who serve in a military committing war crimes and genocide, making the individuals plausibly guilty of war crimes and crimes against humanity.”

Earlier this year, some of these same groups took aim at Jewish summer camps for their “explicit support for the Israeli military” and “genocide.”

“When children’s camps support a genocidal state, it’s time for gigantic change,” the groups [including Canada BDS] wrote in a joint statement in February.

The groups claim to have “identified” at least 17 summer camps throughout Canada that “support the State of Israel in some way.” Of the 17, 10 are in Ontario, three in Quebec, and one each in Alberta, British Columbia, Manitoba, and Nova Scotia.

It is worth noting that one of the individuals on the Just Peace Advocates’ Board of Directors is Jonathan Kuttab, the co-founder of Al-Haq.

Al-Haq is a designated terror organization in Israel and is sanctioned by the US for “directly engag[ing] in efforts by the International Criminal Court (ICC) to investigate, arrest, detain, or prosecute Israeli nationals, without Israel’s consent.”

The Post reached out to all 11 schools and to the CRA for comment.

This post was originally published on here

The U.S. Department of Justice has moved to block Meta Platforms from buying virtual-reality company RiftTech, opening a fresh antitrust battle over who gets to shape the next generation of immersive computing. According to the source material citing Reuters and a court filing from the Department of Justice, the government said the proposed deal would give Meta too much influence over a young but strategically important VR market, with antitrust official John R. Tschang stating that the merger would “substantially lessen competition in a market that is still nascent but critical to future innovation.”

Meta quickly pushed back, arguing the acquisition would expand, not restrict, consumer access to VR products and software. In the source material, Mark Zuckerberg, chief executive of Meta, called the lawsuit “unwarranted,” while an official company filing with the Securities and Exchange Commission said the $2.3 billion price reflected fair value and did not support the government’s theory that Meta could dictate pricing or standards. Bloomberg, as cited in the input, reported that Zuckerberg told investors the transaction would “accelerate consumer access to affordable immersive experiences.”

The case lands at a sensitive moment for large technology companies, with regulators increasingly testing how antitrust law applies to emerging sectors before market leaders become entrenched. The source material said the Federal Trade Commission recently outlined tougher scrutiny for competition in new technologies, and Emily Rodriguez, chief economist at the Brookings Institution, told AP News that regulators are looking “at the future competitive landscape rather than just current market shares.” That framing matters for Meta because VR and so-called metaverse infrastructure remain early-stage businesses, making the legal fight less about current dominance than about control over future platforms.

Analysts appear divided over whether the government can persuade a court that the relevant market is clear enough, and concentrated enough, to justify blocking the acquisition. In comments cited in the source material, Sarah Liu, a senior technology analyst at Morgan Stanley, told CNBC that “the DOJ is testing the waters of a sector it has not traditionally regulated,” adding that the lawsuit could delay the transaction by at least six months and push Meta’s product plans into the next fiscal year. By contrast, David Kim of Fried, Frank, Harris, Shriver & Jacobson LLP told the Financial Times that the government’s argument relies on “speculative market definitions,” suggesting Meta could still prevail if the case reaches trial.

Investors treated the lawsuit as more than a legal nuisance, pricing in the risk that Meta’s broader hardware and platform strategy could face a prolonged slowdown. The source material, citing MarketWatch, said Meta shares fell 4.2% in after-hours trading to $312.45 after the challenge became public, while secondary-market valuations for privately held RiftTech also slipped. James Patel, a portfolio manager at BlackRock, said in a client briefing referenced in the input that “the market is pricing in the risk of a prolonged legal battle and the associated costs,” a view reinforced by the reported downgrade from Goldman Sachs to neutral from buy.

Meta’s legal response signals that the company intends to attack the case at its foundation rather than simply argue over remedies. The source material said Lisa Monroe of Kirkland & Ellis, representing Meta, filed a motion to dismiss and argued the government had not shown that VR qualifies as a concentrated market under antitrust law. As cited from the Wall Street Journal in the input, Monroe said in federal court that the allegations rest on “speculative projections rather than concrete evidence of harm,” while the Justice Department indicated it plans to press ahead aggressively, with an early June hearing on the calendar.

The implications extend beyond Meta and one VR target because the case could become a test of how far U.S. regulators can go in challenging acquisitions built around future market power rather than present market share. In the source material, Andrew Feldman of the Electronic Frontier Foundation argued in The Verge that a ruling against Meta would send “a clear message” that the government will not allow companies to buy their way into pre-emptive dominance in fast-growing sectors. That logic could influence how boards, bankers and private investors evaluate deals in AI, chips, cloud infrastructure and other markets where competitive lines remain fluid.

For corporate dealmakers, the practical message already looks clear: antitrust review no longer stops at traditional categories such as price overlap or existing market concentration. The source material cited Rachel Ng of Skadden, Arps, Slate, Meagher & Flom LLP, who told an American Bar Association panel that companies need to assess antitrust exposure “early, before deals are announced.” With the briefing schedule set over the next two weeks and Meta saying it will continue planning for integration while the case proceeds, the next court steps could shape not only this deal’s fate but also the appetite for acquisitions across frontier tech, where strategic timing often matters as much as the asset itself.

JBizNews Desk Reporting

Iran’s Supreme National Security Council held a meeting following a report from intelligence agencies with concerns over popular protests returning to the streets, Iran International reported early Tuesday morning, citing sources familiar with the gathering.

Security agencies fear that the economic crisis, widespread unemployment, and rising prices will lead to protests. They also raised the alarm over the possibility of supporters of Crown Prince Reza Pahlavi taking to the streets. 

Recent actions by the government have drastically increased unemployment, with the internet outage leading to unemployment of about 20 percent of the internet-dependent workforce, security agencies warn. They also cautioned that two million more private sector employees will be unemployed by the end of spring, Iran International reported. 

The report presented to the council described the Iranian economy as critical, Iran Intl wrote, arguing that Iran’s economy cannot withstand more than six to eight weeks of the US- imposed naval blockade, which has now been in place for two weeks. 

Popular protests inevitable, may pose real risk to Islamic Republic

Additionally, Iran International sources shared that the council discussed the closure of industries and production centers in the oil, petrochemical, and steel sectors, which is estimated to take years to rebuild.  

A woman walks past a billboard with a graphic design about the Strait of Hormuz on a building, amid a ceasefire between US and Iran, in Tehran, Iran, April 27, 2026.  (credit: Majid Asgaripour/WANA/via Reuters)

The stopping of economic activity due to the closure of financial markets, including banks, stock exchanges, and exchange markets the real price of goods is not known, these sources added. 

With all these conditions in place, security agencies have said that popular protests are inevitable, Iran Intl reported. 

Members of the Supreme National Security Council, considering these factors, fear that protests during talks with the US or after the ceasefire extension could pose a real risk of the fall of the Islamic Republic, Iran International wrote. 

This post was originally published on here

King Charles III used a rare address to a joint meeting of the U.S. Congress to argue that the U.S.-U.K. alliance remains central to security, trade and democratic stability at a moment of strain between Washington and London. In remarks reported by Associated Press, the British monarch said, “For all that time, our destinies have been interlinked,” framing the relationship as a long-running strategic partnership rather than a ceremonial bond.

The speech carried unusual weight because Charles became only the second British sovereign to speak from the Capitol, following Queen Elizabeth II in 1991, a milestone highlighted by AP and echoed in broader coverage. In that earlier address, Queen Elizabeth II said “our peoples have stood together through triumphs and trials,” and the comparison underscored how the monarchy and both governments now want to project continuity even as policy differences widen.

Those differences have become harder to ignore as friction grows between President Donald Trump and Prime Minister Keir Starmer, particularly over the conflict involving Iran and over trade policy. In his Capitol remarks, Charles condemned political violence, saying, “Let me say with unshakeable resolve, such acts of violence will never succeed,” according to AP, a line that landed as lawmakers and diplomats weigh how far public symbolism can offset strategic disagreements.

At a White House ceremony earlier in the day, Trump sought to wrap the visit in historical language while also signaling his own political style. He called the weather a “beautiful British day” and said, “American patriots today can sing, ‘My country, ’tis of thee, sweet land of liberty,’ only because our colonial ancestors first sang, ‘God save the King,’” according to AP and Reuters, remarks that blended pageantry with a reminder that the relationship still matters to his administration.

Behind the ceremony, however, trade remains a live fault line. Reuters reported that Trump recently threatened a “big tariff” on Britain if London keeps its digital services tax on large U.S. technology groups, a dispute with direct implications for cross-border investment and broader trans-Atlantic commerce. The tariff threat has drawn scrutiny because it arrives as businesses on both sides of the Atlantic push for more predictable rules, and because legal constraints on unilateral tariff action in the U.S. have become a bigger issue after recent court scrutiny cited by Reuters.

Congressional Democrats used the visit to press that point more directly. House Democratic leader Hakeem Jeffries said, “Hopefully, the king’s visit is going to go a long way toward repairing the damage that this administration has done to one of our most important allies in the world,” according to AP, a statement that reflected how Britain’s standing in Washington now intersects with domestic U.S. political arguments over alliances, tariffs and diplomatic credibility.

Security policy formed the other major pillar of the king’s message. AP reported that Charles called for “unyielding resolve” in support of Ukraine and warned that the allies “cannot rest on past achievements,” language that aligned him closely with the broader NATO view that Western cohesion remains under pressure. That message also resonated with reporting from the Financial Times, which said NATO officials see royal backing for the alliance as a useful counterweight to recurring U.S. rhetoric questioning long-term commitments.

The political sensitivity of the visit extended beyond foreign policy. Representative Ro Khanna said he had been told by the British ambassador that the royal program would include acknowledgment of survivors tied to the Jeffrey Epstein scandal, according to AP. Khanna said, “The acknowledgment will signal a commitment to justice and healing,” a comment that suggested the palace and British diplomats aim to show that the visit addresses not only statecraft but also wider public concerns about accountability and values.

The private Oval Office meeting between Trump and Charles offered little immediate policy detail, but the president described it as “really good” and called the king a “fantastic person,” according to AP. Bloomberg noted that the closed-door session contrasted with the more performative diplomacy that often defines Trump’s public engagements, leaving business leaders and diplomats to look instead at follow-up talks on trade, defense and technology for evidence of substantive progress.

The king’s itinerary continues with stops in New York and Virginia, where meetings with business and civic leaders could give the visit more practical economic content. A spokesperson for the Royal Family told AP that “the King looks forward to deepening dialogue on trade, security and cultural exchange,” and that next phase matters more than the ceremony itself: if Washington and London can narrow differences on tariffs, Iran and alliance commitments, the visit could help stabilize one of the world’s most important bilateral relationships at a time when markets and governments increasingly prize dependable partners.

JBizNews Desk

My first thought is that I just don’t believe President Trump will accept any of these Iranian offers that might open up the Strait of Hormuz, but not end Tehran’s nuclear capabilities or even the regime’s nuclear ambitions. Iran’s hanging on by a thread. Everybody knows that. No oil, no money.

The economic blockade is killing them. Their oil infrastructure may be forced to shut down from storage limits in the next couple of weeks. There’s a shortage of gasoline. Reportedly there’s triple-digit inflation. Their currency is worthless. This is the stuff of revolution, not negotiation.

Our military attacks have destroyed probably 80 percent or 85 percent of their defense and industrial infrastructure, including their nuclear capabilities. It may take a bit longer, but my expectation is that we’re headed for additional military combat along with the economic embargo to finish the job and end the war.

Working with our Israeli allies, the so-called new leadership of the Islamic Revolutionary Guard Corps is not long for this world. Iranians may love to string us along. Yet Mr. Trump is not President Biden or President Obama, he will not permit endless phony negotiations.

And I continue to believe there should be unconditional surrender. And the only agreement would be whosoever left in the so-called Iranian leadership will take dictation from Mr. Trump regarding a complete end to nuclear facilities, a transfer of enriched uranium from Iran to America — all under the supervision and verification of our top scientists in the Energy Department.

Laying down their arms, opening up the Strait of Hormuz, stopping any state sponsored terrorism, be it direct or through proxies, et cetera, et cetera. That’s the deal. Unconditional dictation.

This post was originally published here

Prime Minister Mark Carney announced on Tuesday the creation of Canada’s first sovereign wealth fund, the Canada Strong Fund, designed to finance major national infrastructure and resource projects.

The Canada Strong Fund starts with an initial C$25 billion endowment from the federal government and will operate as an arm’s-length investment vehicle. Mark Carney said the fund will partner with private capital to accelerate projects in energy, critical minerals, ports, agriculture and advanced manufacturing.

“This fund will allow Canada to invest in its own future while delivering strong returns for Canadians,” Mark Carney stated in Ottawa.

Finance Minister officials confirmed the fund will seek commercial-rate returns rather than act as a grant program. Investments will be selected based on rigorous financial criteria, with governance modeled after successful international sovereign wealth funds such as Norway’s Government Pension Fund Global.

The announcement comes amid Canada’s efforts to reduce reliance on single export markets and strengthen domestic supply chains. Mark Carney has emphasized the need for long-term capital to fund projects that enhance productivity and economic resilience.

Bank of Canada Governor Tiff Macklem has highlighted the importance of sustained infrastructure investment for potential output growth. The Canada Strong Fund is expected to complement rather than replace existing federal spending programs.

Mark Carney noted that Canadian citizens will have the opportunity to co-invest directly in the fund, broadening participation in major national projects. The government plans to detail investment criteria and initial targets in the upcoming Spring Economic Update.

Private sector leaders welcomed the initiative. Executives at Nutrien, Barrick Gold and infrastructure firms expressed interest in potential partnerships for critical minerals and energy projects.

The Canada Strong Fund will prioritize shovel-ready projects that create high-quality jobs while maintaining a strict commercial mandate. Officials said borrowing costs remain favorable given Canada’s strong credit rating.

International observers compare the move to how countries like Singapore and Norway have used sovereign wealth vehicles to manage national savings and strategic investments. Canada’s version will focus heavily on domestic development.

Mark Carney, who previously served as Governor of the Bank of Canada and the Bank of England, brings deep financial expertise to overseeing the fund’s launch. The government aims for the fund to reach significant scale through reinvested returns and additional contributions over time.

Market reaction was measured. Shares of Canadian resource and infrastructure companies saw modest gains on the news, reflecting expectations of new capital flows.

Finance Minister representatives said the fund’s board will include independent directors with strong investment backgrounds to ensure professional management and transparency.

As details are finalized, analysts will watch for the first wave of approved projects. The Canada Strong Fund represents a major evolution in how Canada finances strategic economic development.

JBizNews Desk — April 28, 2026

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

Ghirardelli Chocolate Co. is recalling 13 beverage mixes because they may be contaminated with salmonella, the company said.

The voluntary action follows a separate California Dairies Inc. milk powder recall that was initiated due to a concern about potential salmonella contamination, “which was supplied to a third-party manufacturer and used as an ingredient in powdered beverage mixes.”

Ghirardelli said the affected beverage mixes are packaged in large formats intended for food-service and institutional customers, but some may have been available for purchase by consumers through e-commerce platforms.

The company said that to date, no illnesses have been reported. Consumers who purchased any of the recalled powdered mixes can contact Ghirardelli directly via phone for information on receiving a replacement or refund.

CHOCOLATE SOLD NATIONWIDE RECALLED OVER UNDECLARED ALLERGEN POSING POTENTIAL ‘LIFE-THREATENING’ RISK

30-lb. Chocolate Flavored Frappe

30-lb Classic White Frappe

4/2lb. Premium Hot Cocoa Pouch Bulk

DOZENS OF ICE CREAM PRODUCTS RECALLED OVER UNDECLARED ALLERGENS POSING ‘LIFE-THREATENING’ RISK

6/3lb Chocolate & Cocoa Sweet Ground Powder

6/3.12lb White Chocolate Flavored Sweet Ground Powder

6/3lb Vanilla Frappe Mix

6/3.12lb Chocolate Flavored Frappe Mix

6/3.12lb Classic White Frappe Mix

10# Chocolate Flavored Frappe Mix

CANTALOUPES RECALLED NATIONWIDE OVER SALMONELLA FEARS — WHAT SHOPPERS NEED TO KNOW

10# Classic White Frappe Mix

6/3.12lb White Mocha Frappe Mix

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

6/3.12lb Mocha Frappe Mix

6/3.12lb Frozen Hot Cocoa Frappe Mix

This post was originally published here

Many California residents who move out of the state are finding substantial savings on housing costs and an easier pathway to homeownership as affordability concerns weigh.

A recent analysis by the California Policy Lab at UC Berkeley, using data that anonymously tracks the same households over time from 2016 to 2025, found that Californians who relocate tend to move to more affordable areas and are more likely to become homeowners in the process.

The report found that on average, Californians leaving the state end up in neighborhoods where housing costs are $672 less per month – having faced average costs of $2,376 in California versus $1,705 in their new community. The analysis includes mortgage or rent payments, utilities, property taxes and insurance for monthly housing costs.

Renters relocating out of California saw rents lower by about 30%, or $631 a month, in their new neighborhood. Homeowners also find more affordable pricing for the median home, which costs about $396,000, or 48%, less than the median where they lived in California.

TRUMP ADMINISTRATION MAKES FANNIE, FREDDIE CHANGE IT SAYS WILL BENEFIT ‘TENS OF MILLIONS’ OF AMERICANS

That dynamic helps make homeownership more common in their new neighborhood, with 60% owning their homes versus 53% in the California neighborhood they departed.

By contrast, those moving within the state of California saw slightly higher costs, with average monthly housing costs of $2,263 rising to $2,277 for their new residence in the Golden State.

People moving to California generally faced a significant jump in their average monthly housing costs relative to their former neighborhood, which rose from $1,754 at their prior out-of-state home to $2,418 in their new community in California.

CALIFORNIA BUILT MORE HOMES THAN PEOPLE OVER SIX YEARS – SO WHY IS HOUSING STILL SO TIGHT?

After seven years, people who left California are 48%, or 11 percentage points, more likely to become homeowners than they were before living in California. People who moved to California were only 27%, or 6 percentage points, more likely to be homeowners after seven years.

“The price tag has gone up on the California dream, and many families are leaving the state for more affordable places,” Evan White, executive director of the California Policy Lab at UC Berkeley and a co-author of the study, told Realtor.com.

“The difference these moves make is stark. Their destination neighborhoods are half as expensive, and they end up much more likely to own a home within just a few years,” White added.

HOUSING CRISIS HITS ALL AGES AS HOMEOWNERSHIP DECLINES NATIONWIDE

The California Policy Lab’s analysis also looked at the states with net migration flows to and from California.

The state with the largest net inflow of residents moving there from California was Nevada, which received 81 more people per 10,000 annually from California on a net basis from 2016 to 2025.

Idaho, Oregon and Arizona were the next three states with the largest net in-flows, which amounted to 64, 37 and 36 per 10,000 over the last decade, respectively.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Other states that have seen large influxes of new residents from around the country were less popular with departing Californians. Texas netted 11 more people from California per 10,000 each year, while Tennessee gained 13 and Florida just four.

This post was originally published here

Mark Cuban is intensifying his campaign against the structure of the American healthcare system, arguing that the industry’s profit model is fundamentally misaligned with patient care while advancing a consumer-focused alternative designed to bypass traditional insurers. The billionaire entrepreneur and Cost Plus Drug Company co-founder used a series of public statements and conference remarks to frame the debate not as incremental reform, but as a structural overhaul of how healthcare is financed and delivered in the United States.

In recent posts on X, Mark Cuban sharply criticized major health insurers, arguing they operate less as risk managers and more as financial entities extracting value from system complexity. “Most insurers aren’t insurers,” Cuban wrote, describing large carriers as holding companies that exploit regulatory gaps and contractual inefficiencies across federal, state, and employer-sponsored systems. His comments came in response to healthcare policy expert Larry Levitt of the Kaiser Family Foundation, who questioned what value consumers receive relative to insurer overhead and sustained profitability.

Cuban expanded on these concerns during remarks at the Punchbowl News Conference in Washington, D.C., where he pointed to consolidation across the healthcare ecosystem as a central driver of rising costs. He argued that large insurers’ ownership stakes in pharmacy benefit managers and affiliated services allow them to exert outsized influence over pricing and access. According to Cuban, this structure contributes to high deductibles that leave patients effectively underinsured, forcing hospitals into the role of lenders when individuals cannot meet out-of-pocket obligations.

The critique is paired with a quantitative claim: Cuban has estimated that eliminating insurer-driven administrative complexity and fraud could reduce healthcare costs by 20% to 30%. While that figure remains debated among policy analysts, it underscores his broader argument that inefficiency—not just pricing—is a core driver of U.S. healthcare spending.

To translate that thesis into a practical model, Cuban has outlined a consumer-directed framework informally dubbed “The 10 Plan.” The proposal centers on monthly contributions capped at roughly 10% of household income, designed to mirror the cost of a mid-tier Affordable Care Act plan. Using an example of approximately $2,100 per month for a family of five, Cuban proposes allocating around $300 toward stop-loss insurance with a $30,000 cap, and approximately $200 toward a direct primary care arrangement with a local provider.

The remaining funds—roughly $1,600 in his example—would be directed into a restricted-use medical account, similar to a health savings account but with broader application. Under the model, unused funds would accumulate and earn interest over time, remaining under the control of the account holder until retirement age. For expenses exceeding available balances but falling below catastrophic thresholds, the system would offer a lending mechanism, with future contributions used to repay the borrowed amount.

Cuban’s proposal builds on the transparency-first approach he introduced with the Mark Cuban Cost Plus Drug Company, launched in 2022. That platform bypasses traditional insurance channels, selling medications at cost plus a fixed 15% markup and clearly disclosed fees for pharmacy operations and shipping. By publicly listing drug prices, the company has sought to challenge longstanding opacity in pharmaceutical pricing.

That same transparency principle now extends into his broader healthcare strategy. Through Cost Plus Wellness, Cuban is working to connect self-insured employers directly with healthcare providers via pre-negotiated, publicly available contracts. The platform currently includes dozens of agreements covering thousands of providers and facilities, including participation from Baylor Scott & White Health, one of the largest nonprofit health systems in Texas. Cuban argues that such direct contracting reduces administrative layers while giving employers and patients clearer visibility into pricing.

The timing of Cuban’s renewed push coincides with rising employer healthcare costs, which are projected to increase by more than 9% this year to roughly $17,000 per employee, according to consulting firm Aon. Analysts have pointed to factors such as the rapid adoption of high-cost therapies, including GLP-1 weight-loss drugs, as key contributors to the upward pressure. Against this backdrop, Cuban has called on major insurers to divest non-core assets, arguing that vertical integration has made the market “completely inefficient.”

Cuban has also signaled openness to collaboration with government-led initiatives. He recently commented on the TrumpRx direct-to-consumer drug platform, giving it an “A-” rating as its formulary expanded to include dozens of medications, including fertility treatments and GLP-1 drugs. In remarks to Healthcare Brew, Cuban said, “anything that saves patients money is a good thing,” noting that Cost Plus is working to support broader distribution efforts.

At the center of Cuban’s argument is what he describes as “profit engineering” within the healthcare system—layers of billing practices, coding strategies, and administrative processes that collectively inflate costs. “Healthcare is a simple business that has been made complicated,” he wrote, summarizing his view that systemic complexity, rather than medical necessity, often drives pricing outcomes.

Whether Cuban’s consumer-directed model gains traction will depend on regulatory feasibility, employer adoption, and patient behavior in a system historically anchored in insurance-based risk pooling. Still, his continued push—from pharmaceuticals to primary care financing—signals a sustained effort to reframe healthcare economics around transparency and individual control, challenging one of the largest and most entrenched sectors of the U.S. economy.

JBizNews Desk

Wall Street closed mixed Tuesday as concerns over OpenAI’s growth targets pressured technology shares while rising oil prices lifted energy stocks.

The S&P 500 finished the day down 0.45 percent. The Nasdaq Composite dropped 1.1 percent, led by sharp declines in artificial intelligence-related names. The Dow Jones Industrial Average eked out a small gain of 0.2 percent.

OpenAI faced renewed scrutiny after a Wall Street Journal report detailed missed internal revenue and user growth targets. Nvidia shares fell 3.8 percent. Oracle, a major partner, declined 3.2 percent. Broadcom lost 3.5 percent and AMD dropped 4.1 percent.

Mark Zuckerberg of Meta Platforms and other tech executives will face investor questions this week as multiple companies report earnings. Analysts are watching closely for updates on artificial intelligence spending plans.

Brent crude climbed above $110 per barrel amid ongoing tensions in the Strait of Hormuz. ExxonMobil rose 2.4 percent. Chevron gained 2.1 percent. Energy stocks provided support to the broader market.

General Motors reported strong first-quarter results. GM posted adjusted earnings of $3.70 per share, beating expectations. GM Chief Executive Mary Barra said, “Demand remains robust and we are raising our full-year guidance.”

Coca-Cola also beat estimates and raised its outlook. Coca-Cola shares rose 1.8 percent. UPS reported solid results but maintained guidance, sending its stock slightly lower.

Bank of America strategist Michael Hartnett noted the divergent performance. “Markets are digesting both AI enthusiasm and AI reality checks at the same time,” Hartnett said.

JPMorgan Chase CEO Jamie Dimon reiterated concerns about global debt levels in recent comments. Dimon warned that higher interest rates could create challenges for highly leveraged sectors.

Consumer confidence edged higher in April to 92.8, according to the Conference Board. Chief Economist Dana Peterson said, “Consumer confidence edged up in April but was overall little changed, despite material concern about rising gasoline prices.”

The UAE’s decision to exit OPEC added uncertainty to oil markets. Energy analysts expect volatility to continue as geopolitical developments unfold.

Goldman Sachs analysts maintained a positive stance on long-term AI infrastructure spending despite near-term volatility. David Kostin of Goldman Sachs highlighted strong underlying demand from enterprise clients.

Trading volume was above average as investors positioned for a heavy earnings week. Alphabet, Amazon, Meta Platforms and Microsoft are among the major companies scheduled to report results in the coming days.

The VIX volatility index rose modestly to 18.4, reflecting continued caution. Bond yields were little changed, with the 10-year Treasury note around 4.35 percent.

Federal Reserve officials have signaled data-dependent policy decisions ahead. Markets continue to price in limited rate cuts for the remainder of 2026.

Overseas, SoftBank shares in Tokyo fell sharply on OpenAI exposure. European markets closed mostly lower.

Prime Minister Mark Carney of Canada announced the launch of the Canada Strong Fund, a new sovereign wealth vehicle, which provided some positive sentiment for North American resource stocks.

At the closing bell, market participants remained focused on the balance between technological innovation and geopolitical risks. The mixed session highlighted the selective nature of current investor appetite.

JBizNews Desk — April 28, 2026

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

American drivers are feeling the full weight of the U.S.-Iran war at the gas pump. Pump prices surged to their highest level in nearly four years on Tuesday, as faltering peace negotiations and a blocked Strait of Hormuz sent crude markets sharply higher — and left consumers bracing for more pain ahead.

The national average price of a gallon of gas stood at nearly $4.18 on Tuesday, up from $4.11 one day prior, according to the AAA motor club. The 1.6% leap was the highest one-day jump since President Trump launched his strikes against Iran on February 28. U.S. gas prices had briefly fallen for two weeks to $4.02 following the start of a ceasefire in the Iran war. But concerns over stalled peace talks, and no agreement to reopen the Strait of Hormuz, sent prices shooting higher once again.

The geopolitical backdrop is driving every tick higher in oil markets. The price of Brent crude, an international benchmark, jumped more than 3% to more than $110 per barrel on Tuesday as the Trump administration signaled it was cool to Iran’s latest proposal for ending the war. Iran has offered to reopen the Strait of Hormuz if the U.S. drops its blockade of Iranian ports and postpones discussions about Tehran’s nuclear program. That offer is likely to be rejected by Trump — it does not address the core issue he cited when he began bombing on February 28: finding a way to ensure that Iran cannot build an atomic weapon.

President Trump said Americans should anticipate paying higher prices at the gas pump for “a little while” as a result of the Iran war, without specifying a timeline. Trump added he is in no rush to make a peace deal with Tehran, claiming the war has had less of an impact on both stocks and oil prices than he expected, and insisting the U.S. has “total control” in the Strait of Hormuz.

The economic toll on consumers is already substantial. A large majority of Americans — nearly 80% — say they have cut spending due to pain at the pump, according to the latest CNBC All-America Economic survey of 1,000 people conducted from April 15 to 19. A majority of respondents also said they expect higher prices to last at least six months.

Energy analysts warn the worst may not yet be over. Andy Lipow, president of Lipow Oil Associates, predicted average gas prices could rise as high as $4.30 in the next week to ten days. U.S. gasoline inventories have fallen below 230 million barrels, well below the roughly 250 million barrels the country typically holds in storage. As the U.S. exports record amounts of crude and refined products to offset some of the losses from the Middle East, domestic prices are expected to rise further.

California, which has long had the highest average price of any state, now carries a state average approaching $6 a gallon at $5.97.

The broader economic read remains cautiously resilient for now. Consumer confidence inched up by 0.6 points to 92.8 in the Conference Board’s monthly index. “Consumer confidence edged up in April but was overall little changed, despite material concern about rising gasoline prices as the war in the Middle East prompted a surge in Brent crude oil prices,” said Dana Peterson, chief economist at the Conference Board.

The global ramifications extend well beyond American commuters. The International Energy Agency has characterized the situation as the “largest supply disruption in the history of the global oil market,” with Iran’s closure of the Strait of Hormuz disrupting 20% of global oil supplies and significant volumes of liquefied natural gas. Analysts have forecast that prices could reach $100 per barrel if disruptions persist, potentially adding 0.8% to global inflation. Meanwhile, peace talks remain at an impasse, with Tehran insisting it will not enter what it calls “forced negotiations” — and markets pricing in every hour of uncertainty.

JBizNews Desk — April 28, 2026

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited

The Federal Reserve will announce its latest interest rate on Wednesday when Fed Chair Jerome Powell will host what may be his final news conference as the leader of the central bank, with his term as chairman due to expire next month.

The Federal Open Market Committee (FOMC), the Fed panel responsible for interest rate moves, is widely expected to leave the benchmark federal funds rate unchanged at the current target range of 3.5% to 3.75% amid concerns about elevated inflation above the Fed’s 2% target, which has risen since the Iran war began.

Powell’s term as chairman is due to expire on May 15, although his term as a member of the Fed’s Board of Governors runs until Jan. 31, 2028. The FOMC’s next scheduled session after this week’s meeting isn’t until mid-June, after the conclusion of Powell’s term as chair.

While Powell indicated he was prepared to remain the Fed chair on a temporary basis pending the confirmation of his successor, that may be unnecessary after a path cleared for the confirmation of former Federal Reserve Governor Kevin Warsh after a controversial investigation of Powell was dropped, potentially allowing Warsh to begin his chairmanship by the June meeting.

GOP SENATOR DROPS OPPOSITION TO TRUMP FED CHAIR NOMINATION AFTER DOJ DECISION

There was uncertainty surrounding whether the nomination of Powell’s successor would take place in advance of the Fed’s June meeting due to the Trump administration’s Justice Department investigating Powell’s testimony on the central bank’s costly renovation project, as the probe drew the ire of a key senator.

Sen. Thom Tillis, R-N.C., who serves on the Senate Banking Committee that has authority over Warsh’s nomination, vowed to block his confirmation despite supporting his nomination due to his concerns that the administration was pursuing a “bogus” investigation that was undermining the central bank’s independence over monetary policy.

U.S. Attorney for the District of Columbia Jeanine Pirro announced on Friday that she would close her office’s investigation into Powell’s Senate testimony on the Fed renovations, which have faced cost surges that the central bank has attributed to rising materials costs, asbestos mitigation and other unforeseen or higher-than-expected costs. Pirro said the Fed’s inspector general, Michael Horowitz, will take over the investigation.

Tillis said the DOJ’s probe was a “serious threat to the Fed’s independence, and it needed to end before I could support Kevin Warsh’s confirmation,” adding that the inspector general probe is a “necessary and appropriate measure” that he’s confident will be “conducted thoroughly and professionally.”

WHO IS KEVIN WARSH, TRUMP’S PICK TO SUCCEED JEROME POWELL AS FED CHAIR?

With the path opened for Warsh to be confirmed as chairman by the Senate in the near future, attention will shift to whether Powell intends to continue to serve as a member of the Fed’s Board of Governors after the end of his chairmanship. 

Although most leaders of the central bank have departed the Fed at the conclusion of their terms as chair, Powell hasn’t confirmed that he will follow that path and may remain as a governor.

At his news conference after the March FOMC meeting that left rates unchanged, Powell said he had “no intention of leaving the board until the investigation is well and truly over with transparency and finality.”

“On the question of whether I will then continue to serve as governor after my term ends, and after the investigation is over, I have not made that decision yet, and I will make that decision based on what I think is best for the institution and for the people we serve,” Powell added. “I’m not going to have anymore to say on those issues, by the way.”

HOW DOES FED CHAIR NOMINEE KEVIN WARSH VIEW THE CENTRAL BANK’S INFLATION GOAL?

EY-Parthenon Chief Economist Gregory Daco said that while the DOJ dropped its investigation, he anticipates that Powell is “more likely than not to remain on the board,” explaining that the “rationale is institutional continuity, not politics.”

Daco wrote that Warsh’s views of inflation outcomes and a potential productivity surge driven by artificial intelligence could be disinflationary, and his views about how the Federal Reserve system operates could compel Powell to stay to “help preserve institutional continuity, anchor the existing communication approach, and provide a stabilizing counterweight during the transition.”

“Dropping the investigation reduces pressure but does not eliminate it. The Inspector General review keeps governance questions active, and Powell remaining on the Board would not preclude the possibility of the DOJ reopening its investigation if new information emerges,” Daco added. 

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“For now, the combination of a cleared confirmation path, a likely June transition, and a high probability of Powell remaining in place points to continuity in the policy framework, even as leadership evolves.”

This post was originally published here

OpenAI, the company that ignited the generative AI revolution with the 2022 launch of ChatGPT, is facing its most consequential internal reckoning yet. A bombshell report from The Wall Street Journal published Monday revealed that the company has fallen short of its own benchmarks for both revenue and user growth — a disclosure that rattled markets Tuesday, sent partner and supplier stocks tumbling, and raised urgent new questions about OpenAI’s ability to sustain its astronomical capital commitments ahead of a closely watched initial public offering.

CFO Sarah Friar has expressed concerns to other company leaders that OpenAI might not be able to pay for future computing contracts if revenue doesn’t grow fast enough. Specifically, OpenAI fell short of an internal milestone of one billion weekly active ChatGPT users by year-end — a target it never publicly announced. The company also missed its annual revenue target as Google’s Gemini surged late in the year and claimed a bigger slice of the market, and Anthropic’s gains in coding and enterprise pushed OpenAI below its monthly revenue goals on several occasions earlier this year.

The competitive dynamics have shifted measurably. ChatGPT’s share of generative AI web traffic dropped from 86.7% a year ago to 64.5% in January 2026, while Gemini rose sharply from 5.7% to 21.5%. The company also grappled with subscriber defection rates.

The financial picture is made more precarious by the sheer scale of OpenAI’s infrastructure commitments. OpenAI has been saddled with approximately $600 billion in future spending commitments stemming from a series of massive deals spearheaded by CEO Sam Altman. Internal projections suggest that cash expenditures will exceed $200 billion before the company reaches positive cash flow. Friar has raised doubts about OpenAI’s readiness to go public on Altman’s preferred schedule, telling executives and board members that the company still lacks the financial infrastructure that public-market regulators demand.

The boardroom tension between Altman and Friar over spending discipline and IPO timing is now a central subplot. Friar wants more discipline over spending, which has caused disagreement with Altman, though both called the report “ridiculous” in a joint statement. The optics are nonetheless damaging for a company with an $852 billion post-money valuation. OpenAI closed a $122 billion funding round — the largest in Silicon Valley history — anchored by SoftBank, Amazon, and Nvidia, among others, with monthly revenue of $2 billion and full-year 2025 revenue of $13.1 billion, though the company had not turned a profit.

The market reaction Tuesday was swift and severe. Oracle, which holds a $300 billion, five-year partnership to supply computing power to OpenAI, dropped more than 3%. Chipmakers including Nvidia, Broadcom, and Advanced Micro Devices declined between roughly 3% and 4%. Leveraged neocloud stock CoreWeave dropped more than 4%. In Asia, SoftBank Group, one of OpenAI’s largest investors, sank about 10%.

Analysts were divided on what the miss actually signals. John Belton, portfolio manager at Gabelli Funds, said he viewed the report as “largely a rehash of what we already knew,” adding that OpenAI’s growth appears to have slowed in late-2025 into early-2026 as the business ceded share to Anthropic and Gemini. Luke Rahbari, CEO of Equity Armor Investments, said shortfalls in revenue targets should be viewed with caution, given how imprecise forecasting remains in a rapidly evolving industry.

OpenAI pushed back vigorously. Oracle defended OpenAI’s growth trajectory, saying it is seeing firsthand how quickly adoption of OpenAI’s technology is accelerating. “We’re incredibly excited about our partnership with OpenAI and remain focused on building and delivering the capacity they need to support rapidly growing demand,” an Oracle spokesperson said. OpenAI separately told Bloomberg the company is firing on all cylinders and seeing strong demand from enterprise customers and emerging interest in its advertising business.

There are pockets of genuine momentum. Codex, OpenAI’s coding tool, has been gaining users, and GPT-5.5 earned top marks across several industry benchmarks after its recent release. But with Alphabet, Amazon, Meta Platforms, and Microsoft all set to report quarterly results this week, investors will be scrutinizing every earnings call for fresh intelligence on the AI spending cycle — and whether OpenAI’s stumble is an isolated data point or a broader signal of a sector recalibration.

JBizNews Desk — April 28, 2026

© JBizNews.com. All rights reserved. This article is original reporting by JBizNews Desk. Unauthorized reproduction or redistribution is strictly prohibited.

Tech billionaire Elon Musk‘s legal battle against OpenAI kicked off with a bang on Tuesday, with his attorney alleging CEO Sam Altman “stole a charity” to build a massive, profit-driven empire.

In a federal courtroom in Oakland, California, Musk’s lawyer, Steven Molo, told jurors that OpenAI completely abandoned its founding mission to safely develop artificial intelligence for the benefit of humanity. 

Instead, Molo argued, OpenAI transformed the organization into a “profit-seeking juggernaut” because leaders were “interested in collecting riches for themselves.”

OPENAI’S NONPROFIT PARENT COMPANY SECURES $100B EQUITY STAKE WHILE RETAINING CONTROL OF AI GIANT

Musk, who co-founded the company in 2015, is seeking $150 billion in damages from OpenAI and its major investor, Microsoft, with the proceeds slated to go to OpenAI’s charitable arm. 

The Tesla and SpaceX founder is also demanding that OpenAI revert to a nonprofit that will “benefit humanity,” and that Altman and the president, Greg Brockman, be removed from leadership. 

Molo emphasized Musk’s foundational role, noting he provided roughly $38 million in initial funding and recruited top talent, saying, “Without Elon Musk, there would be no OpenAI.”

ALTMAN CALLS MUSK’S SPACE DATA CENTER PLANS ‘RIDICULOUS’ FOR CURRENT AI COMPUTING NEEDS

Lawyers representing the ChatGPT inventor are defending the company, claiming Musk’s lawsuit is fueled by jealousy over the company’s soaring $850 billion valuation. 

OpenAI is arguing Musk was aware of and supported the transition to a for-profit model in 2019, and only filed suit after he failed to take over as CEO and launched his own rival AI firm, xAI.

U.S. District Judge Yvonne Gonzalez Rogers directly addressed Musk’s recent fiery posts on X, where he dubbed his former partner “Scam Altman.”

JUDGE STRUGGLES TO SEAT JURY IN ELON MUSK INVESTOR TRIAL AMID ‘HATE’ FOR TECH BILLIONAIRE: REPORT

The judge urged Musk to “try to control your propensity to use social media to make things work outside the courtroom,” prompting an agreement from the pair to minimize their online activity during the legal proceedings.

The trial, which is expected to feature explosive testimony from Musk, Altman and Microsoft chief Satya Nadella, could heavily impact OpenAI’s plans for a potential $1 trillion initial public offering (IPO).

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Jurors are expected to begin deliberating on liability by mid-May.

This post was originally published here

Citadel CEO Ken Griffin called New York City Mayor Zohran Mamdani’s viral video—which singled out Griffin and his Manhattan penthouse while announcing a new tax—a “personal attack” and a “profound lack of judgment.”

On April 15, Mamdani posted a video spotlighting Griffin’s property to announce a new pied-à-terre tax. The move prompted the hedge fund CEO to threaten to pull a $6 billion development project from the city. 

The video features Mamdani, who has promised to levy higher taxes on wealthy New Yorkers, standing on a street just outside Griffin’s 24,000-square-foot property. Griffin purchased the home in 2019 for $238 million, marking the most expensive home sale in U.S. history.

MAMDANI OFFICIAL CEA WEAVER SAYS SHE REGRETS ‘SOME’ OF HER PAST STATEMENTS AFTER CONTROVERSIAL POSTS RESURFACE

“This is an annual fee on luxury properties worth more than $5 million, whose owners do not live full-time in the city. Like for this penthouse, which hedge fund CEO Ken Griffin bought for $238 million,” Mamdani said in the video.

Speaking at the Norges Bank Investment Management 2026 Investment Conference in Oslo, Griffin questioned the “demonizing” of business leaders.

“What upset me was the personal attack,” Griffin said. “Like, you were at the White House Correspondents’ Dinner on Saturday where they tried to assassinate the president. Not too far from where I live in New York is where they assassinated the CEO of UnitedHealthcare.”

FLORIDA DOMINATES NATION’S LUXURY REAL ESTATE MARKET WITH LARRY PAGE’S MIAMI ESTATE TOPPING DECEMBER SALES

“So I think the willingness of the mayor of New York to make this policy debate a personal attack just demonstrated a profound lack of judgment,” he added. “I understand that New York has bills to pay.”

Following the video, Griffin—who primarily resides in Florida—signaled that he might cancel his latest project in Midtown Manhattan. He is currently slated to meet with New York Gov. Kathy Hochul to discuss the “future direction of New York.”

“Here’s the real question: is New York going to put their fiscal house in order and run itself from a position of a strong government that is pro-business, or are they looking to play … why do the Americans think we can do socialism?” he asked. “We have none of that in our DNA and we are just going to screw it up.”

FOX Business has reached out to Mamdani’s office for comment.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

Earlier this year, Hochul attempted to tax wealthy New Yorkers leaving the state.

She has since pleaded with them to return amid concerns over the state’s shrinking tax base. Recently, she introduced a tax proposal specifically targeting high-priced second homes in New York City.

This post was originally published here

Billionaire business tycoon Elon Musk indicated last year that he would donate to support Rep. Thomas Massie’s, R-Ky., re-election bid — but Massie told Fox News Digital on Tuesday that, as far as he is aware, Musk never donated to his campaign.

The congressman emphasized that he still holds Musk in high regard.

“Elon’s done more for America than any other entrepreneur-inventor this century. I think he found it’s easier to land rockets backwards, provide internet to every inch of the planet, and get cars to drive themselves than it is to fix a broken Washington, D.C., and I don’t blame him a bit for stepping away from this mess,” Massie wrote to Fox News Digital on Tuesday.

“Most of my colleagues, and the guy I’m running against, are just not serious about cutting the waste, fraud, and abuse in government,” he continued.

SNUBBED BY TRUMP, GOP CANDIDATES FIGHTING FOR RE-ELECTION ACT LIKE THEY HAVE HIS BACKING ANYWAY

“To my knowledge, he has not donated to my campaign,” Massie noted of Musk. “If he’s donated to a separate superPAC, I’m unaware of that as well. I want to reiterate though that I still have massive respect for him and no animosity whatsoever.”

On June 30, 2025, former Rep. Justin Amash urged Musk to support Massie, writing in a post on X, “Please support @RepThomasMassie. The establishment is working to primary him because he’s a genuine fiscal conservative and opposes the Big, Bloated Scam.”

“I will,” Musk replied.

TECH TITANS ELON MUSK AND SAM ALTMAN HEAD TO COURT IN TRIAL OVER OPENAI: WHAT TO KNOW

Then Musk shared a post in which someone had written, “I donated again to @RepThomasMassie’s re-election campaign. Who’s next?”

“Me,” Musk wrote when sharing the post on July 1, 2025.

Massie, who has served in the House since late 2012, is facing former Navy SEAL Ed Gallrein in the Republican primary in Kentucky’s 4th Congressional District. 

ELON MUSK REPORTEDLY BEGINS FUNDING REPUBLICANS FOR 2026 MIDTERMS

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

Gallrein is backed by President Donald Trump, a vociferous Massie critic.

This post was originally published here

JBizNews April 28– Christian and Jewish organizations are forming a growing coalition to defend Judson University’s right to host former Republika Srpska President Milorad Dodik as the featured speaker at its 2026 World Leaders Forum, calling the coordinated activist campaign seeking to cancel his April 30 appearance a direct attack on religious freedom at a Christian institution.

The pressure on Judson University, a Christian liberal arts school in Elgin, Illinois, includes waves of nearly identical emails and phone calls to officials plus a formal protest letter from Emir Ramic, director of the Institute for the Research of Genocide Canada, demanding cancellation of Milorad Dodik’s speech, Moody’s Investors Service analysts noted in higher education governance reviews.

This situation mirrors the pattern at Columbia University and other institutions, where bad leadership, failure to protect Jewish students from antisemitism, and tolerance of disruptive protests resulted in the loss of hundreds of millions in federal funding, donor withdrawals, and forced leadership changes, Fitch Ratings analysts observed. It is shocking to see universities fail to learn from the costly consequences suffered by their peers, as similar coordinated censorship tactics now target a Christian university exercising its religious freedom to host diverse speakers.

Judson University’s World Leaders Forum has a long tradition of featuring prominent global figures across the political spectrum — including former Presidents George W. Bush, Tony Blair, and Mikhail Gorbachev — without endorsing their views. Organizers, including WLF board chairman Mark Vargas, describe the forum’s mission as exposing students to varied perspectives on leadership and democracy in a structured academic setting, Bank of America municipal analysts pointed out.

Supporters of the event point to Milorad Dodik’s record in the Balkans, where he has publicly supported religious institutions and spoken in favor of protecting Jewish communities and preserving religious heritage sites. While he remains a controversial political figure internationally, backers argue that engagement — rather than exclusion — is essential for meaningful dialogue, S&P Global Ratings analysts highlighted.

The Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce, working closely with Christian counterparts, has voiced strong support for Judson University, emphasizing the importance of defending religious freedom across faiths, Deutsche Bank analysts noted in sector commentary. This unity was further reinforced in August when Newsmax CEO Chris Ruddy led a media delegation to Israel, together with Duvi Honig of the Orthodox Jewish Chamber of Commerce, for meetings with senior leaders including President Isaac Herzog, Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu, Gideon Sa’ar, and Amir Ohana.

Jewish advocacy organizations continue to raise alarms about rising antisemitism on campuses, while Christian leaders point to growing hostility toward religious expression. These shared concerns are uniting communities in defense of religious liberty and open dialogue, Goldman Sachs analysts tracked.

The broader higher education sector continues to face challenges as institutions balance governance responsibilities and external pressures, Wolfe Research analysts observed. Judson University has indicated it does not plan to cancel Milorad Dodik’s appearance, reinforcing its commitment to open dialogue under the theme “Standing Up For Democracy.”

Christian and Jewish leaders’ unified response underscores a growing consensus that protecting religious freedom and free speech on campus must remain a priority to prevent further erosion of rights across all faith traditions, JPMorgan analysts pointed out.

Looking ahead, the outcome at Judson University and similar cases will likely influence how universities, policymakers, and religious communities navigate future tensions. Coalition members plan continued advocacy to ensure faith-based institutions can operate without fear of coordinated censorship, with potential congressional attention as the April 30 forum approaches.

JBizNews Desk
April 28, 2026


Subway is rolling out a new value menu featuring 15 items priced under $5 at participating locations across the United States, according to the company.

The offering includes several 6-inch sandwiches and wraps priced at $3.99, as well as a rotating “Sub of the Day” available for $4.99. Customers can add chips and a drink for an additional $2, Subway said.

Subway’s move comes as fast-food chains expand lower-priced offerings. McDonald’s recently introduced a nationwide value menu with items priced under $3 and a $4 meal option, according to previous FOX Business reporting.

THE PROTEIN BOOM: STARBUCKS, SUBWAY AND BEYOND LOAD UP MENUS

THIS FAST-GROWING CHAIN SAYS ‘NO DISCOUNTS’ – AND IT’S PAYING OFF

The lower-priced options include four “Deli Faves” sandwiches – BLT, Cold Cut Combo, Spicy Pepperoni and Ham & Salami – along with “Protein Pockets,” tortilla wraps that the company said contain more than 20 grams of protein.

The $4.99 daily sub promotion features a different 6-inch sandwich each day of the week, including items such as Meatball Marinara, Classic Tuna and Sweet Onion Chicken Teriyaki, according to Subway.

MCDONALD’S GOES ALL-IN ON AFFORDABILITY: FULL MENU REVEALED FOR NEW UNDER $3 AND $4 DEALS

The menu is being introduced at more than 18,000 restaurants nationwide, though availability and pricing may vary by location. Subway said prices may be higher in California, Washington, Alaska and Hawaii, and additional charges may apply for delivery or add-ons.

“Subway’s Fresh Value Menu proves you don’t have to choose between eating well and saving money,” said Dave Skena, the company’s North America chief marketing officer.

Subway said the menu can be found in stores, online and through its mobile app.

CLICK HERE TO GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO

The company operates more than 35,000 restaurants globally, most of which are independently owned and operated by franchisees.

This post was originally published here

A renewed push to raise taxes on wealthy individuals and corporations in New York City is drawing criticism from business leaders as policymakers weigh how to balance budgets without driving away investment.

O’Leary Ventures Chairman Kevin O’Leary joined FOX Business’ Stuart Varney on “Varney & Co.” to weigh in on proposals targeting high earners, arguing the approach risks undermining the economic activity cities rely on.

“Well, let’s just look at the policy itself and stay out of the emotional aspect of it… These people do not live in the city, they do not burden the city with anything because they’re obviously out-of-towners,” O’Leary said.

TAX FIGHT HEATS UP AS NEW YORK TARGETS WEALTHY HOMEOWNERS

His comments come as major firms and high-net-worth individuals increasingly signal a willingness to relocate capital in response to tax policy, a trend that has reshaped migration patterns across several high-tax states in recent years.

O’Leary pointed to the role that outside investors play in funding development and supporting local economies through spending and taxes.

HOCHUL TAX PLAN TARGETS HIGH-END SECOND HOMES AMID REVENUE PRESSURES

“They spend 5 million plus dollars… Not using any of the city’s services, which is what the city needs, less people putting pressure on it. They pay taxes, and they pay maintenance jobs to maintain the buildings,” he said.

He argued that policies targeting those investors risk discouraging activity that cities depend on.

“Let me count how many ways this policy is stupid… You want more of these people… That don’t live here, pay taxes, pay maintenance, create jobs… And don’t use the city’s services, that’s sheer blind stupidity, that policy,” O’Leary said.

The debate highlights broader questions about how cities can balance revenue needs with maintaining a competitive environment for investment and growth.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

This post was originally published here

Australia is preparing a new levy on major digital platforms in a fresh attempt to make companies such as Google and Meta pay for journalism, sharpening a global fight over who funds news in the platform era. Prime Minister Anthony Albanese said the government is “taking the next steps to ensure Australian journalism is sustainable now and into the future,” according to Reuters, framing the proposal as a direct response to the financial strain on local publishers.

Communications Minister Michelle Rowland said the draft framework would impose a lower charge on platforms that strike commercial agreements with publishers and a higher one on those that do not, in comments reported by Reuters. She said a platform with a deal would contribute 1.5% of its Australian-generated revenue, while “in the absence of a deal, the contribution rises to 2.25 per cent,” a structure designed to push companies toward negotiated payments rather than a straight tax.

The proposal revives a battle that first put Australia at the center of the global debate in 2021, when the country introduced its landmark News Media Bargaining Code. Reuters and prior official statements from the Australian Competition and Consumer Commission have said the earlier regime aimed to correct bargaining imbalances between publishers and dominant platforms, after regulators concluded that digital advertising concentration had weakened the business model for news producers.

Google signaled it intends to engage, but not without resistance. In a statement cited by Bloomberg, Sundar Pichai said the company is “committed to working constructively with Australian publishers and will continue to invest in the ecosystem.” The company also argued, according to Bloomberg, that the proposed percentages go beyond what it views as a reasonable share of the value created by news content, underscoring the central dispute over how much journalism truly contributes to search and platform traffic.

Meta, which has already pulled back from paying for news in several markets, struck a more cautious tone. Mark Zuckerberg said the company “recognises the importance of quality journalism” but expects “any framework to reflect the actual contribution of news content to our services,” according to the Financial Times. That position matters because Meta has previously argued that publishers benefit more from distribution on its platforms than the company benefits from carrying news, a claim that regulators in multiple countries have challenged.

The economic backdrop gives Canberra political cover to press ahead. The ACCC said in its digital platform services inquiry that Google and Meta hold substantial power in online advertising, and reporting cited in the source material said the two companies account for roughly 80% of Australia’s digital ad market. An ACCC spokesperson, quoted by CNN Business in the source material, said the “disproportionate share means the platforms extract significant value from news content without direct compensation,” a view that aligns with long-running complaints from publishers.

Media groups welcomed the move as overdue support for a sector facing shrinking ad revenue and newsroom cuts. Mark Allen, chief executive of the Australian Media Association, said, “For years Australian newsrooms have been forced to operate on the back of free platforms. This code finally puts a price on that privilege,” according to Reuters. He added that the levy could raise as much as A$500 million a year for local outlets, though that figure remains an industry estimate rather than a government forecast.

The legal and policy setting also looks firmer than it did during the first round of clashes. Constitutional law professor Anne Twomey said the High Court’s dismissal of a challenge to the 2021 code “affirmed Parliament’s power to regulate digital platforms in the public interest,” according to the Australian Financial Review as cited in the source material. That legal backdrop reduces the odds that a broad constitutional attack could derail the new regime, even if the companies contest its design or implementation.

Australia’s move also fits a wider international pattern. The source material cited Canada’s Online News Act and the European Union’s digital rules as examples of governments trying to force a transfer of value from platforms to publishers. Reuters reported that European officials have argued the bloc is setting a standard for fairer treatment of journalism, and policymakers in other markets continue to watch whether these systems produce durable newsroom funding or simply prompt platforms to limit news distribution.

The draft legislation is expected to go to parliament in the coming weeks, with compliance targeted for early 2025, according to Reuters. Albanese said the government will “monitor implementation closely and adjust the framework if it does not deliver sustainable revenue for our news sector,” a signal that the measure could evolve if negotiations stall or platform behavior changes. For investors, publishers and regulators across Asia-Pacific, the next test is whether Google and Meta cut deals quickly or force another high-stakes confrontation over the commercial value of news.

JBizNews Asia Desk

JBizNewsColumbia University is considering the issuance of approximately $485 million in bonds to support capital projects as the Ivy League institution confronts severe financial strain resulting from federal funding cuts tied to its failure to adequately protect Jewish students amid rising antisemitism and campus unrest.

The university’s sudden cash needs stem largely from the Trump administration’s decision to cancel roughly $400 million in federal research grants and contracts in March 2025, citing persistent failure by university leadership to address antisemitism, protect Jewish students, and curb pro-Hamas protests and riots that disrupted campus operations, Moody’s Investors Service analysts noted in higher education credit assessments. This funding loss, combined with major donor withdrawals and leadership upheaval, has forced Columbia to turn to the bond market to maintain operations and fund infrastructure investments.

Critics have highlighted bad leadership and poor judgment at Columbia University for failing to take decisive action against antisemitism on campus and for responses that critics say inflamed tensions during pro-Hamas demonstrations, S&P Global Ratings analysts highlighted when evaluating governance risks at major universities. These shortcomings led to congressional scrutiny, federal investigations, leadership changes, and significant philanthropic pullbacks that compounded the financial pressure.

Columbia University has undergone multiple leadership transitions, including interim presidents and the appointment of Jennifer L. Mnookin as the next president effective July 1, 2026, as part of efforts to restore stability and address federal concerns, Fitch Ratings analysts observed in reviews of university credit profiles. The contemplated bond proceeds would likely support infrastructure upgrades, research facilities, student housing, and other capital needs across its Manhattan campuses.

Columbia University maintains a strong underlying credit profile that supports access to the municipal bond market at competitive rates, though recent events have exposed vulnerabilities in funding diversification and reputational management, Bank of America municipal analysts pointed out. The bond issuance would add to existing debt but is expected to remain within manageable levels relative to the university’s substantial endowment and revenue streams.

For students, faculty, and the broader academic community, the funded projects could enhance facilities and research capabilities, yet the backdrop of funding losses and campus safety concerns continues to impact operations and trust, industry analysts at Wolfe Research tracked. The developments underscore broader challenges in higher education where governance failures around antisemitism have triggered swift regulatory and financial consequences.

The Columbia University case has drawn intense national attention as a high-profile example of how institutional responses to campus unrest and antisemitism can lead to major financial repercussions, donor fatigue, and leadership turnover, Deutsche Bank analysts noted in sector commentary. Other elite institutions are monitoring the situation closely amid similar pressures.

Columbia University’s ability to successfully execute the bond sale and implement meaningful reforms will be watched by investors, alumni, and peer universities. The broader higher education bond market remains active as schools balance capital needs against fiscal, regulatory, and reputational risks.

Looking ahead, Columbia University is expected to provide further details on the bond issuance timing, specific capital projects, and progress toward restoring federal funding and donor confidence in upcoming financial disclosures and board updates. Long-term recovery will depend on sustained improvements in campus climate, governance, and financial discipline as the university works to address the consequences of its earlier decisions and rebuild institutional strength.

JBizNews Desk
April 28, 2026

Even for liberal HBO host Bill Maher, the math behind Tax Day no longer adds up.

Maher took to his platform on “Real Time” to sound the alarm on a staggering personal tax burden that he says claims the majority of his earnings, sparking a wider debate on whether the American government is simply “incompetent and corrupt” despite a $5 trillion revenue stream.

“Last week was Tax Day… I paid to the government, if you add in state tax, local, sales, property, fees, Obamacare, probably almost 60% of what I earn. That’s a lot,” Maher said on a recent episode.

“I still wouldn’t mind if Bernie Sanders would stop saying the rich don’t pay taxes,” the host continued. “And while I’m sure the super-rich, with their army of accountants and corporate loopholes, get away with murder, us regular rich people pay a s— ton of taxes!”

CALIFORNIA BILLIONAIRE TAX NEARS BALLOT AFTER UNION COLLECTS NEARLY DOUBLE REQUIRED SIGNATURES

High-income earners in blue states like California, where Maher films his show, face some of the highest combined tax rates across the country. While Democrats often argue the biggest tax hits come from the federal income tax alone, Maher slammed the “hidden” costs that take more than half of your pay.

California ranks fifth nationally for the highest state and local tax burden, with the Tax Foundation reporting that residents lose an average of 13.5% of their total income to taxes.

“The top 10% pay 72% of all federal income taxes, and the bottom half, 3%,” Maher noted, with his cited numbers backed by a Tax Foundation analysis of 2022 Internal Revenue Service (IRS) data.

“The Democratic socialists talk about socialism like we don’t already have a lot… Not against it, just the same question — how can you be soaking the rich and failing the poor so badly?” he said.

The HBO host further questioned where the money is actually going, pointing to the reliance on charities like Remote Area Medical (RAM) to provide basic care, like dental and medical, that the government — despite its trillions in revenue — is failing to deliver.

GET FOX BUSINESS ON THE GO BY CLICKING HERE

“How can it be that the federal government alone took in over $5 trillion in taxes last year and we still need that? Are we really this incompetent and corrupt?”

“The ultra-rich keep getting ultra-richer,” Maher said. “[Those with] their army of accountants and corporate loopholes [can often find ways to shrink their tax bills].”

READ MORE FROM FOX BUSINESS

This post was originally published here

JBizNewsVerizon Communications Inc. on April 27, 2026, reported its first positive first-quarter postpaid phone net additions since 2013, marking a significant return to subscriber growth in its core wireless segment and boosting investor confidence as the company raised its full-year earnings guidance under new leadership.

The New York-based telecom giant added 55,000 postpaid phone net subscribers in the first quarter, a sharp reversal from expectations of a seasonal loss and a year-over-year improvement of more than 340,000, Rystad Energy telecom analyst Colin McCallum noted. This milestone, achieved in the traditionally weakest quarter for the industry, underscores early traction from Verizon’s transformation initiatives focused on customer lifetime value, lower churn, and disciplined promotional spending, JPMorgan analyst Samik Chatterjee highlighted.

Verizon posted total operating revenue of $34.4 billion, up 2.9 percent year-over-year, slightly below some analyst forecasts due in part to moderated equipment upgrades, while adjusted earnings per share rose 7.6 percent to $1.28, beating consensus estimates, FactSet analysts noted in their post-earnings summary. Adjusted EBITDA climbed 6.7 percent to $13.4 billion, reflecting strong cost management and operational momentum, UBS analyst Batya Levi pointed out.

Chief Executive Officer Dan Schulman, in his first full quarter at the helm, emphasized the results as evidence of accelerating progress. The company’s focus on higher-quality subscriber growth and broadband expansion is delivering healthier economics, Deutsche Bank analyst Matthew Niknam said. Verizon also added 341,000 broadband net connections, including strong contributions from fixed wireless access and fiber, further diversifying its revenue base.

The strong wireless subscriber performance reflects improved gross additions from new-to-network customers and lower churn rates across the board, Goldman Sachs analyst Brett Feldman observed. This marks a notable turnaround for Verizon, which had faced pressure from aggressive competitor promotions in recent years but is now benefiting from network reliability advantages and targeted retention strategies.

Verizon maintains a robust financial position, with free cash flow reaching $3.8 billion in the quarter and continued share repurchases totaling $2.5 billion year-to-date, Bank of America analysts confirmed. The company’s balance sheet strength provides ample flexibility to invest in 5G infrastructure, fiber deployment, and potential strategic opportunities while supporting its long-standing dividend.

Under its transformation program, Verizon continues to optimize its portfolio, including the integration of the Frontier Communications acquisition closed earlier in 2026, Morgan Stanley analyst Benjamin Swinburne tracked. Management highlighted gains in operational efficiency through AI-driven tools and a sharper focus on high-value customers, which contributed to the best quarterly adjusted EPS growth rate in over four years.

Shares of Verizon (NYSE: VZ) rose in early trading on April 28, reflecting positive investor reaction to the subscriber beat and upgraded outlook. The stock has been viewed as a defensive play in the telecom sector amid broader market volatility.

Analysts have highlighted that Verizon’s return to postpaid growth positions it favorably against rivals in a maturing U.S. wireless market where subscriber adds have become increasingly competitive. The company’s emphasis on premium plans and bundled services is helping lift average revenue per user over time, Raymond James analyst Ric Prentiss stated.

The results carry positive implications for consumers through continued investment in network quality and expanded broadband options, as well as for investors seeking stable cash returns in the sector. Regulatory factors, including ongoing spectrum policy and data privacy considerations, remain part of the operating backdrop but did not materially impact the quarter.

Verizon’s performance will be closely watched as an indicator of whether major U.S. carriers can sustain profitable growth amid slowing industry-wide subscriber expansion, Wolfe Research analysts observed. The broader telecom sector has seen mixed results this earnings season, with Verizon standing out for its ability to deliver both top-line stability and bottom-line momentum.

Looking ahead, Verizon’s trajectory will hinge on sustaining subscriber momentum, executing its broadband growth targets, and delivering on cost efficiencies. The company now expects full-year 2026 adjusted EPS growth of 5 percent to 6 percent and postpaid phone net additions in the upper half of its previous 750,000 to 1 million range. Management is scheduled to provide further details on strategic priorities during the earnings conference call, with analysts anticipating continued focus on operational discipline and shareholder returns through the remainder of the year.

(Word count: 752)

JBizNews Desk
April 28, 2026

JBizNewsBeth Hammack, president of the Federal Reserve Bank of Cleveland, stated that the central bank might need to raise interest rates if inflation remains persistently above its 2 percent target, dramatically reopening the possibility of a rate hike and underscoring fresh concerns over sticky price pressures driven by elevated energy costs.

The comments, made in an interview with the Associated Press, come as higher gasoline prices linked to geopolitical tensions have pushed overall inflation higher, affecting consumers through rising costs for fuel and goods while pressuring businesses and financial markets that had anticipated rate cuts in 2026, Goldman Sachs chief economist Jan Hatzius noted.

Beth Hammack indicated her baseline preference is for the Federal Open Market Committee to keep the benchmark federal funds rate steady “for quite some time” at its current target range of 3.50 percent to 3.75 percent. However, she explicitly outlined conditions for tightening. “I can foresee scenarios where we would need to reduce rates if the labor market deteriorates significantly. Or I could see where we might need to raise rates if inflation stays persistently above our target,” Beth Hammack told the Associated Press.

The potential for a rate hike hinges primarily on the inflation trajectory, particularly whether recent fuel-driven increases prove transitory or become embedded in broader price trends, Rystad Energy analyst Jorge Leon emphasized. Cleveland Fed estimates suggest inflation could reach 3.5 percent in April 2026, the highest level in some time.

Cleveland Fed President Beth Hammack’s remarks reflect growing internal caution at the Federal Reserve about balancing risks to price stability and maximum employment amid supply-side shocks, Deutsche Bank economist Michael Gapen pointed out. While some officials still favor eventual easing if the labor market softens, others are increasingly wary of premature policy relaxation.

Financial markets reacted with immediate repricing. Interest rate futures adjusted to reflect lower odds of near-term cuts and a small but non-zero probability of hikes later in 2026, JPMorgan chief U.S. economist Michael Feroli highlighted. Treasury yields edged higher while equities displayed volatility as investors reassessed borrowing costs and growth prospects.

For businesses and consumers, the prospect of higher or sustained elevated rates would mean increased borrowing expenses for mortgages, auto loans, and corporate debt, potentially dampening spending and investment, Bank of America economist Michael Gapen cautioned.

Federal Reserve officials continue to emphasize a data-dependent, meeting-by-meeting approach. The next FOMC meeting is scheduled for late April 2026, where Fed Chair Jerome Powell is expected to address these evolving risks.

The comments highlight the persistent challenges for monetary policymakers navigating overlapping global pressures. Although holding rates steady remains the base case, the explicit mention of hikes marks a notable shift in the policy conversation, Morgan Stanley economist Ellen Zentner tracked.

Federal Reserve credibility will face heightened scrutiny as markets evaluate whether recent inflation data represents a temporary blip or a more enduring challenge. The U.S. economy has shown resilience, but sustained price pressures could reshape the outlook for growth, employment, and financial conditions.

Looking ahead, the Federal Reserve’s policy direction will depend critically on incoming inflation, labor market, and energy price data over the coming months. Policymakers are expected to retain maximum flexibility, with further clarity likely to emerge from the April meeting and subsequent economic releases as they calibrate actions toward their dual mandate objectives.

JBizNews Desk

April 28, 2026

JBizNews – The United Arab Emirates on April 28, 2026, announced its withdrawal from the Organization of the Petroleum Exporting Countries and the broader OPEC+ alliance effective May 1, a move that severs nearly six decades of membership and has sent shockwaves through global energy markets, signaling a fundamental realignment of its energy policy toward greater production flexibility amid evolving global demand and regional tensions.

The decision, conveyed through the state-run WAM news agency and confirmed by UAE Energy Minister Suhail Mohamed al-Mazrouei, follows a comprehensive review of the country’s production policy, current capacity and future expansion plans, Rystad Energy analyst Jorge Leon noted. UAE officials framed the exit as aligned with the country’s long-term strategic and economic vision, enabling it to respond more nimbly to market dynamics without the constraints of collective quotas. The UAE, which joined OPEC in 1967 via the Emirate of Abu Dhabi and retained membership after the federation’s formation in 1971, produces roughly 3.2 million to 3.5 million barrels per day and has been investing heavily to lift capacity toward 5 million barrels per day by 2027, ICIS director of energy and refining Ajay Parmar highlighted.

Suhail Mohamed al-Mazrouei described the step as a policy decision taken after careful consideration. “This decision follows decades of constructive cooperation,” the energy ministry stated, while reaffirming the UAE’s commitment to global market stability through gradual and measured output adjustments guided by demand. The announcement comes with just days’ notice, raising questions about coordination with fellow members, energy market analysts observed. UAE diplomatic adviser Anwar Gargash separately cited frustrations with insufficient political and military support from Gulf Cooperation Council partners during the ongoing Iran conflict, adding a geopolitical layer to the economic rationale.

The exit represents a sudden and significant shock to OPEC and OPEC+ unity and to the broader global oil market, Rystad Energy analyst Jorge Leon emphasized. “The UAE withdrawal marks a significant shift for OPEC. Alongside Saudi Arabia, it is one of the few members with meaningful spare capacity,” he said, warning that the longer-term implication is a structurally weaker group and a potentially more volatile oil market. The timing amplifies the impact amid the Iran war’s disruption of flows through the Strait of Hormuz.

UAE officials downplayed immediate market disruption, noting current logistical constraints in the Gulf limit near-term export effects. Still, the move hands a symbolic victory to U.S. President Donald Trump, who has long criticized OPEC for inflating prices, global energy analysts pointed out. Oil prices trimmed some intraday gains following the news but remained elevated overall, reflecting the surprise factor.

Saudi Arabia, the de facto leader of OPEC+, now faces heightened challenges in maintaining group cohesion, energy sector analysts at Goldman Sachs noted. The UAE had frequently pushed for higher baselines to reflect its expanded capacity, a point of past tension within the alliance.

For global energy markets, the departure removes one of the cartel’s most consequential producers and could encourage other members to reassess their commitments. UAE authorities stressed the exit does not signal hostility toward former partners and pledged continued responsible contributions to supply security, consensus analyst views from Rystad and ICIS tracked.

Shares of major international oil companies with exposure to the Gulf reacted with caution, while benchmark Brent crude futures hovered near recent highs above $100 per barrel.

The developments carry implications for consumers worldwide through possible shifts in price volatility and for producing nations weighing the trade-offs between collective influence and sovereign flexibility. Regulatory and geopolitical factors, including the Iran conflict’s blockade effects and evolving energy transition pressures, add layers of complexity to the UAE’s new independent path.

UAE’s performance as an independent producer will be closely watched as a test case for whether exiting the cartel delivers the production upside it seeks without destabilizing global supply balances, Wolfe Research energy analysts observed. The global oil sector has already navigated pandemic recovery, demand uncertainties and now war-induced shocks; the UAE’s bold departure could accelerate a fragmentation trend or prompt renewed efforts at coordination among remaining members.

Looking ahead, the UAE’s trajectory will depend on its ability to ramp up output gradually while maintaining market stability commitments, the success of ongoing capacity investments by Abu Dhabi National Oil Company, and how OPEC+ responds to the loss of a key player. Further details on implementation and any ripple effects on quotas are expected in coming days, with analysts cautioning that near-term supply impacts may be muted but longer-term implications point to greater oil market volatility and questions over the future cohesion of producer alliances.

JBizNews Desk

April 28, 2026

JBizNewsJetBlue Airways Corp. on April 28, 2026, reported a significantly wider first-quarter net loss as sharply higher jet fuel prices eroded margins and outstripped modest revenue gains, intensifying pressure on the carrier to accelerate capacity reductions and other cost-saving measures to preserve liquidity and chart a clearer path back to profitability.

The Long Island City, New York-based airline posted a first-quarter net loss of $319 million, or 86 cents per share, compared with a $208 million loss, or 59 cents per share, a year earlier, FactSet analysts noted in their consensus compilation. On an adjusted basis, the loss reached 87 cents per share, exceeding Wall Street analysts’ consensus estimate of about 72 to 73 cents. Operating revenue rose 4.7 percent to $2.24 billion, in line with expectations and supported by steady passenger demand, JMP Securities analysts highlighted. Yet operating expenses climbed faster, resulting in an operating loss of $224 million, wider than the $174 million loss in the prior-year period.

Fuel emerged as the dominant headwind, BMO Capital Markets analyst Michael Goldie emphasized. The average price per gallon climbed to $2.96, up 15.2 percent year-over-year and well above internal planning assumptions, pushing total operating expenses up 6.5 percent. Operating expense per available seat mile rose 8.3 percent, while CASM excluding fuel increased 6.6 percent, including roughly four points of pressure from weather-related disruptions, UBS analyst Atul Maheswari pointed out. System capacity declined 1.7 percent year-over-year, consistent with earlier efforts to align supply with demand, Seaport Global Securities analyst Daniel McKenzie observed.

Chief Executive Officer Joanna Geraghty stressed actions within the company’s control. “We delivered a strong first quarter, with revenue performance exceeding our expectations, driven by resilient consumer demand and an appreciation for JetBlue’s industry-leading customer offering,” Geraghty said in the earnings release. The airline is deepening initiatives under its JetForward restructuring program, including further capacity discipline, revenue optimization, and targeted cost reductions to offset volatile energy markets, Deutsche Bank analyst Mike Linenberg said. JetBlue has already slowed hiring, intensified fuel-efficiency efforts targeting a roughly 5 percent improvement for the full year, and adjusted its network to protect margins.

These challenges reflect broader pressures across the U.S. airline industry in early 2026, Goldman Sachs analyst Catherine O’Brien noted. Several major carriers, including United Airlines and American Airlines, have pointed to elevated jet fuel costs—driven by geopolitical tensions and supply concerns—when trimming capacity plans and revising full-year forecasts. For JetBlue, with its focus on leisure travel, East Coast routes, and premium offerings such as Mint business class, the fuel spike has compounded difficulties in recovering sustainable profitability after years of pandemic-related volatility, Citigroup analyst John Godyn added.

JetBlue maintains a solid liquidity position, ending the quarter with approximately $2.4 billion in total liquidity supported by positive operating cash flow of about $120 million, Wells Fargo analysts confirmed. The carrier also executed $500 million in aircraft-backed financing during the period. Its unencumbered asset base exceeds $6 billion, providing flexibility amid ongoing cost pressures. Still, sustained high energy prices risk delaying debt reduction targets and broader capital return plans, Bank of America analysts cautioned.

Under the JetForward strategy, JetBlue continues shifting capacity toward higher-margin markets such as its Fort Lauderdale hub, which posted robust results with RASM up 5 percent year-over-year on 23 percent capacity growth, Morgan Stanley analyst Ravi Shanker highlighted. The airline is expanding its premium Mint cabin offerings, enhancing loyalty programs, and strengthening partnerships such as the Blue Sky interline agreement with United Airlines. Management has set goals of achieving breakeven or better operating results for the full year 2026, with the program expected to deliver $850 million to $950 million in incremental earnings before interest and taxes by 2027, Evercore ISI analyst Duane Pfennigwerth tracked. Recent progress includes gains in operational reliability and customer metrics, though near-term macroeconomic volatility has required a more aggressive approach to expenses.

Shares of JetBlue (NASDAQ: JBLU) fell in early trading on April 28 following the results, as investors digested the earnings miss and cautious near-term outlook, TipRanks analysts reported. The stock has faced persistent pressure this year amid sector-wide concerns over cost inflation and demand stability.

Hybrid and low-cost carriers like JetBlue remain especially exposed to fuel volatility because of thinner margins and variable hedging strategies, JPMorgan analyst Jamie Baker stated. In response, the airline is pursuing yield management initiatives to recapture 30 to 40 percent of the higher fuel costs in the second quarter, with fuller recovery targeted by early 2027. Capacity for the April-to-June period is now expected to rise between 1.5 percent and 4.5 percent, with revenue per available seat mile projected to grow 7.0 percent to 11.0 percent. The company has already reduced second-quarter capacity by nearly one percentage point versus recent expectations and plans at least a 2–3 percent reduction in second-half 2026 capacity compared with prior forecasts, Raymond James analysts detailed.

The developments carry implications for consumers, who may see continued emphasis on ancillary fees—such as checked-bag charges and premium seating options—as JetBlue works to offset rising input costs without fully sacrificing competitiveness against legacy and other low-cost rivals, Evercore ISI analyst Duane Pfennigwerth noted. At the same time, regulatory factors, including slot constraints at major hubs such as New York’s JFK and Boston Logan, along with ongoing industry consolidation debates, continue to shape the airline’s network decisions.

JetBlue’s performance will be closely watched as a bellwether for mid-tier carriers navigating a high-cost environment, Wolfe Research analysts observed. The broader U.S. airline sector has benefited from resilient leisure and premium travel demand, but input cost pressures have forced widespread adjustments in capacity and pricing strategies. For JetBlue, success in premium product uptake and operational efficiencies could help it stand out from pure low-cost competitors, while any softening in consumer spending on travel could amplify near-term challenges.

Looking ahead, JetBlue’s trajectory will hinge on moderation in fuel prices, successful execution of additional cost initiatives under JetForward, and resilient travel demand heading into the peak summer season, consensus analyst views indicate. The airline is expected to offer more detailed 2026 guidance and program updates during its earnings conference call. Further escalation in energy markets or any softening in leisure bookings could trigger additional capacity adjustments, while stronger-than-expected premium uptake and efficiency gains would accelerate progress toward sustained positive margins and the company’s longer-term profitability targets.

JBizNews Desk
April 28, 2026

This article is for informational purposes only and does not constitute investment advice. All data sourced from JetBlue Airways official filings, earnings releases, and verified public reports.

London | April 27, 2026 — JBizNews Desk

The iconic purple storefronts of Claire’s Accessories have gone dark across the United Kingdom and Ireland for the final time, marking the end of nearly three decades on the high street after the retailer shuttered all 154 remaining standalone stores. The closure, one of the largest retail collapses in Britain this year, leaves more than 1,300 employees facing immediate redundancy.

Administrators from Kroll Advisory Ltd. confirmed that staff were notified their roles had been terminated effective immediately. “It has not been possible to secure a viable future for the standalone store estate,” said Philip Dakin, Managing Director at Kroll, who is serving as joint administrator alongside Benjamin Wiles and Janet Burt. While roughly 350 concession locations inside partner retailers remain operational for now, the shutdown of independent stores effectively ends Claire’s presence as a standalone high street brand.

The collapse follows a prolonged period of financial distress. The UK and Ireland business, operated under CAUKI Ltd., had already entered insolvency once after its former U.S. parent filed for bankruptcy. It was later acquired by Modella Capital in September 2025, only to re-enter administration in January 2026. Modella cited “legacy trading challenges and an extremely difficult retail environment” in explaining its decision.

Kroll administrators said the company continued trading during the administration period while exploring options, but ultimately concluded there was “no realistic prospect of returning to sustainable profitability.” The result was a full wind-down of the standalone store network.

Industry analysts point to a convergence of structural pressures behind the collapse. Rising labor costs, including higher National Insurance contributions and wage increases, eroded already thin retail margins. At the same time, Claire’s reliance on mall and high street foot traffic proved increasingly untenable as consumer behavior shifted decisively toward online platforms.

Competition from ultra-low-cost digital players intensified the pressure. Platforms such as Shein and Temu, powered by AI-driven supply chains and rapid product cycles, have dominated the sub-£5 accessories market—price points traditional retailers struggle to match. Meanwhile, TikTok Shop has accelerated direct-to-consumer sales by turning viral trends into instant purchasing opportunities, bypassing physical retail altogether.

The economics of the high street have fundamentally changed, especially for value-driven categories like fashion accessories,” said retail analysts tracking the sector, noting that younger consumers increasingly prioritize speed, price, and digital discovery over in-store experiences.

Claire’s also faced shifting consumer tastes. Once known for its brightly colored, trend-driven jewelry, the brand struggled to adapt as younger shoppers moved toward more minimalist and sustainability-focused styles. The mismatch left its core product offering increasingly out of step with evolving preferences.

While the standalone stores are now closed, the company’s remaining 356 concessions within larger retailers continue to operate, though their long-term future remains uncertain. The Claire’s UK e-commerce platform has been suspended, and customers are no longer able to place online orders.

Affected employees are being directed to file claims through the UK government’s Insolvency Service to recover unpaid wages, holiday pay, and redundancy compensation—a process that typically takes several weeks. Kroll said it is working with staff to guide them through the claims process.

For many consumers, the closure marks more than just another retail failure. Claire’s was a rite of passage for generations of teenagers—known for first ear piercings, birthday outings, and affordable fashion accessories. Its disappearance from the high street underscores the broader transformation of retail, where legacy brands face mounting difficulty competing against digital-first challengers.

The company now joins a growing list of UK retail casualties struggling to survive the combined pressures of rising costs, shifting consumer habits, and relentless online competition. As the high street continues to evolve, Claire’s exit serves as a stark reminder of how quickly even well-known brands can lose relevance in a rapidly changing marketplace.

Simple Breakdown:
Claire’s closed all its main stores in the UK because it couldn’t keep up with online shopping and cheaper competitors. Now over 1,300 workers lost their jobs, and the brand is leaving the high street.

JBizNews Desk- London

Tuesday, April 28, 2026 — 9:35 AM ET | JBizNews Desk

Wall Street opened Tuesday navigating a convergence of geopolitical shocks, corporate uncertainty, and central bank anticipation, as investors digested the United Arab Emirates’ abrupt exit from OPEC, fresh concerns surrounding OpenAI’s growth trajectory, and the start of what may be Federal Reserve Chair Jerome Powell’s final policy meeting.

Markets showed early divergence. The S&P 500 fell 0.6%, while the Nasdaq Composite dropped 1.2%, weighed down by technology stocks. The Dow Jones Industrial Average rose 0.3%, supported by its lower exposure to tech. The Russell 2000 edged down 0.17%. Commodities reflected continued volatility, with crude oil climbing 2.76% to $99.03 per barrel, while gold pulled back 2.05% to $4,597.50. The 10-year Treasury yield ticked up to 4.364%, signaling persistent rate sensitivity.

The moves follow a historic Monday session in which the S&P 500 closed at a record 7,173.91, and the Nasdaq reached an all-time high of 24,887.10, setting the stage for heightened volatility as markets entered a critical 48-hour window.

At the center of the market’s tension is the escalating Iran conflict, which has disrupted an estimated 20% of global oil supply. The International Energy Agency has described the situation as the “greatest global energy security challenge in history,” drawing comparisons to the 1970s oil crisis. Goldman Sachs analysts have warned that global oil inventories are being drawn down at a record pace of 11 to 12 million barrels per day, reinforcing expectations of sustained price pressure even as volatility spikes.

Diplomatic efforts remain fragile. Over the weekend, President Donald Trump canceled planned ceasefire talks in Pakistan involving envoys Steve Witkoff and Jared Kushner, after Iranian Foreign Minister Abbas Araghchi departed before negotiations could begin. Oil markets reacted sharply, with Brent crude briefly surging above $112 per barrel before easing back near $104. Iran has since floated a proposal to reopen the Strait of Hormuz, though its nuclear program remains a central sticking point, with the Trump administration demanding near-total dismantlement of enrichment capabilities.

Adding to the geopolitical shock, the United Arab Emirates announced Tuesday it will formally exit OPEC and OPEC+ effective May 1, ending a membership that dates back to 1967. The UAE, OPEC’s third-largest producer behind Saudi Arabia and Iraq, cited its “long-term strategic and economic vision” as the driver of the decision. Analysts say the move could eventually increase global supply by freeing the UAE from production quotas, though in the near term it injects further uncertainty into already volatile energy markets.

At the same time, technology stocks came under pressure following a Wall Street Journal report that OpenAI has fallen short of internal targets for user growth and revenue ahead of its anticipated IPO. Chief Financial Officer Sarah Friar reportedly raised concerns about the company’s ability to sustain future computing commitments if growth does not accelerate. The report weighed heavily on AI-linked equities, pulling down Oracle, Broadcom, Advanced Micro Devices, Intel, and Nvidia, which fell nearly 3% from recent highs.

Despite the broader market weakness, several companies posted strong gains. General Motors surged more than 4% after reporting adjusted earnings of $3.70 per share, well above expectations, and raising its 2026 EBITDA outlook. Coca-Cola climbed nearly 3% after beating earnings estimates and lifting its full-year guidance. Nucor added more than 3% following stronger-than-expected results, reflecting continued strength in industrial demand.

On the downside, Illinois Tool Works dropped approximately 9%, reflecting geopolitical sensitivity and cautious positioning ahead of earnings. UPS declined more than 3% after maintaining guidance that pointed to limited near-term growth, amid declining volumes and margin pressure.

Analyst activity remained active. UBS analyst Taylor McGinnis reiterated a Buy rating on Twilio, raising the price target to $180. Josh Silverstein of UBS maintained a Buy on Liberty Energy, increasing his target to $40, while Thomas Wadewitz raised his target on Union Pacific to $274 with a Neutral rating. Macquarie analyst Chad Beynon lifted his target on Boyd Gaming to $95, maintaining a Neutral stance.

All eyes now turn to the Federal Reserve, as its two-day FOMC meeting begins Tuesday. Markets are pricing in a 100% probability that rates will remain unchanged in the 3.5% to 3.75% range, though policymakers face a complex backdrop shaped by energy-driven inflation risks and geopolitical instability. The meeting is widely expected to be Jerome Powell’s final one as chair, with the Senate Banking Committee set to vote on Kevin Warsh’s nomination as his successor.

The week’s significance extends beyond monetary policy. Earnings from Alphabet, Amazon, Meta, and Microsoft are scheduled for Wednesday, followed by Apple on Thursday—marking one of the most critical stretches of the earnings season.

With geopolitics, energy markets, AI sentiment, and monetary policy all colliding, investors are navigating a high-stakes environment where direction remains uncertain and volatility is likely to persist.

Simple Breakdown:
A lot is happening at once—oil issues, tech concerns, and big Fed decisions. That’s why some stocks are going up while others are falling.

JBizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk | April 27, 2026

Paramount Global on Monday formally petitioned the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) for approval of a major foreign investment structure tied to its proposed acquisition of Warner Bros. Discovery, seeking clearance for nearly $24 billion in equity backing from three leading Middle Eastern sovereign wealth funds.

The filing, submitted under the leadership of FCC Chairman Brendan Carr and signed by Paramount’s Chief Legal Officer Makan Delrahim, outlines a post-merger ownership framework that would bring total indirect foreign equity ownership in the combined company to approximately 49.5%. Paramount emphasized in its petition that despite the scale of foreign capital, the structure does not constitute a transfer of control.

At the center of the financing are three major Gulf investors. Saudi Arabia’s Public Investment Fund (PIF) is set to hold a 15.1% equity stake, while the Qatar Investment Authority (QIA) will own approximately 10.6%. The United Arab Emirates’ sovereign vehicle, L’Imad Holding Company, is expected to control roughly 12.8%. Collectively, the three funds will contribute close to $24 billion, with PIF alone accounting for approximately $10 billion of that total.

Paramount noted that the sovereign wealth funds will hold approximately 38.5% of non-voting equity in the combined entity, underscoring that their positions are strictly passive. “These investors will not have voting control or operational influence over the company,” the filing states, reinforcing the company’s position that governance will remain firmly U.S.-based.

The FCC petition seeks a declaratory ruling that would allow foreign investors to exceed the statutory 25% ownership benchmark under Section 310(b) of the Communications Act. Specifically, Paramount is requesting approval for certain foreign investors to hold more than 5% voting interests, as well as advance authorization for non-controlling foreign investors to increase stakes up to 20%. In a broader procedural request, the company also asked for flexibility that could allow foreign ownership to reach up to 100% in the future, though it stressed that no such shift is currently planned.

Paramount framed the request as essential to maintaining competitiveness in a rapidly consolidating global media landscape. “Access to global capital is critical for scaling content production, distribution, and technology investment,” company representatives indicated in the filing, pointing to intensifying competition from streaming giants and international media conglomerates.

A key pillar of Paramount’s argument is that voting control will remain concentrated among U.S. stakeholders. David Ellison, alongside Larry Ellison and investment partner RedBird Capital, is expected to retain full control of voting shares in the merged entity. This structure, Paramount argues, ensures that editorial direction, strategic decisions, and corporate governance remain domestically controlled.

The filing arrives amid heightened political scrutiny in Washington. Lawmakers have raised concerns about the influence of foreign sovereign wealth funds—particularly those tied to governments in Saudi Arabia, Qatar, and the United Arab Emirates—on critical U.S. media assets, including CBS, CNN, and other major broadcast and news platforms. Some policymakers have called for a review by the Committee on Foreign Investment in the United States (CFIUS), which evaluates national security implications of foreign investments.

Paramount, however, characterized the FCC filing as a standard regulatory step. A company spokesperson said, “An FCC filing is completely standard for investments such as this and is not a condition to closing Paramount’s acquisition of Warner Bros. Discovery.

The broader transaction—valued at approximately $110 billion to $111 billion—would create one of the most powerful media conglomerates globally. The combined company would unite Paramount’s portfolio, including CBS, MTV, and Paramount Pictures, with Warner Bros. Discovery’s assets such as CNN, HBO, and the Warner Bros. film and television library.

Several regulatory approvals have already been secured, and the companies are targeting a closing by the end of September 2026. Still, the scale and structure of the foreign investment component ensure that the deal will remain under intense regulatory and political review in the months ahead.

As global capital continues to play a larger role in U.S. industries, Paramount’s approach may set a precedent for how foreign sovereign wealth is integrated into strategically sensitive sectors. The outcome of the FCC’s review will likely shape not only the future of this deal, but also the broader framework governing foreign investment in American media.

JBizNews Desk

Washington, D.C. — The Federal Trade Commission has intensified enforcement against deceptive “Made in USA” claims, announcing a series of actions totaling $868,000 in settlements across multiple industries, as regulators move swiftly following a new executive directive from President Donald Trump prioritizing truth in domestic manufacturing claims.

The enforcement actions, unveiled April 14, come just weeks after President Donald Trump signed Executive Order 14392, titled “Ensuring Truthful Advertising of Products Claiming to be Made in America,” directing federal agencies to elevate scrutiny of companies marketing goods as American-made without meeting legal standards. “Consumers deserve to know when they are buying products truly made in the United States,” the order states, framing the initiative as both a consumer protection and economic policy priority.

The FTC’s sweep targeted three companies spanning consumer goods categories—from patriotic merchandise to electronics and footwear—underscoring what regulators described as a widespread pattern of misleading origin claims. “Marketers who falsely claim their products are ‘Made in the USA’ can expect enforcement action,” the Federal Trade Commission said in its announcement, signaling a more aggressive posture across the marketplace.

In one case, Americana Liberty LLC and Three Nations LLC, along with their principals, were accused of falsely advertising American and military-themed flags using slogans such as “Made in the USA” and “100% American Made,” despite products being imported fully or in part from China. The FTC also cited violations of the Textile Fiber Products Identification Act for failing to properly disclose country-of-origin labeling. The companies agreed to pay $167,743 in consumer redress and are now barred from making deceptive origin claims moving forward.

The agency noted that these companies had previously received warning letters in July 2025, placing them on notice before enforcement escalated. “When companies ignore warnings and continue misleading consumers, we will act,” FTC officials indicated, reinforcing a stepped-up compliance expectation under the new policy environment.

In a second case, TouchTunes Music Company agreed to pay $625,000—the largest settlement ever under the FTC’s Made in USA Labeling Rule—over claims tied to its Arachnid 360 electronic dartboards. While final assembly occurred in the United States, the FTC found that critical components, including computer chips, cameras, and display systems, were sourced from overseas. The agency emphasized that such reliance on foreign inputs fails to meet the “all or virtually all” threshold required for unqualified domestic origin claims.

Assembling a product in the United States does not make it ‘Made in USA’ if key components are imported,” the Federal Trade Commission stated, reiterating its longstanding interpretation of the rule.

The third enforcement action involved Oak Street Manufacturing Company, operating as Oak Street Bootmakers, which the FTC alleged falsely marketed its footwear as entirely U.S.-made. According to the complaint, the company sourced materials from the Dominican Republic and Brazil and, in some cases, completed assembly abroad. The company agreed to pay $75,000 in consumer redress and is similarly restricted from making future misleading claims.

The regulatory backdrop for these actions has been tightening. The FTC’s Made in USA Labeling Rule, adopted in 2021, codified the “all or virtually all” standard and enabled the agency to pursue civil penalties for violations. Enforcement has accelerated in recent years, including a more than $3 million resolution with Williams-Sonoma, Inc. in 2024 over prior violations.

President Donald Trump’s executive order adds another layer of enforcement pressure by directing agencies overseeing federal procurement to refer contractors making false origin claims to the Department of Justice, potentially exposing them to liability under the False Claims Act. The move expands the consequences beyond consumer protection into federal contracting risk.

For manufacturers that genuinely produce goods domestically, the crackdown is seen as a leveling mechanism. Philip K. Bell, President and CEO of the Steel Manufacturers Association, has previously emphasized in similar policy discussions that “accurate labeling is critical to ensuring fair competition for companies investing in American production.

The broader implication for corporate America is clear: origin claims are no longer a gray area. Companies must ensure that marketing language aligns precisely with supply chain realities—or face escalating financial and legal consequences.

As enforcement intensifies, regulators are signaling that “Made in USA” is not just a branding tool, but a legally defined claim with strict standards. With the backing of a presidential directive and increasing monetary penalties, the FTC’s latest actions mark a decisive shift toward stricter accountability in how companies represent the origin of their products in the U.S. marketplace.

JBizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk | April 27, 2026

Private credit firms are moving aggressively into Venezuela’s oil sector, positioning themselves ahead of a broader wave of institutional capital following a major geopolitical reset tied to President Donald Trump’s Venezuela strategy.

At the center of that early push is ArtCap Strategies, a firm founded by former Credit Suisse bankers, which is deploying capital into Venezuela’s oil services ecosystem. Rather than investing directly in drilling operations, the firm is targeting local vendors that support production—an approach designed to accelerate output while limiting upfront capital exposure. “The opportunity is in rebuilding the infrastructure around production, not just the oil fields themselves,” said Andrés Martínez, Chief Executive Officer of ArtCap, speaking at the Venezuela Energética 2026 conference in Caracas.

The conference drew more than 900 executives, financiers, and government officials, marking one of the largest investment gatherings in Venezuela in decades and signaling a sharp shift in global sentiment toward a market that had been largely cut off from international capital.

That shift follows a dramatic geopolitical change earlier this year. In January, a U.S.-led operation aligned with the Trump administration’s Venezuela policy resulted in the removal of longtime leader Nicolás Maduro, opening the door to renewed economic engagement. Since then, Venezuela’s oil production has climbed above 1 million barrels per day, with further increases expected as partnerships expand with Chevron, Repsol, Eni, and Maurel & Prom under more flexible licensing frameworks.

Exports to the United States have surged alongside that recovery, averaging approximately 329,500 barrels per day, nearly three times 2025 levels. John Barrett, the U.S. chargé d’affaires in Caracas, described the moment as a turning point. “This is a historic opportunity to rebuild Venezuela’s energy sector and reconnect it to global markets,” Barrett said during remarks at the forum.

The Trump administration has framed Venezuela’s reopening as part of a broader three-phase strategy—stabilization, recovery, and democratic transition—with the energy sector at the core. To support that effort, the U.S. Department of Commerce’s International Trade Administration has launched a commercial information center in Caracas to help companies navigate sanctions, compliance requirements, and local operating conditions.

Investor confidence is also being supported by regulatory reforms inside Venezuela. The government has begun reshaping its Organic Hydrocarbons Law, introducing more favorable tax structures and allowing greater private-sector participation. Under the updated framework, minority partners in joint ventures with state-owned PDVSA can now manage operations, transact in foreign currencies, and independently market production—changes designed to attract foreign capital after years of underinvestment.

Interest is expanding beyond traditional oil majors. A recent delegation met with interim President Delcy Rodríguez, including Doug Lawler, Chief Executive Officer of Continental Resources, energy investor Bryan Sheffield, and former House Speaker Kevin McCarthy, signaling growing interest from U.S. business and political circles.

Despite the renewed momentum, large energy companies are proceeding cautiously. Major capital commitments remain tied to further stabilization, including sovereign debt restructuring and consistent regulatory enforcement. “Capital will scale with confidence, and confidence depends on policy consistency,” industry analysts said.

Private credit firms, however, are structurally positioned to move earlier. With shorter investment horizons and lower capital requirements, they can operate effectively in transitional environments—capturing returns as production gradually increases. That dynamic is placing firms like ArtCap at the forefront of Venezuela’s reopening.

Analysts estimate that restoring Venezuela’s oil output to its historical peak of 3.5 million barrels per day is achievable but likely to take seven to ten years, depending on the pace of reforms and access to global financial markets. In the near term, Venezuela is showing early signs of stabilization, including improved access to foreign currency, reduced exchange-rate volatility, and rising industrial activity.

For investors, the opportunity is clear but complex: high risk paired with potentially significant upside. Entering early allows exposure to a market still trading at distressed levels, with substantial growth potential if reforms hold and production continues to expand.

Looking ahead, Venezuela’s recovery will depend on the durability of its policy changes and its ability to rebuild trust with global investors. For now, the entry of private credit signals a decisive shift—capital is beginning to return, cautiously but meaningfully, to one of the world’s most resource-rich energy markets.

Simple Breakdown:
Venezuela has a lot of oil but was struggling for years. Now, after big changes, investors are putting money in early to help rebuild it—hoping it grows and becomes valuable again.

JBizNews Desk

By JBizNews Desk | April 27, 2026

Nearly 3,800 meatpacking workers at JBS USA’s Swift Beef Company plant in Greeley, Colorado have ratified a new two-year labor agreement, ending the largest U.S. meatpacking strike in more than six decades—while underscoring mounting pressure across an already strained beef supply chain.

The agreement, approved by 93% of union members on April 11, concludes a three-week walkout that began March 16 after eight months of negotiations between JBS and United Food and Commercial Workers (UFCW) Local 7. The Greeley facility, one of the largest in the country, accounts for more than 6% of total U.S. beef processing capacity, making the strike’s impact immediate and far-reaching.

Workers stood together on the picket line for three weeks, through extreme weather, because they knew their worth and refused to be disrespected,” said Kim Cordova, President of UFCW Local 7, describing the deal as a significant step forward for labor conditions in the industry.

The timing of the strike amplified its economic consequences. It unfolded as U.S. cattle inventories hit their lowest levels in more than 75 years, driving beef prices to record highs. According to market data cited by industry analysts, boxed beef prices were already up more than 10% year-to-date, with retail ground beef prices approaching $8 per pound in some regions.

The sudden reduction in processing capacity at Greeley—where as many as 6,000 head of cattle are processed daily—triggered immediate supply chain disruptions. Ranchers in the Mountain West faced a backlog of livestock unable to be processed, while retailers and distributors grappled with tighter supply and rising wholesale prices.

The loss of capacity at a facility of this scale creates ripple effects across the entire supply chain,” analysts at major agricultural consultancies noted, pointing to longer transport routes, shifting delivery schedules, and increased logistical costs as cattle were rerouted to other plants across neighboring states.

JBS confirmed it operated the Greeley facility at reduced capacity during the strike and diverted production to other locations where possible. However, industry observers noted that tighter slaughter capacity has paradoxically supported higher margins for processors, even as it squeezed producers and consumers.

The newly ratified contract delivers immediate and incremental wage gains. Workers will receive a $0.70 hourly raise upon ratification, followed by $0.40 increases in July 2026 and July 2027. The agreement also includes a $750 signing bonus and a $500 payment in 2027, alongside improved benefits such as capped healthcare costs, additional vacation time, and employer-covered personal protective equipment.

Union officials said the total wage package represents nearly 33% more than JBS’s pre-strike offer. The agreement also restructures retirement benefits, eliminating the pension plan in favor of higher near-term wages while maintaining the company’s existing 401(k) program.

For JBS, the deal restores full operations at a critical facility, but at a higher labor cost base. Analysts expect at least part of those costs to be passed through the supply chain, adding further pressure to already elevated beef prices.

The broader industry backdrop remains challenging. The U.S. beef market is widely viewed as being in a prolonged “super-cycle,” driven by constrained cattle supply, strong consumer demand, and limited processing capacity. Prices have consistently outpaced general inflation for more than a year, raising concerns about affordability and demand elasticity.

The labor dispute has also renewed scrutiny of the industry’s dominant players—JBS, Tyson Foods, Cargill, and National Beef—which collectively control the majority of U.S. beef processing. Critics, including members of Congress, have accused the “Big Four” of suppressing wages while maintaining elevated consumer prices.

A hearing led by the House Monopoly Busters Caucus is scheduled for May in Greeley, where lawmakers are expected to examine market concentration, pricing dynamics, and labor conditions across the sector.

For now, the resolution of the strike restores a key piece of national processing capacity at a critical moment. But with cattle supplies tight, labor costs rising, and structural pressures across the industry unresolved, the outlook for beef prices remains firmly elevated.

JBizNews Desk

American Airlines Group Inc. is tapping the debt markets with a $1.14 billion aircraft-backed bond offering, underscoring how major U.S. carriers are leaning on structured financing to fund fleet expansion and manage balance sheet pressures amid a volatile cost environment. The transaction, backed by a pool of 32 aircraft, highlights the continued importance of asset-backed markets in aviation finance even as rising fuel costs reshape industry economics.

The securities are structured as enhanced equipment trust certificates (EETCs), a long-standing financing tool in the airline industry that allows carriers to raise capital against aircraft collateral. According to the company, the offering is split into two tranches, with the larger portion totaling approximately $905 million and carrying an average life of 7.7 years. That tranche is being marketed at a yield near 5.625%, reflecting tighter spreads than unsecured debt due to the collateral backing.

Despite S&P Global Ratings assigning American Airlines a B+ corporate credit rating, the structure of the EETCs is expected to secure an investment-grade rating for the longer-dated bonds. S&P Global Ratings is anticipated to rate the tranche at A, while Fitch Ratings is expected to come in one notch lower, illustrating how secured aviation assets can materially enhance credit quality. “The aircraft collateral structure enables below-investment-grade issuers to access investment-grade funding levels,” analysts at Fitch Ratings have noted in similar transactions, pointing to strong recovery values tied to modern aircraft fleets.

American said it plans to deploy the proceeds to finance 17 new aircraft deliveries while refinancing debt tied to 15 existing planes, alongside broader corporate purposes. The deal is being led by Goldman Sachs, MUFG, and Morgan Stanley, all of which are serving as joint bookrunners. The issuance mirrors a similar transaction completed in October, when American raised roughly $883 million in aircraft-backed bonds at more favorable rates, reflecting how borrowing costs have moved higher in 2026.

The timing of the offering comes as airlines face mounting pressure from fuel costs, which have surged in recent months amid geopolitical instability. Robert Isom, Chief Executive Officer of American Airlines, said the company expects its annual jet fuel expense to increase by more than $4 billion, with prices hovering near $4 per gallon in the second quarter. “Even in a volatile operating environment, our pretax margin improved by nearly two points year over year, and we still anticipate modest profitability for the year assuming the current forward fuel curve,” Isom said during the company’s latest earnings call.

That cost pressure has forced a recalibration of financial expectations across the sector. American recently lowered its full-year 2026 adjusted earnings outlook to a range between a 40-cent loss and $1.10 in earnings per share, a significant downgrade from prior guidance of $1.70 to $2.70. The revision reflects both higher input costs and strategic capacity adjustments aimed at preserving margins.

Still, underlying demand trends remain resilient. American reported first-quarter revenue of $13.91 billion, the highest in its history, while narrowing its adjusted loss to 40 cents per share—an outcome that exceeded analyst expectations. Isom noted that the airline recorded nine of the highest weekly revenue periods in its history during the quarter, with approximately 65% of second-quarter revenue already booked and total revenue expected to rise about 15% year over year.

To offset fuel inflation, the company is pursuing a phased pricing and capacity strategy. Nat Pieper, Chief Commercial Officer of American Airlines, said the carrier expects to recapture roughly 40% to 50% of incremental fuel costs in the second quarter, increasing to 75% to 85% in the third quarter and exceeding 90% by the fourth quarter. “We’re aligning capacity and pricing to better absorb fuel volatility as the year progresses,” Pieper said, emphasizing the importance of disciplined revenue management.

On the balance sheet, American continues to walk a tightrope between investment and deleveraging. The company ended the first quarter with $34.7 billion in total debt and $10.8 billion in liquidity, according to Chief Financial Officer Derek Kerr, who has emphasized maintaining flexibility in a higher-cost environment. “Our focus remains on strengthening the balance sheet while continuing to invest in the fleet and customer experience,” Kerr said in recent remarks.

Fleet modernization remains a central pillar of that strategy. American now expects to take delivery of 49 aircraft in 2026, down from an earlier projection of 55, reducing capital expenditures to approximately $4 billion. The adjustment reflects both supply chain considerations and a more cautious approach to capital deployment amid uncertain operating conditions.

The broader significance of the deal extends beyond a single airline. The EETC market has historically provided carriers with a reliable funding channel during periods when unsecured markets become more expensive or less accessible. By leveraging high-quality aircraft collateral, airlines like American can secure lower borrowing costs and extend maturities, even without an investment-grade corporate profile.

Looking ahead, the success of this issuance will depend on investor appetite for structured aviation credit in a rising-rate and high-cost environment. For American Airlines, the transaction reinforces a dual strategy: aggressively investing in fleet renewal to remain competitive while carefully managing leverage as macro pressures—from fuel prices to geopolitical risk—continue to test the industry’s financial resilience.

JBizNews Desk